JP2018068664A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of enhancing amusement of a game by creating a plurality of game states.SOLUTION: A predetermined period from a jackpot is set to be a lucky period as privilege in winning of the jackpot with a lucky number correspondence pattern, and a continuous game based on acquired winning balls is configured to be permitted during the lucky period. After completion of the lucky period, the continuous game based on winning balls acquired during the lucky period is configured to be disabled. The winning balls acquired during the lucky period are configured to be added to a during-lucky-period ball counter 213d differing from a normal-time ball counter 213c to which ball data is added when a ball lending button 74 is depressed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  As a gaming machine, for example, a certain game value is generally given to a player on the basis that a specific condition such as winning in an internal lottery based on establishment of a start condition is established.

  For example, in some pachinko gaming machines, there is a lottery that determines whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state when a gaming ball has entered a starting pitching portion provided in the gaming area. When such a lottery is won, opening / closing of a big prize opening provided in the game area is executed, and a predetermined number of game balls can be obtained according to the number of game balls entered into the big prize opening (for example, patents) Reference 1).

JP 2001-062098 A

  Here, in the gaming machines such as the above-described examples, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of creating a plurality of gaming states and improving the interest of the game.

  In order to achieve this object, in the gaming machine according to claim 1, the number of game media that can be used for the game is counted by the game media counting means, and the game is executed based on the game media counted by the game media counting means. The game is played by the means, the game medium is given to the player by the game medium giving means based on the game result by the game executing means, and the game state is changed by the game state changing means based on a predetermined opportunity . Then, the use restriction means provided in the game execution means restricts the use of the game medium given to the player by the game medium giving means to the game based on the change of the game state by the game state change means. In addition, the condition setting means provided in the gaming state changing means is configured to be able to set the game state changing condition by the gaming state changing means.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming state is changed from the first gaming state based on the first predetermined opportunity by the first gaming state changing means provided in the gaming state changing means. The game state is changed from the second game state to the first game state based on the second predetermined opportunity by the second game state change means provided in the game state change means. Further, the first counting means provided in the gaming medium counting means counts the first game medium information related to the granted game medium to the player by the game medium giving means in the first gaming state. Further, the second counting means provided in the gaming medium counting means counts the second gaming medium information related to the gaming medium given to the player by the gaming medium giving means in the second gaming state. Furthermore, the game based on the second game medium information stored in the second counting means in the first gaming state is prohibited by the use restricting means. Further, the condition setting means sets a change condition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state or a changing condition from the second gaming state to the first gaming state by the gaming state changing means.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the number of game media that can be used for the game is counted by the game media counting means, and the game is executed by the game execution means based on the game media counted by the game media counting means. The game medium is given to the player by the game medium giving means based on the game result by the game execution means, and the game state is changed by the game state changing means based on a predetermined opportunity. Then, the use restriction means provided in the game execution means restricts the use of the game medium given to the player by the game medium giving means to the game based on the change of the game state by the game state change means. In addition, the condition setting means provided in the gaming state changing means is configured to be able to set the game state changing condition by the gaming state changing means. As a result, by creating a new gameability in which there is a game medium whose use is restricted based on the game state, it is possible to create a game that determines how long a game state that is not restricted to be used will continue, and the use of the game medium. Since it is possible to set a change condition to the gaming state where the restriction occurs, for example, by setting the change condition to the gaming state where the use restriction of the game medium is generated based on the intention of the gaming place, There is an effect that a certain playability can be realized.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effect can be obtained. That is, the first gaming state changing means provided in the gaming state changing means changes the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the first predetermined opportunity, and the gaming state changing means is provided. The gaming state is changed from the second gaming state to the first gaming state based on the second predetermined opportunity by the second gaming state changing means. Further, the first counting means provided in the gaming medium counting means counts the first game medium information related to the granted game medium to the player by the game medium giving means in the first gaming state. Further, the second counting means provided in the gaming medium counting means counts the second gaming medium information related to the gaming medium given to the player by the gaming medium giving means in the second gaming state. Furthermore, the game based on the second game medium information stored in the second counting means in the first gaming state is prohibited by the use restricting means. Further, the condition setting means sets a change condition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state or a changing condition from the second gaming state to the first gaming state by the gaming state changing means. Thereby, regarding the game media individually counted in the first game state and the second game state, it is possible to create a situation that cannot be used in the second game medium information stored in the second counting means in the first game state. In addition, it is possible to set a condition for changing to the second gaming state in which the second game medium information can be acquired, and a condition for changing to the first gaming state in which the second game medium information cannot be used. Therefore, by configuring the situation in which the use of the game media counted for each gaming state is restricted, it becomes possible to create a variety of gaming characteristics according to the setting contents, and based on the intention of the game hall Thus, there is an effect that a characteristic game characteristic can be adopted for each game hall.

(A) is a front view of the pachinko machine and card sand apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is a right view when the pachinko machine is seen from the front right side (arrow Ib direction). It is the front view which showed the state which removed the door frame from the pachinko machine. (A) is the front view which showed the state which removed the resin cover which covers an overhang | projection part from the state of FIG. 2, (b) is the case where the pachinko machine is seen from the IIIb direction shown to (a) FIG. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view which shows the structure of an inner frame and a game board. It is a figure for demonstrating the screen structure of a 3rd symbol display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the 3rd symbol which appears in the fluctuation | variation display area of a 3rd symbol display apparatus. It is a figure for demonstrating the display screen of a status display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a frame integrated control apparatus, a card sand apparatus, and a membership card. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the prize ball process which is executed by MPU inside the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a figure which shows transmission / reception of the information of a pachinko machine, a card sanding device, and a member card when a member card is inserted, a ball lending button is pressed, and a return button is pressed. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a frame integrated control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a frame integrated control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main command determination process performed by MPU in a frame integrated control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the change display command setting process performed by MPU in a frame integrated control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot display command setting process performed by MPU in a frame integrated control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the subcommand determination process performed by MPU in a frame integrated control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the rental ball winning ball count processing which is executed by MPU in the frame integrated control device. It is a flowchart which shows the firing ball count process performed by MPU in a frame integrated control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the clearing process performed by MPU in a frame integrated control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command response process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the remaining frequency command corresponding | compatible process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the figure which represented typically the display condition and drive condition of the 3rd symbol display apparatus and the shutter accessory provided in the both sides. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a card sand apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the frame integrated control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment, a card sand apparatus, and a membership card. It is FIG. 1 which shows transfer of the information of a pachinko machine, a card sand apparatus, and a member card when a member card is inserted and a return button is pressed in the second embodiment. It is the 2nd figure showing exchange of information of a pachinko machine, a card sand device, and a membership card at the time of member card insertion in a 2nd embodiment, and a return button press. It is a flowchart which shows the clearing process performed by MPU in the frame integrated control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stand information confirmation process performed by MPU in the frame integrated control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the card sand apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the authentication process performed by MPU in the card sand apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the frame integrated control apparatus, card sand apparatus, and member card in 3rd Embodiment. It is FIG. 1 which shows transfer of the information of the pachinko machine, card sand apparatus, and member card at the time of member card insertion in 3rd Embodiment, and a return button press. It is the 2nd figure showing exchange of information of a pachinko machine, a card sand device, and a membership card at the time of member card insertion in the 3rd embodiment, and a return button press. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the frame integrated control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the clearing process performed by MPU in the frame integrated control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stand and date information confirmation process which are performed by MPU in the frame integrated control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the card sand apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the authentication process performed by MPU in the card sand apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in a 4th embodiment. (A) is a front view of the condition setting switch provided in the frame integrated control apparatus in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is for explaining the contents for each number corresponding to each switch of the condition setting switch. It is explanatory drawing of. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the frame integrated control apparatus, card | curd sand apparatus, and member card in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the frame integrated control apparatus in 4th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment, which is an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) 10, will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1, the external structure of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment and the card sand device 70 will be described. FIG. 1A is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 and the card sand apparatus 70, and FIG.

  The card sand device 70 is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each pachinko machine 10, installed on the left side (or right side) of the corresponding pachinko machine 10, and connected to the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is within the range of the amount of bills inserted into the corresponding card sand device 70, or the saving data (remaining amount) recorded in a member card 300 described later inserted into the card sand device 70, Lend a ball to the player. The player can play a game on the pachinko machine 10 with the lent ball (rental ball) and the ball (prize ball) paid out by the game as possession balls.

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment does not receive the balls used in the game from the island facility or discharge the balls used in the game to the island facility. In the form, 50 balls) are prepared in advance in the pachinko machine 10, and the balls are circulated in the pachinko machine 10 and used for games. This in-flight circulation pachinko machine 10 does not have a conventional payout device, and does not lend or pay out balls directly to the player, and quantifies the balls and prize balls (as points). Granted to the player.

  This in-machine circulation pachinko machine 10 collects the balls from the conventional island equipment, that is, each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island equipment, cleans the collected balls, and distributes them to each pachinko machine 10 again. Island facilities with large-scale mechanisms can be eliminated. Therefore, in the hall where the pachinko machine 10 is introduced, the cost for the island facilities can be reduced. In addition, since it is not necessary to stop all pachinko machines 10 installed in the island facilities in order to inspect and maintain the island facilities, inspection and maintenance can be performed for each pachinko machine 10, so the operating rate of the pachinko machines 10 can be increased. Can be raised.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a non-magnetic sphere that is not attracted by a magnet, for example, an austenitic stainless steel sphere is used as a game sphere (hereinafter simply referred to as “sphere”). As a result, an illegal act in which the player uses the magnet to change the flow direction of the ball, or a game area which will be described later is held without flowing down, and the game area is released when the game area is released. It prevents fraudulent acts that do something special.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 17 at two positions on the left and right sides of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 17 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side (front side). When the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11.

  The inner frame 12 is made of a synthetic resin, specifically, ABS (acrylonitrile butadiene styrene) resin. ABS resin is suitable as a constituent material of the inner frame 12 because it has a low material cost, has a good paste such as plating, has a good decorative property, and has a high impact resistance.

  In the inner frame 12, a game board 13 (see FIG. 4) described later having a large number of nails, winning holes 3, 4, 5a, etc. in the region 2/3 to 3/4 on the upper side when viewed from the front is detachable from the back side. Installed. A ball ball game is performed by the ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13.

  In addition, the inner frame 12 has a projecting portion 16 that projects to the front front side (front side) in the lower part of the front view, that is, below the area where the game board 13 is mounted. Although details will be described later, a ball launching unit 66 that launches a ball to the front area (game area) of the game board 13 and a ball immediately after being launched from the ball launching unit 66 are inside the projecting portion 16. A launch rail 63 that guides to the front area of the game board 13 and a supply passage 65 that stores the balls collected from the front area of the game board 13 and supplies them to the ball launch unit 66 are mainly disposed ( (See FIG. 3). In the first embodiment, since the pachinko machine 10 is an in-flight circulation pachinko machine, unlike an ordinary pachinko gaming machine, the inner frame 12 has an upper plate and a lower plate for storing balls. It is omitted.

  The overhanging portion 16 is covered with a cover made of resin (for example, ABS resin), and the cover is configured so that it cannot be opened and closed and cannot be removed from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Accordingly, at least the ball stored in the supply passage 65 is configured not to be touched by the player, and the player is not allowed to make any illegal action against the ball used in the pachinko machine 10 stored in the supply passage 65. It is possible to prevent an act (for example, an illegal act such as changing a ball or changing the movement of the ball in the game area by oiling the ball).

  In the central portion of the overhanging portion 16 in the front view, there is a status display device 85 that displays a player's possessed ball and card balance, a lucky number condition for entering a lucky period in which the player can continuously play with the possessed ball, and the like. It is arranged. Details of the status display device 85 will be described later.

  Here, the lucky number system and the lucky period will be described. The lucky number system is a special gaming state when a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, a big hit with a predetermined special symbol in the “normal gaming state”) is achieved, and the subsequent game is a lucky period. It is a game specification that gives. During the lucky period, a game based on the winning ball acquired during the lucky period (hereinafter referred to as a “lucky ball”) becomes possible. On the other hand, after the lucky period, a game based on the lucky ball becomes impossible. . In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, a plurality of types of lucky periods are provided, and the start condition of the lucky period is any of the “normal gaming state” and the “first time” jackpot during any of the lucky periods. If it occurs in a special symbol, one of the lucky periods corresponding to the type of the special symbol that has been won is started. On the other hand, the started lucky period is configured to end when an end condition set for each type of the lucky period is satisfied. In the first embodiment, as a lucky period, a plurality of lucky periods (three kinds in the first embodiment) of “unlimited” state, “lucky” state, and “start” state can be generated. . Details of each lucky period will be described later. As described above, the “first time” jackpot is a jackpot won during the “normal gaming state” that is not in any lucky period, and during any lucky period, the “normal gaming state” The jackpot in the middle, that is, the jackpot in the “normal gaming state” that can enter the “lucky” state or the “unlimited” state is not included.

  In the first embodiment, when a big win with a predetermined special symbol occurs in the “normal gaming state”, the “unlimited” state, the “lucky” state or the “start” state is set according to the type of the special symbol that has been won. Any lucky period is started, and continuous games based on the lucky balls acquired during each lucky period are possible. On the other hand, after each lucky period, continuous games based on the lucky balls acquired during the lucky period are impossible. This is a gaming specification.

  The “unlimited” state, which is one of the lucky periods, is a state that is not one of the lucky periods, and in the “normal gaming state”, when a big hit occurs in the “Dugong symbol” of “7” to be described later It is a lucky period to enter. In other words, in this “unlimited” state, “7” is a big hit for “first time” as a start condition. On the other hand, in the “unlimited” state, an operation of the return button 75 is set as an end condition. That is, this “unlimited” state is set so that the lucky period continues unless the return button 75 is operated in the game after entering the “unlimited” state.

  The “lucky” state, which is one of the lucky periods, is a state that is not any lucky period, and in the “normal gaming state”, a “turtle design” of “3” or “5” described later. This is a lucky period when you get a big hit with the “shrimp design”. That is, in the “lucky” state, “3” or “5” jackpot is set for “first time” as a start condition. On the other hand, in the “lucky” state, as a termination condition, “4” jackpot start when the time reduction function is not activated (that is, “normal game state”), that is, “first time” in the “lucky” state is “ When the big hit of “4” is subtracted, is set. In other words, this “Lucky” state continues during the “Landscape State” based on the jackpot of “3” or “5”, and even after the “Landscape State” ends, after the “Time Reduction State” ends It is set so that the lucky period will not be continued unless the jackpot of “4” is drawn in the “normal game state”. This “Lucky” state is configured to transition from the “Lucky” state to a “Start” state, which will be described later, when a jackpot of “4” in the “normal game state” as the end condition is drawn.

  The “renso” in the first embodiment refers to a case where one of the jackpots is won again in the “high probability state” or the “time reduction state”. Therefore, if any of the jackpots is won in the “normal game state” after the “high probability state” or the “time reduction state” ends, it does not fall under “renso”. In addition, the “rendezvous state” in the first embodiment means that after acquiring the jackpot, either the “high probability state” or the “time reduction state” is maintained from the jackpot state, and the “time The state until the “shortened state” is completed.

  In addition, the “high probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability of the first symbol after the first symbol (special symbol) ends as a value-added after the jackpot of the first symbol is higher than the normal state, that is, the probability variation is changing It is time, in other words, the state of the game that easily shifts to the jackpot state. The “high probability state (during probability change)” in the first embodiment is that the winning probability of a second symbol (ordinary symbol), which will be described later, is increased, and the electric accessory associated with the start winning opening 4 is easily opened. This includes a game state in which a ball can easily enter the start winning opening 4.

  Unlike the “high probability state”, the “time reduction state (medium time reduction)” means that the jackpot probability of the first symbol is normal and only the probability of hitting the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is increased. It means a state of a game in which a ball easily enters the start winning opening 4 because the electric accessory attached to the starting winning opening 4 is easily opened. This “time reduction state” occurs after the jackpot corresponding to the “time reduction state” is completed, and continues until the third symbol variation display is performed 100 times. Then, when the 100th variation display is completed, or when one of the jackpots is won, the “time reduction state” is completed. On the other hand, the “normal gaming state” means a time when it is not a “high probability state” or a “time reduction state”, and the jackpot probability of the first pattern is a normal state, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than the probability change. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol is a normal state.

  The “start” state, which is one of the lucky periods, is a state that is not one of the lucky periods and is a jackpot other than “3”, “5” or “7” described above in the “normal gaming state” That is, “1” “octopus symbol”, “2” “harisenbon symbol”, “4” “shark symbol”, “6” “angler symbol”, “8” “angelfish symbol”, which will be described later. Alternatively, it is a lucky period that enters when a big hit with “9” “crab symbol” occurs. That is, in this “start” state, as a start condition, a big hit of “1”, “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” or “9” is set for “first time”. On the other hand, as the end condition of the “start” state, the end of the “time reduction state”, that is, the end of the “rendezvous state” starting from this jackpot is set. In other words, this “start” state continues during the “long villa state” starting from this jackpot, and until the “time shortening state” ends, that is, the change display of the special symbol in the “time shortening state” after the jackpot Is set to continue until 100 is completed.

  Therefore, even during the lucky period, the “unlimited” state can be said to be the most advantageous lucky period for the player. The “Lucky” state is less advantageous than the “Unlimited” state, but is more advantageous than the “Start” state, and is a lucky period that is advantageous to the player after the “Unlimited” state. . Furthermore, it can be said that the “start” state is a lucky period that is more disadvantageous for the player than the “unlimited” state or the “lucky” state. Therefore, in this pachinko machine 10 adopting the lucky number system, the player is not able to enter the “start” state and pulls the jackpot of the “unlimited” state or the “lucky” state for a long-term lucky period. Play games aiming to win.

  In the first embodiment, any lucky period is set not based on any lucky period and based on the type of jackpot that was drawn during the “normal gaming state”. That is, for example, even when a big hit of “3” or “5” corresponding to the “lucky” state is drawn at the “running state” in the “start” state, the “start” state changes to the “lucky” state. In addition, even if a big hit of “7” corresponding to the “unlimited” state is subtracted during the “village state” in the “lucky” state, the “lucky” state is not changed to the “unlimited” state. Absent. In other words, the conditions for setting each lucky period are based on the type of jackpot of “first time” in the “normal gaming state” that is not in any lucky period. The period type is set so that it does not “rise”.

  Conventionally, at game halls that adopt the lucky number system, the staff of the game hall check the presence / absence of jackpots in each pachinko machine, which is the starting condition of the lucky period, and the type of the jackpot symbol, and according to the type of jackpot The lucky period is started by inserting a bill or the like on the upper part of the machine, the lucky period is ended by monitoring whether or not the end condition of the lucky period is achieved during the lucky period, When the period ended, it was necessary to urge the player to exchange the acquired game balls.

  When the above-mentioned work is performed by a staff at a game hall, work related to the lucky number system is added in addition to normal work such as checking for abnormalities of the gaming machine and cleaning. There was a point. On the other hand, increasing the number of staff to cope with the lucky number system has the problem of increasing personnel costs and increasing the management of the game hall. Therefore, even in an environment where a game specification that can improve the gameability of the lucky number system can be realized, the game hall does not adopt the lucky number system in consideration of the above problems, and in a normal business form. As a result, the gameability was not improved.

  Therefore, in the first embodiment, a system for quantifying and managing rental balls and prize balls, which are functions of the in-flight circulation pachinko machine 10, is effectively used, and a sharable ball possessed before the lucky period starts. The possessed ball data and the possessed ball data related to the lucky ball acquired during the lucky period are respectively identified and stored, and after the lucky period, a game based on the lucky ball acquired during the lucky period is prohibited. Thus, the lucky number system can be realized only by controlling the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, by realizing the lucky number system by controlling the in-flight circulation pachinko machine 10, it is possible to play the game without reducing the labor cost without imposing a heavy work burden on the staff of the game hall and increasing the number of staff. The venue can be managed soundly, and a variety of games can be realized while maintaining the conventional environment.

  In addition, since the gaming value acquired for each gaming state can be managed individually and the acquired gaming value that can be used according to the gaming state can be determined, for example, it is acquired in one gaming state (lucky period) The game value (prize ball) can be used only in the gaming state, and cannot be used in other gaming states (after the lucky period is finished), and various gaming properties can be realized.

  In addition, the gameability of the lucky number system is more likely to produce a more prominent effect because the rental rate of the rental balls is different from the prize conversion rate at the game hall window. Specifically, for example, if there is a prize conversion gap in which the lending rate is 4 yen per ball and the prize conversion rate is equivalent to 2.5 yen per ball, a game with a rental ball and an award that has been won In a game with a ball, a difference is generated in the game value equivalent to 1.5 yen per ball. In such a situation, the player can continue to play the game based on the winning ball because playing the winning ball continuously contributes to his own benefit. However, this is a factor that divides the game. In a game hall with such a prize conversion gap, it is possible to acquire a lucky period by adopting a lucky number-based game specification, and continue to play with the prize balls acquired during that time. The effect of the specification can be made remarkable and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  An operation handle 39 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed on the lower right side of the overhanging portion 16 when viewed from the front. Inside the operation handle 39, a ball launch unit 66 is provided. The touch sensor 39a for permitting the driving of the motor, the push button-type stop switch 39b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and the amount of rotation of the operating handle 39 by changing the electric resistance. A variable resistor (not shown) for detection is incorporated.

  When the operation handle 39 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 39a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 39 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 39a and the stop switch 39b are off.

  A door frame (also referred to as a “glass frame”) 14 is provided on the front side of the area where the game board 13 is mounted in the inner frame 12. In order to support the door frame 14, metal hinges 18 are attached at two locations on the left side of the front view of the area where the game board 13 is mounted in the inner frame 12. The door frame 14 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side (front side) with the side on which the hinge 18 is provided as an opening / closing axis. When the door frame 14 is closed, the door frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

  The inner frame 12 has a cylinder lock 21a that constitutes the locking device 20 at the lower central portion in front view of the end portion (right end portion in front view) of the inner frame 12 on the side separated from the open / close shaft of the inner frame 12 and the open / close shaft of the door frame 14. It is arranged. The locking of the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 and the locking of the door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21b of the cylinder lock 21a and performing a predetermined operation. Specifically, when the key inserted into the keyhole 21b is turned counterclockwise, the locking of the inner frame 12 is unlocked. On the other hand, when the key inserted into the keyhole 21b is turned clockwise, the door frame 14 is unlocked.

  The door frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window portion 14a having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit (not shown) having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the door frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 mounted on the inner frame 12 through the glass unit is the front of the pachinko machine 10. Visible to the side.

  The door frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the door frame 14. These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. For example, on the periphery of the window portion 14a, there are provided electrical decoration portions 32 to 36 that incorporate light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 32 to 36 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the illumination parts 32 to 36 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, a display lamp 31 is provided in the upper left part of the front view of the door frame 14 (refer to FIG. 1). The display lamp 31 has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is paid out and when an error occurs.

  The lower part of the door frame 14 protrudes to the front front side (front side), and an operation unit 23 is provided at a substantially central position of the protruding part. The operation unit 23 is an input device that receives an operation instruction from a player, and includes a joystick 23a, an operation button 23b disposed on the left side of the joystick 23a, and an operation button disposed on the right side of the joystick 23a. 23c. When the joystick 23a and the operation buttons 23b and 23c are operated by the player, the pachinko machine 10 changes the images displayed in various effects executed on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 described later. , Raising the expectation that will be a big hit for the player. As a result, the player can actively participate in the game.

  Here, by providing the operation part 23 in the door frame 14, the following effects can be acquired. That is, since the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is an in-machine circulation type pachinko machine, the pachinko machine 10 has a mechanism for circulating a ball such as a supply passage 65 that is not provided in a normal pachinko machine. . Conventionally, when replacing a pachinko machine, the entire pachinko machine was removed from the island facility and replaced. However, the in-machine circulation pachinko machine has a mechanism for circulating balls in the machine, so the unit price of one pachinko machine is It is higher than a normal pachinko machine, and as a result, the cost required to replace the pachinko machine is higher.

  It is the shape of the game board 13 and the door frame 14 that is greatly different in each model and model of the pachinko machine. Therefore, when the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12 including the mechanism for circulating the ball in the machine are shared by each model and model, and the pachinko machine is replaced, the door frame 14 and the game board 13 are exchanged. By doing so, the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12 can be reused for each model and model, so that the cost for replacing the pachinko machine can be kept low.

  And when replacing a pachinko machine in this way, if the operation part 23 is provided in the door frame 14 like 1st Embodiment, when replacing a pachinko machine, the operation part 23 is replaced | exchanged together with the door frame 14. Can do. Therefore, the configuration and design of the operation unit 23 can be easily changed for each model / model.

  The overhanging portion of the door frame 14 provided with the operation portion 23 is disposed on the upper side of the overhanging portion 16 of the inner frame 12. As a result, since the operation unit 23 is supported not only by the door frame 14 but also by the inner frame 12, a strong force is exerted on the operation unit 23 by the player, such as pressing down on the operation unit 23, particularly in the downward direction in front view. Even so, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 23 and the door frame 14 that supports the operation unit 23 from being destroyed.

  In the upper part of the door frame 14, an unrestricted movable accessory 95, a lucky movable accessory 96, and a start movable accessory 97 (not shown in FIG. 1, see FIG. 11) are accommodated according to the type of lucky period. Any movable combination 95 to 97 is configured to be able to appear and disappear from the upper part of the door frame 14 by a drive mechanism (not shown). Specifically, in the “unlimited” state, an unrestricted movable accessory 95 is configured to appear. In the “lucky” state, the lucky movable accessory 96 is configured to appear. 97 is configured to appear. With these movable objects 95 to 97, it is possible to notify the player or staff of the game hall which lucky period the pachinko machine 10 is in. In addition, when it is not in any lucky period, any movable accessory 95-97 is accommodated in the upper part of the door frame 14, and cannot be visually recognized by a player. Further, when the movable combination items 95 to 97 appear from the upper part of the door frame 14, the movable combination items 95 to 97 are repeatedly driven in a predetermined operation drive pattern, or by LEDs (not shown) mounted therein. You may comprise so that it may alert | report that it is any lucky period by making this movable combination 95-97 light-emit.

  A small window 37 is formed on the lower right side of the window portion 14a by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the door frame 14 can be seen, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 4). A stamp or the like affixed to the pachinko machine 10 is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to the area around the illumination parts 32 to 36 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A card sand device 70 is arranged on the left side of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front. The card sand device 70 is provided with a bill insertion slot 71 for inserting bills and a card insertion slot 72 for inserting a membership card 300 (see FIG. 11) and a guest card (not shown). .

  The membership card 300 is a game recording medium issued to member players registered as members in the game hall, and the guest card is a game issued to general players who are not registered as members in the game hall. Recording medium. The membership card 300 and the guest card are composed of IC cards, and record the game value (for example, card balance (amount data), sharable ball, lucky ball, or unusable ball) owned by the player. ing.

  Here, a sharable ball, a lucky ball, and a game unusable ball that are part of the game value owned by the player will be described. The sharable ball is player-owned ball data that can be used in all pachinko machines installed in the game hall and can be used in any gaming state. The lucky ball is player-owned ball data that can be used only by a pachinko machine that has acquired a lucky period and can be used only during the acquired lucky period. This lucky ball is configured such that when the lucky period being executed ends, the possessed ball data relating to the lucky ball at that time is changed to possessed ball data of a game unusable ball. The game unusable ball is ball data possessed by a player that cannot be used with a pachinko machine, and the game unusable ball is set so that it can only be exchanged for a prize at a game hall window.

  The guest card is always provided inside the card sanding device 70 and plays an alternative role of the member card 300 to a player who does not have the member card 300. The member card 300 is inserted into the card insertion slot 72. When the player inserts a banknote into the banknote slot 71 without being inserted, money data corresponding to the banknote is recorded on the guest card provided in the card sand device 70. The guest card functions are the same as the functions other than the member card 300 and the member ID, and hence the description regarding the guest card is omitted below. Although the invention relating to the first embodiment will be described using the membership card 300, the present invention is naturally realized even with a guest card having a function equivalent to that of the membership card 300.

  In the present embodiment, in the state where the membership card 300 or the guest card is not provided in the card sand device 70, an error state in which insertion of banknotes by the player is prohibited is configured. By configuring in this way, it is not possible to insert a bill into the bill insertion slot 71 unless the membership card 300 or the guest card is inserted into the card sand device 70. And since it is comprised so that a player can insert a banknote into the card sand apparatus 70 only when this error state is cancelled | released, money amount data according to this banknote can always be recorded on the member card 300. it can. In the error state where the membership card 300 or the guest card is not provided in the card sand device 70, the member card 300 is inserted into the card insertion slot 72 by the player or the guest card is inserted into the card insertion slot by the staff of the game hall. It is configured so as to be eliminated by being input to 72.

  When the player inserts the membership card 300 into the card insertion slot 72 and confirms the validity (that it is not illegal) of the inserted membership card 300, the cash corresponding memory 300b described later of the membership card 300 will be described later. It becomes possible to lend out the lent balls to the player within the range of the amount data (balance data) stored in (see FIG. 11), and the normal time memory 300c (see FIG. 11) of the membership card 300 described later. The ball can be launched within the range of the number of balls that can be shared corresponding to the points stored in ().

  A ball lending button 74 for obtaining a lending ball is disposed below the bill insertion slot 71. When the player operates the ball lending button 74, as long as the amount data exists in the cash corresponding memory 300b of the membership card 300, the same is set in advance for each lending amount unit preset in the card sand device 70. Depending on the lending rate, the lending ball is added to a normal time ball counter 213c (to be described later) of the pachinko machine 10 as a sharable ball.

  Specifically, for example, in the card sand device 70, in a situation where the lending amount unit is set to 500 yen and the lending rate is set to 4 yen per ball, the player operates the ball lending button 74. In the event of a failure, 125 balls are rented to the player. In addition, in the situation where the lending amount unit is set to 500 yen and the lending rate is set to 2 yen per ball, if the ball lending button 74 is operated by the player, 250 balls are lending to the player Loaned to. Furthermore, if the player operates the ball lending button 74 in a situation where the lending amount unit is set to 500 yen and the lending rate is set to 1 yen per ball, a 500 ball lending is given to the player. Loaned to.

  The lending rate is transmitted from the hall computer 263 (see FIG. 10) to the card sand device 70 in advance and set. For example, when the card sand device 70 is turned on, a signal indicating that the card sand device 70 is turned on is transmitted to the hall computer 263, and the hall computer 263 that has received the signal sends the signal to the card sand device 70. On the other hand, a rate signal related to the lending rate corresponding to the card sand device 70 is transmitted. Then, the card sand device 70 that has received the rate signal stores the lending rate specified by the rate signal in a predetermined area of the RAM 273 (see FIG. 11) in the card sand device 70 to set the lending rate. To do. The set lending rate (ball unit price) is displayed in the value information display area 85c (see FIG. 9) of the status display device 85. The player can know the sphere unit price (exchange rate) of the lent balls in the pachinko machine 10 corresponding to the card sand device 70 by confirming the rent rate displayed in the value information display area 85c of the status display device 85. it can.

Also, the lending amount unit is transmitted from the hall computer 263 (see FIG. 10) to the card sanding device 70 and set in advance. For example, when the card sand device 70 is turned on, a signal indicating that the card sand device 70 is turned on is transmitted to the hall computer 263, and the hall computer 263 that has received the signal sends the signal to the card sand device 70. On the other hand, while transmitting the rate signal described above to the card sand device 70,
A monetary unit signal related to the lending monetary unit corresponding to the card sand device 70 is transmitted. Then, the card sand device 70 that has received the monetary unit signal stores the lending monetary unit specified by the monetary unit signal in a predetermined area of the RAM 273 (see FIG. 11) in the card sand device 70, thereby lending. Set the monetary unit. The set loan amount unit is displayed in the value information display area 85c (see FIG. 9) of the status display device 85. The player can know the loan amount unit in the pachinko machine 10 corresponding to the card sand device 70 by checking the loan amount unit displayed in the value information display area 85c of the status display device 85.

  A return button 75 for requesting the return of the membership card 300 inserted in the card insertion slot 72 is disposed below the ball lending button 74 (lower side in FIG. 1). In the first embodiment, when the return button 75 is pressed, the card sand device 70 receives from the pachinko machine 10 the sharable balls, the lucky balls, and the game unusable balls displayed on the status display device 85 at that time. Points are converted at a predetermined exchange rate (same as the lending rate), and the converted points are accumulated and added as saving data to the normal time memory 300c of the member card 300 and a game unusable memory 300d described later. Then, the membership card 300 that stores the accumulated and added saving data is discharged from the card insertion slot 72.

  As an example of converting points at a predetermined exchange rate, for example, if there are 1000 sharable balls, in the card sand device 70 set to exchange 4 yen per ball, 1000 balls × 4 yen = 4000 points Is added to the normal memory 300c of the membership card 300. In addition, in the card sanding device 70 in which the setting for exchanging 2 yen per ball is made, 1000 balls × 2 yen = 2000 points are added to the normal time memory 300c of the member card 300. Further, in the card sanding device 70 in which the setting for exchanging 1 yen for 1 ball is made, 1000 balls × 1 yen = 1000 points are added to the normal time memory 300 c of the member card 300.

  In the first embodiment, the game specification of the lucky number system is configured to be executable, and when a big hit is made with a lucky number compatible symbol, the bonus is acquired during the lucky period as a bonus period from the big hit to a predetermined period. While the continuous game based on the lucky ball is configured to be possible, the continuous game based on the lucky ball acquired during the lucky period is configured to be impossible after the lucky period. The continuous game here means a state in which a game can be continuously performed using a lucky ball acquired and possessed during the lucky period, and when the lucky period ends, The state in which a game cannot be performed based on is a state in which the continuous game has ended. In the first embodiment, when the return button 75 is operated during the lucky period, the lucky period ends. With this configuration, when the return button 75 is operated by a player who has lost the willingness to continue the game even during the lucky period, the lucky period is extinguished, and then the other person makes the pachinko machine 10 The game can be started from a gaming state that is not a lucky period when the game is started at. Therefore, it is possible to realize a personal attribute of the lucky period, which is a game specification based on the lucky number system. When the lucky period ends based on the player operating the return button 75, the movable accessories 95 to 97 appearing from the upper part of the door frame 14 are stored inside the door frame 14. It is comprised so that.

  The card sand device 70 is also provided with a card usable lamp 78, a rentable lamp 79a, and an error display lamp 79b as various lamps.

  The card usable lamp 78 is a lamp for notifying whether or not the member card 300 can be inserted into the card insertion slot 72. When the membership card 300 can be inserted into the card insertion slot 72, the card sand device 70 turns on the card usable lamp 78. The player can determine whether or not the member card 300 can be inserted into the card sand device 70 based on the lighting state of the card usable lamp 78.

  The card sand device 70 is a count permission signal indicating that the lending rate and the lending amount unit are set after the power is turned on, and that the number of possessed balls can be counted in the frame overall control device 111 described later. Until the card is received, the card usable lamp 78 is not turned on, and the standby state in which the acceptance of the membership card 300 is not permitted. In other words, the rate signal and the monetary unit signal from the hall computer 263 serve as a lending permission signal for the card sand device 70, and the counting permission signal from the frame overall control device 111 serves as a lending permission signal for the card sand device 70. Plays. When the card sand device 70 determines that the setting of the lending rate and the lending amount unit has been completed and the frame overall control device 111 has made it possible to count the number of possessed balls, the card usable lamp 78 is turned on. The player is informed that the membership card 300 can be accepted.

  The lendable lamp 79a is a lamp for informing the player whether or not the ball can be rented. The lendable lamp 79a is turned on when a ball can be rented. During normal times, the card sanding device 70 turns off the lendable lamp 79a. Only when the member card 300 is inserted into the card insertion slot 72 and it is confirmed that the member card is not a fraudulent one but a legitimate one, the card sand device 70 lights the lendable lamp 79a, Inform the player that a ball can be rented. On the other hand, even if the membership card 300 is inserted into the card insertion slot 72, if the validity of the membership card 300 cannot be confirmed, the card sanding device 70 keeps the lendable lamp 79a unlit, and from the player Reject the ball lending request. In addition, acceptance of banknotes into the banknote slot 71 is not permitted. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that the member card 300 inserted into the card insertion slot 72 cannot lend a ball and cannot receive a ball lending based on cash. In this case, the player can call the hall clerk and take measures such as having the data stored in the membership card 300 be checked for destruction.

  Thus, in this pachinko machine 10, in order to play a game using a ball, the legitimate member card 300 is inserted into the card insertion slot 72, or the bill insertion slot 71 is inserted without inserting the membership card 300. It is essential to insert cash.

  The error display lamp 79b is a lamp that lights when a predetermined error occurs. The card sand device 70 turns on the error display lamp 79b when a predetermined error is detected inside. For example, when it is confirmed that the membership card 300 inserted into the card insertion slot 72 is not valid and is illegal, the error display lamp 79b is turned on. The hall clerk can recognize that a predetermined error has occurred in the card sanding device 70 by confirming that the error display lamp 79b is turned on. Thereby, the store clerk in the hall can deal with an error that has occurred in the card sand device 70.

  Note that the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment is configured to display not only the lending rate (exchange rate) and the card balance described above, but also the status notification of the card sand device 70 and the like on the status display device 85 described later. However, specific contents will be described later.

  Next, the details of the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 2 is a front view showing a state in which the door frame 14 is removed from the pachinko machine 10. 3A is a front view showing a state in which the resin cover that covers the overhanging portion 16 is further removed from the state of FIG. 2, and FIG. 3B is a plan view of the overhanging portion 16 from the pachinko machine 10. It is an enlarged view at the time of seeing the pachinko machine 10 from the IIIb direction shown to Fig.3 (a) in the state which removed the resin-made covers which cover a. 2 and 3 (a), for convenience, the structure in the game area on the surface of the game board 13 is shown as blank.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3A, the inner frame 12 is mainly configured by a resin base 40 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially circular window hole 52 is formed at the center of the resin base 40. Has been. A game board 13 is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 on the rear side of the resin base 40. The game board 13 is composed of a quadrangular plywood, and its peripheral edge is attached in a state where it abuts against the back side of the resin base 40 (inner frame 12). Accordingly, the substantially central portion of the front surface portion of the game board 13 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 52 of the resin base 40.

  The resin base 40 is provided with a substantially rectangular small window 47 at the lower right portion of the window hole 52. As will be described later, a sticking space K1 is provided at the lower right corner of the game board 13, and a sticker or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is small when the game board 13 is mounted on the rear side of the resin base 40. It can be visually recognized through the window 47. It is also possible to attach a sticker or the like from the small window 47.

  As shown in FIG. 3 (a), a ball is placed inside the overhanging portion 16 projecting toward the front side (front side) of the inner frame 12 below the area where the game board 13 is mounted. A ball launch unit 66 that launches to the front area of 13, a launch rail 63 that guides the ball immediately after being launched from the ball launch unit 66 to the front area of the game board 13, and a recovery from the front area of the game board 13. A supply passage 65 for storing a ball used for a game and supplying a ball to be subsequently launched to the ball launch unit 66 is mainly disposed.

  The ball launch unit 66 includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are driven by a launch control device 112 (see FIG. 10) described later. The firing control device 112 receives a firing permission instruction from the frame overall control device 111, which will be described later, and detects that the player is touching the operation handle 39 by the touch sensor 39a, and stops firing the ball. On the condition that the stop switch 39b is turned off (not operated), the firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the rotation amount of the operation handle 39, and the ball is fired with the strength according to the rotation amount of the operation handle 39.

  The launch rail 63 is attached and fixed to the resin base 40 via a metal plate 63a behind the launch rail 63, and is configured to extend linearly at a predetermined launch angle (launch angle). Accordingly, the ball launched by the ball launch unit 66 in accordance with the turning operation of the operation handle 39 is first launched obliquely upward along the launch rail 63, and thereafter, two later-described two provided on the game board 13. The game area is guided through a ball guide path 60 formed by rails 61 and 62.

  A launch ball detection switch 94 is provided above the launch position of the game ball on the launch rail 63. The launch ball detection switch 94 detects a launch ball that has passed on the launch rail, and the detection result is output to a frame overall control device 111 (see FIG. 11) described later. The frame overall control device 111 counts the balls, firing balls, and foul balls stored in the supply passage 65, and when the ball fired from the firing solenoid is detected by the firing ball detection switch 94, the player Therefore, “1” is subtracted from the number of the player's balls (the value of the normal time ball counter 213c or the value of the lucky middle ball counter 213d shown in FIG. 11).

  Since the launch ball detection switch 94 is provided in the vicinity of the launch position of the ball, the launch ball detection switch 94 is configured to immediately detect a ball that has been launched from the launch solenoid and passed on the launch rail 63. Therefore, since the shot ball can be detected at an interval (for example, 0.05 s) shorter than an interval (for example, 0.05 s) in which the next ball is fired after the ball is fired, The ball data of the possessed ball can be counted before the next ball is launched, and the launch of the ball without the player's possessed ball can be prevented in advance.

  A gap having a predetermined interval is formed between the launch rail 63 and the outer rail 62 provided on the game board 13, and a foul ball passage 64 is formed below the gap. The foul ball passage 64 is connected to the supply passage 65, and the ball launched from the ball launching unit 66 does not reach the return ball prevention member 68 (see FIG. 4) and returns to the ball guide passage as a foul ball. The foul sphere is discharged and stored in the supply passage 65 via the foul sphere passage 64. As a result, the foul ball is supplied again to the ball launch unit 66 via the supply passage 65 and is launched toward the front area of the game board 13.

  A foul ball detection switch 93 is provided in the foul ball passage 64. The foul sphere detection switch 93 detects a sphere that has passed through the foul sphere passage 64, and the detection result is output to a frame overall control device 111 (see FIG. 11) described later. The frame overall control device 111 counts the balls, firing balls, and foul balls stored in the supply passage 65, and when a ball that has passed through the foul ball passage 64 is detected by the foul ball detection switch 93, the game One player's ball was fired, but it did not reach the game area and returned to the supply passage 65 without being effectively used. Thus, the number of player's balls (the normal time ball counter shown in FIG. 11) "1" is added to the value of 213c or the value of the lucky central ball counter 213d).

  In the first embodiment, the possession balls for subtracting the fired ball are different depending on whether or not it is during the lucky period. Specifically, when a shot ball is detected by the shot ball detection switch 94 outside the lucky period (that is, other than “unlimited” state, “lucky” state or “start” state), the shareable ball is set to “1”. On the other hand, when the shot ball is detected by the shot ball detection switch 94 during the lucky period, “1” is subtracted from the lucky ball (only when there is a lucky ball). Has been. In addition, even if it is during a lucky period, when there is no lucky ball, it is comprised so that a sharable ball may be reduced.

  Balls acquired during the lucky period can only be used during the lucky period and cannot be used during other periods (normal game period), while sharable balls can be used outside the lucky period or on other pachinko machines. Therefore, it can be said that the sharable ball is more versatile and has higher game value for the player than the lucky ball. Therefore, during the lucky period, when a ball is detected, the ball is configured to be consumed preferentially from the lucky ball only when there is a lucky ball. Can be maintained.

  Moreover, in 1st Embodiment, it is comprised so that the ball data which add a foul ball may differ according to whether it is during a lucky period. Specifically, when a foul ball is detected by the foul ball detection switch 93 during a normal game period that is not during the lucky period, it is configured to add “1” to the shareable ball, while during the lucky period When a foul ball is detected by the foul ball detection switch 93, “1” is added to the lucky ball.

  As described above, the shareable ball is more versatile than the lucky ball because it can be used in all gaming states, and has a higher game value by the player. Therefore, during the lucky period, the launch ball based on the lucky ball If a player can add a sharable ball when the player becomes a foul ball, the player can deliberately generate a foul ball to convert the lucky ball into a sharable ball. There is a risk of collapse. Therefore, as in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, by configuring the foul ball during the lucky period to be added to the lucky ball, the above problem can be prevented and the lucky number can be prevented. The game playability can be maintained.

  In the first embodiment, it is not identified whether the launch ball that has become a foul ball during the lucky period is a ball based on a sharable ball or a ball based on a lucky ball. With this configuration, there is no need to perform a process of determining whether the shot ball is a sharable ball or a lucky ball, so that the control burden can be reduced accordingly. However, when the launch ball based on the sharable ball due to the absence of the lucky ball during the lucky period becomes a foul ball, there is a problem that the ball is based on the sharable ball and added to the lucky ball. is there. Therefore, if a foul ball was generated during the lucky period, it was determined whether the foul ball was a launch ball based on a lucky ball or a shareable ball, and was a launch ball based on a shareable ball At this time, “1” may be added to the shareable ball. With this configuration, when a foul ball is generated for a launch ball based on a sharable ball even during the lucky period, it can be returned (added) to the sharable ball, so that the game possessed by the player An appropriate gaming environment can be provided without detracting more than necessary.

  As described above, the supply passage 65 stores balls that are launched toward the front area of the game board 13 and supplies the balls one by one to the ball launch unit 66. In the first embodiment, 50 balls are stored in the pachinko machine 10, and the player is allowed to play a game while circulating the 50 balls. When no game is played, 50 balls are stored in the supply passage 65.

  In the supply passage 65, the left end 65 a in front view is connected to a discharge passage 42 a (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the game board 13. The ball that has flowed down the front area of the game board 13 is once discharged to the back of the game board 13 from various winning holes 3, 4, 5a (see FIG. 4) described later provided on the game board 13 and the out port 6. It is supplied to the supply passage 65 from the end portion 65a through the discharge passage 42a (see FIG. 6) provided on the back surface of the game board 13. Further, the supply passage 65 is connected to the foul ball passage 64 on the right side of the end portion 65 a, and a sphere that has returned to the ball guide passage as a foul ball is supplied from the foul ball passage 64 to the supply passage 65.

  The supply passage 65 is formed in a Z shape with an inclination from the left end portion 65a in front view toward the right end portion 65b in front view, and the width of the passage (width in the front-rear direction in the front view). ) Is set to a range in which spheres can pass one by one (for example, a range of 1.3 to 1.8 times the diameter of the sphere). Thereby, the sphere supplied from the end portion 65a and the foul ball passage 64 flows down toward the end portion 65b one by one. The end 65b is provided with a gate (not shown) that can be opened and closed by a solenoid (not shown), and the gate is normally closed. Therefore, the spheres supplied from the end portion 65 a and the foul sphere passage 64 are sequentially retained one by one from the end portion 65 b by the gate of the end portion 65 b and are stored in the supply passage 65.

  The solenoid that opens and closes the gate of the end portion 65b is driven by the launch control device 112 immediately before the ball launch unit 66 launches a ball by driving the launch control device 112, and the gate of the end portion 65b is opened. In the vicinity of the gate of the end portion 65b, the lower surface of the supply passage 65 is provided with a gradient so that the ball firing unit 66 side is lowered. Thereby, when the gate of the end portion 65 b is opened, the sphere stored in the supply passage 65 rolls toward the sphere launch unit 66, and the sphere is supplied to the sphere launch unit 66.

  A ball extraction passage 67 for extracting a sphere stored from the supply passage 65 is connected to the lower side of the end portion 65 b of the supply passage 65 in front view. The ball extraction passage 67 communicates with the back side of the inner frame 12, and an outlet 67 b is provided on the back side of the inner frame 12. The sphere extracted from the supply passage 65 is discharged from the outlet 67 b on the back side of the inner frame 12.

  A gate (not shown) is provided at a connecting portion 67a between the supply passage 65 and the ball removal passage 67, and the gate is normally closed. Therefore, normally, the sphere stored in the supply passage 65 is not discharged from the ball removal passage 67.

  A lever 67 c that opens and closes the gate is attached to a gate provided in a connection portion 67 a between the supply passage 65 and the ball passage 67. The lever 67c is disposed on the right side of the ball removal passage 67 when viewed from the front, and a spring provided between the lever 67c and the ball launching unit 66 applies force to the lever 67c in the direction of the left when viewed from the front. Is energized. The lever 67c maintains the gate closed state by the biasing by the spring.

  The lever 67c is configured to be able to be pulled toward the right side of the front view. When the lever 67c is pulled in the right direction when viewed from the front, the gate provided in the connection portion 67a is opened in accordance with the pull, and the supply passage 65 and the ball removal passage 67 communicate with each other. Thereby, the sphere stored in the supply passage 65 is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the ball removal passage 67. When the pulling force applied to the lever 67c in the right direction in the front view is released, the lever 67c returns to the position before being pulled by the biasing force of the spring provided between the ball launching unit 66 and again. The gate provided in the connecting portion 67a is closed, and the communication between the supply passage 65 and the ball removal passage 67 is released. Thereby, it can be set as the state where the ball stored in supply passage 65 is not extracted.

  The lever 67c is covered with a resin cover provided on the overhanging portion 16, and cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. The lever 67c can be operated only from the back side of the inner frame 12. Therefore, the ball stored in the supply passage 65 can be extracted only by unlocking the inner frame 12 and opening the back side of the inner frame 12 (hall personnel). When a person concerned with the hall is informed that trouble or fraud has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 from the frame overall control device 111, the hall operator operates the lever 67c by opening the back side of the inner frame 12, and the supply passage 65 The sphere stored in the container can be extracted to check whether the sphere has any problem.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the ball launch unit 66, the launch rail 63, the supply passage 65, and the ball removal passage 67 provided inside the overhang portion 16 are also made of a resin cover provided in the overhang portion 16. Covered by. The cover is configured so that it cannot be opened and closed and cannot be removed from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Thereby, it is configured so that the player cannot touch at least the balls stored in the supply passage 65, and the player does not perform any illegal acts (for example, exchange the balls) against the balls used in the pachinko machine 10. Or illegal actions such as changing the movement of the ball in the game area by oiling the ball).

  Next, the details of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 13 attached to the inner frame 12.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 50 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of balls for nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning port 3, a starting winning port. 4. The variable winning device 5, the through gate 7, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 3, the starting winning port 4, the variable winning device 5, the through gate 7, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 50 by router processing, and from the front side of the game board 13 It is fixed with wood screws. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14a (see FIG. 1) of the door frame 14.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and a glass unit (not shown) disposed on the back side of the door frame 14. A game area where a game is played is formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by the behavior of the ball. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 51 (a winning opening is provided and a ball that has been launched is Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided for guiding the ball fired from the ball launching unit 66 (see FIG. 3) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61. The return ball preventing member 68 reduces (closes) the exit of the ball guide passage 60 sandwiched between the two rails 61 and 62 in a normal state, and the ball is guided from the ball guide passage 60 to the upper part of the game board 13. In this case, the exit of the ball guide passage 60 is enlarged (opened) by the amount of movement of the ball. The sphere guided by the sphere guide passage 60 expands the return sphere prevention member 68 according to the amount of movement of the sphere itself, and moves to the game area above the game board 13.

  On the other hand, the return ball prevention member 68 is configured to maintain a state in which the exit of the ball guide passage 60 is reduced (closed) when the ball tries to move from the upper part of the game board 13 to the ball guide passage 60. Yes. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation where the ball once guided to the game area at the top of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage 60 again.

  The return ball prevention member 68 is provided with a game ball detection switch 68a. The game ball detection switch 68 a is a switch that detects that a ball has been guided from the ball guide passage 60 to the game area at the top of the game board 13. The game ball detection switch 68a detects that the exit of the ball guide passage 60 is expanded (opened) by the momentum of the ball when the ball is guided from the ball guide passage 60 to the upper part of the game board 13. Then, it is detected that the ball is guided from the ball guide passage 60 to the upper part of the game board 13. By counting the number of balls detected by the game ball detection switch 68a, the number of balls used in the game (the number of game balls) can be counted. The game ball detection switch 68a may have any configuration as long as it detects the passage of a ball guided from the ball guide passage 60 to the game area above the game board 13.

  A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the sphere launched with a momentum of a predetermined level or more hits the return rubber 69 and the momentum is attenuated while the center portion side. Rebounded. A resin arc member 51 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 50 is driven and fixed.

  A first symbol display device 87 provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) 87a which are light emitting means and a 7-segment display 87b is disposed in the upper right part of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right part of FIG. 4). ing. The first symbol display device 87 uses the LED 87a and the 7-segment indicator 87b to display the first symbol in accordance with each control performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 10) described later. The gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly displayed by the display mode of the first symbol. The plurality of LEDs 87a display a change by indicating whether or not the change is made in accordance with a ball entering the start winning opening 4 (start win) by a lighting state, or as a stop pattern after the end of the change, A symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery performed for the start winning prize is indicated by a lighting state, or the number of balls that have not been executed among the balls that have entered the starting prize opening 4 (holding balls) is on hold. The number of balls is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display 87b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 87a are configured so that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with a small number of LEDs depending on the combination of the light emission colors. .

  In the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for the entrance to the start winning opening 4, whether or not a big hit is determined, and if the big hit is determined, the type of the big hit is also determined. As the jackpot type determined here, “15R probability variation jackpot”, “2R probability variation jackpot”, and “time / temporary jackpot” are prepared. The LED 87a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.

  Here, “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a “high probability state” after 15 rounds of jackpot, and “2R probability variation jackpot” is a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a “high probability state” after the jackpot. In addition, “short-time jackpot” means that after the jackpot of the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, the jackpot probability of the third pattern is normal, but during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations), “time shortened state” It is a big hit.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability of the first symbol after the first symbol (special symbol) ends as an added value is increased, that is, the so-called probability change (probably changing), In other words, it is a game state that can easily shift to the special game state. The “high probability state (during probability change)” in the first embodiment is that the winning probability of a second symbol (ordinary symbol), which will be described later, is increased, and the electric accessory associated with the start winning opening 4 is easily opened. This includes a game state in which a ball can easily enter the start winning opening 4.

  On the other hand, the “normal gaming state” means a time when it is not a “high probability state” or a “time reduction state”, and the jackpot probability is a normal state, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than the probability change, A state where the probability of hitting two symbols (ordinary symbols) is low. In addition, the “time shortened state (short time)” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is increased. It means a game state in which a ball easily enters the start winning opening 4 because the accompanying electric accessory is easily opened.

  Instead of changing the winning probability of the second symbol, the electric power associated with the start winning opening 4 is opened according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, or the electric power is applied once per symbol in the second symbol. It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that an accessory opens. For example, the “time shortening state” or the “high probability state” may be a state in which the opening time of the electric accessory attached to the start winning opening 4 is longer than the “normal game state”. In addition, the “time reduction state” and the “high probability state” may be a state in which the number of times the electric accessory is released per one time in the second pattern is larger than the “normal gaming state”. .

  In the game area, a plurality of (four in FIG. 4) general winning openings 3 are arranged through which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. When a ball wins the general winning opening 3, a general winning switch 44 (see FIG. 10) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. It is paid out as a prize ball. Since this pachinko machine 10 is an in-flight circulation pachinko machine, five balls are not actually paid out to the player, but the number of possessed balls of the player counted inside the pachinko machine 10 The value for 5 balls is added.

  A variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, a liquid crystal display that performs a variable display of the third symbol while being synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display device 87, triggered by a ball entering the start winning opening 4 (start winning prize) to be described later. (Hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”), a third symbol display device 81, and a second symbol (ordinary symbol) LED that is variably displayed with the passage of the ball of the through gate 7 as a trigger. 2 symbol display device 83 is provided. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 19-inch large liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIG. 9) to be described later, for example, upper, middle and lower. The three symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol sequence is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are scrolled horizontally for each symbol sequence, and a variable display (variable effect) in which the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is provided. To be done. In the third symbol display device 81 of the first embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 87, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 87 is performed. The decorative display according to is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like. The display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described later.

  The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which a symbol “◯” and a symbol “X” are alternately lit as a display symbol (second symbol) every time the ball passes through the through gate 7. is there. In the second symbol display device 83, when the result of the lottery performed along with the passage of the through gate 7 is a win, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed after the change display. If the result of the lottery is off, the symbol “x” is stopped and displayed after the variable display.

  The pachinko machine 10 is configured such that when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at the symbol “◯”, the electric accessory associated with the start winning opening 4 is activated (opened) for a predetermined time. Has been. The number of passes of the ball through the through gate 7 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 87 and also on the second symbol hold lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are disposed in the vicinity of the second symbol display device 83 and symmetrically above the third symbol display device 81.

  The second symbol variation display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the first embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 87 or the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the pass through the through gate 7 is not limited to the maximum number of balls to be held, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 87, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform the lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a start winning opening 4 through which a ball can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the start prize opening 4 (start prize), a start prize switch 45 (see FIG. 10) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the start prize switch 45 is turned on, The main controller 110 draws a big hit, and the variable display on the first symbol display device 87 and the third symbol display device 81 is started (started). Then, after the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, the variable display is stopped, the display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 87a of the first symbol display device 87, and the third symbol corresponding to the lottery result is displayed as the third symbol display. The device 81 is stopped and displayed. The start winning opening 4 is one of the winning openings, and when a ball enters, five balls are paid out as winning balls. Since this pachinko machine 10 is an in-flight circulation pachinko machine, five balls are not actually paid out to the player, but the number of possessed balls of the player counted inside the pachinko machine 10 The value for 5 balls is added.

  On the left and right of the third symbol display device 81, there are disposed shutter accessories 228 (see FIG. 34) for informing the digestion status (elapsed status) of the “start” state, which is one of the lucky periods. The shutter accessory 228 is provided as a pair on the left and right of the third symbol display device 81 and is configured to be driven and controlled by a single motor (not shown) by a link mechanism (not shown). It is configured to be able to be driven into a standby state where it waits to the left and right and a plurality of patterns of covering states that cover the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The shutter accessory 228 in the first embodiment is any when the “start” state is a predetermined situation (in the first embodiment, the remaining number of times in the “time reduction state” is 50 times, 10 times, or 0 times). It is configured to be driven to such a covering state. The driving mode of the shutter accessory will be described later.

  When a ball enters the start winning opening 4 while the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 87), the ball is held up to four times at maximum. Then, the variable display corresponding to the held sphere (held sphere) is performed after the end of the variable display corresponding to the held sphere previously held. As described above, the number of held balls (the number of held balls) is indicated by the first symbol display device 87 and also in the hold display area Dh of the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, the ball entering the start winning opening 4 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less, Or you may set to the frequency | count (for example, 8 times) of 5 times or more.

  A variable winning device 5 is disposed below the start winning opening 4, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning opening (large winning opening) 5a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. When a ball wins the specific winning opening 5a, a specific winning switch 46 (see FIG. 10) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. Due to the turning on of the specific winning switch 46, 15 balls are turned on. It is paid out as a prize ball. Since the pachinko machine 10 is an in-flight circulation pachinko machine, 15 balls are not actually paid out to the player, but the number of possessed balls of the player counted inside the pachinko machine 10 The value for 15 balls is added.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main controller 110 is a big hit, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, the LED 87a of the first symbol display device 87 is turned on so as to become a big hit stop symbol. The stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 5a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 5a is closed when a predetermined time elapses or ten balls are won, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 5a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 5a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 5 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 5a, and a large winning opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open and close the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 5a is normally in a closed state where the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the event of a big win, the big winning hole solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downwards to form a temporary open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 5a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A special winning opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 5a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 87a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 87, the specific winning opening 5a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening A special gaming state is defined as a special gaming state in which a large winning opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 5a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball is opened into the specific winning opening 5a while the mouth 5a is opened. You may make it form.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhering space K1, The small window 47 (see FIG. 2) and the small window 37 (see FIG. 1) of the door frame 14 can be visually recognized.

  Further, an out port 6 is provided below the game board 13. Balls that have not entered any of the winning openings 3, 4, 5 a are discharged to the back surface of the game board 13 through the out opening 6. A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6 is a rear view showing configurations of the inner frame 12 and the game board 13.

  First, an overall outline of the rear configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. On the back of the pachinko machine 10 (actually the back of the inner frame 12 and the game board 13), various control boards are arranged so as to be arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions or stacked in front and back, and further, resin A back pack 402 constituted by a protective cover made of metal is attached. In the first embodiment, two control board units 400 and 401 are configured by separately mounting various control boards on two mounting bases, and these control board units 400 and 401 are individually attached to the inner frame 12 or the game board 13. I try to put it on the back.

  The control board unit 400 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 401 is unitized by mounting a frame overall control board (frame overall control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launch control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card sand apparatus connection board 116. ing.

  Each control board has an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a clock used for time counting and synchronization. A pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the frame overall control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card sand device connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. ing. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (frame control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown). Connected by structure). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  Further, the frame overall control device 111 is provided with an error release button 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. For example, when the frame overall control device 111 determines that there is a possibility that a trouble or an illegal act has occurred, the error release button 120 indicates that the trouble or the illegal act has been resolved. It is operated to notify 111. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the back surface configuration of the inner frame 12 and the game board 13 will be described. The game board 13 is installed in a square frame-shaped installation area surrounded by the resin base 40 and is fixed by a plurality of locking fixtures provided on the inner frame 12 so as not to drop off.

  A variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the center of the game board 13. In the variable display unit 80, a resin (for example, ABS) frame cover 88 that covers the center frame 86 (see FIG. 4) from the back is provided so as to protrude rearward, and at the rear end of the frame cover 88, A third symbol display device (LCD) 81, which is a liquid crystal display device, and a display control device 114 are detachably attached in a state where they are overlapped in the front-rear direction. In the frame cover 88, an LED control board for driving LEDs and the like built in the center frame 86 are disposed.

  A back frame set 41 is attached to the back surface of the game board 13 so as to surround the variable display device unit 80. This back frame set 41 is a thin resin molded product (for example, made of ABS) provided so as to stick to the back surface of the game board 13, and has a game ball collecting mechanism for collecting balls won in various winning openings. Is formed. In detail, below the back frame set 41, it corresponds to the opening portion of the game board 13 of the general winning port 3, the starting winning port 4, and the specific winning port 5 a (refer to FIG. 4 respectively), and 1 on the downstream side. A collection passage 41a is formed that gathers at the place.

  The collection passage 41 a is provided with a discharge port 41 b for discharging the sphere to a discharge passage 42 a provided in the ball discharge passage board 42 at a position where the collection passage 41 a gathers at one place on the downstream side. The balls collected from the general winning port 3, the starting winning port 4, and the specific winning port 5a by the collecting passage 41a and gathered in one place on the downstream side are the outlets provided in the collecting passage 41a at the place where the balls gather. 41b is discharged into the discharge passage 42a of the ball discharge passage board 42.

  The ball discharge passage board 42 is a resin molded product (for example, made of polycarbonate resin) attached below the game board 13. The discharge passage 42 a is a passage for guiding the discharge ball to the end portion 65 a (see FIG. 3A) of the supply passage 65 provided on the front side of the inner frame 12. Is formed.

  Accordingly, as exemplified by the phantom line in FIG. 6, all the game balls won in the general winning opening 3 etc. gather through the collection passage 41a of the back frame set 41 and pass through the discharge opening 41b. After being discharged to the discharge passage 42a of the board 42, it is discharged to the supply passage 65 through the discharge passage 42a. In addition, the ball that has entered the out port 6 is directly discharged to the discharge passage 42a, and the ball that has not won any winning opening is also discharged to the supply passage 65 through the discharge passage 42a.

  In the above configuration, with the lower end surface of the game board 13 as a boundary, a back frame set 41 (collection passage 41a) is provided above, and a ball discharge passage board 42 (discharge passage 42a) is provided below. 42 is provided without overlapping (overlapping) the game board 13 in the front-rear direction. Therefore, when the game board 13 is removed from the inner frame 12, there is no inconvenience that the ball discharge passage board 42 prevents the game board 13 from being removed.

  On the back surface of the game board 13, a winning detection mechanism for detecting passage of a ball to various winning holes and the like is provided. Specifically, a general winning switch 44 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning slot 3 on the front side of the game board 13, and a starting winning switch 45 is provided at a position corresponding to the starting winning slot 4, and the specific winning slot 5a. Is provided with a specific winning switch 46.

  The general winning switch 44 is connected to a board surface relay board (not shown) through electric wiring, and this board surface relay board (not shown) is further connected to a main controller 110 described later. The specific winning switch 46 is connected to a specific winning opening relay board (not shown), and this specific winning opening relay board (not shown) is also connected to the main controller 110. On the other hand, the start winning switch 45 is directly connected to the main controller 110 without going through the relay board.

  When the general winning switch 44 senses a winning of a ball at the general winning opening 3, the general winning switch 44 which is normally turned off is turned on. Accordingly, five prize balls are determined by the main control device 110, and a prize ball addition command for notifying that the possessed ball is increased by five is transmitted to the frame overall control device 111.

  When a winning of a ball at the start winning opening 4 is detected by the start winning switch 45, the start winning switch 45 which is normally turned off is turned on. As a result, the main control device 110 makes a big winning lottery, and starts (starts) a variable effect in the first symbol display device 87 and the third symbol display device 81. Further, the main controller 110 determines five prize balls, and a prize ball addition command for notifying that the number of possessed balls is increased by five is transmitted to the frame overall controller 111.

  When the winning of a ball at the specific winning opening 5a is detected by the specific winning switch 46, the specific winning switch 46 which is normally turned off is turned on. As a result, 15 prize balls are determined by the main control device 110, and a prize ball addition command for notifying that the possessed ball is increased by 15 is transmitted to the frame overall control device 111.

  As will be described in detail later, the number of balls possessed by the player is counted by the frame overall control device 111. When the frame overall control device 111 receives a prize ball addition command from the main control device 110, the received prize ball addition is received. A value corresponding to the number of spheres indicated by the command is added to the number of possessed spheres. Thereby, in the in-flight circulation pachinko machine 10, a prize ball is given as a player's possession ball.

  On the back side of the game board 13, a winning ball detection switch for detecting a winning ball that passes through the discharge port 41b and is discharged to the discharge channel 42a at the position of the discharge port 41b provided in the collection passage 41a (see FIG. (Not shown), and an out-ball detection switch (not shown) for detecting a sphere discharged from the out-port 6 to the discharge passage 42a is provided at the position of the out-port 6. Both the winning ball detection switch and the out ball detection switch normally output an off signal, and output an on signal when the ball passes the position where each detection switch is provided. Both the winning ball detection switch and the out ball detection switch are connected to a frame general relay board (not shown), and this frame general relay board (not shown) is connected to the frame general control device 111.

  As described above, the ball that passes through the discharge port 41b and is discharged to the discharge passage 42a is a winning ball that has won a prize in any of the various winning ports (the general winning port 3, the starting winning port 4, or the specific winning port 5a). . Therefore, the winning balls detected at the winning ball detection switch provided at the position of the discharge port 41b are all the winning balls that have been won at various winning ports (the general winning port 3, the starting winning port 4, or the specific winning port 5a). It becomes. Accordingly, the winning ball detection switch is connected to the frame overall control device 111 via the frame overall relay board, so that the frame overall control device 111 can count the number of winning balls won in various winning openings. Yes.

  Further, the balls that pass through the out port 6 and are discharged to the discharge passage 42a are balls that have not won any of the winning ports 3, 4, 5a. Accordingly, the balls detected by the out ball detection switch provided at the position of the out port 6 are all balls guided to the front area (game area) of the game board 13 and have not won the various winning holes. It becomes. Therefore, when the out port 6 is connected to the frame overall control device 111 via the frame overall relay board, various out of the balls guided to the front area (game area) of the game board 13 in the frame overall control device 111. It is possible to count the number of balls that did not win the winning opening.

  On the back surface of the inner frame 12, a locking device 20 is disposed in a vertically long manner at the left end in rear view (right end in front view of the pachinko machine 10). The locking device 20 is a device for locking the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 and locking the door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12.

  A cylinder lock 21 a is provided at the lower center of the locking device 20 as viewed from the front. The cylinder lock 21 a is provided so as to protrude from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and has a keyhole 21 b (see FIG. 1) on the front side of the pachinko machine 10. When a dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole 21b and the inserted key is turned leftward in the front view (rightward in the rear view), the locking of the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 is unlocked. Moreover, when the key inserted in the keyhole 21b is turned rightward in the front view (leftward in the rear view), the door frame 14 is unlocked from the inner frame 12.

  The locking device 20 includes an inner frame locking unit that locks the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11, and an electronic lock 99 that locks the door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12. The inner frame locking unit includes an eaves base 21e formed in a vertically long shape, and a eaves member 21f that is slidably provided on the eaves base 21e and engages with the outer frame 11. The eaves base 21e is formed in a substantially L-shaped cross section by an attachment plate 21e1 having a plurality of attachment holes and a support plate 21e2 orthogonal to the attachment plate 21e1 and supporting the eaves member 21f. The locking device 20 is fixed to the inner frame 12 by tightening a mounting plate 21e1 of the flange base 21e with a screw at an end portion (left end portion in rear view) on the back surface side of the inner frame 12 and away from the opening / closing axis.

  Inside the support plate 21e2 of the rod base 21e, a plate-like slide rod 21d formed vertically along the support plate 21e2 is disposed so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. Further, two upper and lower portions of the flange base 21e are provided with flange members (inner frame flange members) 21f that are slidably supported by the support plate 21e2 while being always pulled upward by a coil spring (not shown). Yes. The inner frame collar member 21f is formed in a bowl shape with the tip portion protruding upward, and is hooked on a metal fitting (not shown) provided on the outer frame 11 to lock the inner frame 12. The inner frame collar member 21f engages with the sliding collar 21d and slides downward only when the sliding collar 21d moves downward from the neutral position. The sliding rod 21d is urged upward by a reaction force having substantially the same magnitude as the pulling force of the coil spring that urges the inner frame flange member 21f.

  The two upper and lower inner frame collar members 21f are independently movable downward. When the inner frame collar member 21f is moved and unlocked with a wire or the like, both inner frames The scissor member 21f must be moved downward. Even if only one of them is moved downward, the other inner frame flange member 21f remains hooked on a metal fitting (not shown) of the outer frame 11. For this reason, an unauthorized unlocking operation becomes difficult and crime prevention is improved. The inner frame collar member 21f moves downward as the sliding collar 21d slides downward. The sliding rod 21d is slid downward in conjunction with an operation of turning counterclockwise (clockwise in rear view) with a dedicated key to the cylinder lock 21a. The inner frame 12 is operated by operating the dedicated key. Can be unlocked.

  On the back side of the inner frame 12, a photosensor 98 is attached on the extended line in the protruding direction of the protruding portion of the door frame 14 so as to surround the tip of the protruding portion. The photosensor 98 includes a light emitting element attachment portion (not shown) to which a light emitting element (not shown) is attached, a light receiving element attachment portion (not shown) to which a light receiving element (not shown) is attached, and light emission. A U-shape formed by a connecting portion (not shown) that connects one end of the element mounting portion and one end of the light receiving element mounting portion so that the light emitting element and the light receiving element are opposed to each other by a predetermined distance. It is a shape sensor. Further, in the photosensor 98, a detection groove (not shown) is formed by the light emitting element attaching portion, the light receiving element attaching portion, and the connecting portion.

  The pachinko machine 10 outputs the detection result of the photosensor 98 (whether or not light is received by the light receiving element) to the frame overall control device 111. Thereby, the frame overall control device 111 can grasp the open / closed state of the door frame 14 based on the detection result of the photosensor 98.

  Next, the screen configuration of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the screen configuration of the third symbol display device 81, as described above, and schematically shows the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIGS. 8A to 8J are diagrams showing a third symbol displayed mainly in the variable display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 8, each third symbol is a main symbol imitating nine kinds of marine organisms (refer to FIG. 8A to FIG. 8I) with numbers “1” to “9”, respectively. It is composed of sub-patterns (see FIG. 8 (j)) imitating shell shapes without numerals. Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” to the upper left part of the character symbol imitating marine life.

  Specifically, the main symbol “1” is formed by attaching a number “1” to the upper right side of the marine life imitating an octopus (see FIG. 8A). In addition, the main symbol “2” is formed by attaching the number “2” to the upper right side of the marine life imitating the parent and child of Harrisenbon (see FIG. 8B). The main symbol “3” is formed by attaching a number “3” to the upper right side of the marine life imitating a turtle (see FIG. 8C). In addition, the main symbol “4” is formed by attaching a number “4” to the upper right side of the marine life imitating a shark (see FIG. 8D). The main symbol “5” is formed by attaching a number “5” to the upper right side of the marine life imitating shrimp (see FIG. 8E). The main symbol “6” is formed by attaching a number “6” to the upper right side of the marine life imitating the anglerfish (see FIG. 8F). In addition, the main symbol “7” is formed by attaching the number “7” to the upper right side of the marine life imitating the dugong parent and child (see FIG. 8G). The main symbol “8” is formed by attaching the number “8” to the upper right side of the marine life imitating an angelfish parent and child (see FIG. 8G). The main symbol “9” is formed by attaching a number “9” to the upper right side of the marine life imitating a crab (see FIG. 8 (i)).

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, as described above, the main symbols assigned with odd numbers (“1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, and “9”) are high-probability symbols. In the display, when the jackpot state is set based on the fact that the high probability symbol is confirmed and displayed, it is set to shift to the “high probability state” after the jackpot is completed. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (“2”, “4”, “6” and “8”) are low-probability symbols, and the jackpot state is based on the fact that the low-probability symbols are fixedly displayed in the variable display. In this case, it is set to shift to a so-called “time reduction state” after the jackpot is over.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 is a big win, any lucky period is given according to the type of the third symbol that has won the big win. It is configured. Specifically, if a big hit occurs in “7” “Dugong”, it will enter the “unlimited” lucky period, and “3” “Turtle” or “5” “Shrimp” If a big hit occurs, it will enter the lucky period in the “Lucky” state, and other than the above 3rd symbol, that is, “1” “octopus symbol”, “2” “Harisenbon symbol”, “4” “shark” If a jackpot occurs in the “design”, “6” “Ancho design”, “8” “angelfish design” or “9” “crab design”, it will enter the “start” lucky period. It is configured.

  Note that the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment is configured such that the main control device 110 does not determine the jackpot symbol type, and the sound lamp control device 113 described later determines the jackpot symbol type. With this configuration, the main control device 110 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot, and the audio lamp control device 113 determines which lucky period to be given by determining the jackpot symbol type. You can draw a lottery. Therefore, the main controller 110 does not have to perform a lottery for the lucky period, and accordingly, the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced. Further, since lotteries with different game values can be given between the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, a variety of games that are not possible in the past can be realized.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two areas. One is the variable display area Dm, and the other is the hold display area Dh.

  The fluctuation display area Dm is an area in which a fluctuation display in which the third symbol is variably displayed is displayed. The variable display area Dm has three symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of upper, middle, and lower, and the third symbols for effects shown in FIGS. 8A to 8J are predetermined in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Are displayed in the order. That is, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the third symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers, and the third symbols are scrolled from the left side to the right side of the display screen with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Are displayed in a variable manner.

  The upper symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the third symbol appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the third symbol appear in ascending order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers (descending order with respect to the variation direction of the third symbol), and each main symbol is arranged. One sub-pattern is arranged between each. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine kinds of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending order of numbers (ascending order with respect to the changing direction of the third symbol), and sub-designs are provided between the main symbols. Are arranged one by one. That is, each of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 is composed of 18 third symbols.

  On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine kinds of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending order of numbers (ascending order with respect to the variation direction of the third symbol), and then “9”. A “4” main symbol is additionally arranged between the main symbol “1” and the main symbol “1”, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of the main symbols. That is, only the middle symbol row Z2 includes 10 main symbols and is composed of a total of 20 third symbols.

  Further, in the variable display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three places, left, middle, and right, for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Accordingly, a total of nine third symbols of 3 rows × 3 columns are displayed in the variable display area Dm. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when three identical third symbols are arranged in a straight line (or when combinations of predetermined symbols (for example, “3”, “4” and “1”) are arranged) In addition, the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are not arranged in such a manner that three identical third symbols are arranged in succession. In Dm, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right descending line L4, and a left descending line L5 are set.

  The variation display of the 3rd symbol starts in the variation display area Dm so that each 3rd symbol of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scrolls periodically from the left side to the right side of the display screen in response to winning at the start winning opening 4 Is done. Thereafter, the display is switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally the third symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery result is stopped in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. It is configured to display (stationary display) and to end one variable display.

  Among the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3, when the symbols are displayed on standby for some of the symbol rows (in the first embodiment, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3), any of the effective lines L1 to L5 When the same main symbol is stopped, so-called reach display is performed, and in this reach display, the main symbol of the remaining symbol sequence (in the first embodiment, the middle symbol sequence Z2) is displayed as a normal loss variation display. It is comprised so that it may fluctuate longer.

  And when a predetermined combination of main symbols (for example, three identical main symbols) is stopped and displayed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 from the reach display, it is configured to shift to a big hit state. Yes. In the case of shifting to the big hit state, the third symbol display device 81 is set to display a winning video.

  The variable display area Dm has a function of displaying characters, character information, and the like on the back side of the third symbol, and displaying a notice effect during the variable display being executed. The notice effect is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that will be a big hit in the presenting of the variable display that is currently being performed, so that the player can know the degree of expectation that will be a big hit according to the content of the image displayed in the notice effect It has become. The player can increase the expectation that is a big hit by viewing the notice effect displayed during the effect of the variable display.

  The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a variation display with a short variation time to a variation display with a long variation time, and the notice effect is configured to be executed as much as a variation display with a long variation time, for example, reach display. ing. That is, if the fluctuation display time is long, the player may get bored until the stop display is made. Can have a sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game for the player and continue playing the game.

  In addition, the mode of the 3rd symbol variable display in the 3rd symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the variable symbol 3 display in the symbol sequence, The number of symbols in the symbol row can be changed as appropriate. Further, the design of the third design that is variably displayed on the 3rd design display device 81 is not limited to that shown in FIGS. 8A to 8J. For example, only a number is variably displayed as the design. It is good also as composition to be.

  In the lower right part of the display area of the variable display area Dm, there is provided a variable area hold display area Dmh for displaying the hold number of the variable display of the third symbol. The variable area hold display area Dmh is configured to display the hold number of the variable display of the third symbol as a number, and to uniquely recognize the hold number for the player. The value of the variable area holding display area Dmh has a one-to-one correspondence with the value of a holding ball number counter 203c (see FIG. 10) described later, and the value indicated by the holding ball number counter 203c is displayed.

  Further, the variable area hold display area Dmh is configured to continue to be displayed without being erased in any display mode during execution of the variable display. On the other hand, the display mode is configured to be erased in a display mode other than the variable display, for example, in a state where the variable display is not executed as in the demonstration display or the jackpot display.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the 3rd symbol display device 81 may be covered by a shutter accessory 228 described later just before the end of the lucky period. Even in this case, the door member of the shutter accessory 228 is not covered. A notch 228a is provided at the corner, and the variable area holding display area Dmh is visible from the notch 228a. With this configuration, even if the 3rd symbol display device 81 becomes difficult to visually recognize, the variable area hold display area Dmh can be visually recognized, and the player can recognize the number of hold of the variable display. Therefore, for example, the player is made to recognize whether or not the reserved number is the maximum reserved number, and the player is encouraged to play the game according to the player's intention (for example, stop), so that the player's possession of the gaming value Damage can be prevented.

  The hold display area Dh is horizontally long so as to be distinguished from the variable display area Dm, and the execution hold display area Dh0 is displayed at the left corner of the front view, and the first to fourth hold displays on the right side of the execution hold display area Dh0. Areas Dh1 to Dh4 and other display areas are included. The first to fourth hold display areas Dh1 to Dh4 are configured to display associated with stored contents stored in main hold first to fourth areas (not shown) described later.

  The hold display area Dh is called a so-called hold cockpit. In addition to the hold symbol, the hold display area Dh executes a notice effect related to the change display performed in the change display area Dm, or displays a subgame that is not directly related to the change display. It is configured to be able to execute or notify a gaming state.

  This reserved cockpit (holding display area Dh) leaves the execution holding display area Dh0 at the time of the variable display reach display, so that the display of the first to fourth holding display areas Dh1 to Dh4 and the other display areas are erased. It is configured. Therefore, at the time of reach display, the display area of the variable display area Dm is enlarged, and the reach display that the player is gazing at is enlarged and displayed, so that the force using the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed. A certain performance can be performed.

  In addition, when only the hold symbol displayed in the execution hold display area Dh0 is displayed at the time of reach display, for example, when the hold symbol in the execution hold display area Dh0 is changed to a chance-up display due to a pre-reading notice or the like Since the contents can be continuously suggested to the player even when the reach is displayed, the contents of the execution hold display area Dh0, which is part of the notice effect related to the variable display during execution, are erased and the game contents become unclear. This can be prevented beforehand. The chance-up display is an effect that can be easily selected when winning a jackpot, and is a reservation pre-reading effect that is difficult to select when out of play. For example, the reserved symbol is blue, green, red, or rainbow (for example, The expectation degree of jackpot is one that changes from blue to green to red to rainbow.

  In place of displaying the number of reserved balls in the reserved display area Dh, the number of reserved balls is different from a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. You may make it display in a mode (for example, a color and a lighting pattern). In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 87, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80, the game board 13, or the door frame 14 and the like are provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state. May be displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the situation display device 85 provided in the central portion in the front view of the overhanging portion 16 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the status display device 85. The display screen of the status display device 85 is roughly divided into three areas. One is a menu display area 85a, one is a lucky number display area 85b, and the other is a value information display area 85c. The status display device 85 is configured by a touch panel so that various operations can be input when the player touches various icons displayed on the status display device 85 with a finger.

  The menu display area 85a is an area for displaying icons for setting display contents of the other display areas 85b and 85c of the status display device 85. A plurality of icons are displayed in the menu display area 85a. In the first embodiment, a “home” icon, a “wagon service” icon, a “notification” icon, and a “help” icon are displayed.

  The “home” icon is a button icon for displaying a basic display state of the status display device 85. When the “home” icon is operated by the player, the lucky number display area 85b and the value information display area 85c are set to be displayed as shown in FIG. Details of the home screen based on the operation of the “home” icon will be described later.

  The “wagon service” icon is a button icon for receiving various services preset by the game hall based on the ball data possessed by the player. When this “wagon service” icon is operated by the player, the player can order the food by pulling down the player-owned ball data for the value corresponding to the selected food (eg coffee). It is configured to receive a wagon service. The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured such that the ball data for food and drink ordered by the wagon service is withdrawn from the shareable ball or the lucky ball so that the wagon service with the game unusable ball cannot be received. Is set. The game unusable balls are configured such that prizes can be exchanged only at the game hall window, and therefore, the wagon service, which is a service during the game, is also unusable. In addition, you may comprise so that a game center can set the use availability in a wagon service about a game unusable ball.

  The “notification” icon is a button icon for displaying in-store information, advertisements, and other information (for example, news and weather forecasts) from the amusement hall. When this “notice” icon is operated by the player, information on various services performed by the game hall is displayed, and when the “help” icon is operated by the player, the pachinko machine 10 or Usage guidance for the card sand device 70 is displayed.

  The lucky number display area 85b is a display area for displaying conditions for obtaining a lucky period. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, an “unlimited” state and a “lucky” state are sequentially displayed from the top of the lucky number display area 85b. And a start condition for acquiring the “start” state and an end condition for ending the acquired lucky period.

  For example, the start condition in the “unlimited” state is displayed as “first time: 7 symbols (Dugong)”, and the end condition is not displayed. That is, the “unlimited” state continues when the big hit with “7 symbols (Dugong)” is drawn during the “normal gaming state” unless the return button 75 is operated or the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. It is shown that. The “first time” displayed in the start condition means “in a normal game state” that is not a “high probability state” or a “time reduction state”. Therefore, if the jackpot of “7 symbols (Dugong)” is drawn during “high probability state” or “time shortening state”, another lucky period (“lucky” state or “start” state) has already occurred. Since it is in the started state, it is not a big hit with the “first figure” of “7 symbols (Dugong)”, which suggests that it will not be in an “unlimited” state. In addition, even in the “lucky” state, there is a case where the game state is shifted to the “normal gaming state”, that is, the gaming state that is neither the “high probability state” nor the “time reduction state”. When the big hit with "" is pulled, it is configured to shift to the "unlimited" state.

  The start condition of the “lucky” state is displayed as “first time: 3 symbols (turtle) or 5 symbols (shrimp)”. On the other hand, the end condition is displayed as “first time: 4 symbols (shark)”. In other words, the “Lucky” state is started when a jackpot with “3 symbols (turtle)” or a jackpot with “5 symbols (shrimp)” is subtracted during the “normal game state”. This indicates that the game ends when a big hit with “4 symbols (shark)” is drawn during the “normal gaming state”.

  In addition, even in the “unlimited” state, there may be a transition to a “normal gaming state”, that is, a gaming state that is neither a “high probability state” nor a “time reduction state”. ”Or“ 5 symbols (shrimp) ”, the“ unlimited ”state is maintained without shifting to the“ lucky ”state. Since the “unlimited” state is a lucky period in which the player has a higher gaming value than the “lucky” state, the “unlimited” state without an end condition does not fall (does not end) due to the start condition of the “lucky” state. It is configured. The same applies when the jackpot corresponding to the “start” state is drawn during the “unlimited” state.

  The start condition of the “start” state is displayed as “first time: 1 symbol (octopus) or 2 symbols (harisenbon) or 4 symbols (shark) or 6 symbols (angko) or 8 symbols (angel fish) or 9 symbols (crab)”. On the other hand, the end condition is displayed as “short time end”. In other words, the “start” state is started when a jackpot other than “3 symbol (crab)”, “5 symbol (shrimp)” or “7 symbol (dugong)” is drawn during the “normal game state”, and thereafter This indicates that the game ends when the “time reduction state” ends. It should be noted that even in the above-mentioned “unlimited” state or “lucky” state, it is a case of shifting to a “normal gaming state”, that is, a state that is neither a “high probability state” nor a “time reduction state”. When a symbol jackpot, which is a start condition in the “start” state, is drawn, the “unlimited” state or the “lucky” state is maintained without shifting to the “start” state. Since the “unlimited” state and the “lucky” state are lucky periods that have a higher game value for the player than the “start” state, the “unlimited” state or the “lucky” state is reduced by the start condition of the “start” state. It is configured so as not to end (do not end).

  In the first embodiment, the start condition and end condition of the lucky period are displayed by characters. Instead, the start condition and end condition are displayed by displaying a symbol character. May be. By displaying with the character of the pattern, since the effect of appealing to the player may be higher than when suggested by the character, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the start condition and end condition of the lucky period.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment is configured such that the contents of the lucky number display area 85b are set when the power is turned on. Specifically, the start condition and end condition of the “unlimited” state and the “lucky” state are set and displayed based on the value of the condition memory 213n described later. In the first embodiment, the start condition in the “start” state is set in advance as a jackpot other than the jackpot corresponding to the “unlimited” state or the “lucky” state. Further, the end condition of the “start” state is set in advance as the end of the “time reduction state” in the “start” state. The start condition and end condition in the “start” state are set and displayed without fail when the power is turned on.

  The value information display area 85c is configured to display the state of the card sand device 70 and the state of the member card 300 inserted at the present time. FIG. 9 shows a state in which the membership card 300 is inserted into the card sand device 70. The membership card 300 has a card balance of “5000” yen, and a sharable ball that can be used on other pachinko machines is “ "250" balls, lucky balls that can only be used with the pachinko machine 10 currently in play are "3,500" balls, which cannot be used with any pachinko machine and can only be exchanged for prizes at the amusement hall counter It is shown that the balls are “5,000” balls.

  Further, the state of the card sand device 70 is displayed on the upper part of the value information display area 85c. Specifically, it is shown in the upper left part of the value information display area 85c that the player can insert the banknote into the banknote slot 71 of the card sand device 70 and increase the card balance of the member card 300. “Payable” is displayed. This “payment is permitted” display is configured to display the state of the card sanding device 70. For example, when an abnormality occurs in the card sanding device 70, the display is switched to the “payment impossible” display. It is configured.

  In the display area on the right side of the “Payable” display, as the state of the card sand device 70, the “loan amount (lending unit amount)” when lending a sharable ball from the card balance is “500 yen”, and “1 A lending rate indicating that the ball of “ball” is lent at a lending rate of “4 yen” is displayed. Therefore, when the player operates the ball lending button 74 of the card sand device 70, the cash data for 500 yen is subtracted from the cash corresponding memory 300b, which will be described later, of the membership card 300, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal time described later. The ball counter 213c is configured to add ball data for 125 balls. In addition, when the lending rate is changed in the card sand device 70, the lending rate display is configured to be switched to a display corresponding to the changed content.

  In the display area on the right side of the lending rate display, a card type display indicating that the member card 300 is inserted is displayed. This card type display is configured to display whether a member card 300 is inserted or a guest card is inserted. In the first embodiment, since the membership card 300 is inserted, the display is “membership card”. When the guest card is inserted, “guest card” is displayed. Yes. In the first embodiment, when the player does not insert the membership card 300 or the guest card into the card sand device 70, the card type display is not displayed, and the card type display is displayed. In a state where it is not, it is configured not to be able to play a game.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the player can recognize the conditions for acquiring the lucky period by the lucky number display area 85b of the status display device 85. In this case, the game can be performed without causing unnecessary confusion to the player.

  In addition, the status display device 85 displays the lucky period acquisition conditions and the lucky balls and unusable balls acquired during the lucky period at the same time, so that the game of the lucky number system is uniquely given to the player. Can be recognized.

  Furthermore, since the status display device 85 for displaying the acquisition conditions of the lucky period is arranged in the inner frame 12 (the overhanging portion 16 in the first embodiment), the status display device 85 can be used as it is when the pachinko machine is replaced. Thus, the cost of the entire game board 13 can be reduced as compared with the case where a lucky period notification component is installed on the game board 13 to be replaced.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer, and a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and various data temporarily when executing the control program stored in the ROM 202. In addition, the RAM 203 is a memory for storing, and in addition, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the frame control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. The command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  In the main controller 110, the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 87 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83, and determination of a winning ball in accordance with winning a prize. Perform the main processing. The ROM 202 stores fixed value data used for controlling these processes. For example, a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a jackpot variation pattern table 202c, and a release variation pattern table 202d are stored in the ROM 202. The RAM 203 controls main processes of the pachinko machine 10 (big hit lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 87 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83, etc.). Various counters are provided for this purpose.

  The jackpot lottery and the display settings of the first symbol display device 87 and the third symbol display device 81 include the first hit random number counter C1 (see FIG. 14) used for the jackpot lottery and the first jackpot symbol used for the selection of the jackpot symbol. 1 type counter C2 (see FIG. 14), stop pattern selection counter C3 (see FIG. 14), first initial value random number counter CINI1 (see FIG. 14) used for setting the initial value of the first per random number counter C1 A variation type counter CS1 (see FIG. 19) used for variation pattern selection is used. The second symbol random number counter C4 (see FIG. 14) is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 (see FIG. 14) is used to set the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Reference) is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds “1” to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), or at intervals of 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 19), for example. Furthermore, some counters are updated irregularly even during the main process (see FIG. 19). The updated value of each counter is appropriately stored in a counter buffer 203 a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The counter buffer 203a is an area for storing the updated value of each counter. The MPU 201 uses the value stored in the counter buffer 203a at the counter update timing for each counter. Update the counter.

  The RAM 203 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 203b composed of one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas). The holding area temporarily stores the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 read from the counter buffer 203a in accordance with the timing of entering the start winning opening 4. This is an area for storing (holding) automatically. In addition, the execution area stores a first per-random number counter C1, a first per-type counter C2, and a stop pattern selection counter C3 that are used to determine a variation pattern and stop type of jackpot lottery and variation effects at the start timing of variation. It is an area to do.

  When the MPU 201 detects a ball entering the start winning opening 4 (start win), each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 of the counter buffer 203a at that time is detected. , It is stored in one area of the reserved first to fourth areas. At this time, if there is no reservation in the reserved area and all of the reserved first to fourth areas are empty areas, the value of each counter is stored in the reserved first area. When there is only one hold in the hold area and each counter value is stored only in the hold first area, the value of each counter is stored in the hold second area. When there are two holds in the holding area and the values of the counters are stored only in the holding first and second areas, the values of the counters are stored in the holding third area. When there are three holds in the holding area and the values of the counters are stored only in the holding first to third areas, the values of the counters are stored in the holding fourth area. Thereby, the value of each counter acquired from the counter buffer 203a at the timing of the start winning prize is stored in the hold first area, the hold second area, the hold third area, and the hold fourth area in the order of the start winning prize. Can do. If a start winning is detected when the value of each counter is stored in all of the holding first to fourth areas, the value of each counter at that time is not held but discarded. In other words, in the first embodiment, the value of each counter can be held up to four start winnings.

  Further, when the start timing of the variable effect is reached, the MPU 201 moves the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved first area to the execution area. Based on the value of each counter stored in the execution area, the jackpot lottery, the variation pattern of the variation effect, and the type of stop symbol are determined.

  Further, after the values of the counters in the holding first area are moved to the execution area, the values of the counters stored in the holding second area are shifted to the empty holding first area and stored in the holding third area. Each counter value is shifted to the reserved second area, and the counter value stored in the reserved fourth area is shifted to the reserved third area. Thereby, when the variable display is started based on the value of each counter held in the holding ball storage area 203b, the holding is reduced by one and one area of the holding area is released.

  Each counter will be described in detail. As described above, the first per-random number counter C1 is a counter for use in the jackpot lottery and is updated periodically (once every timer interrupt process in the first embodiment). The update of the first random number counter C1 is performed by incrementing one by one within a predetermined range (for example, “0 to 899”), and in the case of a counter that can take a maximum value (for example, “0 to 899”), 899 ") and then returning to" 0 ". Further, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round (when the initial value is periodically updated from a certain initial value and then returned to the initial value in the next update), the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time Is set as a new initial value in the first random number counter C1, and updating is performed from the initial value.

  As described above, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is used as the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1, and is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first per-random number counter C1. For example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of “0 to 899”, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also configured by a loop counter in the range of “0 to 899”. The The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated not only once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) is executed, but also repeatedly within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 19).

  The value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the counter buffer 203a is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the start winning opening 4. Then, at the start of the fluctuation, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b is a big random number value (big hit random value, also referred to as a win value). Make a lottery. The value of the random number for winning the jackpot (the jackpot random value) is set by the jackpot random number table 202a (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the reserved ball storage area 203b (execution of the reserved ball storage area 203b). When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in (area) matches the jackpot random number set by the jackpot random number table 202a, it is determined that the jackpot is won.

  The jackpot random number table 202a shows the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 (jackpot random number value) determined to be a jackpot. The jackpot random number table 202a includes a jackpot random number value that is referred to when the gaming state is “normal gaming state” and “time reduction state” (that is, a period during which the probability change is not in progress), and the gaming state is “high probability state” (that is, The number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between the “normal gaming state”, the “time reduction state”, and the “high probability state”.

  In the first embodiment, the first random number counter C1 is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of “0 to 899”. In addition, the number of jackpot random numbers that are jackpots in the “normal gaming state” and the “time reduction state” is 3, and the values “7,307,582” are changed to the “normal gaming state” and the “time reduction state”. Correspondingly, it is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. On the other hand, the number of jackpot random numbers that are jackpots in the “high probability state” is 30, and the values “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, "420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892" are associated with the "high probability state" and the jackpot random number table 202a.

  When the MPU 201 makes a jackpot determination, the MPU 201 reads a jackpot random number value suitable for the gaming state at that time from the jackpot random number table 202a. Then, the MPU 201 determines that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 (first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203b) used for the jackpot determination is read from the jackpot random number table 202a. It is determined whether or not it matches one of them.

  In other words, when the gaming state is “normal gaming state” or “time reduction state”, a big hit is obtained when the value of the first random number counter C1 matches any one of “7,307,582”. Since the first random number counter C1 is updated within the range of “0 to 899”, the jackpot probability in the “normal game state” or the “time reduction state” is 1/300. When the gaming state is “high probability state”, the value of the first random number counter C1 is “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 ”is a big hit. Accordingly, the jackpot probability in the “high probability state” is 1/30.

  In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number value read from the jackpot random number table 202a in the “normal gaming state” and the “time reduction state” and the jackpot random number value read from the jackpot random number table 202a in the “high probability state” Each jackpot random value is set so as not to be duplicated. Here, if there is a value that is always used as the jackpot random number value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the value may be input from the outside, and the jackpot may be easily illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in the first embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is “high probability state”, “normal game state” or “time reduction state”), the jackpot By changing the value of the random number, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the value of the random number that will be a big hit, and thus it is possible to suppress fraud.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the big hit type when the big hit is reached, and is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, “0 to 99”) to obtain a maximum value (for example, “0”). In the case of a counter that can take a value of “˜99”, the counter returns to “0” after reaching “99”). The value of the first hit type counter C2, for example, is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the first embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the start winning opening 4 (start winning). Along with the random number counter C1 per 1, it is stored in one of the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that falls outside, in the effect of the variable display The variation pattern and stop symbol type (hereinafter referred to as “stop type”) are those at the time of detachment. On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit, the variation pattern and stop type in the effect of the variable display are those of the big hit It becomes. In this case, the variation pattern and stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined corresponding to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of “0 to 99”. The jackpot type is determined based on the first jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b stored in the ROM 202.

  The jackpot type table 202b is a table in which the jackpot type is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2. As described above, the jackpot type is “15R probability variable jackpot” in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the “high probability state” after 15 rounds of jackpot, and the maximum number of rounds is “ There are “15R normal jackpot” that becomes “time shortening state” and “2R probability variable jackpot” in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to “high probability state” after jackpot of two rounds.

  In the jackpot type table 202b, each jackpot type is associated with a value of a first jackpot type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type. Specifically, the value “0-39” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with “15R probability variation big hit”, and the value “40˜ 79 ”is associated, and the value“ 80 to 99 ”of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with“ 2R probability variation big hit ”.

  When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a big hit value, the big hit type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area is determined from the big hit type table 202b. . For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “20”, “15R probability variable big hit” is determined as the big hit type, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “60”, the big hit type is “ If “15R normal jackpot” is determined and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “90”, “2R probability variation jackpot” is determined as the jackpot type.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, in the case of a jackpot, “15R probability variable jackpot” is selected with a probability of 40%, “15R normal jackpot” is selected with a probability of 40%, and “2R” with a probability of 20%. Probable jackpot is selected. Note that the probability that each jackpot type is selected in the case of a jackpot is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, according to the set probability, the value of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each big hit type is defined in the big hit type table 202b.

  The stop pattern selection counter C3 determines the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as “stop type”) when the stop pattern is lost. For example, the stop pattern selection counter C3 is incremented one by one within the range of “0 to 99”, and the maximum After reaching the value (that is, “99”), it returns to “0”. In the first embodiment, the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop pattern selection counter C3. As the stop type selected in the first embodiment, after the reach display is generated, the final stop symbol is shifted by one by one before and after the reach symbol and stopped, and after the reach display is also generated. There are three stop (production) patterns: “reach other than front / rear out” that stops when the final stop symbol is not before or after the reach symbol, and “complete out” that does not cause reach display.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interrupt process in the first embodiment), and the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the start winning opening 4 (start winning). It is stored in one of the reserved areas among the reserved first to fourth areas provided in the ball storage area 203b. Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that falls outside, in the effect of the variable display The stop type is the one at the time of departure. In this case, the stop type at that time is determined based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area.

  In the first embodiment, the ROM 202 is provided with a plurality of tables (not shown) having different ranges of the random number values selected as the stop type corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C3. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a “high probability state”, a “normal game state”, a “time reduction state”, or the like.

  For example, in the “high probability state”, since the jackpot is likely to occur, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is wide as “0 to 89” so that the reach display effect is not selected more than necessary. The table is selected, and “completely out” is easily selected. In this table, the range of random values corresponding to “rear out of front / rear out” and “reach out of front / rear out of front” and “reach out of front / rear out of front / rear” and “reach out of front / rear out of front / rear” is “98-99”. It is narrow and it becomes difficult to select “rear out of front / rear reach” or “reach out of front / rear out”.

  Further, in the “normal game state” or the “time reduction state”, the random value range corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is “0” in order to secure the time for entering the ball into the start winning opening 4. A narrow table such as “˜79” is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select. In this table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than front / rear out” is as wide as “80 to 97”, and “reach other than front / rear out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the “normal game state” or the “time reduction state”, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so that it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball at the start winning opening 4 and the third symbol display device 81 The variable display is easily performed continuously. In the latter table as well, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to “98, 99”.

  The variation type counter CS1 is a loop counter for use in determining a variation pattern. For example, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 within a range of “0 to 198” and reaches “0” after reaching the maximum value (ie, “198”). It is the composition which returns to. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 19).

  The MPU 201 refers to the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203b and the variation pattern table stored in the ROM 202 at the start of variation, and determines the variation pattern to be executed by variation display. The variation pattern determined here is a variation time of symbol variation.

  That is, main controller 110 determines only the variation time of the symbol variation as the variation pattern. On the other hand, a specific variation mode is set by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 via the frame overall control device 111. That is, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 change in the change time based on the change pattern (change time) determined by the change type counter CS1 of the main control device 110 via the frame overall control device 111. The details of the variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined from the variation modes that can be displayed. Then, according to the determined variation mode, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to variably display the third symbol, and the sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the variation display. At the same time, the lamps of the lamp display device 227 (lighting units 32 to 36) are turned on and blinked.

  As described above, in the main control device 110, only the variation time is determined as the processing for determining the variation pattern, and the details of the variation mode according to the variation time are determined via the frame overall control device 111. 113 and the display control device 114. The MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer and cannot perform complicated processing. However, when determining the variation pattern, the main controller 110 is configured to determine only the variation time. Compared with the case where the main control device 110 determines the details of the variation mode, the variation pattern determination processing of the main control device 110 can be easily performed. Further, when the details of the variation mode are determined by the main control device 110, detailed information on the determined variation mode must be notified to the audio lamp control device 113 and the like, and the command necessary for the notification is, for example, 3 There is a risk that it may have to be composed of bytes or more, and command transmission and reception may be complicated. On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the main controller 110 is configured to determine only the variation time. Therefore, only the information related to the determined variation time is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 and the like. What is necessary is just to simplify the structure of the command concerning the notification. Therefore, it is possible to suppress complication of command transmission / reception. Even if only the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation is determined in the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the fluctuation mode according to the specified fluctuation time from among the many fluctuation modes. However, since it is configured to perform variable display on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in the determined variation mode, it is possible to give a variety of variation display effects to the player, improving the player's interest Can be achieved.

  Now, in the first embodiment, as a variation pattern table used for determining a variation pattern (variation time) according to the value of the variation type counter CS1, a big hit variation pattern table 202c used at the time of a big hit and a variation pattern table 202c used at the time of a loss. A deviation variation pattern table 202d is prepared. Further, as the variation pattern table 202d for detachment, the divergence (probability change) is determined depending on whether the gaming state is “time shortening state” or “high probability state” or “normal gaming state” which is not “time shortening state”. ) A fluctuation pattern table 202d2 and a deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1 are prepared.

  The jackpot variation pattern table 202c is divided into groups based on the jackpot type. Specifically, the jackpot type is divided into 15R jackpot common that is referred to when "15R probability variable jackpot" or "15R normal jackpot", and 2R probability variable jackpot dedicated that is referred to when "2R probability variable jackpot" is used. Has been. Then, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each divided group.

  When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is a big hit random number value at the start of fluctuation, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area is set. Accordingly, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area is determined from the jackpot variation pattern table 202c.

  In common with 15R jackpot, there are a fluctuation A with a fluctuation time of “30 seconds” and a fluctuation B with a fluctuation time of “60 seconds” as fluctuation patterns. Associating the fluctuations A and B with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the fluctuation A is “0 to 39” and the fluctuation B is “40 to 198”.

  When the variation A (30 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern, the display of the variation display is performed in the “normal reach” mode under the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. When the variation B (60 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern, the display of the variation display is performed in the “super reach” mode under the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114.

  “Norreach” is a reach display with a short variation time, and is a variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after the short reach display. In addition, “Super Reach” has the 1st symbol (or 3rd symbol) after the reach display of the fluctuation time longer than “Normal Reach” (for example, “Special Reach” developed from “Long Reach” or “Normal Reach”). It is a fluctuation pattern. Since a table common to 15R jackpots is selected in the case of “15R probability variable jackpot” or “15R normal jackpot”, “super reach” is easily selected in order to give the player a sense of expectation. It has become. However, by configuring so that “normal reach” is also selected, it is possible to provide a game that can expect a big hit from any reach display.

  Note that many “normal reach” and “super reach” executed by the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are prepared with different contents of production even in the same variation time. For example, in addition to a normal reach display in which no character is displayed, when two symbols on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 become the same symbol and reach display, or at other timing, a predetermined character or character A reach display is provided in which information is displayed once or a plurality of times to provide a notice effect. Various characters are displayed in this case. In addition, the reach display that changes the back image quickly, the reach display to which the notice effect before the start of the change is added, the reach display to which the effect that becomes a big hit by re-change is added, etc. A display is provided. Thereby, the production | presentation of a various variable display can be performed and a player's interest can be heightened.

  Next, the variation pattern selected exclusively for the 2R probability variation jackpot is only the 2R variation with a variation time of “31 seconds”, and the correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 198”. That is, when the jackpot type is “2R probability change jackpot”, 2R fluctuation (31 seconds) is determined as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  When 2R variation (31 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern, one mode is selected from among a plurality of prepared variation modes dedicated to 2R probability variation big hits under the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. The variation display effect is performed in the selected mode. As a variation mode dedicated to 2R probability variation jackpot, for example, with the character of “chicken”, the variation pattern in which the final first symbol (or third symbol) stops at a specific symbol, or “girl” that does not normally appear A variation mode in which the final first symbol (or third symbol) stops at a specific symbol along with the character is included.

  The variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be determined using a plurality of other variation type counters. For example, another variation type counter for finely adjusting the variation time in about ± several seconds may be provided, or a notice effect for notifying the start of a jackpot or reach effect is added before the change start or during the effect of the variable display. Or not may be determined by another variation type counter.

  The deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 is determined to be used only when complete deviation is determined as the stop type at the time of deviation, and “rear out of front / rear out reach” and “reach out of front / rear out” are determined. Are classified into groups (groups) based on the reach common to be referred to in the case of being released, and the stop type at the time of departure, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups. . When the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is not a big hit value (big hit random number value) at the start of the change, that is, when the value is out of the game state, When the player is in the “normal game state” that is not “”, it corresponds to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area according to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area. The fluctuation pattern to be determined is determined from the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern.

  For complete deviation only, the variation pattern is “7 seconds”, the variation D is completed in a short time and reach display is not established, and “10 seconds” is the variation time longer than variation D, but reach display is established. The change D (7 seconds) is “0 to 149” and the change E (10 seconds) is “150 to 198” in association with the value of the change type counter CS1. Further, the reach common includes the above-described variation A (30 seconds) and variation B (60 seconds) as the variation pattern, and the association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 indicates that the variation A (30 seconds) is “0”. ˜197 ”and the fluctuation B (60 seconds) is“ 198 ”.

  The deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2 is similar to the variation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1, and is used only for complete separation, which is referred to when the complete stop is determined as the stop type at the time of separation. The stop types are classified into “reach common” that is referred to when “rearward / backward reach” and “reach other than front / rear reach” are determined. Then, for each divided group, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with the variation pattern selected in each group. Note that the variation pattern selected when reference to complete out-going is referred to is variation D (7 seconds) and variation E (10 seconds), similar to the out (normal) variation pattern table 202d1. Also, the variation patterns selected when the reach common is referred to are the variation A (30 seconds) and the variation B (60 seconds), similarly to the out (normal) variation pattern table 202d1.

  When the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is a value that does not become a big hit, that is, a value that is out of the game, when the gaming state is in the “time reduction state” or “high probability state” In accordance with the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area, the change pattern corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the execution area is a deviation (probability change) change pattern. It is determined from the table 202d2.

  In the deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d2, the variation D (7 seconds) is “0 to 190” and the variation E (10 seconds) is “191” in association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 dedicated to complete deviation. ~ 198 ". In addition, associating with the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the common reach, the variation A (30 seconds) is “0 to 197” and the variation B is “198”.

  Since the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d2 is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is in the “time shortening state” or the “high probability state”, the ball is likely to enter the start winning opening 4 Become. Therefore, if there are many fluctuations E with a relatively long fluctuation time in the “time reduction state” or “high probability state”, it takes time to start the next fluctuation display, and the player is put in a waiting state. This can cause discomfort to the player. Moreover, even if it is a hall | hole, an operation rate falls and it is unpreferable. Therefore, when the game state is in the “time reduction state” or the “high probability state” in the case of complete losing, the variation D having a shorter variation time than the variation E than when the gaming state is in the “normal gaming state”. Can be easily selected, and by starting the next variable display at an early stage, it is possible to reduce the possibility of discomfort to the player. Moreover, it can suppress that an operation rate falls extremely.

  The variation pattern at the time of detachment is selected using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be selected using a plurality of variation type counters together (selection of presence / absence of notice display, etc.). In addition, when reach is established at the time of detachment, the number of the first symbol (or the third symbol) that stops last is shifted and stopped (for example, the front and back shifts that are shifted by one symbol). May be determined.

  Further, the selection of the detachment type is configured to be divided into the detachment (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 and the detachment (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2. However, even when the gaming state is normal, there are a plurality of holding balls. In the case of (for example, 3 or more if the maximum is 4), the change display may be terminated early, so that it may be selected with reference to the deviation (probability change) change pattern table 202d2. A variation pattern table for normal use or probability change corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

  Further, in the variation pattern table for each deviation, when the variation D and variation E are simply deviated, and the deviation is selected, the variation D and the variation E are selected with a predetermined probability by referring to other tables. You may comprise so that it may do. Of course, in this case as well, a table corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

  The second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83 as described above. For example, the second random number counter C4 is incremented by “1” in order within the range of “0 to 250”, and the maximum value (that is, “250 ”), And is configured as a loop counter that returns to“ 0 ”. In addition, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round (when the initial value is periodically updated and returned to the initial value in the next update), the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time Is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4. In the first embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is updated every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and it is confirmed that the ball has passed either the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. Obtained when detected. The number of random number values to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. That is, when the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 153”, it is determined that the winning is selected, and the symbol “○” is displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol) on the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed and the start winning opening 4 is opened for a predetermined time. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second per-random number counter C4 (value = “0 to 250”), and is set for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14). It is updated once and updated repeatedly within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 19).

  The held ball number counter 203c sets the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed on the first symbol display device 87 (third symbol display device 81) based on the winning of the ball to the start winning opening 4 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value (RAM initial setting executed after power-on (value set in S1013 in FIG. 12)) is set to “0”, and the reserved ball number counter 203c is set to “0”. Every time the number of held balls for variable display increases after winning (winning), “1” is incremented by “1” (see S1604 in FIG. 18). On the other hand, the value of the held ball number counter 203c is decremented by “1” every time the change display based on the winning at the start winning opening 4 is executed (see S1305 in FIG. 15).

  If there is a winning at the start winning opening 4 and the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c is less than “4”, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-kind counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time Each value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the counter buffer 203a and stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. On the other hand, if the value of the held ball number counter 203c is “4”, it means that four held balls are already held, and the start winning is ignored.

  Further, the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c (that is, the number of held balls) is notified to the frame overall control device 111 by the held ball number command (see S1607 in FIG. 18). The held ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the frame overall control device 111 every time the value of the held ball number counter 203c is incremented by “1” based on winning at the start winning opening 4 It is. When the frame overall control device 111 receives the reserved ball number command from the main control device 110, the frame integrated control device 111 transmits a display reserved ball number command corresponding to the held ball number command to the voice lamp control device 113 which is a downstream control device. (See S2313 in FIG. 25).

  The time reduction counter 203d is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations in the “time reduction state” in the main controller 110 and grasping the end of the “time reduction state”. At this time, the short-time counter 203d has an initial value (RAM initial setting executed after power-on (the value set in S1013 in FIG. 12)) set to “0”, and after the jackpot with the low probability symbol ends. “100” is set, and “1” is subtracted every time a deviation is confirmed and displayed in the third symbol variation display performed thereafter. When the value of the time reduction counter 203d becomes “0”, the gaming state is returned from the “time reduction state” to the “normal gaming state”. In addition, when a big hit with a low probability symbol occurs again during the “time shortening state”, by setting “100” again to the hour / count counter 203d after the big hit, the variable display in which the “time shortening state” is continued. Can be returned to 100 again. In addition, if the jackpot of the high probability symbol (the main symbol with an odd number) is made during the “time reduction state”, the value of the time reduction counter 203d is set to “0”. In this case, the gaming state is a “high probability state”, and the “high probability state” is maintained until the next jackpot is established.

  Every time the value of the short time counter 203d (that is, the remaining short number of times) is updated, a short time subtraction command is output to the frame overall control device 111 (see S1316 in FIG. 15). A value of a frame side time reduction counter 213k, which will be individually managed in 111, will be updated. This time subtraction command is sent from the main controller 110 to the frame overall control device 111 each time the value of the time counter 203d based on the confirmation of the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is decremented by “1”. Is a command sent to When the time reduction control command is received from the main control device 110, the frame overall control device 111 subtracts “1” from the value of the frame side time reduction counter 213k managed by the frame overall control device 111 (S2214 in FIG. 24). The display time short subtraction command corresponding to the time short subtraction command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 which is the downstream control device (see S2215 in FIG. 24).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big hit lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 87 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 10, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes a counter buffer 203a for storing various counters, a holding ball storage area 203b, a holding ball number counter 203c, and a short time counter 203d, as well as the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201. And a work area (work area) in which values such as various flags and counters and I / O are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 19), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 12) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 13) as a process during a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 opens and closes forward with the frame overall control device 111, the first symbol display device 87, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 5a as an axis. A grand prize opening solenoid (not shown) for driving and a solenoid (not shown) for driving an electric accessory are connected, and the MPU 201 uses the input / output port 205 to control various commands and controls. Send a signal.

  The input / output port 205 includes various winning switches such as a general winning switch 44, a starting winning switch 45, and a specific winning switch 46, various switches including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a power supply device 115 described later. The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  For example, when the main controller 110 detects the presence / absence of a ball at the general winning opening 3 based on the detection result of the general winning switch 44, and detects the winning of the ball at the general winning opening 3, the main controller 110 Five prize balls are determined, and a prize ball addition command for notifying that the possessed ball is increased by five is transmitted to the frame overall control device 111. Further, the main control device 110 detects the presence or absence of a ball at the start winning opening 4 based on the start winning switch 45. When the main control device 110 detects the winning of a ball at the start winning opening 4, the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery. Based on the result, the effect of the variable display on the first symbol display device 87 and the third symbol display device 81 is started (started). Also, five prize balls are determined, and a prize ball addition command for notifying that the possessed ball is increased by five is transmitted to the frame overall control device 111. Further, when the main controller 110 detects the presence / absence of a ball at the specific winning opening 5a based on the detection result of the specific winning switch 46, and detects the winning of a ball at the specific winning opening 5a, the main controller 110 A prize ball of 15 balls is determined, and a prize ball addition command for notifying that the number of possessed balls is increased by 15 is transmitted to the frame overall control device 111.

  Details of the frame overall control device 111, the card sand device 70, and the membership card 300 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 32 to 36, display lamp 31, etc.) 227, third symbol display Based on the variation time indicated by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 and received via the frame control device 111, the drive control of the shutter accessory 228 capable of covering the display screen of the device 81 The control is performed such as setting the variation mode of the variation display to be executed in the variation time. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The ROM 222 receives the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 by the frame overall control device 111 and receives various variation patterns (variation) indicated by the display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern command from the frame overall control device 111. 1) or more detailed variation patterns are stored in association with each other. For example, for a variation A with a variation time of “30 seconds”, a normal “normal reach” in which no character is displayed during the variation time of “30 seconds” and a “normal reach” in which a predetermined character is displayed during the variation. Are associated with each other. In addition, with respect to the fluctuation B with the fluctuation time of “60 seconds”, a plurality of “supermarkets” in which a predetermined character is displayed during the fluctuation time of “60 seconds”, or the rear image is changed and displayed quickly “Reach” is associated. The “super reach” includes a variation pattern in which a notice effect is performed more during the effect of one variation display than in the case of “normal reach”.

  Upon receiving the display variation pattern command from the frame overall control device 111, the MPU 221 selects 1 or more detailed variation patterns associated with the variation pattern (variation time) indicated by the display variation pattern command from the one or more detailed variation patterns. Determine one detailed variation pattern. For example, when the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is variation A (variation time 30 seconds), the normal character “normal reach” in which no character is displayed during the variation time “30 seconds” and the predetermined character varies. One detailed variation pattern is determined from “normal reach” displayed in the middle. Then, lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to a predetermined pattern with respect to the determined detailed variation pattern, and sound output from the sound output device 226 is controlled.

  Further, when the MPU 221 determines a detailed variation pattern, the MPU 221 generates a display variation pattern command for the third symbol that notifies the display controller 114 of the determined detailed variation pattern type, and generates the generated first variation pattern. A display variation pattern command for 3 symbols is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 executes control for displaying a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a predetermined pattern with respect to the detailed variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command for the third symbol. For example, the MPU 221 sends a display variation pattern command for the third symbol indicating the normal “normal reach” in which no character is displayed during the variation time of “30 seconds” to the display control device 114 as the detailed variation pattern type. In the case of transmission, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the effect of variable display in the normal “normal reach” mode in which the character is not displayed for “30 seconds”.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the frame overall control device 111, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the shutter accessory 228, and the like.

  As described above, the shutter accessory 228 is driven and controlled during the “start” state, which is one of the lucky periods, and is configured to indicate the progress of the “start” state. Details of the driving mode of the shutter accessory 228 will be described later.

  The voice lamp control device 113 of the first embodiment relates to a command related to the variation pattern of the variation display of the third symbol and the stop result of the third symbol in the variation display via the frame overall control device 111 from the main control device 110. The command is received, and the variation pattern of the variation display and the stop result of the third symbol are determined based on the received command. The sound lamp control device 113 is configured to transmit the contents of the jackpot symbol of the variation display to the frame overall control device 111 when the variation display is a jackpot. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, since any lucky period can be granted based on the jackpot symbol in the variation display of the third symbol, a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a jackpot, and the lucky period The lottery for determining whether or not to grant the control information is executed by a different control device, and the control burden for each control device can be distributed to reduce the processing burden of each control device.

  The display control device 114 is a device that controls the screen display of the third symbol display device (LCD) 81, and the voice lamp control device 113 displays various screen displays such as a variation display (variation effect) and a jackpot effect of the third symbol. Control is performed in accordance with a command transmitted from the (main control device 110 and the frame overall control device 111).

  The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a ROM (program ROM) 232, a work RAM 233, a video RAM 234, a character ROM 235, an image controller 236, an input port 237, an output port 238, and bus lines 239 and 240. have. The input side of the input port 237 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 237 is connected to the MPU 231, ROM 232, work RAM 233, and image controller 236. A video RAM 234 and a character ROM 235 are connected to the image controller 236, and an output port 238 is connected via a bus line 240. A third symbol display device 81 and a status display device 85 are connected to the output side of the output port 238. Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different winning probability for winning the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot, there is a model having the same specifications as the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common part to reduce the cost.

  The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command for the third symbol output from the sound lamp control device 113 and other various commands. Further, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 controls the display contents of the status display device 85 based on the possessed ball command for the status display device 85, the condition command, and various remaining number commands output from the sound lamp control device 113. . The ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various programs. The character ROM 235 is a memory that stores data (character information) for effects such as symbols (background symbols and third symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a compressed form. The video RAM 234 stores an area (not shown) in which a plurality of character information read from the character ROM 235 is decompressed in order to generate an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the decompressed plural This is a memory having a frame buffer area (not shown) for temporarily storing display data for one frame generated using at least a part of the character information until the display is performed.

  The image controller 236 adjusts the timings of the MPU 231, the video RAM 234, and the output port 238 to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads display data stored in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 234 at a predetermined timing to read the third data. It is displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  In the first embodiment, the character ROM, video RAM, image controller and the like related to the display control of the status display device 85 are not particularly shown, but the display control of the status display device 85 is for the third symbol display device 81. The display contents of the status display device 85 may be controlled using the character ROM 235 or the like, or the character ROM or the like for the status display device 85 may be provided separately from the character ROM 235 or the like for the third symbol display device 81. Another set may be arranged so that the display content of the status display device 85 is controlled.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 5). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches, solenoids, motors, etc. 12 volts, logic 5 volts, RAM A backup voltage or the like for backup is generated, and a necessary voltage is supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like using the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the frame overall control device 111 when the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the frame overall controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the frame overall control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the frame overall control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 13).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 5) is pressed. The main control device 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is inputted when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and the frame control unit 111 clears an initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the control device 111.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the details of the frame overall control device 111 and the launch control device 112 that constitute the pachinko machine 10 will be described. The electrical configuration of the membership card 300 inserted into the card sand device 70 will be described. FIG. 11 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the frame overall control device 111, the firing control device 112, the card sand device 70, and the membership card 300.

  The frame overall control device 111 is provided in place of the conventional payout control device of the pachinko machine 10. The frame overall control device 111 mainly performs the following four functions. First, the frame overall control device 111 counts the number of possessed balls, which is the number of balls that the player can use for the game, and possesses it in the status display device 85 via the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Display the number of balls. Secondly, the frame overall control device 111 counts the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 in order to circulate the balls in the pachinko machine 10 and use them in the game as the number of circulating balls. The frame overall control device 111 confirms whether or not there is any change in the number of spheres circulating in the pachinko machine 10 based on the number of circulating spheres. Thirdly, the frame overall control device 111 allows the launch control device 112 to permit or stop the launch of the sphere. Fourth, the frame overall control device 111 records the ball data owned by the player on the member card 300 inserted in the card sand device 70 or reads the ball data recorded on the member card 300. The pachinko machine 10 is controlled so that it can be used. Hereinafter, the above functions will be specifically described while explaining the detailed configuration of the frame overall control device 111.

  The frame overall control device 111 is mainly composed of an MPU 211 that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 211 has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like. doing.

  In addition, an input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the frame overall control device 111 via a bus line 214 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the firing control device 112, the sound lamp control device 113, and the card sand device 70, and various ball detection switches such as a foul ball detection switch 93 and a launch ball detection switch 94. And unlimited movable combination 95, lucky movable combination 96, start movable combination 97, solenoid of electronic lock 99 (not shown), external terminal plate 216 capable of outputting an external signal to hall computer 263, etc. Are mainly connected to each other.

  The ROM 212 of the MPU 211 is mainly provided with a condition table 212a and the like. The condition table 212a is a table that stores start conditions and end conditions according to the type of lucky period. Specifically, in the condition table 212a, the start condition for the “unlimited” state is stored as a case where a big hit with “7 symbols (dugong)” occurs in the “first time”, and the end condition for the “unlimited” state Is remembered as none. In addition, as a start condition for the “lucky” state, it is stored that a big hit with “3 symbols (turtle)” or “5 symbols (shrimp)” occurs in the “first time”, and as an end condition for the “lucky” state. In the “first time”, a case where a big hit with “4 symbols (shark)” occurs is stored. In the first embodiment, the start condition and the end condition in the “start” state are not stored in the condition table 212a. In the first embodiment, if a big hit other than “7 symbol (Dugon)”, “3 symbol (turtle)” or “5 symbol (shrimp)” occurs in the “first time”, the “start” state starts without omission. It is configured to be. In addition, when the “time reduction state” is completed, if it is in the “start” state, the “start” state is completed without exception. The start condition and the end condition in the “start” state may be stored in the condition table 212a.

  The data in the condition table 212a is determined when the stored contents of the RAM 213 are destroyed when the power is turned on (S2005: No in FIG. 22), or when the RAM erase switch circuit 253 is pressed. Sometimes read after initialization of the RAM 213 (S2008 in FIG. 22 or S2203 in FIG. 24) executed when an initialization command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (S2201: Yes in FIG. 24). The read condition table 212a is set in an unlimited condition memory 213m and a lucky condition memory 213n, which will be described later.

  In the RAM 213 of the MPU 211, a prize ball addition flag 213a, a prize ball buffer 213b, a normal time ball counter 213c, a lucky middle ball counter 213d, an unusable area 213e, an open extension flag 213f, a jackpot result memory 213g, an unlimited flag 213h, a lucky flag 213i, a start flag 213j, a frame side hour / times counter 213k, an unlimited condition memory 213m, a lucky condition memory 213n, and the like are mainly provided.

  The prize ball addition flag 213a is a flag indicating that a prize ball addition command has been received from the main controller 110 when the prize ball is on. The MPU 211 determines whether or not a prize ball addition command has been received from the main controller 110 depending on whether or not the prize ball addition flag 213a is on. When the prize ball addition flag 213a is on, The prize ball number information shown is temporarily stored in the prize ball buffer 213b in order to be added to either a normal time ball counter 213c or a lucky middle ball counter 213d described later.

  The prize ball addition flag 213a is determined when the stored contents of the RAM 213 are destroyed when the power is turned on (S2005: No in FIG. 22) or when the RAM erase switch circuit 253 is pressed. In the initial setting of the RAM 213 (S2008 in FIG. 22 or S2203 in FIG. 24), which is executed when the initialization command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (S2201: Yes in FIG. 24), the initial value As off. Then, in the main command determination process (FIG. 24) executed every 1 millisecond, when a reception of a prize ball addition command is detected from the main controller 110 (S2206: Yes in FIG. 24), a prize ball addition is performed. The flag 213a is set to ON, and the winning ball number information indicated by the winning ball addition command is extracted and stored in the winning ball buffer 213b of the RAM 213.

  Then, in the rental ball prize ball counting process (FIG. 28), when the prize ball addition flag 213a is turned on, the MPU 211 determines that a prize ball addition command has been received from the main controller 110, and the prize ball addition is performed. Either the normal time ball counter 213c or the lucky central ball counter 213d is set according to whether or not the winning ball number information stored in the winning ball buffer 213b, which will be described later in the main command determination process, is set during the lucky period. Add to. Thereby, the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball addition command received by the main controller 110 can be added to the number of possessed balls that the player can use for the game, and the prize balls can be used as possession balls. .

  The prize ball buffer 213b temporarily stores the prize ball number information in order to add the prize ball number information indicated by the prize ball addition command to either a normal time ball counter 213c or a lucky middle ball counter 213d described later. It is a buffer to keep. The prize ball buffer 213b is provided with a plurality of storage areas so that a plurality of prize ball number information can be stored. Every time a prize ball addition command is received, the received prize ball number information Is configured to write to a storage area that is not stored. Further, the prize ball buffer 213b adds the value stored in each storage area of the prize ball buffer 213b to either the normal time ball counter 213c or the lucky center ball counter 213d, “0” is cleared for each value (see S2609 in FIG. 28).

  The normal time ball counter 213c is a counter that counts the number of possessed balls related to a sharable ball that the player can use in any pachinko machine. The normal time ball counter 213c determines that the stored contents of the RAM 213 are destroyed when the power is turned on (S2005: No in FIG. 22), or when the RAM erase switch circuit 253 is pressed. In the initial setting of the RAM 213 (S2008 in FIG. 22 or S2203 in FIG. 24), which is executed when the initialization command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (S2201: Yes in FIG. 24), the initial value “0” is set. That is, in this case, 0 is set as the number of possessed balls regarding the shareable ball.

  Then, the normal time counter 213c is updated by the rental ball winning ball counting process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 211 every 1 millisecond, and the player operates the ball lending button 74 during the game. Or when it is determined that the player has won a prize ball during the “normal game state” outside the lucky period (ie, not in the “unlimited” state, “lucky” state or “start” state) In addition, the number of rented balls and the number of winning balls are added to the normal time ball counter 213c. Specifically, the MPU 211 receives a ball lending signal from the card sand device 70 (a signal for notifying the frame overall control device 111 of the number of balls lent determined in the card sand device 70 by operating the ball lending button 74). ) Is received, the number of lent balls included in the lent signal is added to the normal time ball counter 213c (see S2602 in FIG. 28).

  For example, in the situation where the lending amount unit is set to 500 yen and the lending rate is set to 4 yen per ball in the card sand device 70, if the ball lending button 74 is operated by the player, 125 The ball data is added to the normal time ball counter 213c of the pachinko machine 10, and the amount data of 500 yen is subtracted from the cash corresponding memory 300b of the membership card 300 described later. Also, if the player operates the ball lending button 74 in a situation where the lending amount unit is set to 500 yen and the lending rate is set to 2 yen per ball, 250 ball data is stored in the pachinko machine. It is added to the ten normal time ball counter 213c, and the amount data of 500 yen is subtracted from the cash corresponding memory 300b of the membership card 300 described later. Further, when the player operates the ball lending button 74 in a situation where the lending amount unit is set to 500 yen and the lending rate is set to 1 yen per ball, the ball data of 500 balls is stored in the pachinko machine. It is added to the ten normal time ball counter 213c, and the amount data of 500 yen is subtracted from the cash corresponding memory 300b of the membership card 300 described later.

  Also, for example, in the situation where the lending amount unit is set to 100 yen and the lending rate is set to 4 yen per ball in the card sand device 70, when the player operates the ball lending button 74 The ball data of 25 balls is added to the normal time ball counter 213c of the pachinko machine 10, and the amount data of 100 yen is subtracted from the cash corresponding memory 300b of the membership card 300 described later. In addition, in a situation where the lending amount unit is set at 100 yen and the lending rate is set at 2 yen per ball, when the ball lending button 74 is operated by the player, the 50 ball data is stored in the pachinko machine. The amount data for 100 yen is subtracted from a cash corresponding memory 300b of a membership card 300 described later. Further, when the player operates the ball lending button 74 in a situation where the lending amount unit is set to 100 yen and the lending rate is set to 1 yen per ball, 100 ball data is stored in the pachinko machine. The amount data for 100 yen is subtracted from a cash corresponding memory 300b of a membership card 300 described later.

  Further, the normal time ball counter 213c is configured to add a prize ball generated during a time other than during the lucky period. Specifically, when the MPU 211 receives a prize ball addition command from the main controller 110 outside the lucky period, the MPU 211 determines that a prize ball outside the lucky period is to be performed, and the prize ball indicated by the prize ball addition command is displayed. The prize ball number information stored in the buffer 213b is added to the normal time ball counter 213c (see S2308 in FIG. 28).

  Further, the normal time ball counter 213c is decremented by “1” when it is determined that a ball is launched toward the game area of the game board 13 outside the lucky period. When the MPU 211 detects that the launch ball detection switch 94 provided on the upper side of the launch position of the ball of the launch rail 63 is turned on outside the lucky period, the MPU 211 has launched the ball toward the game area of the game board 13. The normal time ball counter 213c is decremented by “1” (see S2705 in FIG. 29).

  In addition, “1” is subtracted from the value of the normal hour ball counter 213c based on the detection of the launch ball detection switch 94 outside the lucky period, but a lucky central ball counter 213d described later even during the lucky period. Value of “0” and the player may lose the lucky ball (for example, in the “lucky” state, after the big hit and after the “time reduction state”, the variable display If you don't get the next jackpot even after 1000 times.) In such a case, since the ball is fired based on the value of the normal time ball counter 213c in spite of the lucky period, “1” is calculated from the value of the normal time ball counter 213c even during the lucky period. Is subtracted (see S2705 in FIG. 29).

  Further, the normal time ball counter 213c is incremented by “1” when a ball launched outside the lucky period becomes a foul ball without reaching the game area of the game board 13. When the MPU 211 detects that the foul ball detection switch 93 is turned on outside the lucky period, the MPU 211 determines that the shot ball has not reached the game area of the game board 13 and has become a foul ball, and the value of the normal time ball counter 213c Is added by “1” (see S2709 in FIG. 29). Thus, by updating the normal time ball counter 213c, it is possible to count the number of possessed balls that the player can use for the game outside the lucky period.

  When the return button 75 provided on the card sand device 70 is pressed and the frame control device 111 receives a return signal transmitted from the card sand device 70 to the frame control device 111, the MPU 211 In order to notify the card sand device 70 of possessed ball data regarding the sharable balls at the time, the value of the normal time ball counter 213c is notified to the card sand device 70 (see S2804 in FIG. 30). Then, the value of the normal time counter 213c is initialized to “0” (see S2805 in FIG. 30). In the card sand device 70, the possessed ball data relating to the sharable balls received from the frame overall control device 111 is converted into points at a predetermined exchange rate, and the converted points are cumulatively added to a normal time memory 300c described later of the member card 300. (Refer to S4012 in FIG. 35).

  Further, when the membership card 300 is inserted into the card sand device 70, the MPU 211 of the frame overall control device 111 is recorded in the normal time memory 300c of the membership card 300 converted by the card sand device 70 at a predetermined exchange rate. The possessed ball data relating to the shareable ball is received from the card sand device 70, and the received possessed ball data relating to the shareable ball is added to the normal time ball counter 213c.

  The lucky central ball counter 213d is a counter that counts the number of possessed balls related to the lucky ball that the player can use for the game only during the lucky period. When the lucky sphere counter 213d determines that the stored contents of the RAM 213 are destroyed when the power is turned on (S2005: No in FIG. 22), or when the RAM erase switch circuit 253 is pressed. In the initial setting of the RAM 213 (S2008 in FIG. 22 or S2203 in FIG. 24), which is executed when the initialization command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (S2201: Yes in FIG. 24), the initial value “0” is set. That is, in this case, 0 is set as the number of possessed balls related to the lucky ball.

  The lucky central ball counter 213d is updated by the rental ball winning ball counting process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 211 every 1 millisecond, and during the lucky period (that is, “unlimited” state, “lucky” When it is determined that a player has won a prize ball in either the “start” state or the “start” state), the number of prize balls is added to the lucky central ball counter 213d. Specifically, when the MPU 211 receives a prize ball addition command from the main controller 110 during the lucky period, the MPU 211 determines that the prize ball during the lucky period is to be performed, and the prize ball indicated by the prize ball addition command is displayed. The award ball number information stored in the buffer 213b is added to the lucky central ball counter 213d (see S2607 in FIG. 28).

  Further, the lucky central ball counter 213d determines that the value of the lucky central ball counter 213d is greater than “0” when it is determined that a ball has been launched toward the game area of the game board 13 during the lucky period. 1 "is subtracted. When the MPU 211 detects that the launch ball detection switch 94 provided on the upper side of the launch position of the ball of the launch rail 63 is turned on during the lucky period, the MPU 211 has launched the ball toward the game area of the game board 13. Judgment is made and “1” is subtracted from the lucky central ball counter 213d (see S2704 in FIG. 29).

  Further, the lucky middle ball counter 213d is incremented by “1” when the ball fired during the lucky period does not reach the game area of the game board 13 and becomes a foul ball. When the MPU 211 detects that the foul ball detection switch 93 is turned on during the “normal game state” that is not the lucky period, the MPU 211 determines that the shot ball has not reached the game area of the game board 13 and has become a foul ball. Then, “1” is added to the value of the normal time ball counter 213c (see S2708 in FIG. 29).

  Note that the value of the lucky central ball counter 213d is added to the value of the lucky central ball counter 213d based on the detection of the foul ball detection switch 93 during the lucky period, but the value of the lucky central ball counter 213d is also during the lucky period. May become “0” and the player may lose the lucky ball (for example, in the “lucky” state, after the jackpot and after the “time reduction state” end, If you do n’t win the next jackpot even if you ’re going to). In such a case, the ball is fired based on the value of the normal time ball counter 213c in spite of the lucky period, but even if a foul ball is detected in this situation, the lucky middle ball counter 213d "1" is added to the value of (see S2708 in FIG. 29). During the lucky period, if the lucky ball counter 213d has no possession ball data related to the lucky ball and is playing with possession ball data related to the sharable ball of the normal time ball counter 213c, even if it is a foul ball, Even if “1” is added to the value of the central ball counter 213d, the ball data of the lucky central ball counter 213d is used preferentially. That is, since the possession ball data regarding the launch ball that has become the foul ball can be immediately used, whether the launch ball that has become the foul ball is based on the normal time ball counter 213c or based on the lucky middle ball counter 213d There is little need to determine the attribute. Therefore, when the foul ball is detected, it is not necessary to control whether the value is based on the value of the normal time ball counter 213c or the value of the lucky central ball counter 213d. The control burden of 111 can be reduced.

  When the return button 75 provided on the card sand device 70 is pressed and the frame control device 111 receives a return signal transmitted from the card sand device 70 to the frame control device 111, the MPU 211 In order to notify the card sand device 70 of the possessed ball data related to the lucky ball as the possessed ball data of the game unusable ball, the value of the lucky central ball counter 213d is notified to the card sand device 70 (FIG. 30). S2807). Then, the value of the lucky central ball counter 213d is initialized to “0” (see S2808 in FIG. 30). In the card sand device 70, the possessed ball data relating to the lucky ball received from the frame overall control device 111 is converted into points at a predetermined exchange rate, and the converted points are cumulatively added to a later-described game unusable memory 300d of the member card 300. (Refer to S4013 in FIG. 35).

  When the lucky period ends, the unusable area 213e converts the possession ball data related to the lucky ball acquired during the lucky period stored in the lucky central ball counter 213d as possession ball data relating to the game unusable ball, This is a storage area that is stored so as not to be used in subsequent games. In the unusable area 213e, when it is determined that the stored contents of the RAM 213 are destroyed when the power is turned on (S2005: No in FIG. 22), or when the RAM erase switch circuit 253 is pressed. As an initial value in the initial setting of the RAM 213 (S2008 in FIG. 22 or S2203 in FIG. 24) executed when an initialization command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (S2201: Yes in FIG. 24). “0” is set. That is, in this case, 0 is set as the number of possessed balls regarding the game unusable balls.

  The unusable area 213e is stored in the lucky central ball counter 213d at that time when it is determined that the lucky period has ended (in the first embodiment, when the “start” end condition is achieved). The possessed ball data relating to the lucky ball being stored is stored as possessed ball data relating to the game unusable ball in the unusable area 213e (see FIG. 24). More specifically, when the MPU 211 receives a time reduction subtraction command from the main controller 110 and subtracts “1” from the value of a frame side time reduction counter 213k described later, the value of the frame side time reduction counter 213k is “ When it is determined that the value is “0” or less, possessed ball data relating to the lucky ball stored in the lucky central ball counter 213d at that time is added to the unusable area 213e as a game unusable ball (see S2221 in FIG. 24). ). In the first embodiment, when the lucky period ends under conditions other than the operation of the return button 75, the specification is always ended via the “start” state. That is, the “lucky” state is a specification that always shifts to the “start” state after the end of the “lucky” state, and the “unlimited” state is a specification that does not end.

  In the first embodiment, the possession ball data relating to the game unusable balls stored in the unusable area 213e is configured so that a ball cannot be fired based on the value, and the game is stored in the unusable area 213e. Even if possessed ball data relating to the unusable ball exists, if there is no possessed ball data relating to the sharable ball or lucky ball in the normal time ball counter 213c or the lucky middle ball counter 213d, the ball may be fired. It is configured so that it cannot be performed (see S2710 to S2713 in FIG. 29).

  When the return button 75 provided on the card sand device 70 is pressed and the frame control device 111 receives a return signal transmitted from the card sand device 70 to the frame control device 111, the MPU 211 uses If the possessed ball data of the game unusable ball is in the unusable area 213e, the value of the unusable area 213e is notified to the card sand device 70 in order to notify the possessed ball data regarding the game unusable ball at that time to the card sand device 70. 70 (see S2810 in FIG. 30). Then, the value of the unusable area 213e is initialized to “0” (see S2811 in FIG. 30). In the card sand device 70, the possessed ball data regarding the game unusable balls received from the frame overall control device 111 is converted into points at a predetermined exchange rate, and the converted points are stored in a game unusable memory 300d described later of the member card 300. Cumulative addition is performed (see S4014 in FIG. 35).

  With the configuration as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the possession ball data related to the sharable balls of the normal time ball counter 213c held by the player before the lucky period, and the game during the lucky period The possessed ball data related to the lucky ball of the lucky central ball counter 213d acquired by the user is identified and stored (accumulated). After the lucky period, only the possessed ball data related to the lucky ball stored in the lucky central ball counter 213d is stored. To the unusable area 213e so that it cannot be used for a game, while the possession ball data relating to the shareable ball of the normal time ball counter 213c at that time can be continuously played.

  In conventional pachinko machines, rented balls and prize balls acquired based on the game are stored in the upper plate without distinction. For example, when the lucky number system is adopted, it is held before the lucky period. It was impossible to determine afterwards whether it was a ball that was playing or a ball that was acquired during the lucky period. Even in a circular pachinko machine following this configuration, if the lucky balls acquired during the lucky period and the sharable balls held before the lucky period are counted (accumulated), after the lucky period ends, Since not only the lucky balls acquired during the lucky period but also the sharable balls will be disabled together, the sharable balls that can be used in subsequent games and other platforms will be disabled. The game value that the person originally obtained was damaged. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the sharable balls possessed by the player before the lucky period and the lucky balls acquired by the player during the lucky period are respectively identified and stored. After the lucky period, only the lucky balls are made unusable balls, and the sharable balls can be used in subsequent games. Since the game can be started immediately, it is possible to continue the game without exchanging the unusable game one by one.

  The release extension flag 213f is a flag for determining whether or not the “high probability state” or “time reduction state” after the end of the jackpot, and by checking whether the release extension flag 213f is on or off, “ It is possible to determine whether the jackpot in the “high probability state” or the “time reduction state”, the so-called “rensou state”, or the jackpot in the “normal gaming state”, the so-called “first time”.

  In the first embodiment, the game specification of the lucky number system is “unlimited” according to the type of jackpot symbol drawn during the “normal game state” which is neither “high probability state” nor “time reduction state”. State, “lucky” state, or “start” state is given a lucky period, and the “lucky” state lucky period is neither a “high probability state” nor a “time reduction state”. The “Lucky” state is set to end when a jackpot of “4 symbols (shark)” is drawn during the “normal game state”. In other words, the lucky number system of the first embodiment is the jackpot symbol drawn in the “first game” in the “normal game state”, not in the “high probability state” or “time saving state”. It is a game specification that starts or ends the lucky period depending on the type. In order to realize such a game specification, it is possible to determine whether the state is in the “ream” state or “first time” by determining whether the release extension flag 213f is on or off.

  The release extension flag 213f is used when it is determined that the stored contents of the RAM 213 are destroyed when the power is turned on (S2005: No in FIG. 22), or when the RAM erase switch circuit 253 is pressed. In the initial setting of the RAM 213 (S2008 in FIG. 22 or S2203 in FIG. 24), which is executed when the initialization command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (S2201: Yes in FIG. 24), the initial value As off. That is, in this case, it is set not as being in the “ream” state but in the “normal game state”.

  The release extension flag 213f is turned on when any jackpot state occurs, and it is determined that the jackpot state has ended and the “high probability state” or “time reduction state” is started. Specifically, when the MPU 211 receives an ending command indicating the end of the jackpot state from the main controller 110, the MPU 211 determines that the subsequent gaming state transitions to the “high probability state” or the “time reduction state”, and is released. The extension flag 213f is set to ON (see S2417 in FIG. 26).

  On the other hand, the release extension flag 213f is turned off during the big hit state when any of the big hit states occurs. Specifically, when the MPU 211 receives a fanfare command indicating the start of the jackpot state from the main controller 110, the MPU 211 determines that the jackpot state is started and sets the release extension flag 213f to OFF (FIG. 26). (See S2404).

  The release extension flag 213f is set to OFF when the “time reduction state” ends. Specifically, the MPU 211 sets the “time reduction state” when the value of a frame side time reduction counter 213k, which will be subtracted every time a time reduction subtraction command is received from the main controller 110, becomes “0”. It is determined that the process is to end, and the release extension flag 213f is set to OFF (see S2217 in FIG. 24).

  In this way, by setting the release extension flag 213f to ON only during the “high probability state” or “time reduction state” and determining the contents of the release extension flag 213f when the jackpot state occurs, It is possible to determine whether it is a “big hit” or “first time” big hit, and it is possible to determine whether or not to set a flag related to the lucky period.

  The jackpot result memory 213g is a storage area for storing the contents of the jackpot symbol that has caused the occurrence of the jackpot state in the variation display of the third symbol. The jackpot result memory 213g is configured so that numerical values “0” to “9” can be written, and the numerical value written in the jackpot result memory 213g indicates the jackpot symbol information. Specifically, in the value of the jackpot result memory 213g, “0” indicates that there is no jackpot history, “1” is “1 symbol (octopus)”, “2” is “2 symbol (harisenbon)”, “3” is “3 design (turtle)”, “4” is “4 design (shark)”, “5” is “5 design (shrimp)”, “6” is “6 design (fish)”, “7 "7" (Dugong) "," 8 "is" 8 "(angelfish)," 9 "is" 9 "(crab), and is set to indicate that a big hit state has occurred . In the first embodiment, the type of jackpot symbol stored in the jackpot result memory 213g at the start of the jackpot is determined, and the type of lucky period is determined according to the determination result.

  In the jackpot result memory 213g, when it is determined that the stored contents of the RAM 213 are destroyed when the power is turned on (S2005: No in FIG. 22), or when the RAM erase switch circuit 253 is pressed. In the initial setting of the RAM 213 (S2008 in FIG. 22 or S2203 in FIG. 24), which is executed when the initialization command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (S2201: Yes in FIG. 24), the initial value “0” is set. That is, in this case, a value indicating that there is no big hit history is set.

  The jackpot result memory 213g is configured such that, when a jackpot symbol command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, jackpot symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol command is written (see S2502 in FIG. 27). .

  In the first embodiment, when a jackpot state occurs, the MPU 211 of the frame overall control device 111 receives the contents of the jackpot symbol determined by the sound lamp control device 113 as a jackpot symbol command and writes it to the jackpot result memory 213g. When receiving a fanfare command indicating that a jackpot state has occurred from the main control device 110, if it is a “first time” jackpot, the value of the jackpot result memory 213g is confirmed and any lucky period is given. It is configured as follows.

  The unrestricted flag 213h is a flag for indicating an “unrestricted” state, which is one of the lucky periods, when turned on. While the unrestricted flag 213h is set to ON, the lucky period continues, and the player can continue the game based on possessed ball data relating to the lucky ball stored in the lucky central ball counter 213d.

  The unrestricted flag 213h is used when it is determined that the stored contents of the RAM 213 are destroyed when the power is turned on (S2005: No in FIG. 22), or when the RAM erase switch circuit 253 is pressed. As an initial value in the initial setting of the RAM 213 (S2008 in FIG. 22 or S2203 in FIG. 24) executed when an initialization command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (S2201: Yes in FIG. 24). Off is set. That is, in this case, it is set as a gaming state that is not an “unlimited” state. In the first embodiment, the unlimited flag 213h is set to be turned off even when the return button 75 is operated by the player.

  The unrestricted flag 213h is used when it is determined that the start condition of the “unlimited” state stored in the unrestricted condition memory 213m, which will be described later, that is, the big hit state of “7 symbols (Dugong)” occurs in the “first time”. Turned on. Specifically, when the MPU 211 receives a fanfare command indicating the start of the jackpot state from the main controller 110, the jackpot result is obtained only when the open extension flag 213f indicating whether or not the “first time” jackpot is off. The value of the memory 213g is discriminated, and when the value of the jackpot result memory 213g is “7”, that is, the jackpot of “7 symbols (Dugong)”, the unrestricted flag 213h is set to ON (FIG. 26). (See S2401 to S2407).

  In the first embodiment, since the end condition is not set in the “unlimited” state, once the unrestricted flag 213h is set to on, the unrestricted flag 213h is kept on in subsequent games. . That is, in the “normal game state”, when the jackpot of “7 symbols (Dugong)” is drawn, the lucky period in the “unlimited” state continues in the subsequent game.

  While the unrestricted flag 213h is set to ON, an unrestricted movable accessory 95, which will be described later, stored in the upper part of the door frame 14 of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed (see S2408 in FIG. 26). In addition, it is possible to suggest that the game staff is in an “unlimited” state.

  Further, the unlimited flag 213h is configured not to change even if a jackpot state occurs in the jackpot symbol corresponding to the “lucky” state or the “start” state in the “normal game state” in the “unlimited” state. Yes. Since the “unlimited” state is a lucky period in which the player has a higher gaming value than the “lucky” state and the “start” state, the “unlimited” state without an end condition becomes a “lucky” state or a “start” state. It is configured not to go down (do not end).

  In the first embodiment, the unrestricted flag 213h, the lucky flag 213i and the start flag 213j, which will be described later, are configured to be turned on at the same time. , Unlimited flag 213h> lucky flag 213i> start flag 213j) is preferentially reflected in the lucky period. For example, when the unlimited flag 213h and the lucky flag 213i are respectively set to ON, the lucky period in the “unlimited” state is set. Further, when the lucky flag 213i and the start flag 213j are respectively set to ON, the lucky period in the “lucky” state is set.

  The lucky flag 213i is a flag for indicating a “lucky” state, which is one of the lucky periods, when the lucky flag 213i is on. While the lucky flag 213i is set to ON, the lucky period continues, and the player can continue the game based on possession ball data relating to the lucky ball stored in the lucky central ball counter 213d.

  The lucky flag 213i is used when it is determined that the stored contents of the RAM 213 are destroyed when the power is turned on (S2005: No in FIG. 22), or when the RAM erase switch circuit 253 is pressed. As an initial value in the initial setting of the RAM 213 (S2008 in FIG. 22 or S2203 in FIG. 24) executed when an initialization command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (S2201: Yes in FIG. 24). Off is set. That is, in this case, it is set as a gaming state that is not a “lucky” state. In the first embodiment, the lucky flag 213i is set to be turned off even when the return button 75 is operated by the player.

  The lucky flag 213i is a start condition of a “lucky” state stored in a lucky condition memory 213n described later, that is, a big hit state of “3 symbols (turtle)” or “5 symbols (shrimp)” in “first time”. It is turned on when it is determined that has occurred. Specifically, when the MPU 211 receives a fanfare command from the main controller 110, the MPU 211 determines the value of the jackpot result memory 213g only when the release extension flag 213f is turned off, and the value of the jackpot result memory 213g is If it is a big hit with “3” or “5”, that is, “3 symbol (turtle)” or “5 symbol (shrimp)”, this lucky flag 213i is set to ON (see S2409 in FIG. 26). .

  On the other hand, the lucky flag 213i is turned off when it is determined that a big hit state of “4 symbols (shark)” has occurred in the “first time” during the “lucky” state. Specifically, when the MPU 211 receives a fanfare command from the main controller 110, the MPU 211 determines the value of the jackpot result memory 213g only when the release extension flag 213f is turned off, and the value of the jackpot result memory 213g is If it is a big hit with “4”, that is, “4 symbols (shark)”, the lucky flag 213i is set to OFF (see S2412 in FIG. 26). When the lucky flag 213i is turned off, a start flag 213j, which will be described later, is set on, and the “lucky” state is changed to the “start” state.

  Therefore, in the first embodiment, the “lucky” state continues until the end condition is achieved, but is changed to the “start” state when the end condition is achieved. That is, if you win a jackpot with “3 symbols (turtles)” or “5 symbols (shrimp)” in the “first time”, a lucky period of “lucky” state will be started in the subsequent games, and in subsequent games The lucky period will continue unless the “first time” wins a jackpot with “4 symbols (shark)”. Therefore, the player becomes obsessed with the game of how to win a big win with “4 symbols (shark)” in the “lucky” state. Then, the game value obtained by the big win with “4 symbols (shark)” and the big win with the other 3 symbols is clearly changed, for example, “4 symbols (shark)” reach display When they appear, they can be in a psychological state of wishing to “get off!”, And a lucky number game can be added.

  While the lucky flag 213i is set to ON, a lucky movable member 96 described later stored in the upper part of the door frame 14 of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed (see S2410 in FIG. 26), and the player In addition, it is possible to directly suggest that the game room staff is in a “lucky” state. When the unlimited flag 213h is turned on and the unlimited movable accessory 95 appears, the lucky movable accessory 96 is configured not to appear even if the lucky flag 213i is turned on.

  Also, the lucky flag 213i does not change even if a big hit state occurs in a big hit symbol corresponding to a “start” state other than “four symbols (shark)” in the “normal gaming state” in the “lucky” state. It is configured. The “Lucky” state is a lucky period in which the player has a higher gaming value than the “Start” state, so the “Lucky” state does not fall into the “Start” state even though the end condition has not been achieved (End) Not configured).

  On the other hand, the lucky flag 213i is displayed in the “normal game state” in the “lucky” state, when the big hit state with the big hit symbol of “7 symbols (Dugong)” corresponding to the “unlimited” state occurs. "" To "unlimited" state. The “Lucky” state is a lucky period in which the player has a lower gaming value than the “Unlimited” state. Therefore, even though the “Lucky” state is in progress, the jackpot corresponding to the “Unlimited” state is subtracted from the “First”. Not giving the “unlimited” state is severe for the player, and if the desired game value is not given even though the start condition is satisfied, there is a risk of causing the player to feel distrust with the game. is there. Therefore, even if the player is in the “lucky” state, if the start condition of the “unlimited” state is satisfied in the “first time”, the player is configured to shift from the “lucky” state to the “unlimited” state. It is possible to prevent dissatisfaction with the game.

  The start flag 213j is a flag for indicating a “start” state, which is one of the lucky periods, when turned on. While the start flag 213j is set to ON, the lucky period continues, and the player can play a game based on possession ball data relating to the lucky ball stored in the lucky central ball counter 213d.

  The start flag 213j is used when it is determined that the stored contents of the RAM 213 are destroyed when the power is turned on (S2005: No in FIG. 22), or when the RAM erase switch circuit 253 is pressed. As an initial value in the initial setting of the RAM 213 (S2008 in FIG. 22 or S2203 in FIG. 24) executed when an initialization command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (S2201: Yes in FIG. 24). Off is set. That is, in this case, the game state is set not in the “start” state. In the first embodiment, the start flag 213j is set to be turned off even when the return button 75 is operated by the player.

  The start flag 213j includes "1 design (octopus)", "2 design (harisenbon)", "4 design (shark)", "6 design (angko)", "8 design (angel fish)" ) ”Or“ 9 symbols (crabs) ”is turned on when it is determined that a big hit state has occurred. Specifically, when the MPU 211 receives a fanfare command from the main controller 110, the MPU 211 determines the value of the jackpot result memory 213g only when the release extension flag 213f is turned off, and the value of the jackpot result memory 213g is , “1”, “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” or “9”, ie, “1 design (octopus)”, “2 designs (harisenbon)”, “4 designs (shark)” , “6 symbol (Anko)”, “8 symbol (angel fish)” or “9 symbol (crab)” is a big hit, this start flag 213j is set to ON (see S2414 in FIG. 26) .

  On the other hand, the start flag 213j is turned off when the “time reduction state” ends during the “start” state. Specifically, when the MPU 211 receives a time reduction subtraction command indicating subtraction of time reduction from the main control device 110, the MPU 211 subtracts “1” from a frame side time reduction counter 213k described later, and the frame side time reduction after subtraction. When the value of the counter 213k is “0” or less and only the start flag 213j is turned on, it is determined that the end condition of the “start” state has been achieved, and the start flag 213j is turned off. (See S2219 in FIG. 24).

  Accordingly, in the first embodiment, the “start” state continues until the “time reduction state” after the end of the jackpot ends, but when the “time reduction state” ends and the end condition is achieved, “ The lucky period in the “start” state is over, and a game based on the possession ball data relating to the lucky ball stored in the lucky central ball counter 213d in the subsequent games can not be played. It is configured. On the other hand, since the “start” state is continued unless the “time reduction state” is completed, if a big win is won again during the “time reduction state”, a frame-side short time counter 213k described later is also reset. However, as a player, he / she becomes obsessed with the game of how to end the lucky period in the “start” state by “ream” in the “time saving state”.

  While the start flag 213j is set to ON, a start movable accessory 97, which will be described later, stored in the upper part of the door frame 14 of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed (see S2414 in FIG. 26), and the player In addition, it is configured to be able to directly suggest the “start” state to the staff of the game hall. If the unlimited flag 213h or the lucky flag 213i is turned on and the unlimited movable accessory 95 or the lucky movable accessory 96 appears, the start movable accessory 97 does not appear even if the start flag 213j is turned on. Configured as follows.

  Further, when the start flag 213j is once turned on and the “start” state is started, the “time reduction state” is not ended unless the “start” state is ended. The “first time” condition is not satisfied. Therefore, for example, even if you win a jackpot with “7 symbols (Dugong)” in the “Start” state, it is a big hit with “7 Symbols (Dugong)” in “Time Reduction”. "Is not satisfied, so that the" unlimited "state is not shifted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a difference in the gaming value given based on the symbol type that hits the “first time”, and any jackpot symbol in the “normal gaming state” where no lucky period is given Thus, it is possible to enhance the interest of whether or not the variable display is stopped, and to make the player pay attention to the game of the variable display even in the “normal game state”.

  The frame side hour / short number counter 213k is a counter for counting the number of times the third symbol fluctuates in the “time reduction state” in the frame overall control device 111. This frame-side short time counter 213k determines that the stored contents of the RAM 213 are destroyed when the power is turned on (S2005: No in FIG. 22), or the RAM erase switch circuit 253 is pressed. In the initial setting of the RAM 213 (S2008 in FIG. 22 or S2203 in FIG. 24) executed when the initialization command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (S2201: Yes in FIG. 24), “0” is set as an initial value.

  On the other hand, the frame side hour / times counter 213k is set to “100” when the big hit state ends and the subsequent game state shifts to the “time reduction state (time reduction state)”. Specifically, when the MPU 211 receives an ending command indicating the end of the jackpot from the main control device 110, the MPU 211 determines whether or not the subsequent gaming state shifts to the “time reduction state”, and the “time reduction” When it is determined to shift to “status”, “100” is set to the value of the frame-side hourly number counter 213k (see S24129 in FIG. 26).

  In addition, the frame side hour / times counter 213k is decremented by “1” every time the variation display of the third symbol is completed once in the “time reduction state”. Specifically, when the MPU 211 receives a time reduction subtraction command from the main controller 110, the MPU 211 subtracts “1” from the value of the frame side time reduction counter 213k. The time reduction subtraction command is sent from the main control device 110 to the frame overall control device 111 each time the value of the time reduction counter 203d based on the confirmation of the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is decremented by “1”. This is a command transmitted to the user. At this time, every time a short subtraction command is received, the value of the frame side short time counter 213k is decremented by "1", whereby the remaining short time can be counted. Further, the value of the frame side hour / times counter 213k is configured to be cleared to “0” when the return button 75 is operated by the player (see S2813 in FIG. 30).

  With this configuration, the progress status of the “time reduction state” can be determined on the frame overall control device 111 side. In the first embodiment, the value of the frame side time reduction counter 213k is determined, and when it is determined that the “time reduction state” has reached a predetermined digestion state, a shutter accessory 228 described later is driven to “ The digestion status in the “start” state can be notified. Specifically, when the MPU 211 receives the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, the MPU 211 determines whether only the start flag 213j is turned on, that is, whether it is in the “start” state. In the “start” state, the remaining 50 commands or the remaining 10 commands for driving the shutter accessory 228 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in accordance with the value of the frame side time reduction counter 213k. (See S2305 or S2307 in FIG. 25). In addition, when the time reduction subtraction command is received from the main control device 110, when the value of the frame side time reduction counter 213k becomes “0” and only the start flag 213j is turned on, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified. On the other hand, the remaining number 0 command is transmitted (see S2220 in FIG. 24). When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the remaining number of times command from the frame overall control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113 drives the shutter accessory 228 according to the command type.

  Note that the frame-side short time counter 213k is configured to clear “0” when the player operates the return button 75 (see S2813 in FIG. 30). If it is in the “start” state, the digestion status in the “start” state is notified based on the value of the frame-side time reduction counter 213k. In the first embodiment, when the return button 75 is operated by the player in the “start” state, the “start” state is extinguished, but the “start” state disappears. Nevertheless, if the value of the frame-side short time counter 213k remains, the shutter accessory 228 that informs the digestion status of the “start” state is driven even though it is not in the “start” state, and the player May be confused. Therefore, when the player operates the return button 75 and the “start” state disappears, the value of the frame side hour / times counter 213k is cleared to “0”, thereby preventing unnecessary effects from being executed. The game can be performed without confusing the player.

  The unrestricted condition memory 213m is a memory that stores the conditions for the “unrestricted” state. The unrestricted condition memory 213m is used when it is determined that the stored contents of the RAM 213 are destroyed when the power is turned on (S2005: No in FIG. 22), or when the RAM erase switch circuit 253 is pressed. After the initialization of the RAM 213 (S2008 in FIG. 22 or S2203 in FIG. 24) executed when the initialization command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (S2201: Yes in FIG. 24), the ROM 212 The start condition of the “unlimited” state stored in the condition table 212a is stored.

  The lucky condition memory 213n is a memory that stores a condition for entering the “lucky” state. This lucky condition memory 213n does not store information on occurrence of power interruption when power is turned on (S2003: No in FIG. 22), or when it is determined that the stored contents of the RAM 213 are destroyed. After the initial setting of the RAM 213 (S2008 in FIG. 22) executed in the case of No (S2005 in FIG. 22), the start condition and end condition of the “lucky” state stored in the condition table 212a of the ROM 212 are stored. The The MPU 211 is configured to determine the type of the lucky period by determining the value of the jackpot result memory 213g and the value of the unlimited condition memory 213m or the lucky condition memory 213n in the case of the “first time” jackpot. .

  In the first embodiment, when the big hit is won, if the start condition stored in the unlimited condition memory 213m or the lucky condition memory 213n does not match, the “start” state is completely started. Yes. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to provide a condition memory relating to the “start” state, so that the capacity of the RAM 213 can be effectively utilized for that memory. In addition, when the “time reduction state” in the “start” state ends, the “start” state is completed without exception. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to provide a condition memory relating to the “start” state, so that the capacity of the RAM 213 can be effectively utilized for that memory.

  In addition to the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the frame overall control device 111 has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as flags, counters, and I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 13) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 66 so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 39 is obtained when the launch of the ball is permitted by the frame overall control device 111. The launch control device 112 stops the launch of the sphere regardless of the operation of the operation handle 39 when the sphere launch control is instructed from the frame overall control device 111. In the first embodiment, one of the normal time ball counter 213c and the lucky middle ball counter 213d is instructed to permit launching when possessed ball data relating to a sharable ball or a lucky ball exists (see S2711 in FIG. 29). When there is no possessed ball data in either the normal time ball counter 213c or the lucky middle ball counter 213d, the launch prohibition is instructed (see S2713 in FIG. 29).

  As described above, the ball launching unit 66 includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 39 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 39a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 39, and the stop switch 39b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 39, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 39.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the card sand apparatus 70 provided on a one-to-one basis with respect to the pachinko machine 10 will be described. The card sand device 70 is constituted by an MPU 271 which is an arithmetic unit, and the MPU 271 has a ROM 272 storing a control program executed by the MPU 271 and fixed value data, and a RAM 273 used as a work memory. Yes. In addition, an input / output port 279 is connected to the MPU 271 via a bus line 278 including an address bus and a data bus.

  The input / output port 279 includes a card reader / writer 274 that reads and writes data from and to the membership card inserted into the card insertion slot 72, and detection and authentication of the denomination of the bill inserted into the bill insertion slot 71. The banknote detection device 275 that performs the determination, various buttons such as a ball lending button 74 and a return button 75, and various lamps such as a card usable lamp 78, a lending available lamp 79a, and an error display lamp 79b are connected. Further, the input / output port 279 is connected to a hall computer 263, which is a computer that comprehensively manages the entire hall in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed, and is a computer provided outside the card sand device 70. .

  The hall computer 263 is provided with a history recording unit (not shown) for storing a player's game history. As will be described later, the history recording unit stores history information relating to the past several games for each member card 300 inserted into the card sand device 70. More specifically, as history information, the date and time when the member card 300 was inserted into the card sand device 70, the date and time when the member card 300 was removed from the card sand device 70, the identification number of the card sand device 70 that received the lending of the ball, Number of loans, counting results of possessed balls as a result of playing games, profit information converted into points from the counting results, accumulated stored profit information (saved savings data), loan rate when lending balls The exchange rate when the count result of possessed balls is converted into points, the number of prize balls from the pachinko machine 10 and the like are stored.

  As described above, when a player plays a game on any one of the pachinko machines 10, it is necessary to insert the member card 300 into the card sanding device 70 corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 when receiving a rental of a ball. Some history information is transmitted to the hall computer 263 at a predetermined timing, such as when the member card 300 is inserted or returned. That is, when a player plays a game with any of the pachinko machines 10, some history information is always recorded in the history recording unit of the hall computer. The hall computer 263 includes a member database (not shown) that stores the member ID 300a of the member card 300 and the like.

  Here, the operation of the card sand apparatus 70 will be briefly described. First, the player inserts the membership card 300 possessed by the player into the card insertion slot 72 of the card sand apparatus 70 installed in association with the desired pachinko machine 10. The membership card 300 in the first embodiment is composed of a magnetic card capable of storing various information. The member card 300 stores a member ID 300a for identifying a registered player, a cash corresponding memory 300b for storing balance data, a normal memory 300c for storing sharable balls, and a game unusable ball. A game unusable memory 300d is mainly provided.

  The member ID 300a is a storage area for storing identification information (ID) unique to the player in the member card 300. The member ID 300a is written with unique identification information when the player obtains the member card 300 at the game hall, and the identification information is managed by the hall computer 263.

  The cash correspondence memory 300 b is a storage area for storing money amount data related to banknotes inserted into the banknote insertion slot 71 of the card sand device 70 by the player in the member card 300. The cash corresponding memory 300b is configured to add money amount data corresponding to the inserted banknote when a banknote is inserted into the card sanding device 70 by the player (not shown). Further, when the player operates the ball lending button 74, the ball lending according to the lending amount unit is performed, and the amount data according to the lending amount unit is subtracted from the cash corresponding memory 300b. (See S4010 in FIG. 35). In addition, when the amount data is not stored in the cash corresponding memory 300b, that is, when the value of the cash corresponding memory 300b is “0”, the control regarding the ball rental is executed even if the ball lending button 74 is operated. (See S4007 in FIG. 35).

  The normal time memory 300c is a storage area for storing possessed ball data related to sharable balls in the member card 300. The normal time memory 300c is set to “0” in the initial state, and when the return button 75 is operated by the player, the possession regarding the sharable ball stored in the normal time ball counter 213c of the frame overall control device 111. The ball data is added (see S4012 in FIG. 35). Further, when the player inserts the member card 300 into the card insertion slot 72 of the card sand device 70, the possessed ball data related to the sharable ball stored in the normal time memory 300c is the normal time of the frame overall control device 111. The value is added to the sphere counter 213c (see S4004 in FIG. 35), and the value in the normal time memory 300c is cleared to “0” (see S4005 in FIG. 35).

  The game unusable memory 300d is a storage area for storing possessed ball data relating to a game unusable ball in the member card 300. This game unusable memory 300d is initially set to “0”, and when the return button 75 is operated by the player, the possession regarding the lucky ball stored in the lucky central ball counter 213d of the frame overall control device 111. The ball data and possessed ball data relating to the game unusable balls stored in the unusable area 213e are added (see S4013 and S4014 in FIG. 35). The value of the game unusable memory 300d is configured not to be transmitted to the frame overall control device 111 even when the member card 300 is inserted into the card insertion slot 72 of the card sand device 70 by the player. ing.

  In addition, the membership card 300 stores history information relating to the past several games. The history information stored in the member card 300 includes, for example, the date and time when the member card 300 is inserted into the card sand device 70, the date and time when the member card 300 is taken out from the card sand device 70, and the card sand device 70 that received the lending of the ball. Identification number, number of balls rented, counting result of possessed spheres as a result of playing games, profit information converted to points from the counting results, accumulated stored profit information (saved saving data), rented balls Lending rate at the time of purchase, exchange rate when the count result of possessed balls is converted into points.

  However, when the membership card 300 is unused (including an initialized state), no history information is stored at first, and history information is stored every time it is used.

  The membership card 300 is issued to the player by receiving membership registration in advance, and is owned by the individual player. The player (specific member) who owns the membership card 300 can find out the status of each pachinko machine 10 and the like by inserting the membership card 300 into a predetermined data management device. Is obtained.

  On the other hand, if the player is not a member, the game is played using a guest card borrowed in advance from the game hall instead of the member card. The guest card is intended to be used for one day in principle, and the player's personal information is not managed in association with the card. In addition, after the hall is closed, the guest card is collected and an initialization operation is performed to erase the history information stored in the card, and the history recording unit of the hall computer 263 is associated with the card. An operation for deleting the stored history information is performed.

  Now, when the membership card 300 is inserted into the card insertion slot 72 of the card sand device 70, the MPU 271 temporarily stores the various information read by the card reader / writer 274 in the RAM 273. In addition, the MPU 271 transmits all information read from the member card 300 such as the member ID and history information to the hall computer 263. Here, various types of information are transmitted in an encrypted state to prevent fraud.

  The hall computer 263 collates the received information with information stored in the above-described history recording unit (not shown) or member database (not shown) of the hall computer 263 to perform card authentication. The hall computer 263 transmits a game permission signal to the card sand device 70 when the various information matches as a result of the collation and the validity of the card is confirmed.

  The card sand device 70 that has received such a game permission signal permits acceptance of bills at the bill insertion slot 71 and permits operation on the ball lending button 74. In addition, the lendable lamp 79a is turned on to notify the player that the ball can be lent.

  On the other hand, the hall computer 263 transmits an error signal to the card sand device 70 when the various information does not match as a result of the collation. The card sand device 70 that has received the error signal ejects the member card 300 from the card insertion slot 72 and rejects the ball lending request. In addition, the error display lamp 79b is turned on to notify the player, hall personnel, and the like. At this time, based on the history information stored in the membership card 300, the record of the surveillance camera of the hall may be confirmed, and the profit lost by the player may be compensated. As a result, a player who owns the membership card 300 whose validity has not been confirmed due to, for example, noise during data transmission, even though it is not a counterfeited unauthorized membership card, can be remedied. it can.

  That is, in this pachinko machine 10, (1) the membership card 300 is inserted into the card sand device 70, (2) no history information is stored in the membership card 300, or the membership card 300 stores the history information. Under the permission condition that the recorded history information is valid, the player can borrow a ball and play a game on the pachinko machine 10.

  With this function, it is possible to suppress fraud using data tampering or forged cards. For example, when a membership card with altered balance data is inserted into the card sand device 70, history information (saving data, etc.) stored in the membership card and a history recording unit (not shown) of the hall computer 263 are stored. The history information (saving data, etc.) relating to the membership card stored in is not matched, and an error signal is transmitted from the hall computer 263 to the card sand device 70.

  When a game ball is permitted to be rented and the player inserts a bill into the bill insertion slot 71, or when balance data is stored in the cash corresponding memory 300b of the member card 300, a numerical value ( The input amount or the balance data point value) is temporarily stored in the RAM 273. In the balance data in the first embodiment, one point corresponds to one yen.

  When the ball lending button 74 is operated once in this state, lending of a ball corresponding to a predetermined amount (for example, 500 yen) is performed within the limit of the value stored in the cash corresponding memory 300b. A lending signal including the number of lending balls is transmitted to the frame overall control device 111. The number of balls lent out here is calculated based on the rental rate stored in the RAM 273. For example, when the lending rate is 4 yen per ball, 25 lending balls are lent out per 100 yen. In accordance with the lending of the sphere, the card sand device 70 subtracts the value used for the lending from the balance data temporarily stored in the RAM 273. As described above, the value data in the cash corresponding memory 300b of the member card 300 is temporarily stored in the RAM 273 of the card sand apparatus 70 and the subtraction process is performed, so that the amount data can be immediately updated in response to the lending request. It is possible to quickly control the sphere.

  Subsequently, the card sand device 70 writes new history information on the member card 300 together with its own identification number. Specifically, the date and time when the member card 300 is inserted into the card sand device 70, the identification number of the card sand device 70, the number of balls lent, the updated balance data, the loan rate, etc. are written. At the same time, the card sand device 70 transmits the history information to the hall computer 263. The hall computer 263 that has received the information newly stores the history information in a history recording unit (not shown). Thereby, the hall computer 263 can determine the validity of the membership card 300 inserted into the card sand device 70 using the history information newly stored in the history storage unit.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a startup process periodically (in the first embodiment at a cycle of 2 milliseconds). There are a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.

  With reference to FIG. 12, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on.

  In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1001). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in the first embodiment) is performed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the frame overall control device 111) to be operable. Execute (S1002). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 5) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1004). If it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process proceeds to S1011. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005), and if not stored (S1005: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not been completed normally, the process proceeds to S1011 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1007: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. Therefore, in this case as well, the process proceeds to S1011. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1711 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the processing of S1011, an initialization command is transmitted to initialize the frame overall control device 111 that is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1011). Upon receiving this initialization command, the frame overall control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state where the counting control of the sphere can be started. Main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1012 and S1013) of RAM 203 after transmission of the initialization command.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1012 and S1013) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S1012 and S1013) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S1012 and S1013), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to “0” (S1012), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1013). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1010.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1005: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( (S1007: Yes), the occurrence information of power-off is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is retained (S1008). Next, a return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (the frame overall control device 111) to the gaming state at the time of driving power interruption is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. When receiving the return command, the frame overall control device 111 is in a state where the management control of the sphere can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 203.

  In the process of S1010, an interrupt is permitted (S1010). And it transfers to the main process mentioned later.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1101), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the frame overall control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the frame overall control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading processes of the various winning switches 44 to 46 are executed (S1201). That is, the state of the various winning switches 44 to 46 connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switches 44 to 46 is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored in the RAM 203.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1202). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by “1” and cleared to “0” when the counter value reaches the maximum value (“899” in the first embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the counter buffer 203 a of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by “1”, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (“250” in the first embodiment), it is cleared to “0” and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented. The updated value of the value random number counter CINI 2 is stored in the counter buffer 203 a of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are updated (S1203). Specifically, “1” is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (first In the embodiment, when “899”, “99”, “99”, “250”) are reached, each is cleared to “0”. The updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the counter buffer 203a of the RAM 203.

  Next, a process for performing display by the first symbol display device 87 and a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S1204). A winning ball process for determining a winning ball for winning at the specific winning slot 5a is executed (S1205), and a starting winning process for winning at the starting winning slot 4 is further executed (S1206). Details of the variation process, the prize ball process, and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 15, 17, and 18, respectively.

  After the start winning process is executed, other processes to be executed periodically are further executed (S1207), and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

  Next, the fluctuation process (S1204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing this variation processing (S1204). The variation process (S1204) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and controls the variation display performed by the first symbol display device 87 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit (S1301). The jackpot includes the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 87 in the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if it is a big hit (S1301: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not a big hit (S1301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 87 is changing (S1302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 87 is not changing. (S1302: No) Next, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable display on the first symbol display device 87 is stopped (S1303). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation stop (S1303: No), this processing is terminated as it is. Thereby, since the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 87 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1303, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the suspension of the fluctuation (S1303: Yes), whether or not the number N of the suspended balls held in the main control device 110 is larger than “0”. Is determined (S1304). As a result, if the number of held balls N is not “0” (S1304: Yes), the number of held balls counter 203c (number of held balls N) is decremented by “1” (S1305) and stored in the stored ball storage area 203b. The data is shifted (S1306). This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the holding ball storage area 203b to the execution area side. The holding first area → the execution area, the holding second area The data in each area is shifted, such as the hold first area, the hold third area, the hold second area, the hold fourth area, and the hold third area. After the data shift process, the fluctuation start process of the first symbol display device 87 is executed (S1307). The variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the processing of S1304, if it is determined that the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of held balls N) is “0” (S1304: No), the demonstration effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 That is, it is determined whether or not a demonstration is in progress (S1308). In this determination processing, after a demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113, the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of reserved balls N) is determined to be greater than “0”. It is determined that the interval is being demonstrated.

  If it is determined that the demonstration is not in progress (S1308: No), a demo command is set (S1309), and this process ends. If it is determined that the demonstration is in progress (S1308: Yes), This process is finished as it is. The demo command set in the process of S1309 is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1701) of a main process (see FIG. 19) described later executed by the MPU 201. And transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 via the frame overall control device 111. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the demo command as it is to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 performs control so as to display a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the demo command.

  Here, as described above, the demo command is set when there is no holding ball when a predetermined time elapses after the fluctuation stop. Therefore, when the variable display is not started when a predetermined time has elapsed after the change is stopped, the demo command can be set and the demonstration effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1302, if it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 87 is changing (S1302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time has elapsed (S1310). The display time during fluctuation of the first symbol display device 87 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time has elapsed. If not (S1310: No), the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 87 is updated (S1311), and this process is complete | finished.

  In the first embodiment, among the LEDs 87a of the first symbol display device 87, for example, if the currently lit LED is red until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, the red LED is changed. Turn off and turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED. If the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. A display mode for turning off the red LED and turning on the red LED is set.

  The variation process is executed every 2 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the variation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted as “1” every time the variation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the counter reaches “200”. In this case, the lighting color of the LED is changed. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. Note that the counter value is reset to “0” when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 87 has elapsed (S1310: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 87 is set (S1312). The stop symbol is set in advance by a variation start process (S1307) described later with reference to FIG. That is, whether or not a big hit is determined by the processing of S1306 according to the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203b, and if the big hit, Depending on the value of the counter C2, after the jackpot, the design will be “15R probability variation jackpot (maximum number of rounds is a probability variation jackpot that shifts to“ high probability state ”after 15 rounds jackpot”) or “2R probability variation jackpot (maximum number of rounds is 2 rounds) Whether the symbol is “probable big jackpot that shifts to“ high probability state ”after jackpot” ”or“ 15R normal jackpot (big jackpot that shifts to “time reduction state” after jackpot of 15 rounds) ” It is determined.

  In the first embodiment, the blue LED is turned on when the “15R probable big hit” comes after the big hit, and the red LED is turned on when the “2R probable big hit” becomes “15R normal big hit”. The red LED and the blue LED are turned on. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the display of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 87 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the processing of S1312, the stop symbol of the variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 87. In this case, a confirmation command is set for confirmation (S1313), and the process proceeds to S1314. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the display confirmation command related to the confirmation command via the frame overall control device 111, it transmits the display confirmation command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the variation time elapses, the third symbol display device 81 stops the variation, and receives the display confirmation command to confirm the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1314, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203d (time reduction number K) is larger than “0” (S1314). As a result, if it is determined that the number of time reductions K is “0” (S1314: No), the present process is terminated, while if the number of time reductions K is greater than “0” (S1314: Yes), the time reduction The time counter 203d (number of time reductions K) is decremented by “1” (S1315), a time reduction subtraction command to be transmitted to the frame overall control device 111 is set (S1316), and this process is terminated. When receiving the short time subtraction command, the frame overall control device 111 is configured to subtract “1” from the value of a frame side short time counter 213k (described later) provided in the RAM 213 of the frame overall control device 111.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the change start process (S1307) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S1307). This variation start process (S1307) is executed in the variation process (see FIG. 15) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203b. In addition to performing a lottery (win / no-go determination) for “big hit” or “off”, the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable display performed on the first symbol display device 87 and the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

  In the variation start process, first, a lottery (win / no-go determination) process is performed to determine whether or not a big hit is made based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203b (S1401). Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the gaming state at that time. As described above, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “normal gaming state” or “time reduction state”, the “normal gaming state” or “time reduction state” associated with the “big game random number table 202a” 7,307,582 ”is a jackpot random value, and when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is“ high probability state ”,“ 28, 58, 58 ”associated with the“ high probability state ”in the jackpot random number table 202a. 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 "is the jackpot random number value. In the processing of S1401, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203b is compared with these jackpot random number values. Determine.

  If it is determined as a big hit as a result of the processing of S1401 (S1401: Yes), based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203b, A display mode is set (S1402). In this process, the jackpot type set by the first jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b, that is, the maximum round number is “15R probability variable jackpot” that shifts to the “high probability state” after jackpot of 15 rounds, or the maximum Based on whether the number of rounds is “2R probabilistic jackpot” that shifts to “high probability state” after jackpot of 2 rounds, or “15R normal jackpot” that shifts to “time reduction state” after jackpot of 15 rounds Thus, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 87a) of the first symbol display device 87 is set. Further, based on the transition state after the jackpot, in order to stop and display the jackpot symbols corresponding to various jackpots on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type ("15R probability variation jackpot", "2R probability variation jackpot", "15R normal hit Jackpot ") is set as the stop type.

  Next, a variation pattern (variation time) at the time of jackpot is determined (S1403). The determination of the variation pattern is performed based on the jackpot type set in the processing of S1402, the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the jackpot variation pattern table 202c. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S1403, the display time of the first symbol display device 87 is set.

  If it is determined in step S1401 that the game is not a big hit (S1401: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S1404). In the processing of S1404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 87 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203b. As the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, whether “rearward / rearward reach”, “reach other than frontward / rearward”, or “completely disengaged” is set. In the first embodiment, as described above, each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponds to the “high probability state”, the “normal game state”, or the “time reduction state”. The table is set up to have different value ranges.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S1405). This variation pattern is determined by determining the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (“high probability state”, “time reduction state”, or “normal gaming state”), the stop type set in the processing of S1404, This is performed based on the value of the type counter CS1 and the deviation variation pattern table 202d. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S1405, the display time of the first symbol display device 87 is set.

  When the processing of S1403 or S1405 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern type determined by the processing of S1403 or S1405 via the frame overall control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 is issued. It sets (S1406). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S1402 or S1404 via the frame overall control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 is set (S1407). finish. These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the frame overall control device 111 in the processing of S1701 of the main processing (FIG. 19). The

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 17, the process of the winning ball process (S1205) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the prize ball processing (S1205). This winning ball process (S1205) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 14), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the general winning slot 3 and the specific winning slot 5a. And a prize ball addition command is set in order to add the number of prize balls counted in the frame overall control device 111.

  When the winning ball process is executed, it is first determined whether or not there is a winning in the general winning opening 3 (S1501). In this process, based on the winning detection information of the general winning opening switch 44 stored in the RAM 203 by the switch reading process in S1201 of the timer interruption process (see FIG. 14), it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the general winning opening 3. to decide.

  If it is determined that there is a prize at the general prize opening 3 (S1501: Yes), five prize balls are determined, and five balls are counted against the number of prize balls counted in the frame overall control device 111. In order to add a prize ball, a 5-ball prize ball addition command is set for transmission to the frame overall control device 111 (S1502). The prize ball addition command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the frame overall control device 111 in the process of S1701 of the main process (see FIG. 19).

  After the process of S1502, the process proceeds to S1503. As a result of the process of S1501, if it is determined that there is no winning in the general winning opening 3 (S1501: No), the process of S1502 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1503.

  In the processing of S1503, it is determined whether or not there is a winning at the specific winning opening 5a (S1503). In this process, based on the winning detection information of the specific winning switch 46 stored in the RAM 203 by the switch reading process in S1201 of the timer interruption process (see FIG. 14), it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the specific winning opening 5a. To do.

  If it is determined that there is a winning at the specific winning opening 5a (S1503: Yes), 15 winning balls are determined, and 15 balls are counted against the number of winning balls counted in the frame overall control device 111. In order to add a prize ball, a 15-ball prize ball addition command is set to be transmitted to the frame overall control device 111 (S1504). The prize ball addition command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the frame overall control device 111 in the process of S1701 of the main process (see FIG. 19).

  After the processing of S1504, the prize ball processing is ended and the processing returns to the timer interruption processing. If it is determined as a result of the processing of S1503 that there is no winning at the specific winning opening 5a (S1503: No), the processing of S1504 is skipped, the winning ball processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the timer interruption processing.

  Next, the start winning process (S1206) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S1206). This start winning process (S1206) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 14), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the start winning opening 4, and if there is a start winning, Holds the value indicated by the random number counter. In addition, a winning ball is determined when a winning prize is determined, and a winning ball addition command is set to add the number of winning balls to the number of winning balls counted in the frame overall control device 111. .

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the start winning opening 4 (start winning) (S1601). In this process, whether or not there has been a prize (start prize) at the start prize opening 4 based on the prize detection information of the start prize switch 45 stored in the RAM 203 by the switch reading process of S1201 of the timer interruption process (see FIG. 14). Judge whether or not.

  Then, if it is determined that the ball has won the start winning opening 4 (start winning) (S1601: Yes), five award balls are determined and the number of award balls counted in the frame overall control device 111 is determined. In order to add five prize balls, a five-ball prize command is set to be transmitted to the frame overall control device 111 (S1602). The prize ball addition command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the frame overall control device 111 in the process of S1701 of the main process (see FIG. 19).

  Following the processing in S1602, it is determined whether or not the number N of balls for variable display held in the main controller 110 is less than the upper limit (“4” in the first embodiment) (S1603). If there is no winning at the start winning opening 4 (S1601: No), or even if there is a winning at the starting winning opening 4, if the number N of active suspension balls is not less than “4” (S1603: No), the timer Return to interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the start winning opening 4 (S1601: Yes) and the number of reserved balls N <“4” (S1603: Yes), “1” is added to the number of reserved balls N (S1604), Further, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 updated in the processing of S1203 of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14) are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It stores in the first area among the empty reservation areas (S1605).

  Next, a reserved ball number command including the value of the reserved ball number N updated by the processing of S1604 is created (S1606), the created reserved ball number command is set (S1607), and the start winning process is terminated. Return to timer interrupt processing.

  This reserved ball number command is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 via the frame overall control device 111 in the processing of S1701 of the main processing (see FIG. 19). The The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls in the voice lamp control device 113 based on the number of held balls N included in the number of held balls command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 sends a hold display command to the display control device 114 so that the number of held balls managed by the voice lamp control device 113 is displayed in the hold display area Dh of the third symbol display device 81. Send. This hold display command includes information indicating the number of held balls to be displayed. The display control device 114 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 so as to display the number of held balls indicated by the hold display command in the hold display area Dh.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above startup process will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1701 to S1704 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1708 and S1709 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, output data such as commands stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14) is transferred to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side. ) Is executed (S1701). Specifically, the winning ball addition command set in the winning ball process (S1205) is transmitted to the frame overall control device 111. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the start winning process (S1206) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 via the frame overall control device 111. Furthermore, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, a confirmation command, a time subtraction command, a fanfare command, a round number command, an ending command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are provided. This is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 via the frame overall control device 111 or the frame overall control device 111.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1702). Specifically, “1” is added to the variation type counter CS1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (“198” in the first embodiment), it is cleared to “0”. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the counter buffer 203 a of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, next, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a big hit state, execution of the big hit effect and opening or closing the specific winning port (big winning port) 5a of the variable winning device 5 The jackpot control process is executed (S1703). The details of the jackpot control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 20. In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 5a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning slot 5a has elapsed, or It is determined whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning opening 5a. And when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 5a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 5a is repeatedly performed a predetermined number of rounds. In the first embodiment, the jackpot control process is executed in the main process, but may be executed in a timer interrupt process.

  Next, display control processing of the second symbol (for example, symbol “◯” or “x”) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1704). Briefly, on the condition that the sphere has passed through the through gate 7, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 83 changes the second symbol. Display is performed. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is performed based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4, and when the winning state of the second symbol is reached, the electric accessory associated with the start winning opening 4 is released for a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705). If the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1705: No), a power failure signal is transmitted from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in the first embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process ( In S1706), if the predetermined time has already passed (S1706: Yes), the process proceeds to S1701, and the processes after S1701 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S1706: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1707 and S1708).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1707). Specifically, “1” is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the counter values reach the maximum values (“899” and “250” in the first embodiment). When cleared, it is cleared to “0”. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer 203a of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1702 (S1708).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1701 to S1704 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1705, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705: Yes), the power failure is caused by the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 13 has been executed, the power-off process after S1709 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1709), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the frame overall control device 111) (S1710). ). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1711), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1712), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  It should be noted that the processing of S1705 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1701 to S1704, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1707 and S1708 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1701. In other words, the process can be started from the process of S1701 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, the stack pointer is not stored in the initial setting process (S1001) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1701. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1703) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1703). This jackpot control process (S1703) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 19). When the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot, the execution of various effects corresponding to the jackpot and the specific winning a prize port (large This is a process for opening or closing the winning award 5a.

  In the jackpot control process, it is first determined whether or not it is time to start the jackpot (S1801). Specifically, in the timer interruption process performed immediately before the execution of the process of S1801, the process of S1312 of the fluctuation process (see FIG. 15) is executed, and the jackpot display is set as the stop display of the first symbol display device. If so, it is determined that the jackpot will be started.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1801 that the timing for starting the big hit (S1801: Yes), a big hit middle flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is set to ON (S1802), and then a fanfare indicating the start of the big hit state is set. A command is set (S1803), the jackpot control process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. The big hit flag is a flag that is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 and indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in big hit. When the big hit medium flag is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in big hit. Show.

  The fanfare command set in the processing of S1803 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is directed to the frame overall control device 111 in the external output processing (S1701) executed next by the MPU 201. Sent. When receiving the fanfare command, the frame overall control device 111 transmits the display fanfare command to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113. When the display fanfare command is received by the display control device 114, the fanfare effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. In addition, when the frame overall control device 111 receives the fanfare command, the frame overall control device 111 performs the start determination of the lucky period, and if the determination result satisfies the start condition of the lucky period, the lucky period is determined to start one of the lucky periods. The related flags 213h to 213j are set. The setting of the lucky period related flags 213h to 213j will be described later.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot is not the start timing in the processing of S1801 (S1801: No), it is next determined whether or not the jackpot flag is on and the jackpot is currently being hit (S1804). The jackpot includes the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 87 in the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends.

  In the processing of S1804, if the big hit / medium flag is off and not big hit (S1804: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S1804, if the big hit / medium flag is on and if the big hit is being hit (S1804: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1805). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1805: Yes), the specific winning opening 5a is opened (S1806), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1807). After the round number command is set, this process ends.

  The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and the external control process 111 is executed next by the MPU 201 via the frame overall control device 111. It is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is not the start timing of a new round in the processing of S1805 (S1805: No), it is then determined whether the closing condition for the specific winning opening 5a is satisfied (S1808). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the specific winning opening 5a, or when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10) have been won after opening the specific winning opening 5a. It is determined that the closing condition is established.

  In the process of S1808, when the closing condition for the specific winning opening 5a is satisfied (S1808: Yes), the specific winning opening 5a is closed (S1809), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the closing condition for the specific winning opening 5a is not satisfied (S1808: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1810).

  In the process of S1810, when it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1810: Yes), an ending command indicating the end of the jackpot state is set (S1811), and this process ends. The ending command set in the process of S1811 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and through the frame overall control device 111 in the external output process (S1701) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. Further, when receiving the ending command, the frame overall control device 111 performs control related to the grant of the lucky period, specifically, the ON setting of the release extension flag 213f, which will be described later, and the frame side time reduction in the “start” state The counter 213k is set (“100” is set). When a display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1810, if it is not the ending start timing (S1810: No), it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is to be ended (S1812). In the process of S1812, if the current jackpot is to be ended (S1812: Yes), the end of the jackpot is set (S1813), the jackpot medium flag is set to OFF (S1814), and then the “time reduction state” It is determined whether or not to enter (S1815). Whether or not to enter the “time reduction state” is determined by a state flag (not shown). As a result of the determination, if it is determined to enter the “time reduction state” (S1815: Yes), “100” is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203d (S1816), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined as a result of the processing of S1815 that the “time reduction state” is not entered (S1815: No), that is, if the “high probability state” is entered, the time reduction counter 203d is cleared to “0”. (S1817), and this process ends. Note that if it is determined as a result of the processing in S1812 that it is not the timing to end the current jackpot (S1812: No), this processing ends as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the contents of command and response transmission / reception between the pachinko machine 10, the card sand device 70, and the member card 300 will be described. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing information exchange of the pachinko machine 10, the card sand device 70, and the member card 300 when the member card 300 is inserted, when the ball lending button 74 is pressed, and when the return button 75 is pressed. With reference to this FIG. 21, three actions performed centering on the card sand apparatus 70 are demonstrated. The first action will be described as an action when the player-owned member card 300 is inserted into the card sand apparatus 70 at the start of the game, that is, the exchange of information in the <member card insertion> action. The second action will be described for the exchange of information in the action when the ball lending button 74 is operated by the player, that is, the action of <pressing the ball lending button>. The third action will be described for the action when the return button 75 is operated by the player at the end of the game, that is, the exchange of information in the action of <return button press>.

<Insert membership card>
When the player's membership card 300 is inserted by the player into the card insertion slot 72 of the card sand device 70, first, the above-described authentication process with the hall computer 263 is performed (not shown), and a valid member When it is the card 300, possessed ball data related to the sharable ball stored in the normal time memory 300 c of the member card 300 is read into the card sand device 70. Thereafter, the card sand device 70 transmits an insertion signal indicating that the member card 300 has been inserted into the card sand device 70 to the pachinko machine 10. Then, possessed ball data related to the sharable balls stored in the normal time memory 300 c of the read membership card 300 is transmitted to the pachinko machine 10. When the pachinko machine 10 receives possessed ball data related to a sharable ball stored in the normal memory 300c of the membership card 300 from the card sand device 70, the pachinko machine 10 transmits the possessed ball data of the normal memory 300c to the frame overall control device 111. Is added to the normal time counter 213c. The card sand device 70 clears the value of the normal time memory 300c of the membership card 300 after transmitting the possessed ball data of the normal time memory 300c.

  Thus, when the membership card 300 is inserted into the card sand device 70, only possessed ball data relating to the sharable balls in the normal time memory 300c of the membership card 300 is transmitted to the pachinko machine 10, and the game unusable memory 300d The possession ball data regarding the game unusable ball is configured not to be notified.

<Pressing the ball rental button>
When the player operates the ball lending button 74 of the card sand device 70, first, the card sand device 70 checks whether or not the balance data is stored in the cash corresponding memory 300b of the member card 300. If the balance data is not stored in the cash corresponding memory 300b, the subsequent processing is canceled (not shown). On the other hand, if the balance data is stored in the cash corresponding memory 300b, the card sand device 70 In order to perform the lending process, a lending signal is transmitted to the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 that has received the ball lending signal from the card sand device 70 adds a predetermined number of lending balls to the value of the normal time ball counter 213c of the frame overall control device 111. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 transmits a reception completion signal to the card sand device 70. The card sanding device 70 that has received the reception completion signal subtracts data corresponding to the number of lent balls from the balance data in the cash corresponding memory 300b of the member card 300.

  In this manner, when the player operates the ball lending button 74, the ball lending control is performed on the condition that there is balance data in the cash corresponding memory 300b of the member card 300, and the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state. It is added to the ball counter 213c as a shareable ball.

<Press return button>
When the return button 75 of the card sand device 70 is operated by the player, first, the card sand device 70 transmits a return signal to the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 that has received the return signal transmits possessed ball data relating to the sharable balls of the normal time ball counter 213c to the card sand device 70, and clears the value of the normal time ball counter 213c to “0”. The card sand device 70 that has received the possessed ball data related to the balls that can be commonly used by the normal time ball counter 213c stores the contents of the possessed ball data related to the balls that can be commonly used by the normal time ball counter 213c in the normal time memory 300c of the member card 300. to add.

  Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 transmits possessed ball data relating to the lucky ball of the lucky central ball counter 213d to the card sand device 70, and clears the value of the lucky central ball counter 213d to “0”. The card sand device 70 that has received the possession ball data relating to the lucky ball of the lucky central ball counter 213d adds the content of possession ball data relating to the lucky ball of the lucky central ball counter 213d to the game unusable memory 300d of the membership card 300. .

  Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 transmits possessed ball data regarding the game unusable balls in the unusable area 213e to the card sand device 70, and clears the value of the unusable area 213e to “0”. The card sand device 70 that has received the possessed ball data related to the game unusable ball in the unusable area 213e stores the content of the possessed ball data related to the game unusable ball in the unusable area 213e in the game unusable memory 300d of the membership card 300. to add.

  As described above, when the return button 75 is operated by the player, the possessed ball data regarding the sharable ball, the lucky ball, and the game unusable ball managed by the frame overall control device 111 of the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the membership card. 300 is added to the normal time memory 300c and the game unusable memory 300d.

  In the first embodiment, an addition process is performed when the contents of possessed ball data are reflected in the values of the normal time memory 300c and the game unusable memory 300d of the membership card 300. On the other hand, every time the possessed ball data is generated in the buffer area composed of a plurality of storage areas, instead of the addition process, the data already written is overwritten to update the data. Control content that accurately reflects the content of possessed ball data managed by the pachinko machine 10 on the member card 300, such as a method of accumulating data by writing the possessed ball data to a vacant storage area. For example, any means and method may be used, and the contents are not limited.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 211 in the frame overall control device 111 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 211 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 211 in the frame overall control device 111 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  In this start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, the RAM access is permitted (S2002).

  After that, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 213 in the MPU 211. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 (S2003). If not stored (S2003: No), the backup data is not stored, so the process proceeds to S2007. Then, initialization processing of the RAM 213 is executed (S2007 to S2009).

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 (S2003: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S2004). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S2005: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed. Therefore, in this case as well, the process proceeds to S2007 and the initialization process of the RAM 213 is executed (S2007 to S2007). S2009). As will be described later in the processing of S2110 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 213 is correctly stored.

  In the initialization process of the RAM 213 in S2007 to S2009, after clearing all areas of the RAM 213 to “0” (S2007), the initial value of the RAM 213 is set (S2008). Thereafter, conditions for each lucky period are set in the unlimited condition memory 213m and the lucky condition memory 213n from the condition table 212a stored in the ROM 212 (S2009), and the process proceeds to S2010.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the unlimited condition memory 213m and the lucky condition memory 213n are set only in this initialization process (S2007 to S2009), and thereafter, as long as the backup is valid, the unlimited condition memory 213m and The value of the lucky condition memory 213n is maintained. When the jackpot is won, in the jackpot display command setting process (S2212), which will be described later, the values of the unlimited condition memory 213m and the lucky condition memory 213n are taken into consideration and either lucky period is given.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is set (S2003: Yes) and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S2005: Yes), the data backed up in the RAM 213 is retained. The information on the occurrence of power shutdown is cleared (S2006), and then the process proceeds to S2010.

  In the processing of S2010, initial setting of peripheral devices of the MPU 211 is performed (S2010). Thereafter, a condition command based on the values of the unlimited condition memory 213m and the lucky condition memory 213n is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (S2011). When the sound lamp control device 113 receives a condition command from the frame overall control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to display the start condition and end condition of the lucky period indicated by the condition command on the status display device 85. After the processing of S2011, the interruption is permitted (S2012), and the process proceeds to the main processing (see FIG. 23). In the first embodiment, the start condition in the “start” state is set in advance as a jackpot other than the jackpot corresponding to the “unlimited” state or the “lucky” state. Further, the end condition of the “start” state is set in advance as the end of the “time reduction state” in the “start” state. The start condition and the end condition in the “start” state are set without fail when the power is turned on, and are displayed on the status display device 85.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the main process executed by the MPU 211 in the frame overall control device 111 after the above startup process will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, a main command determination process (S2101) for performing various controls according to the contents of the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and various controls according to the contents of the command transmitted from the sound lamp controller 113. Sub-command determination process (S2102) to be performed, a rental ball prize ball coefficient process (S2103) for counting the number of balls and award balls that are the number of balls that a player can use in the game, and a launch ball or a foul ball is detected When the number of balls that can be used in the game is counted and the firing control device 112 permits or prohibits the launching of the ball, and when the membership card 300 is inserted, When the ball lending button 74 is operated, a clearing process (S2105) for performing various processes when the return button 75 is operated is executed. As an outline, each process of S2101 to S2105 is executed as a periodic process with a 1-msec cycle, and a power-off occurrence monitoring process (S2106) is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, as a regular process, a command received from the main control device 110 is determined, and a main command determination process is performed to perform processing corresponding to the command (S2101), and then received from the sound lamp control device 113. A sub-command determination process is performed in which the determined command is determined and a process corresponding to the command is performed (S2102). Next, a rental ball prize ball counting process for counting the number of balls and possession balls is executed (S2103), and then a normal ball counter 213c or In addition to adding to or subtracting from one of the lucky center ball counters 213d, a firing ball counting process for allowing the launch control device 112 to permit or prohibit launching of the balls according to the values of the normal time ball counter 213c and the lucky center ball counter 213d. Execute (S2104). When the member card 300 is inserted into the card sand device 70, the ball lending button 74 of the card sand device 70 is operated, or the return button 75 of the card sand device 70 is operated, the member card The payment processing for transferring the possessed ball data stored in 300 to the pachinko machine 10 or the owned ball data stored in the pachinko machine 10 to the member card 300 is executed (S2105), and the periodic processing is performed. Exit.

  For details of the main command determination process (S2101), refer to FIG. 24. For details of the subcommand determination process (S2102), refer to FIG. Referring to FIG. 28, details of the fired ball counting process (S2104) will be described later with reference to FIG. 29, and details of the settlement process (S2105) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the process of S2105, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 (S2106). If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 (S2106: Yes), a power failure occurs. Alternatively, the power is shut off when the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 13 has been executed. The

  First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S2108), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the launch control device 112) (S2109). . Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S2110), access to the RAM 213 is prohibited (S2111), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 213.

  Note that the processing in 2106 is executed at the timing when the series of processing performed in S2101 to S2105 ends or when one cycle of the processing in S2106 performed within the remaining time ends. Therefore, in the main process of the frame overall control device 111, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each process is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, Can be started from the processing of S2101. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of S2101 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup processing. Therefore, the contents of each register used by the MPU 211 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the process at power-off, and the stack pointer is not changed in the initial setting process (S2008). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process can start from S2101. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the frame overall control device 111 and to perform accurate control without causing the frame overall control device 111 to malfunction or run away.

  As a result of the processing of S2106, if the occurrence information of power interruption is not stored in the RAM 213 (S2106: No), the power failure signal SG1 is not output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 and the power is not shut off. It is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next periodic process (the processes of S2101 to S2105) has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (1 millisecond in the first embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous periodic process ( S2107) If the predetermined time has already passed (S2107: Yes), the process proceeds to S2101 and the processes after S2101 are repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S2107: No), the process returns to S2106 until the predetermined time is reached, and the process of S2106 is repeatedly executed.

  Next, the main command determination process (S2101) executed in the main process (see FIG. 23) by the MPU 211 in the frame overall control apparatus 111 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the main command determination process. The main command determination process (S2101) is to determine a command received from the main controller 110 and perform a process corresponding to the command.

  The command received from main controller 110 is temporarily stored in a command storage area for main commands provided in RAM 213. The command storage area for the main command is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. In the main command determination process, among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area for the main command, the first stored command is read, the command is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. .

  In the main command determination process, first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area for main commands provided in the RAM 213, analyzed, and from the main control device 110. It is determined whether an initialization command has been received (S2201). If it is determined that the initialization command is received (S2201: Yes), the work area of the RAM 213 is cleared to “0” (S2202), and the initial value of the RAM 213 is set by setting the initial value at the time of initialization in the work area. The setting is performed (S2203), and the work area of the RAM 213 is initialized. Then, a count permission signal is transmitted to the card sand device 70 provided corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 (S2205), and the main command determination process is terminated. Upon receiving the count permission signal from the frame overall control device 111, the card sand device 70 can accept the membership card 300 on the condition that the setting of the lending rate has been completed based on the signal from the hall computer 263. It becomes a state. Thereby, a lending signal is transmitted from the card sand device 70 in a state where the work area of the RAM 213 is initialized, and counting of the number of possessed balls can be started from the initialized state. .

  If it is determined that the initialization command has not been received as a result of the processing of S2201 (S2201: No), it is then determined whether a return command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2204). If it is determined that a return command has been received (S2204: Yes), the process proceeds to the above-described processing of S2205, and a count permission signal is transmitted to the card sand device 70 provided corresponding to the pachinko machine 10. (S2205), the main command determination process is terminated. Thus, the card sand device 70 accepts the membership card 300 on the condition that the setting of the lending rate is completed based on the signal from the hall computer 263 while the value of the work area of the RAM 213 is held. Since it becomes possible, the ball lending signal is transmitted from the card sand device 70 while the value of the work area of the RAM 213 is maintained, and counting of the number of possessed balls can be started from that state. .

  If it is determined that the return command has not been received as a result of the process of S2204 (S2204: No), it is then determined whether or not a prize ball addition command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2206). If it is determined that the prize ball addition command has been received (S2206: Yes), the prize ball addition flag 213a is turned on (S2207), and the prize ball number information indicated by the received prize ball addition command is stored in the RAM 213. Temporarily stored in the sphere buffer 213b (S2208). In accordance with whether or not the number of winning balls indicated by the winning ball number information stored in the processing of S2208 is during a lucky period in the rented winning ball counting process (see FIG. 28) described later, It is added to one of the central ball counters 213d. Thereafter, the main command determination process is terminated.

  If it is determined as a result of the processing of S2206 that no prize ball addition command has been received (S2206: No), it is then determined whether or not a command related to variable display has been received from the main control device 110 (S2209). If a command related to fluctuation display, that is, a fluctuation pattern command, a stop type command, a confirmation command, or a held ball number command is received (S2209: Yes), the voice lamp control device 113 displays fluctuation according to the command related to fluctuation display. In order to generate a command for executing the command, a variable display command setting process is performed (S2210), and the main command determination process is terminated. The variation display command setting process (S2210) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As a result of the processing of S2209, when it is determined that a command related to variation display has not been received (S2209: No), it is then determined whether or not a command related to jackpot has been received from the main controller 110 (S2211). If a command related to a jackpot, that is, a fanfare command, an ending command, or the like has been received (S2211: Yes), a command for causing the sound lamp control device 113 to execute a jackpot display is generated according to the command related to the jackpot, and a fanfare command For receiving the ending command, and for receiving the ending command, settings necessary for giving the lucky period (setting of the open extension flag 213f on and the setting of the frame side short time counter 213k value) are made. Therefore, a jackpot display command setting process is performed (S2212), and the main command determination process is terminated. The jackpot display command setting process (S2212) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined as a result of the processing of S2211 that a command related to jackpot has not been received (S2211: No), it is then determined whether or not a time reduction subtraction command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2213). If it is determined that the time reduction subtraction command has not been received (S2213: No), it is determined whether another command has been received, processing corresponding to the other command is executed (S2223), and the main command The determination process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time reduction subtraction command has been received (S2213: Yes), it means that the variation display of the third symbol in the “time reduction state” has been executed once, so the value of the frame side time reduction counter 213k is "1" is subtracted (S2214), and the display time reduction subtraction command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 to indicate to the audio lamp control device 113 that the time reduction count has decreased by 1 (S2215), and the processing proceeds to S2216. Transition.

  In the processing of S2216, it is determined whether or not the value of the frame-side time reduction counter 213k obtained by subtracting “1” is smaller than “0” (S2216). In this determination, the value of the frame-side short time counter 213k may be “0” or less in consideration of the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, the comparison determination is “0” or less instead of “0” coincidence determination. It is carried out. As a result of the confirmation, if the value of the frame side short time counter 213k is not “0” or less, that is, if the value is larger than “0” (S2216), since it is still in the “time shortening state”, special processing is performed. The main command determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the frame side hour / count counter 213k is “0” or less (S2216: Yes), the process proceeds to S2217.

  In the process of S2217, since the “time reduction state” ends, the release extension flag 213f is set to OFF (S2217), and then it is determined whether only the start flag 213j is ON (S2218). When the start flag 213j is not independently turned on (S2218: No), that is, the state where the unrestricted flag 213h and the lucky flag 213i other than the start flag 213j are turned on is not the “start” state but the “unrestricted” state. Or the “lucky” state of the lucky period, the main command determination process is terminated without performing any special processing to continue the lucky period even after the “time reduction state” is terminated.

  On the other hand, when only the start flag 213j is turned on in the processing of S2218 (S2218: Yes), the start flag 213j is set to OFF in order to end the “start” state because it is in the “start” state. Then, the remaining number 0 command indicating that the “start” state has ended is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (S2220). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the remaining number 0 command from the frame overall control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113 recognizes that the “start” state has ended, and drives the shutter accessory 228 to perform the third symbol display device 81. And let the player recognize that the “start” state has ended.

  After the processing of S2220, since the lucky period has ended, in order to prevent the possession ball data relating to the lucky ball stored in the lucky central ball counter 213d from being used in subsequent games, the lucky central ball counter The value of 213d is added to the unusable area 213e (S2221), the value of the lucky central ball counter 213d is cleared to “0” (S2222), and the main command determination process is terminated. In this way, by providing the frame-side time reduction counter 213k so that the frame overall control device 111 can grasp the digestion status of the “time reduction state”, the control related to the lucky period is completed within the frame overall control device 111. In addition, since it is not necessary to manage the lucky period on the main controller 110 side, the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

  Next, the variable display command setting process (S2210) executed in the main command determination process (see FIG. 24) by the MPU 211 in the frame overall control device 111 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the change display command setting process. The variation display command setting process (S2210) mainly performs processing for transmitting a command related to variation display received from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and whether or not the “start” state is present when the variation pattern command is received. In the “start” state, the digestion status in the “start” state is confirmed by the frame side short time counter 213k, and the predetermined digestion status (for example, 50 times or 90 times) In this case, a process of transmitting a remaining number command indicating the digestion status to the sound lamp control device 113 is performed.

  In the variation display command setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the command related to variation display received from the main control device 110 is a variation pattern command (S2301). If it is determined that a variation pattern command has not been received (S2301: No), the process proceeds to S2308, whereas if it is determined that a variation pattern command has been received (S2301: Yes), the sound lamp control device In order to cause 113 to perform a variable display, a display variation pattern command corresponding to the received variation pattern command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (S2302), and the process proceeds to S2303.

  In the process of S2303, it is determined whether or not only the start flag 213j is on (S2203). When the start flag 213j is not on by itself (S2203: No), that is, when any of the flags 213h to 213j is not on, or when the unrestricted flag 213h and the lucky flag 213i are on in addition to the start flag 213j Since it is not the “start” state, the “unlimited” state or the “lucky” state lucky period, or the “normal game state” other than the lucky period, the subsequent processing is skipped and this variable display command setting process is performed. finish.

  On the other hand, if only the start flag 213j is turned on in the processing of S2303 (S2303: Yes), it is in the “start” state. In the case of a predetermined determination value, any remaining number command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in order to notify the digest status of the “start” state.

  In the processing of S2304, it is determined whether or not the value of the frame side time reduction counter 213k is “50” (S2304). As a result of the confirmation, if the value of the frame-side hourly counter 213k is “50” (S2304: Yes), the variation display of the third symbol in the “time reduction state” in the “start” state is executed 50 times. Therefore, a remaining number 50 command indicating that the remaining number of time reductions (the number of “start” states) is 50 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (S2305), and the process proceeds to S2306. On the other hand, if the value of the frame side hour / count counter 213k is not “50” (S2304: No), the process of S2305 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2306.

  In the process of S2306, it is determined whether or not the value of the frame side time reduction counter 213k is “10” (S2306). As a result of the confirmation, if the value of the frame-side time reduction counter 213k is “10” (S2306: Yes), the variation display of the third symbol in the “time reduction state” in the “start” state is executed 90 times. Therefore, the remaining number of times 10 command indicating that the remaining number of time reductions (the number of “start” states) is 10 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (S2307), and this variable display command setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the frame-side short time counter 213k is not “10” (S2306: No), the process of S2307 is skipped, and this variable display command setting process is terminated.

  As described above, when the frame overall control device 111 receives the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, the frame overall control device 111 determines the setting status of the flags 213h to 213j related to the lucky period, and also determines the value of the frame-side time counter 213k. Thus, it is possible to cause the sound lamp control device 113 to perform an effect according to the digestion status in the “start” state. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the remaining number 50 command or the remaining number 10 command from the frame overall control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the digestion status of the “start” state, and according to the type of the command, the shutter accessory By driving 228, the third symbol display device 81 is gradually covered, and the player can recognize the digestion status (remaining number of times) in the “start” state.

  In the process of S2308, it is determined whether or not the command related to the variable display received from the main controller 110 is a stop type command (S2308). When it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S2308: Yes), in order to cause the sound lamp control device 113 to execute the variable display, the display stop type command corresponding to the received stop type command is set to the sound lamp control device. 113 (S2309), and the variable display command setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S2308: No), the process proceeds to S2310.

  In the process of S2310, it is determined whether or not the command related to the variable display received from the main control device 110 is a confirmed command (S2310). When it is determined that the confirmation command is received (S2310: Yes), the display confirmation command corresponding to the received confirmation command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in order to stop the sound lamp control device 113 from changing display. (S2311), and the variable display command setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the confirmation command has not been received (S2310: No), the process proceeds to S2312.

  In the process of S2312, it is determined whether or not the command related to the variable display received from the main control device 110 is a pending ball number command (S2312). When it is determined that the held ball number command has been received (S2312: Yes), the display hold ball corresponding to the received held ball number command is used so that the voice lamp control device 113 recognizes the held ball number of the variable display. The number command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (S2313), and the variable display command setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S2312: No), the process of S2313 is skipped, and the variable display command setting process is terminated. After the change display command setting process ends, the process returns to the main command determination process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the jackpot display command setting process (S2212) executed in the main command determination process (see FIG. 24) by the MPU 211 in the frame overall control device 111 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the jackpot display command setting process. The jackpot display command setting process (S2212) mainly performs a process of transmitting a command related to the jackpot received from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113, and at the time of receiving a fanfare command indicating the start of the jackpot, When the “time reduction state” is started upon reception of an ending command indicating the end of jackpot, processing for setting the value of the frame side short time counter 213k is performed.

  In the jackpot display command setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the command related to the jackpot received from the main controller 110 is a fanfare command (S2401). When it is determined that the fanfare command has been received (S2401: Yes), the display fanfare command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 (S2402), and then it is determined whether or not the release extension flag 213f is turned on (S2403). ). If the release extension flag 213f is turned on at the time of receiving the fanfare command (S2403: Yes), it is a big hit in the “high probability state” or “time shortened state”, that is, a big hit in the “village state”. The flag for the lucky period is not set, the release extension flag 213f is set to OFF (S2404), and the jackpot display command setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2403 that the release extension flag 213f is not turned on (S2403: No), it is a big hit in the “normal gaming state”, that is, a “first time” big hit, so the lucky period The processing moves to S2406 in order to set a flag related to S2406.

  In the process of S2406, the type of lucky period is determined based on the value stored in the jackpot result memory 213g representing the symbol when the jackpot is reached (S2406). For example, if the value stored in the jackpot result memory 213g is a value corresponding to the start condition in the “unlimited” state stored in the unlimited condition memory 213m (ie, “7”), the type of lucky period is “ The state is determined to be “unlimited” (S2406: “unlimited”). Therefore, in this case, the unlimited flag 213h is set to ON (S2407), and the gaming state thereafter is set to the “unlimited” state. Then, the unlimited movable accessory 95 is driven (S2408) to indicate to the player and the staff of the game hall that the “unlimited” state has started, and the jackpot display command setting process is terminated. In the processing of S2407, when other movable actors 96, 97 other than the unlimited movable accessory 95 are driven, the driving of the other movable actors 96, 97 is stopped, and the unlimited movable accessory 95 is stopped. Is configured to appear.

  In the processing of S2406, when the value stored in the jackpot result memory 213g is a value corresponding to the start condition in the “lucky” state (ie, “3” or “5”) (S2406: “lucky”). In the “normal game state”, a jackpot due to “3 symbols (turtles)” or “5 symbols (shrimp)” has occurred, so that it matches the start condition of the “lucky” state stored in the lucky condition memory 213n. Then, the lucky flag 213i is set to ON (S2409), and the subsequent gaming state is set to the “lucky” state. Then, on condition that the unlimited movable combination 95 is not driven, the lucky movable combination 96 is driven (S2410), and it is suggested to the player and the staff of the playground that the “lucky” state is started. This jackpot display command setting process is terminated. In the process of S2410, when the start movable combination 97 is driven, the start movable combination 97 is stopped and the lucky movable combination 96 appears.

  In the first embodiment, the unlimited flag 213h, the lucky flag 213i, and the start flag 213j are configured to be turned on at the same time. > Lucky flag 213i> Start flag 213j) is preferentially reflected in the lucky period. For example, when the unlimited flag 213h and the lucky flag 213i are respectively set to ON, the lucky period in the “unlimited” state is set. Further, when the lucky flag 213i and the start flag 213j are respectively set to ON, the lucky period in the “lucky” state is set.

  In the processing of S2406, when the value stored in the jackpot result memory 213g is a value corresponding to the end condition of the “lucky” state (ie, “4”) (S2406: “lucky end”), “normal” In the “gaming state”, it means that a big hit with “4 symbols (shark)” has occurred, so it matches the end condition of the “lucky” state stored in the lucky condition memory 213n. In order to check whether or not, it is determined whether or not the lucky flag 213i is turned on (S2411). If it is determined that the lucky flag 213i is turned on (S2411: Yes), the processing is performed to set the lucky flag 213i to off in order to end the “lucky” state (S2412) and shift to the “start” state. To S2413. On the other hand, if the lucky flag 213i is not turned on in the processing of S2411 (S2411: No), it means that a big hit of “4 symbols (shark)” has occurred in the “first time” without being in the “lucky” state. The process of S2412 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2413.

  In the processing of S2406, the value stored in the jackpot result memory 213g is other values other than the values described above, that is, “1”, “2”, “6”, “8”, or “9”. In this case (S2406: “Start”), the start condition is the start condition. Therefore, the processes of S2411 and S2412 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S2413.

  In the process of S2413, the start flag 213j is set to ON (S2413), and the subsequent gaming state is set to the “start” state on condition that it is not another lucky period. Then, on the condition that the other movable combination objects 95 and 96 are not driven, the start movable combination 97 is driven (S2414), and the player and the staff of the game hall indicate that the “start” state is started. This jackpot display command setting process is terminated.

  As described above, when receiving the fanfare command indicating the start of the jackpot, the values of the release extension flag 213f and the jackpot result memory 213g are determined and the lucky period is set, so that the “first time” which is not in the “village state” is set. A lucky period can be set at the time of a big hit.

  If it is determined in the process of S2401 that the command related to the jackpot received from the main controller 110 is not a fanfare command (S2401: No), then it is determined whether or not the command related to the jackpot received from the main controller 110 is an ending command. (S2415). If an ending command has not been received (S2415: No), the processing of S2416 to S2420 is skipped and processing according to other commands (for example, round number command etc.) is performed (S2405). The setting process ends. On the other hand, if the ending command has been received (S2415: Yes), the display ending command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 (S2416), the open extension flag 213f is set to ON (S2417), and the “high probability state” Alternatively, it is set to be recognizable that the “time reduction state” has been started, and the process proceeds to S2418.

  In the processing of S2418, it is determined whether or not the gaming state after the jackpot is “time reduction state” (S2418). This determination may be made by a state command indicating a gaming state transmitted from the main control device 110. As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the “time reduction state” has been entered (S2418: Yes), in order to grasp the digestion status of the “time reduction state”, the value of the frame side time reduction counter 213k is set to “100”. This is set (S2419), and the jackpot display command setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the state has not entered the “time reduction state” (S2418: No), it means that the state is a “high probability state”, and therefore the value of the frame side short time counter 213k is cleared to “0” ( S2420), the jackpot display command setting process is terminated.

  In the first embodiment, the frame-side time reduction counter 213k is used for grasping the digestion status of the “start” state. Therefore, in the “unlimited” state or the “lucky” state, the “time reduction state” is set. Even if it exists, it is not necessary to grasp the digestion status of the “time reduction state”. Therefore, when the entry to the “time reduction state” is determined in the processing of S2418, it is determined whether or not it is in the “start” state, and the value of the frame side short time counter 213k is only in the “start” state. It may be configured to set. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to grasp and manage the digestion status of the “time reduction state” other than the “start” state, so that the control burden on the frame overall control device 111 can be reduced.

  Next, a subcommand determination process (S2102) executed in the main process (see FIG. 23) by the MPU 211 in the frame overall control device 111 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the subcommand determination process. The sub-command determination process (S2102) is to determine a command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and perform a process corresponding to the command.

  The command received from the voice lamp control device 113 is temporarily stored in a command storage area for subcommands provided in the RAM 213. The command storage area for the subcommand is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. In the subcommand determination process, among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area for the subcommand, the first stored command is read, the command is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. .

  In the subcommand determination process, first, the first command received from the voice lamp control device 113 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area for the subcommand provided in the RAM 213, analyzed, and the voice lamp control device. It is determined whether or not a jackpot symbol command is received from 113 (S2501). The jackpot symbol command is a command indicating the contents of the jackpot symbol determined by the sound lamp control device 113 when the variation display of the third symbol is confirmed and displayed as a jackpot. If it is determined that the jackpot symbol command has been received (S2501: Yes), the jackpot symbol information indicated by the jackpot symbol command is set in the jackpot result memory 213g (S2502), and the subcommand determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that a jackpot symbol command has not been received (S2501: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S2503), and the subcommand determination processing is terminated.

  In this way, the frame overall control device 111 receives the jackpot symbol command related to the symbol type of the third symbol that generated the jackpot from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the jackpot symbol information indicated by the jackpot symbol command in the jackpot result memory 213g. By storing them, the type of jackpot symbol determined by the sound lamp control device 113 can be grasped. Therefore, by performing the control related to the lucky period and the control related to the determination of the jackpot symbol in the respective control devices 111 and 113, it is possible to prevent the control from becoming complicated while distributing the respective processing loads. .

  Further, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command from the frame overall control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113 determines the jackpot symbol command and transmits the jackpot symbol command to the frame overall control device 111. It is configured. Therefore, the frame overall control device 111 can grasp the type of jackpot symbol at the start of the variable display, and grasps the type of jackpot symbol that generated the jackpot when setting the lucky period at the beginning of the subsequent jackpot. In this state, accurate control can be performed in giving during the lucky period.

  In the first embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to determine the contents of the jackpot symbol and the variation pattern in the variation display of the third symbol. On the other hand, the frame general control device 111 may be configured to determine the jackpot symbol and the variation pattern of the variation display of the third symbol. With this configuration, it is not necessary to transmit / receive information regarding the big hit symbol between the frame overall control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113, and thus the control burden can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the rental ball winning ball counting process (S2103) executed in the main process (see FIG. 23) by the MPU 211 in the frame overall control device 111 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the rented ball winning ball counting process. The rented ball award counting process is a process for counting the number of lent balls or the number of winning balls. It is determined whether to add to the normal time ball counter 213c or to the lucky central ball counter 213d.

  In this ball rental prize counting process, first, it is determined whether or not a ball rental signal is received from the card sand device 70 (S2601). As a result, when the rent signal is received (S2601: Yes), it means that the lending of the ball is instructed from the card sand device 70, so the number of lent balls included in the rent signal is extracted, The extracted number of rented balls is added to the normal hourly ball counter 213c (S2602). Thereby, it becomes possible to use a lending ball for a game as a common ball. Then, a reception completion signal notifying that the lending ball signal has been received is transmitted to the card sand device 70 (S2603), and the process proceeds to S2604. On the other hand, as a result of the process of S2601, if a lending signal has not been received from the card sand device 70 (S2601: No), the process proceeds to S2604 as it is.

  In the process of S2604, it is determined whether or not the prize ball addition flag 213a is on (S2604). When the prize ball addition flag 213a is on (S2604: Yes), a prize ball addition command is received from the main controller 110. That is, it means that there is a prize ball, so after setting the prize ball addition flag 213a to OFF (S2605), it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is in any lucky period (S2606). . Whether or not it is during the lucky period is determined by whether or not any of the unlimited flag 213h, the lucky flag 213i, or the start flag 213j is turned on. As a result of the determination, if it is determined that one of the lucky periods is in effect (S2606: Yes), since it is a winning ball during the lucky period, all the winning ball number information stored in the winning ball buffer 213b is lucky. The ball is added to the lucky central ball counter 213d (S2607), the value of the prize ball buffer 213b is cleared to "0" (S2609), and the present ball rental prize ball counting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that no lucky period is in effect (S2606: No), the winning ball is out of the lucky period, and therefore all the information regarding the number of winning balls stored in the winning ball buffer 213b is used as a shareable ball. The normal time ball counter 213c is added (S2608), and the process proceeds to S2609.

  By the processing from S2606 to S2608, a storage area to which a prize ball is added is selected according to whether or not it is during the lucky period, and the prize balls acquired during the lucky period and outside the lucky period can be managed individually. As a result, during the lucky period, it is possible to play any possessed ball data (sharable ball and lucky ball) of the normal hour ball counter 213c or the lucky central ball counter 213d, while after the lucky period, the lucky central ball counter Since it is possible to prohibit games based on possession ball data related to lucky balls stored in 213d, it is possible to realize various gaming characteristics in various gaming states by using different gaming values for each gaming state. it can.

  Next, the shot ball counting process (S2104) executed in the main process (see FIG. 23) by the MPU 211 in the frame overall control device 111 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this shot ball counting process. The shot ball counting process (S2104) is a process of subtracting the player's possession ball data according to whether or not it is a lucky period when a ball is launched by the ball launch unit 66. In addition, when the ball fired by the ball launching unit 66 does not reach the game area of the game board 13 and becomes a foul ball, the shot ball counting process is performed according to whether the player has a lucky period or not. This is a process of adding data. Further, the shot ball counting process also performs a process of instructing the launch control apparatus 112 to permit or prohibit launch depending on whether or not the player has possession ball data that can be used for the game.

  In the shot ball counting process, first, it is determined whether or not the shot ball detection switch 94 is on (S2701). If it is determined that the shot ball detection switch 94 is on (S2701: Yes), it is then determined whether the current gaming state is in any lucky period (S2702). Whether or not it is during the lucky period is determined by whether or not any of the unlimited flag 213h, the lucky flag 213i, or the start flag 213j is turned on. As a result of the determination, if it is determined that no lucky period is in effect (S2702: No), it means that the ball has been launched outside the lucky period, so “1” is subtracted from the value of the normal time ball counter 213c. (S2705), the process proceeds to S2706. On the other hand, if it is determined that one of the lucky periods is in progress (S2702: Yes), it means that the ball has been fired during the lucky period. Next, the value of the lucky central ball counter 213d is “0”. It is determined whether it is larger (S2703). If the value of the lucky central ball counter 213d is larger than “0” (S2703: Yes), the ball launching based on the possessed ball data of the lucky central ball counter 213d during the lucky period is determined as “1” from the value of the lucky central ball counter 213d. "Is subtracted (S2704), and the process proceeds to S2706. On the other hand, if the value of the lucky central ball counter 213d is not larger than “0” (S2703: No), the lucky central ball counter 213d to be decremented during the lucky period has no possession ball data, and the normal central ball counter 213c has As a ball launch based on the ball data, “1” is subtracted from the value of the normal time ball counter 213c (S2705), and the process proceeds to S2706.

  In this way, when a ball is launched from the ball launching unit 66, it is determined whether or not it is during the lucky period, and if it is during the lucky period, the value of the lucky central ball counter 213d is determined and determined. By configuring so that the value of the normal time ball counter 213c or the lucky central ball counter 213d is subtracted based on the result, it is possible to preferentially digest the lucky ball having a low game value for the player during the lucky period.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, since the launch ball detection switch 94 is provided in the vicinity of the launch position of the ball, it is possible to immediately detect a ball that has been launched from the launch solenoid and passed on the launch rail 63. It is configured as follows. Therefore, it is possible to detect the launch ball at an interval (for example, 0.05 s) shorter than the launch interval (0.6 s in the first embodiment) at which the next ball is launched after the ball is launched, and based on the detection. By subtracting the value of the normal time ball counter 213c or the lucky middle ball counter 213d, the ball data of the player's ball can be updated before the next ball is launched, and the player has no ball It is possible to prevent the ball from being launched.

  In the process of S2706, it is determined whether or not the foul ball detection switch 93 is on (S2706). If it is determined that the foul ball detection switch 93 is on (S2706: Yes), it means that the ball fired from the ball launching unit has not reached the game area of the game board 13 and has been collected as a foul ball. Therefore, in order to add the possessed ball data for the foul ball, it is next determined whether or not the current gaming state is in any lucky period (S2707). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that one of the lucky periods is in progress (S2707: Yes), it means that a foul ball has occurred during the lucky period. After addition (S2708), the process proceeds to S2710. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not in any lucky period (S2707: No), it means that a foul ball has been generated outside the lucky period, so “1” is added to the value of the normal hour ball counter 213c ( S2709), the process proceeds to S2710.

  As described above, the ball data related to the sharable ball stored in the normal time ball counter 213c has higher versatility than the ball data stored in the lucky central ball counter 213d and has a higher game value by the player. Therefore, during the lucky period, if the launch ball based on the value of the lucky central ball counter 213d becomes a foul ball, if the value of the normal time ball counter 213c is added, the player deliberately during the lucky period By generating the foul ball, the ball data of the lucky central ball counter 213d can be converted as the ball data of the normal hour ball counter 213c, and the gameability of the lucky number system is disrupted. Therefore, as in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a foul ball is generated during the lucky period, it is possible to prevent the above problem from occurring by configuring the counter to be added to the lucky central ball counter 213d. Can be prevented, and the gameability of the lucky number system can be maintained. Further, during the lucky period, the value of the lucky central ball counter 213d is configured to be used for launching with priority over the value of the normal hour ball counter 213c. Therefore, even when the foul ball based on the value of the normal time ball counter 213c is stored in the lucky central ball counter 213d, the value stored in the lucky central ball counter 213d based on the foul ball is immediately Therefore, there is no substantial loss for the player. Therefore, an appropriate gaming environment can be provided without substantially detracting from the gaming value possessed by the player.

  In the first embodiment, it is identified whether the launch ball that has become a foul ball during the lucky period is a ball based on the value of the normal time ball counter 213c or a ball based on the value of the lucky central ball counter 213d. Absent. Therefore, if the fire ball based on the sharable ball of the normal time ball counter 213c becomes the foul ball due to the lack of possession data regarding the lucky ball in the lucky ball counter 213d during the lucky period, the value of the normal time ball counter 213c For example, when the value of the lucky central ball counter 213d is not preferentially used over the value of the normal time ball counter 213c, because it is added to the lucky central ball counter 213d despite being based on In addition, there is a problem that the game value of the player is damaged. Therefore, when a foul ball is generated during the lucky period, it is determined whether the foul ball is a shot ball based on the lucky middle ball counter 213d or a shot ball based on the normal time ball counter 213c, and the normal time ball counter 213c is determined. When the ball is a launch ball based on the value of “”, “1” may be added to the normal time ball counter 213c. With this configuration, when a foul ball is generated with respect to a launch ball based on the value of the normal time ball counter 213c even during the lucky period, it can be returned (added) to the value of the normal time ball counter 213c. Therefore, it is possible to provide an appropriate gaming environment without damaging the gaming value possessed by the player more than necessary.

  In the process of S2710, it is determined whether or not the value of the lucky central ball counter 213d is greater than “0” (S2710). If the value of the lucky center ball counter 213d is larger than “0” (S2710: Yes), it means that the player has the lucky ball possession ball data during the lucky period. The permission is instructed to the launch control device 112 (S2711), and the process proceeds to S2714. On the other hand, if the value of the lucky central ball counter 213d is not greater than “0” (S2710: No), it means that at least the lucky central ball counter 213d does not store the possession ball data owned by the player. Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal time ball counter 213c is greater than “0” (S2712).

  In the processing of S2712, if the value of the normal time ball counter 213c is larger than “0” (S2712: Yes), it means that the player has possessable ball data of the sharable ball, so that the ball is permitted to be launched. Is instructed to the launch control device 112 (S2711), and the process proceeds to S2714. On the other hand, if the value of the normal time ball counter 213c is not larger than “0” (S2712: No), it means that the player has neither possession ball data regarding the lucky ball nor possession ball data regarding the shareable ball. This means that the launch control apparatus 112 is instructed to prohibit launching the ball (S2713), and the process proceeds to S2714.

  In the processing of S2714, a possessed ball command is generated based on the values of the normal time ball counter 213c and the lucky central ball counter 213d updated in S2701 to S2709 and the value of the unusable area 213e. This is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (S2714), and this shot ball counting process is terminated. The voice lamp control device 113 that has received the possessed ball command instructs the display control device 114 to perform display control based on the possessed ball command. The contents of the command are displayed in the value information display area 85c of the status display device 85.

  In the first embodiment, the possessed ball command is issued at regular intervals (every 1 millisecond) in the main process regardless of the update of the values of the normal time ball counter 213c, the lucky central ball counter 213d and the unusable area 213e. It is configured to generate and send. On the other hand, the possessed ball command may be generated and transmitted when the value of the normal time ball counter 213c, the lucky middle ball counter 213d, or the unusable area 213e is updated. In addition, the values of the normal time ball counter 213c, the lucky central ball counter 213d, and the unusable area 213e are determined not by the main process but by a timer interrupt process executed at regular intervals (for example, every second). You may comprise so that a possessed ball command may be produced | generated. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the MPU 211 as compared to the case where the possessed ball command is generated every time during the main process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the settlement process (S2105) executed in the main process (see FIG. 23) by the MPU 211 in the frame overall control device 111 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the settlement process. In the checkout process, when the membership card 300 is inserted into the card sand device 70, the possession ball data relating to the sharable balls stored in the membership card 300 is received and used on the pachinko machine 10 side. When the return button 75 of the card sand device 70 is operated, possessed ball data relating to the sharable balls, lucky balls, and unusable balls stored at that time is transmitted to the card sand device 70, and the member card This is a process for paying a game by recording in 300.

  In this settlement process, first, based on the membership card 300 being inserted into the card insertion slot 72 of the card sand device 70, it is determined whether or not an insertion signal has been received from the card sand device 70 (S2801). If the insertion signal is received from the card sand device 70 (S2801: Yes), the possessed ball related to the sharable ball stored in the normal time memory 300c of the membership card 300 transmitted from the card sand device 70 following the insertion signal. The data is added to the normal time ball counter 213c (S2802), and the process proceeds to S2803. If the insertion signal has not been received from the card sand device 70 (S2801: No), the process of S2802 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2803.

  In the process of S2802, the possessed ball data related to the sharable balls stored in the normal time memory 300c is added to the normal time ball counter 213c. When the possessed ball data in the normal time memory 300c is reflected in the normal time ball counter 213c, the possessed ball data may already be stored in the normal time ball counter 213c. By updating the possessed ball data, it is possible to reflect the possessed ball data related to the sharable balls stored in the normal time memory 300c while maintaining the value of the normal time ball counter 213c that has already been stored. In particular, at the start of the game, if the member card 300 is inserted into the card insertion slot 72 in the middle of playing the game with the guest card without using the member card 300, the normal time counter 213c has already been inserted. May have possession ball data. Therefore, when the membership card 300 is inserted, by updating the possessed ball data of the normal time ball counter 213c by adding the value of the normal time memory 300c, an appropriate game environment can be obtained without impairing the game value possessed by the player. Can be provided.

  On the other hand, when the possessed ball data in the normal time memory 300c is reflected on the normal time ball counter 213c, if the value of the normal time ball counter 213c is always set to “0”, the normal time is set by overwriting. The value of the sphere counter 213c may be updated. In particular, when the player card 300 is used and the game is played with the guest card without using the membership card 300, the specification of the membership card 300 is prohibited, that is, the value of the normal time counter 213c is If the specification is such that the membership card 300 cannot be inserted unless it becomes “0”, the membership card 300 cannot be inserted while the ball data relating to the sharable ball is stored in the normal time ball counter 213c. Therefore, even if the value of the normal time memory 300c is updated to the value of the normal time ball counter 213c by overwriting, the game value possessed by the player is not impaired.

  Thus, when the membership card 300 is inserted into the card sand device 70, only possessed ball data relating to the sharable balls in the normal time memory 300c of the membership card 300 is transmitted to the pachinko machine 10, and the game unusable memory 300d The possession ball data regarding the game unusable ball is configured not to be notified.

  In the processing of S2803, it is determined whether or not a return signal transmitted from the card sand device 70 is received when the return button 75 of the card sand device 70 is operated (S2803). If no return signal has been received (S2803: No), the settlement process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the return signal has been received from the card sand device 70 as a result of the processing in S2803 (S2803: Yes), the value of the normal time ball counter 213c (sharable ball) is notified to the card sand device 70. (S2804). In the card sand device 70, the possessed ball data relating to the shareable balls is converted into points at a predetermined exchange rate, and the converted points are cumulatively added to the normal time memory 300c of the member card 300.

  Thereafter, the value of the normal time ball counter 213c is cleared to “0” (S2805), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the lucky central ball counter 213d is greater than “0” (S2806). It is determined whether or not possessed ball data relating to a lucky ball of “1” or more is stored in the lucky central ball counter 213d. If possessed ball data relating to a lucky ball of “1” or more is stored in the lucky ball counter 213d (S2806: Yes), the value (lucky ball) of the lucky ball counter 213d is notified to the card sand device 70 (S2807). ). Then, the value of the lucky central ball counter 213d is cleared to “0” (S2808), and the process proceeds to S2809. In the card sand device 70, the possessed ball data relating to the lucky ball is converted into points at a predetermined exchange rate, and the converted points are cumulatively added to the game unusable memory 300d of the member card 300. In the processing of S2806, if possessed ball data relating to a lucky ball of “1” or more is not stored in the value of the lucky central ball counter 213d (S2806: No), the processing of S2807 and S2808 is skipped and the processing is performed. The process moves to S2809.

  In the process of S2809, it is determined whether possessed ball data relating to a game unusable ball of “1” or more is stored in the unusable area 213e (S2809). If possessed ball data relating to a game unusable ball of “1” or more is stored in the unusable area 213e (S2809: Yes), a lucky period is given in the previous game, and a lucky ball acquired during the lucky period Is stored as a game unusable ball after the end of the lucky period, the value of the unusable area 213e (game unusable ball) is notified to the card sand device 70 (S2810). Then, the value of the unusable area 213e is cleared to “0” (S2811), and the process proceeds to S2812. In the card sand device 70, the possessed ball data relating to the game unusable balls is converted into points at a predetermined exchange rate, and the converted points are cumulatively added to the game unusable memory 300d of the member card 300. In the process of S2809, if there is no possession ball data relating to a game unusable ball of “1” or more in the unusable area 213e (S2809: No), the process of S2810 and S2811 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2812. .

  In the process of S2812, in order to end the lucky period with the return operation, the values of the unlimited flag 213h, the lucky flag 213i, and the start flag 213j are all set to OFF (S2812), and then the frame-side time reduction counter 213k is set. The value is cleared to “0” (S2813), and then a display return command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 (S2814). This settlement process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. At this time, the card sand device 70 discharges the member card 300 storing the accumulated normal time memory 300c and the game unusable memory 300d from the card insertion slot 72.

  In the first embodiment, when the return button 75 is operated by the player during the lucky period, it is determined that the player has no intention to continue the game, and the lucky period being executed is terminated. Yes. Therefore, when the player who has acquired the lucky period stops the game, the lucky period in the pachinko machine 10 can also be ended, without giving the lucky period to other players who have not acquired the lucky period. That's it. Further, when the return button 75 is operated by the player during the lucky period, the lucky period acquired by one pachinko machine 10 can be resumed by another pachinko machine by ending the lucky period being executed. It is configured not to be able to. Accordingly, it is possible to realize the gameability of the lucky number system that is dedicated to one person and one.

  In addition, when the lucky period is ended, the value of the frame side short time counter 213k is also cleared to “0”, so that when the new player starts the game, the remaining value of the frame side short time counter 213k Thus, the remaining number of times are produced, and the situation where the shutter accessory 228 is driven although it is not in the “start” state can be prevented.

  Furthermore, when the lucky period is ended in accordance with the operation of the return button 75, the operation of the return button 75 can be recognized by the audio lamp control device 113 by transmitting a display return command to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the display return command, even if it is in the “start” state and the shutter accessory 228 is driven to any state other than the initial state, Based on the reception of the display return command, the shutter accessory 228 can be returned to the initial state, and the game can be started without confusing the next player.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The MPU 221 is roughly classified into a timer interrupt process that is periodically executed, a command response process that is executed in the timer interrupt process, and a remaining number command response process that is executed in the command response process. There is.

  First, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. The timer interruption process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is a periodic process executed every 1 millisecond, for example.

  In the timer interrupt process, first, a command storage process for storing a command received from the frame overall control device 111 in a command storage area (not shown) of the RAM 223 is executed (S3001). The MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to receive a control command from the frame overall control device 111, executes the command storage process, and stores the command received from the frame overall control device 111 in the command storage area. Can be stored.

  In the first embodiment, the command storage process (S3001) described above is executed in the timer interrupt process. Instead, in another interrupt process (for example, a command reception interrupt process) or the like. You may comprise so that the process corresponding to a command storage process may be performed.

  Thereafter, in order to perform processing corresponding to the command stored in the command storage area, command corresponding processing is performed (S3002). Details of the command response processing will be described later. After the command handling process, a command output process for outputting the command generated by the command handling process to the frame overall control device 111 or the display control device 114 is executed (S3003). Thereby, the command generated by the sound lamp control device 113 is output to the frame overall control device 111 or the display control device 114, and the control based on the received command is executed in each of the control devices 111 and 114.

  After the process of S3003, a light emission control process for performing light emission control of various light emitting units including the lamp display device 227 is executed (S3004), and a sound control process for performing sound control of the sound output apparatus 226 is executed (S3004). S3005). Then, a movable accessory control process for controlling the driving of the movable accessory including the shutter accessory 228 is executed (S3006). The light emission control process (S3004), the voice control process (S3005), and the movable accessory control process (S3006) are configured to be executed based on the setting contents set in the command response process (S3002). Yes. After the process of S3006, a timer update process for updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of counters provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed (S3007), and then other processes are executed. In step S3008, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 32, the command response process (S3002) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this command response processing. The command handling process (S3002) is to determine a command received from the frame overall control device 111 and perform a process corresponding to the command.

  In the command response process (S3002), first, it is determined whether or not both the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are received from the frame overall control device 111 (S3101). When the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are not received, or when only one of the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command is received (S3101: No), the content of the variation display cannot be specified. Therefore, the process of S3102 to S3106 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3107.

  On the other hand, when both the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are received in the processing of S3101 (S3101: Yes), first, in order to determine the specific contents of the variation display, it is included in the display stop type command. The stop type determination process for determining the display result of the third symbol that is finally displayed in the current variation display is executed (S3102). In this stop type determination process, when the current variation display is won by a jackpot, the jackpot symbol to be jacked is determined and the jackpot symbol information is stored. Then, from the information included in the display fluctuation pattern command, the fluctuation time of the current fluctuation display is grasped, and whether or not reach display has occurred from the fluctuation display time, and when reach display occurs, which reach display is selected A variation pattern determination process for determining a variation pattern of variation display such as whether to perform or not is executed (S3103).

  Next, a lottery for determining whether or not to perform a notice effect in the current variable display and a notice lottery process for determining which notice effect to execute when it is determined to perform the notice effect are executed (S3104). As this notice effect, for example, a character design different from the 3rd design is displayed during execution of the variable display, the background screen of the variable display is changed to a mode different from the previous mode, or Included are effects such as changing the 3rd symbol display mode itself to a mode different from the previous mode. These notice effects can appear regardless of whether or not reach display occurs in the variable display, but the variable display that generates the reach display has a higher probability than the variable display that does not generate the reach display. It is set to occur. Also, in the lottery process, the variable display that wins the jackpot is more likely to generate a notice effect than the variable display that does not win the jackpot, and moreover, a lottery that makes it easy to generate a notice effect with a low appearance rate. I do.

  Next, in the process of S3105, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won in the current variation display (S3105). If it is determined that the jackpot is won (S3105: Yes), a jackpot symbol command based on the jackpot symbol information is generated, and the jackpot symbol command is set as a control command to the frame overall control device 111 ( S3106), the process proceeds to S3107. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is not won (S3105: No), the process of S3106 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3107.

  As described above, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command from the frame overall control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether or not it is a big hit. The jackpot symbol command corresponding to the type of the command is transmitted to the frame overall control device 111. Accordingly, the frame overall control device 111 grasps the type of jackpot symbol in the current variation display by the jackpot symbol command received from the sound lamp control device 113, sets the start of the lucky period, and ends the lucky period. Can be judged.

  In the process of S3107, it is determined whether or not a possessed ball command is received from the frame overall control device 111 (S3107). If the possessed ball command has been received (S3107: Yes), a possessed ball status command based on the possessed ball data indicated by the possessed ball command is generated, and the possessed ball status command is set as a control command to the display control device 114. (S3108), and the process proceeds to S3109. When the display control device 114 receives the possessed ball status command from the voice lamp control device 113, the value information of the status display device 85 indicates the contents of the shareable ball, the lucky ball, and the game unusable ball indicated by the possessed ball status command. Each is displayed in the display area 85c. On the other hand, if the possessed ball command is not received in the process of S3107 (S3107: No), the process of S3108 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3109.

  In the first embodiment, the balance data stored in the cash correspondence memory 300b of the membership card 300 is managed by the card sand device 70 and the membership card 300, but the balance data stored in the cash correspondence memory 300b. Is also configured to be displayed in the value information display area 85c of the status display device 85. Specifically, although not shown, the card sand device 70 reads the cash corresponding memory 300b of the membership card 300, notifies the balance control device 111 of the balance data, and the border control device 111 transmits the balance data to the voice. It is configured to be able to transmit to the display control device 114 via the lamp control device 113. The balance data based on the value of the cash corresponding memory 300b is configured to be transmitted when the ball lending process is performed and the value of the cash corresponding memory 300b is updated. The balance data may be read and transmitted at regular intervals (for example, every second).

  In the processing of S3109, it is determined whether or not a condition command has been received from the frame overall control device 111 (S3109). If the condition command has been received (S3109: Yes), a display condition command based on the lucky period condition information indicated by the condition command is generated, and the display condition command is set as a control command to the display control device 114 ( (S3110), the process proceeds to S3111. When the display control device 114 receives the display condition command from the audio lamp control device 113, the display condition command indicates the start and end conditions of the “unlimited” state and the “lucky” state, and the start of the “start” state. Condition and End Condition (In the first embodiment, the start condition of the “start” state is preset as a big hit other than the big hit corresponding to the “unlimited” state or the “lucky” state, and the end condition of the “start” state is: The end of the “time reduction state” at the time of the “start” state is set in advance in the lucky number display area 85 b of the status display device 85. On the other hand, if the condition command is not received in the process of S3109 (S3109: No), the process of S3110 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3111.

  In the first embodiment, since the condition command is generated and transmitted in the startup process of the frame overall control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113 is started up by the frame overall control device 111. Is configured to be able to receive a command from the frame overall control device 111 before the operation starts. Specifically, in the start-up process of the frame overall control device 111, a wait process (not shown) is performed until the voice lamp control device 113 becomes ready to receive a command. With this configuration, the sound lamp control device 113 can reliably receive a control command such as a condition command from the frame overall control device 111.

  In the processing of S3111, it is determined whether or not any remaining number command indicating the remaining number of times in the “time reduction state” has been received from the frame overall control device 111 (S3111). If any remaining number command has been received (S3111: Yes), remaining number correspondence processing corresponding to the remaining number command is executed (S3112). On the other hand, if no remaining number of times command has been received (S3111: No), the process of S3112 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3113.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 33, the remaining number command corresponding processing (S3112) executed in the command corresponding processing (see FIG. 32) by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the remaining number command response processing. The remaining number command corresponding process (S3112) performs a process of driving the shutter accessory 228 according to the type of the remaining number command received from the frame overall control device 111 and responds to the remaining number command toward the display control unit 114. It performs processing to generate a command.

  In the remaining number command corresponding process (S3112), first, it is determined whether or not the remaining number command received from the frame overall control device 111 is a remaining number 50 command (S3201). When it is determined that the remaining number 50 command is received (S3201: Yes), the remaining display number 50 command is generated and set as a control command to the display control device 114 (S3202), and then the shutter accessory. 228 is driven to enter the first state in which 25% of the third symbol display device 81 is covered with the shutter accessory 228 (S3203), and the remaining number command corresponding processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining number 50 command has not been received (S3201: No), the process of S3202 and S3203 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3204.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display remaining count 50 command from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 is covered by 25% of the third symbol display device 81 by the shutter accessory 228. The display ratio is reduced by 25% in the horizontal direction from the normal display ratio and displayed. Specific contents will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S3204, it is determined whether or not the remaining number command received from the frame overall control device 111 is a remaining number 10 command (S3204). When it is determined that the remaining number of times 10 command has been received (S3204: Yes), the remaining display number of times 10 command is generated and set as a control command to the display control device 114 (S3205), and then the shutter accessory 228 is driven to enter the second state in which 50% of the third symbol display device 81 is covered by the shutter accessory 228 (S3206), and the remaining number command corresponding processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining number of 10 commands has not been received (S3204: No), the process of S3205 and S3206 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3207.

  When the display control device 114 receives the remaining display count 10 command from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 is covered by 50% of the third symbol display device 81 by the shutter accessory 228. The display ratio is reduced by 50% in the horizontal direction from the normal display ratio and displayed. This specific content will also be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the processing of S3207, it is determined whether or not the remaining number command received from the frame overall control device 111 is a remaining number 0 command (S3207). If the remaining number of times 0 command has been received (S3207: Yes), the remaining display number of times 0 command is generated and set as a control command to the display control device 114 (S3208), and then the shutter accessory 228 is driven. Then, the third symbol display device 81 is completely covered by the shutter accessory 228 except for a notch 228a to be described later (S3209), and the remaining number of times command response processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining number of times 10 command has not been received (S3207: No), the processing of S3208 and S3209 is skipped, and the remaining number of times command handling process is terminated. After the remaining number of times command response processing is completed, the process proceeds to S3113 of command response processing.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display remaining count 0 command from the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 has two points on the display portion of the third symbol display device 81 that can be seen from the notch 228a of the shutter accessory 228. The variable display of the third symbol is expressed by blinking display, and the variable display hold number is displayed in the variable region hold display area Dmh so as to be visible.

  Returning to FIG. 32, the description will be continued. In the process of S3113, it is determined whether or not a display fanfare command or a display return command is received from the frame overall control device 111 (S3113). As a result of the determination, if a display fanfare command or a display return command is received (S3113: Yes), it means that a win is won in the variable display or the return button 75 by the player is pressed. Regardless of whether the object 228 is driven or not, the shutter accessory 228 is returned to the initial state (S3114), and the process proceeds to S3115. On the other hand, if the display fanfare command or the display return command has not been received (S3113: No), the processing of S3114 is skipped, other command handling processing is executed (S3115), and this command handling processing is terminated.

  In the process of S3113, if the display fanfare command is received from the frame overall control device 111, it means that the jackpot is won by the variable display on the third symbol display device 81. As shown, the shutter accessory 228 is returned to the initial state, and the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be visible to the player. With this configuration, for example, when the remaining 50 commands are received and the shutter accessory 228 is driven to the first state to cover the third symbol display device 81, the shutter accessory 228 is Returning to the initial state, the player can recognize the jackpot result throughout the third symbol display device 81. Similarly, in the process of S3113, if the display return command is received from the frame overall control device 111, it means that the player has operated the return button 75 to stop the game, so the shutter accessory 228 is in the initial state. It is possible to return to the state where the third symbol display device 81 is not covered with the shutter accessory 228, and the game can be started without confusing the next player.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 34, the notification mode of the digestion status of the “start” state by the third symbol display device 81 and the shutter accessory 228 will be described. FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (d) are diagrams schematically showing the display status and driving status of the third symbol display device 81 and the shutter accessory 228 provided on the left and right sides thereof. The shutter accessory 228 is provided as a pair on the left and right of the third symbol display device 81, and is configured to be driven and controlled by one motor (not shown) by a link mechanism (not shown). . Further, the shutter accessory 228 is disposed behind the center frame 86 provided in the vicinity of the third symbol display device 81, and is hidden behind the center frame 86 during a gaming state other than the “start” state. It is configured to be invisible.

  In the first embodiment, the state of digestion in the “start” state is notified by the driving mode of the shutter accessory 228, and the display content of the third symbol display device 81 is changed in accordance with the movement of the shutter accessory 228. It is configured. By configuring in this way, two games can be displayed at the same time by displaying the two games of the gameability of whether or not the jackpot is awarded and the gameability of whether or not the lucky period continues. It is possible to create new interesting interests.

  FIG. 34A shows a state immediately after the “start” state is started. In this state, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed at a normal display ratio, and the shutter accessory 228 is waiting in a state where it is all hidden behind the center frame 86. In this state (the 0th state), the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is in a state where it can be visually recognized. When the player recognizes this state (the 0th state), the remaining number of times in the “start” state still remains, so it is not considered that the “start” state will end immediately, and the player can play with peace of mind. It is in a state.

  In FIG. 34 (b), in the “start” state, the variation display after the big hit is performed 50 times, and the remaining number 50 command is transmitted from the frame overall control device 111 to the sound lamp control device 113. A state in which the shutter accessory 228 is driven to the first state is shown. In this first state, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed by being reduced by 25% in the horizontal direction from the normal display ratio, and the third symbol and the reserved symbol are slightly smaller than the normal display state. Is displayed. Further, the shutter accessory 228 is in a state where 25% of the entire shutter accessory 228 appears from the rear of the center frame 86. Therefore, the display mode is as if the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is compressed by the shutter accessory 228. When the player witnesses the first state, the remaining number of times in the “start” state still remains, but the shutter accessory 228 appears a little and the display content of the 3rd symbol display device 81 is somewhat tight. Therefore, the game is being played with a sense of anxiety that the “start” state will end without a big hit.

  In FIG. 34C, in the “start” state, the fluctuation display after the big hit is performed 90 times, the remaining command 10 is transmitted from the frame overall control device 111 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 A state in which the shutter accessory 228 is driven to the second state is shown. In this second state, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed by being reduced by 50% in the horizontal direction from the normal display ratio, and the third symbol and the reserved symbol are about half smaller than the normal display state. Displayed with content. Further, the shutter accessory 228 is in a state where 50% of the entire shutter accessory 228 appears from the rear of the center frame 86. Therefore, similarly to the first state, the second state has a display mode as if the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is compressed by the shutter accessory 228. When the player witnesses the second state, the remaining number of times in the “start” state is hardly left, and the shutter feature 228 appears about half, and the display content of the third symbol display device 81 has become tight. Therefore, the game is being played with a fear that the “start” state will end soon.

  In FIG. 34 (d), in the “start” state, the variation display after the big hit is performed 100 times, and the remaining number 0 command is transmitted from the frame overall control device 111 to the sound lamp control device 113. A state in which the shutter accessory 228 is driven to the third state is shown. In this third state, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 leaves the notch 228a of the shutter accessory 228, and is entirely covered by the shutter accessory 228. Further, the shutter accessory 228 is in a state where the entire shutter accessory 228 appears from the rear of the center frame 86, and the character “END” written on the front side of the pachinko machine of the shutter accessory 228 is clear. It can be recognized. When the player witnesses the third state, the player recognizes that the “start” state has ended.

  In the third state, a part of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by the notch 228a of the shutter accessory 228. On the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 that can be visually recognized from the notch 228a, blinking display of two points is performed so that whether or not the variable display is executed can be grasped, and the variable area holding display area Dmh displays the variable display. The number of holds can also be recognized. Therefore, even when the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is covered by the shutter accessory 228, the player can confirm the display content of the third symbol display device 81 that can be visually recognized by the notch 228a. The current gaming state can be grasped.

  In the first embodiment, the shutter accessory 228 is configured to maintain the third state during high-speed fluctuation of the first fluctuation display after the “start” state ends. When the “start” state ends, it is the timing when the “time reduction state” ends, and in many cases, the number of suspended display of the variable display is accumulated, and the next variable display is immediately executed. On the other hand, since the remaining number 0 command from the frame overall control device 111 is output at the timing when the change display is fixed, the sound lamp control device 113 sets the shutter accessory 228 to the first when the final change in the “start” state is determined. It is configured to have three states. In such a case, if the third state of the shutter accessory 228 indicating the end of the “start” state is canceled immediately after the start of the next variable display and the shutter accessory 228 is returned to the original standby position, Even though the end of the “start” state is notified by the corner shutter accessory 228, the notification state is instantaneous, and thus the player may not be able to recognize the end of the “start” state. Thus, when the shutter accessory 228 enters the third state, the state is maintained for a while, so that the player can clearly recognize the end of the “start” state. In addition, the period during which the third symbol display device 81 is covered by the shutter accessory 228 is performed only during high-speed fluctuation that is not important among the effects in the variable display, thereby causing excessive interference with the effect in the variable display. Without fail, the end of the “start” state can be accurately notified. The “high-speed fluctuation” refers to a fluctuation that scrolls all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 at a high speed so that the player cannot visually recognize when moving display is performed on the third symbol display device 81.

  With this configuration, it is possible to notify the digestion status of the “start” state in the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 and the operating state of the shutter accessory 228. It can create new interests that fuse display.

  Next, the main process executed by the MPU 271 in the card sand apparatus 70 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this main process. In the main process executed by the MPU 271 of the card sand apparatus 70, an acceptance process when the membership card 300 is inserted, a return process when returning, and the like are executed. As its outline, after the startup process (S4001) is performed, the loop process is configured to repeat the execution of each process of S4002 to S4016.

  In the main process, first, a startup process is performed (S4001). This activation process is executed when the card sand device 70 is turned on, receives an initial setting process and a backup process associated with power-on, a rate signal and a monetary unit signal transmitted from the hall computer 263, and a lending rate and a lending amount. A unit setting process or the like is executed. Next, it is determined whether or not the member card 300 is inserted into the card insertion slot 72 of the card sand device 70 (S4002). If it is determined that the membership card 300 has been inserted (S4002: Yes), the validity of the membership card 300 is confirmed. If the membership card 300 is not valid, the membership card 300 is discharged. If it is confirmed that the membership card 300 is valid, an insertion signal indicating that the membership card 300 has been inserted is transmitted to the frame overall control device 111 (S4003), and The possessed ball data relating to the sharable balls stored in the normal time memory 300c of the membership card 300 is transmitted to the frame overall control device 111 (S4004). Thereafter, the value of the normal time memory 300c of the membership card 300 is cleared to “0” (S4005), and the process proceeds to S4006. On the other hand, if the membership card 300 is not inserted in the process of S4002 (S4002: No), the process of S4003 to S4005 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4006.

  Thus, when the membership card 300 is inserted, only possessed ball data related to the sharable balls stored in the normal memory 300c of the membership card is transmitted to the frame overall control device 111, and the game stored in the game unusable memory 300d. Since possessed ball data relating to unusable balls is configured not to be transmitted, possessed ball data once designated as unusable balls can be made unusable for games.

  The validity of the membership card 300 in the card sand device 70 is determined by, for example, determining whether the membership ID 300a is registered in the hall computer 263 or operating the return button 75 from the membership card 300. Examples include determination of consistency between various information transmitted to H.263 and various information of the membership card 300 when the membership card 300 is inserted this time.

  In the process of S4006, it is determined whether or not the player has operated (pressed) the ball lending button 74 of the card sand apparatus 70 (S4006). If it is determined that the ball lending button 74 has been operated (S4006: Yes), it means that the player has requested a ball lending, and then the value of the cash corresponding memory 300b of the membership card 300 is It is determined whether or not it is greater than “0” (S4007). As a result of the determination, when the value of the cash corresponding memory 300b is not larger than “0” (S4007: No), that is, when the balance data is not stored in the cash corresponding memory 300b, the processing from S4008 to S4010 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S4011. On the other hand, if the value of the cash corresponding memory 300b is larger than “0” (S4007: Yes), since the balance data exists in the cash corresponding memory 300b, the set number of lending (first In the embodiment, a lending signal corresponding to 125 balls) is transmitted to the frame overall control device 111 (S4008). Then, the process waits until a reception completion signal indicating that the lending operation for lending has been completed is received from the frame overall control device 111 (S4009: No). When a reception completion signal is received from the frame overall control device 111 (S4009: Yes), it means that the lending operation according to the set lending number has been completed in the frame overall control device 111, so the data according to the set lending number (In the first embodiment, 500 yen) is subtracted from the balance data of the cash corresponding memory 300b (S4010), and the process proceeds to S4011.

  When the balance data stored in the cash corresponding memory 300b is less than the set loan number, the lending signal corresponding to the loan number corresponding to the balance data stored in the cash corresponding memory 300b is sent to the frame overall control device. 111 is configured to be transmitted to 111. Further, when a predetermined lending rate (for example, 4 yen per ball) is set, and the value of the cash corresponding memory 300b is less than the value for lending one ball at the lending rate (for example, “3”) You can't lend a ball. Accordingly, in the process of S4007, even if the value of the cash corresponding memory 300b is larger than “0”, if the value of the cash corresponding memory 300b is less than the lending rate (for example, “3”), the cash The value of the corresponding memory 300b is regarded as “0” (S4007: No), and the process proceeds to S4011.

  In the process of S4011, it is determined whether or not the return button 75 of the card sand apparatus 70 has been operated (pressed) by the player (S4011). If it is determined that the return button 75 has been operated (S4011: Yes), it means that the player has requested the return of the membership card 300, and a return signal is sent from the card sand device 70 to the frame overall control device 111. Is transmitted, and possessed ball data relating to the sharable balls, lucky balls, and unusable balls possessed by the player is transmitted from the frame overall control device 111 upon receipt of the return signal. First, the frame overall control device 111 The possessed ball data relating to the sharable ball of the normal time ball counter 213c is added to the normal time memory 300c of the member card 300 (S4012), and then the lucky ball stored in the lucky central ball counter 213d of the frame overall control device 111 The possessed ball data regarding is added to the game unusable memory 300d of the membership card 300 (S4013). The possessed ball data relating to the game unusable balls stored in the unusable area 213e of the frame overall control device 111 is added to the game unusable memory 300d of the membership card 300 (S4014), and the membership card 300 is added to the card insertion slot 72. The member card is discharged (S4015), and the process proceeds to S4016. In the membership card discharge process, information indicating that the game has ended normally and is a valid membership card 300 is written to the membership card 300. The information is referred to when determining the validity of the membership card 300 when the membership card 300 is inserted into the card sand device 70 again. Further, the card sand device 70 is configured to transmit various information of the member card 300 to the hall computer 263 along with the member card discharge process. If it is determined in the process of S4011 that the return button 75 has not been operated (S4011: No), the process of S4012 to S4015 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4016.

  In the process of S4016, other processes are performed (S4016). As other processing, for example, lighting processing of various lamps such as a card usable lamp 78, a lending available lamp 79a, and an error display lamp 79b, and reading by the banknote detection device 275 when cash is inserted into the banknote insertion slot 71. Processing is performed. Further, in this other processing, when cash is inserted into the bill insertion slot 71 by the player, the amount data based on the inserted cash is stored in the cash corresponding memory of the guest card built in the card sand device 70. It is configured so that the processing of S4002 to S4005 is executed by regarding writing and insertion of this cash as insertion of the membership card 300. After this other process, the process returns to the beginning of the loop process of the main process (S4002) and the above process is repeated.

  In the first embodiment, when the return button 75 of the card sand device 70 is operated, it is determined that the player's willingness to continue the game is lost, and even if it is during the lucky period, it is stored in the lucky central ball counter 213d. The possessed ball data relating to the lucky ball to be played is stored as a game unusable ball in the game unusable memory 300d of the member card 300, and cannot be used in subsequent games. Further, when the return button 75 is operated, if it is during the lucky period, the lucky period is ended. By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize a single-player and single-player gameability with a lucky number system.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the system for quantifying and managing the rental balls and prize balls, which are the functions of the in-flight circulation type pachinko machine 10, is effectively used, and before the lucky period starts. The possessed ball data related to the sharable balls that were possessed by and the possessed ball data related to the lucky balls acquired during the lucky period are respectively identified and stored, and based on the lucky balls acquired during the lucky period after the lucky period. By configuring the game to be prohibited, the lucky number system can be realized. Therefore, by adopting the lucky number system, it is possible to manage the amusement halls in a sound manner without reducing the labor costs without placing a heavy burden on the amusement hall staff and without having to increase the staff. It is possible to realize a variety of game play while maintaining the conventional environment. In addition, the possessed ball data possessed before the lucky period and the possessed ball data acquired during the lucky period are individually managed, and the possessed ball data that can be used according to the possessed ball data acquired in which period Since the game value (prize ball) acquired in the lucky period can be used only in the lucky period and cannot be used after the lucky period ends, various game characteristics can be created. Can be realized.

  In addition, the gameability of the lucky number system is more likely to produce a more prominent effect because the rental rate of the rental balls is different from the prize conversion rate at the game hall window. Specifically, for example, if there is a prize conversion gap in which the lending rate is 4 yen per ball and the prize conversion rate is equivalent to 2.5 yen per ball, a game with a rental ball and an award that has been won In a game with a ball, a difference is generated in the game value equivalent to 1.5 yen per ball. In such a situation, the player can continue to play the game based on the winning ball because playing the winning ball continuously contributes to his own benefit. However, this is a factor that divides the game. In a game hall with such a prize conversion gap, it is possible to acquire a lucky period by adopting a lucky number-based game specification, and continue to play with the prize balls acquired during that time. The effect of the specification can be made remarkable and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Although it is a lucky number system that can enhance the interest of the game in this way, conventionally, at a game hall that adopts the lucky number system, the staff of the game hall has a big hit in each pachinko machine that is the starting condition of the lucky period And the type of the jackpot symbol is confirmed, and the lucky period is started by performing the work of inserting a bill etc. on the upper part of the pachinko machine according to the jackpot type, or the lucky period end condition is achieved during the lucky period. It is necessary to perform an operation for monitoring whether or not the lucky period is ended, and when the lucky period ends, an operation for prompting the player to exchange the acquired game ball is required.

  When the above-mentioned work is performed by a staff at a game hall, work related to the lucky number system is added in addition to normal work such as checking for abnormalities of the gaming machine and cleaning. There was a point. On the other hand, increasing the number of staff to cope with the lucky number system has the problem of increasing personnel costs and increasing the management of the game hall. Therefore, even in an environment where a game specification that can improve the gameability of the lucky number system can be realized, the game hall does not adopt the lucky number system in consideration of the above problems, and in a normal business form. As a result, the gameability was not improved.

  Therefore, by employing the lucky number system by utilizing the functions of the in-machine circulation pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, it is necessary to increase the staff without imposing a great work burden on the game hall staff. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the labor cost and make the management of the amusement hall sound and to realize a variety of games while maintaining the conventional environment.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the possessed ball data related to the sharable ball of the normal time ball counter 213c held by the player before the lucky period and the lucky central ball acquired by the player during the lucky period. The possessed ball data related to the lucky ball of the counter 213d is identified and stored (accumulated), and after the lucky period, only the possessed ball data related to the lucky ball stored in the lucky central ball counter 213d is transferred to the unusable area 213e. However, it is configured such that the game can be continued using the possessed ball data relating to the sharable ball of the normal time ball counter 213c that has been acquired at that time, while preventing the game from being used.

  Conventionally, after the lucky period, not only the lucky balls acquired during the lucky period but also the balls acquired before the lucky period or lent out balls can not be used together. The sharable balls that could be used became unusable balls, and the game value originally obtained by the player was damaged. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the sharable balls possessed by the player before the lucky period and the lucky balls acquired by the player during the lucky period are respectively identified and stored. After the lucky period, only the lucky balls are made unusable balls, and the sharable balls can be used in subsequent games. Since the game can be started immediately, it is possible to continue the game without exchanging the unusable game one by one.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when a ball is launched from the ball launch unit 66, it is determined whether or not it is during the lucky period, and if it is during the lucky period, the lucky central ball counter 213d. Is determined, and the value of the normal time ball counter 213c or the lucky central ball counter 213d is subtracted based on the determination result. By comprising in this way, it can be preferentially digested from the lucky ball | bowl with low game value for a player during a lucky period.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, since the launch ball detection switch 94 is provided in the vicinity of the launch position of the ball, it is possible to immediately detect a ball that has been launched from the launch solenoid and passed on the launch rail 63. It is configured as follows. Therefore, it is possible to detect the launch ball at an interval (for example, 0.05 s) shorter than the launch interval (0.6 s in the first embodiment) at which the next ball is launched after the ball is launched, and based on the detection. By subtracting the value of the normal time ball counter 213c or the lucky middle ball counter 213d, the ball data of the player's ball can be updated before the next ball is launched, and the player has no ball It is possible to prevent the ball from being launched.

  Also, the ball data related to the sharable ball stored in the normal time ball counter 213c is more versatile than the ball data stored in the lucky central ball counter 213d because it can be used in all gaming states. Since the game value is high, during the lucky period, if the launch ball based on the value of the lucky central ball counter 213d becomes a foul ball, if the player adds the value of the normal time ball counter 213c, By intentionally generating the foul ball, the ball data of the lucky central ball counter 213d can be converted as the ball data of the normal time ball counter 213c, and the gameability of the lucky number system may be destroyed. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a foul ball is generated during the lucky period, it is added to the lucky central ball counter 213d without any problem, thereby preventing the above problem from occurring. And the gameability of the lucky number system can be maintained.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 and the digestion status of the “start” state can be notified in the operating state of the shutter accessory 228. It is possible to create a new interest that fuses the variable display of special symbols.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, in the third state of the shutter accessory 228, a part of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by the notch 228a of the shutter accessory 228. On the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 that can be visually recognized from the notch 228a, blinking display of two points is performed so that whether or not the variable display is executed can be grasped, and the variable area holding display area Dmh displays the variable display. The number of holds can also be recognized. Therefore, even when the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is covered by the shutter accessory 228, the player can confirm the display content of the third symbol display device 81 that can be visually recognized by the notch 228a. The current gaming state can be grasped.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the shutter accessory 228 is configured to maintain the third state during high-speed fluctuation of the first fluctuation display after the “start” state ends. When the “start” state ends, it is the timing when the “time reduction state” ends, and in many cases, the number of suspended display of the variable display is accumulated, and the next variable display is immediately executed. On the other hand, since the remaining number 0 command from the frame overall control device 111 is output at the timing when the change display is fixed, the sound lamp control device 113 sets the shutter accessory 228 to the first when the final change in the “start” state is determined. It is configured to have three states. In such a case, if the third state of the shutter accessory 228 indicating the end of the “start” state is canceled immediately after the start of the next variable display and the shutter accessory 228 is returned to the original standby position, Even though the end of the “start” state is notified by the corner shutter accessory 228, the notification state is instantaneous, and thus the player may not be able to recognize the end of the “start” state. Thus, when the shutter accessory 228 enters the third state, the state is maintained for a while, so that the player can clearly recognize the end of the “start” state. In addition, the period during which the third symbol display device 81 is covered by the shutter accessory 228 is performed only during high-speed fluctuation that is not important among the effects in the variable display, thereby causing excessive interference with the effect in the variable display. Without fail, the end of the “start” state can be accurately notified.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the frame overall control device 111 receives a jackpot symbol command related to the symbol type of the third symbol that has generated a jackpot from the audio lamp controller 113, and the jackpot symbol command indicated by the jackpot symbol command indicates By storing the symbol information in the jackpot result memory 213g, the type of the jackpot symbol determined by the sound lamp control device 113 can be grasped. Therefore, by performing the control related to the lucky period and the control related to the determination of the jackpot symbol in the respective control devices 111 and 113, it is possible to prevent the control from becoming complicated while distributing the respective processing loads. .

  Further, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command from the frame overall control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113 determines the jackpot symbol command and transmits the jackpot symbol command to the frame overall control device 111. It is configured. Therefore, the frame overall control device 111 can grasp the type of jackpot symbol at the start of the variable display, and grasps the type of jackpot symbol that generated the jackpot when setting the lucky period at the beginning of the subsequent jackpot. In this state, accurate control can be performed in giving during the lucky period.

Second Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 42. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the player returns the member card 300 by operating the return button 75 of the card sand device 70 during the lucky period, the lucky period that is being executed is terminated and the acquired lucky It is configured to add (accumulate) the value of the central ball counter 213d as a game unusable ball to the game unusable memory 300d of the member card 300. Therefore, even if the player has acquired one of the lucky periods, if the return button 75 is operated, the player may fear that the acquired lucky period will end. For example, the player may have a toilet break during the lucky period. Even if a meal break is desired, the user may hesitate to discharge the membership card 300 by operating the return button 75, and may not be able to maintain a comfortable gaming environment. Also, if you leave the pachinko machine 10 for a toilet break etc. with the membership card 300 inserted in the card sand device 70 without operating the return button 75, return it to someone else while you are away The member 75 may be stolen by operating the button 75.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, when the player operates the return button 75 during the lucky period, information during the lucky period and the identification information (game table information) about the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. ) Are stored in the member card 300 in association with each other, and when the member card 300 is inserted again into the card sanding device 70 attached to the pachinko machine 10, the gaming machine information is authenticated, and the authentication is performed. If it is properly performed, the period during the lucky period is resumed, and the state before the operation of the return button 75 is restored. By configuring in this way, the player can restore the lucky period when the game is resumed even if the member card 300 is returned even if the player wishes to take a rest or meal break even during the lucky period. Therefore, a comfortable gaming environment can be constructed while preventing the membership card 300 from being stolen.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  FIG. 36 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the frame overall control device 111, the card sand device 70, and the membership card 300 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the ROM 212 of the frame overall control device 111 is provided with game table information 212b, which is identification information unique to the pachinko machine 10. In addition, the membership card 300 can store the lucky in-memory data 300e that can store the possession ball data related to the lucky ball, the gaming machine information memory 300f that can store the gaming machine information of the pachinko machine 10, and the type of the lucky period. The flag memory 300g is provided. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

  The game table information 212b of the frame overall control device 111 is ID information for identifying the pachinko machine 10 with a unique value determined for each pachinko machine 10 installed in the game hall. The ID information stored in the gaming machine information 212b is configured to be written (overwritten) in the gaming machine information memory 300f of the membership card 300 when the return button 75 of the card sand device 70 is operated. . In addition, when the membership card 300 is inserted into the card sand device 70, it is determined whether the ID information stored in a gaming machine information memory 300f (to be described later) of the membership card 300 matches the ID information of the gaming machine information 212b. It is configured.

  The lucky in-memory 300e of the membership card 300 is a storage area in which possessed ball data relating to the lucky ball stored in the lucky central ball counter 213d of the pachinko machine 10 that has been playing before the membership card 300 is returned can be added. In this lucky memory 300e, possessed ball data relating to the lucky ball stored in the lucky central ball counter 213d of the frame overall control device 111 is added when the return button 75 of the card sand device 70 is operated by the player. Configured as follows.

  The possessed ball data relating to the lucky ball stored in the lucky memory 300e is stored in the gaming table information memory 300f of the membership card 300 when the membership card 300 is inserted into the card insertion slot 72 of the card sand device 70. If the ID information matches the ID information of the gaming machine information 212b stored in the frame overall control device 111, that is, if the pachinko machine when the membership card 300 is returned matches the pachinko machine when the game is resumed, It is configured to be added to the lucky central ball counter 213d of the frame overall control device 111 and then cleared to "0".

  On the other hand, when the membership card 300 is inserted into the card insertion slot 72 of the card sand device 70, the ID information stored in the gaming machine information memory 300f of the membership card 300 and the gaming machine information stored in the frame overall control device 111. When the ID information of 212b does not match, that is, when the pachinko machine when the member card 300 is returned does not match the pachinko machine when the game is resumed, the value of the lucky memory 300e of the member card is added to the game unusable memory 300d. It is configured to be.

  The gaming table information memory 300f is a storage area for storing the gaming table information 212b of the pachinko machine 10 that has been playing before the membership card 300 is returned. When the return button 75 of the card sand device 70 is operated by the player, the ID information stored in the game table information 212b of the frame overall control device 111 is written (overwritten) in the game table information memory 300f. ). Further, the ID information stored in the game table information memory 300f matches the ID information of the game table information 212b of the frame overall control device 111 when the member card 300 is inserted into the card insertion slot 72 of the card sand device 70. Used for judgment (authentication).

  The flag memory 300g is a storage area for storing flag setting information indicating the contents of the lucky period of the pachinko machine 10 that was playing before the membership card 300 was returned. In the flag memory 300g, when the return button 75 of the card sand device 70 is operated by the player, the setting states of the unlimited flag 213h, the lucky flag 213i, and the start flag 213j of the frame overall control device 111 are stored as they are. . Specifically, in a 3-bit memory, the upper bits are configured to correspond to the unlimited flag 213h, the lucky flag 213i, and the start flag 213j. When the value of each bit is “0”, it is off, “1”. Is set to ON. Therefore, for example, when the value of the flag memory 300g is “110”, the unlimited flag 213h is on, the lucky flag 213i is on, and the start flag 213j is off.

  When the member card 300 is inserted into the card insertion slot 72 of the card sand device 70, the value of the flag memory 300g is stored in the ID information stored in the game machine information memory 300f of the member card 300 and the frame overall control device 111. If the ID information of the stored game table information 212b matches, that is, if the pachinko machine when the membership card 300 is returned matches the pachinko machine when the game is resumed, the frame management is performed according to the stored contents of the flag memory 300g. An unrestricted flag 213h, a lucky flag 213i, and a start flag 213j of the control device 111 are set.

  On the other hand, when the membership card 300 is inserted into the card insertion slot 72 of the card sand device 70, the ID information stored in the gaming machine information memory 300f of the membership card 300 and the gaming machine information stored in the frame overall control device 111. When the ID information of 212b does not match, that is, when the pachinko machine when the member card 300 is returned does not match the pachinko machine when the game is resumed, the value of the flag memory 300g of the member card is cleared to “0”. It is configured.

  As described above, when the membership card 300 is inserted into the card sand apparatus 70, if the pachinko machine 10 at the time of return coincides with the pachinko machine 10 at the time of introduction, In addition to restarting the lucky period, the possessed ball data relating to the lucky balls acquired during the lucky period can be added to the lucky central ball counter 213d to return to the state before returning the membership card 300. Therefore, even if the membership card 300 is returned during the lucky period, the lucky period can be restored when the game is resumed, so that a comfortable gaming environment can be obtained while appropriately acquiring toilet breaks and the like while preventing the theft of the membership card 300 Can be built.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37 and FIG. 38, the contents of transmission and reception of commands and responses with the pachinko machine 10, the card sand device 70, and the membership card 300 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing exchange of information of the pachinko machine 10, the card sand device 70, and the member card 300 when the member card 300 is inserted and when the return button 75 is pressed, and is stored in the game machine information memory 300f of the member card 300. It is the figure which showed the case where ID information and the ID information of the game machine information 212b of the frame integrated control apparatus 111 correspond. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing information exchange of the pachinko machine 10, the card sand device 70, and the member card 300 when the member card 300 is inserted and when the return button 75 is pressed, as in FIG. It is the figure which showed the case where ID information memorize | stored in the game machine information memory 300f and ID information of the game machine information 212b of the frame integrated control apparatus 111 do not correspond. In FIG. 37 and FIG. 38, the action of <pressing a ball rental button> is the same as that in the first embodiment, so description and explanation are omitted. In FIGS. 37 and 38, the processing of <return button pressing> is the same.

<Insert membership card (second embodiment)>
When the player has inserted the member card 300 owned by the player into the card insertion slot 72 of the card sand device 70, first, an authentication process with the hall computer 263 is performed (not shown), and the legitimate member card 300 is obtained. The possessed ball data relating to the sharable balls stored in the normal memory 300c of the membership card 300 is read into the card sand device 70. Thereafter, the card sand device 70 transmits an insertion signal indicating that the member card 300 has been inserted into the card sand device 70 to the pachinko machine 10. Then, possessed ball data related to the sharable balls stored in the normal time memory 300 c of the read membership card 300 is transmitted to the pachinko machine 10. When the pachinko machine 10 receives possessed ball data related to a sharable ball stored in the normal memory 300c of the membership card 300 from the card sand device 70, the pachinko machine 10 transmits the possessed ball data of the normal memory 300c to the frame overall control device 111. Is added to the normal time counter 213c. After transmitting the possession ball data in the normal time memory 300c, the card sand device 70 clears the value of the normal time memory 300c of the membership card 300 to “0”.

  Thereafter, the ID information stored in the game machine information memory 300 f of the membership card 300 is read into the card sand device 70. Then, the card sand device 70 notifies the pachinko machine 10 of the ID information of the gaming table information memory 300f. It is determined whether or not the ID information of the gaming machine information 212b of the control device 111 matches. If they match, the pachinko machine 10 (the frame overall control device 111) sends the matching information to the card sand device 70. Transmit (see FIG. 37). The card sand device 70 that has received the match information reads possession ball data related to the lucky ball stored in the lucky memory 300e of the membership card 300, transmits the possession ball data related to the lucky ball to the frame overall control device 111, and The overall control device 111 adds the possessed ball data relating to the received lucky ball to the value of the lucky central ball counter 213d.

  Subsequently, the card sand device 70 reads flag setting information related to the lucky period stored in the flag memory 300g of the membership card 300, transmits the flag setting information to the frame overall control device 111, and the frame overall control device 111 Based on the received flag setting information, the values of the unlimited flag 213h, the lucky flag 213i, and the start flag 213j are set. Thereafter, the card sand device 70 clears the value in the lucky memory 300e of the membership card 300 to “0” and also clears the value in the flag memory 300g to “0”.

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the ID information in the gaming machine information memory 300f notified from the card sand device 70 matches the ID information in the gaming machine information 212b of the frame overall control device 111. If not, the pachinko machine 10 (frame overall control device 111) transmits mismatch information to the card sand device 70 (see FIG. 38). The card sand device 70 that has received the mismatch information adds the possessed ball data related to the lucky ball stored in the lucky memory 300e of the membership card 300 to the game unusable memory 300d, and then sets the value of the lucky memory 300e to “0”. "And clear the value of the flag memory 300g to" 0 ".

<Return button pressed (second embodiment)>
When the return button 75 of the card sand device 70 is operated by the player, first, the card sand device 70 transmits a return signal to the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 that has received the return signal transmits the ID information of the gaming machine information 212b stored in the ROM 212 of the frame overall control device 111 to the card sand device 70. The card sand device 70 that has received the ID information of the gaming machine information 212b writes the received ID information into the gaming machine information memory 300f of the membership card 300.

  Then, the possessed ball data relating to the sharable ball of the normal time ball counter 213c is transmitted to the card sand device 70, and the value of the normal time ball counter 213c is cleared to “0”. The card sand device 70 that has received the possessed ball data related to the balls that can be commonly used by the normal time ball counter 213c stores the contents of the possessed ball data related to the balls that can be commonly used by the normal time ball counter 213c in the normal time memory 300c of the membership card 300. to add.

  Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 transmits possessed ball data relating to the lucky ball of the lucky central ball counter 213d to the card sand device 70, and clears the value of the lucky central ball counter 213d to “0”. The card sand device 70 that has received the possessed ball data related to the lucky ball of the lucky central ball counter 213d adds the content of the possessed ball data related to the lucky ball of the lucky central ball counter 213d to the lucky memory 300e of the membership card 300.

  Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 transmits possessed ball data regarding the game unusable balls in the unusable area 213e to the card sand device 70, and clears the value of the unusable area 213e to “0”. The card sand device 70 that has received the possessed ball data related to the game unusable ball in the unusable area 213e stores the content of the possessed ball data related to the game unusable ball in the unusable area 213e in the game unusable memory 300d of the membership card 300. to add.

  After that, the pachinko machine 10 transmits the flag setting information of the unlimited flag 213h, the lucky flag 213i and the start flag 213j to the card sand device 70, and turns off all the values of the unlimited flag 213h, the lucky flag 213i and the start flag 213j. Set. The card sand device 70 that has received the flag setting information writes the flag setting information in the flag memory 300g of the member card 300.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the clearing process (S2105) executed by the MPU 211 in the frame overall control device 111 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the settlement process. This settlement process (S2105) is executed in the main process of the frame overall control device 111, as in the first embodiment.

  The clearing process in the second embodiment is similar to the first embodiment in that when the return signal is received from the card sand device 70, the value of the normal time ball counter 213c and the value of the unusable area 213e are set to the normal time of the membership card 300. The memory 300c and the game unusable memory 300d are configured to be added (written) (S2804, S2805, and S2809 to S2811). In the process of S2812, the values of the flags 213h to 213j related to the lucky period are set to off. Since these processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the clearing process in the second embodiment, when the insertion signal is received from the card sand device 70, the base information for determining the values of the gaming base information memory 300f of the membership card 300 and the gaming base information 212b of the frame overall control device 111. A confirmation process is executed (S2851). When a return signal is received from the card sand device 70, the card sand device 70 is notified to write the game table information 212b of the frame overall control device 111 into the game table information memory 300f of the member card 300 (S2852). The card sand device 70 is notified to add the possessed ball data relating to the lucky ball stored in the lucky central ball counter 213d to the lucky memory 300e of the member card 300 (S2853). In addition, the card sand device 70 is notified to write the set values of the flags related to the lucky period, that is, the unrestricted flag 213h, the lucky flag 213i, and the start flag 213j, to the flag memory 300g of the member card 300 (S2854).

  Specifically, in the process of S2801, when the insertion signal of the membership card 300 is received from the card sand device 70, the base information confirmation process is executed (S2851). This table information confirmation process will be described later. Further, in the process of S2803, when the return signal of the membership card 300 is received from the card sand device 70, the gaming machine information 212b stored in the ROM 212 is written (overwritten) in the gaming machine information memory 300f of the membership card 300. To the card sand device 70 (S2852). Furthermore, in the process of S2806, if the value of the lucky central ball counter 213d is greater than “0” (S2806: Yes), the possession ball data relating to the lucky ball stored in the lucky central ball counter 213d is stored in the membership card 300. The card sand device 70 is notified to be added to the in-lucky memory 300e (S2853). Further, in the processing of S2812, before the setting values of the unlimited flag 213h, the lucky flag 213i, and the start flag 213j are turned off, the setting values of the unlimited flag 213h, the lucky flag 213i, and the start flag 213j are set to the flag of the member card 300. The card sand apparatus 70 is notified to write to the memory 300g (S2854).

  As described above, when the return button 75 is operated by the card sanding device 70 by the player, the game card information 212b of the pachinko machine 10 at that time is stored in the member card 300, and the normal time base counter 213c is stored. Is stored as a sharable ball, the value of the lucky central ball counter 213d is stored as a lucky ball, the value of the unusable area 213e is stored as a game unusable ball, and each flag 213h to lucky period is stored. The set value of 213j is stored in the flag memory 300g. By configuring in this way, game information such as the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 when the member card 300 is returned can be stored in the member card 300, so the card sand device 70 corresponding to the same pachinko machine 10 When the membership card 300 is reinserted into the card insertion slot 72, it becomes possible to resume the gaming state based on the gaming information.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 40, the base information confirmation process (S2851) executed by the MPU 211 in the frame overall control apparatus 111 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this table information confirmation processing. This machine information confirmation process (S2851) is a pachinko machine in which the previous game was performed when the membership card 300 was inserted into the card insertion slot 72 of the card sand apparatus 70 in the settlement process (S2105) (S2801: Yes). And is executed to confirm whether or not the pachinko machine to be played this time matches.

  In the first embodiment, when the member card 300 is inserted into the card sand device 70, the card sand device 70 reads possessed ball data relating to the sharable balls stored in the normal time memory 300 c of the member card 300 and reads the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 performs only the process of adding the possessed ball data related to the sharable balls received from the card sand device 70 and stored in the normal time memory 300c to the normal time ball counter 213c. In contrast, in the second embodiment, the ID information stored in the gaming machine information memory 300f of the membership card 300 and the gaming machine information stored in the ROM 212 of the frame overall control device 111 in the machine information confirmation process (S2851). 212b is determined to match, and if they match, it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 in which the previous game was interrupted matches the pachinko machine in which the current game is played, and the lucky ball stored in the lucky in-memory 300e of the member card 300 The possessed ball data is added to the lucky central ball counter 213d, and the unlimited flag 213h, the lucky flag 213i, and the start flag 213j are set based on the set value data stored in the flag memory 300g of the membership card 300.

  Specifically, in the table information confirmation process (S2851), first, the possessed ball data related to the sharable balls stored in the normal time memory 300c of the membership card 300 transmitted from the card sand device 70 is stored in the frame overall control device 111. It is added to the normal time counter 213c (S2871). Next, it is determined whether or not the ID information of the gaming machine information 212b stored in the ROM 212 matches the ID information stored in the gaming machine information memory 300f of the membership card 300 received from the card sand device 70 (S2872). . If it is determined that they match (S2872: Yes), this means that the pachinko machine that interrupted the previous game matches the pachinko machine that is going to play the current game, so the matching information is notified (transmitted) to the card sand device 70. Next, it is confirmed whether or not the possessed ball data related to the lucky ball stored in the lucky memory 300e of the membership card 300 is received from the card sand device 70 (S2875), and the possessed ball data related to the lucky ball is received. Wait (S2875: No). When possessed ball data relating to the lucky ball is received (S2875: Yes), the possessed ball data relating to the lucky ball stored in the lucky memory 300e is added to the value of the lucky central ball counter 213d of the frame overall control device 111. Then (S2876), the process proceeds to S2877.

  In the processing of S2877, it is confirmed whether or not the setting value data of each flag 213h to 213j stored in the flag memory 300g of the membership card 300 is received from the card sand device 70 (S2877), and the setting value data is received. (S2877: No). When the set value data is received (S2877: Yes), the unrestricted flag 213h, the lucky flag 213i, and the start flag 213j are set based on the received set value data (S2787), and the machine information confirmation process is terminated. Then, the process returns to the settlement process (S2105).

  In this way, if the pachinko machine that interrupted the previous game matches the pachinko machine that is going to play this time, the game situation when the previous game was interrupted saved in the membership card 300 is restored, If it is during the period, the lucky period is resumed, and the possession ball data relating to the lucky ball stored in the lucky central ball counter 213d can be restored.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2872, it is determined that the ID information of the gaming machine information 212b stored in the ROM 212 and the ID information stored in the gaming machine information memory 300f of the membership card 300 received from the card sand device 70 do not match. In this case (S2872: No), it means that the pachinko machine that interrupted the previous game and the pachinko machine that is going to play this time do not match. The other information processing is not executed, the table information confirmation processing is terminated, and the process returns to the settlement processing (S2105).

  Thus, if the pachinko machine that interrupted the previous game does not match the pachinko machine that is going to play this time, the game situation when the previous game stored in the member card 300 is interrupted is not restored. By configuring, when a game is played with a different pachinko machine, a new game can be played without reviving the game situation of the pachinko machine where the previous game was played.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the main process executed by the MPU 271 in the card sand apparatus 70 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this main process. As in the first embodiment, the main processing of the card sand apparatus 70 of the second embodiment is to execute a reception process when the membership card 300 is inserted, a return process when returning, and the like.

  The main process in the second embodiment is different from the main process in the first embodiment. When the member card 300 is inserted (inserted) from the card insertion slot 72 by the player, the frame overall control device 111 When the authentication process (S4051) is executed according to whether the match information or mismatch information between the game table information memory 300f and the game table information 212b is received, and when the return button 75 is operated by the player, A point of executing the process (S4052) of writing ID information based on the gaming machine information 212b notified (received) from the frame overall control device 111 to the gaming machine information memory 300f of the membership card 300, and a notification ( The possessed ball data relating to the lucky ball stored in the received lucky ball counter 213d is stored in the lucky memory 300e. The flag memory of the membership card 300 stores the set value data based on the values of the addition processing (S4053) and the unrestricted flag 213h, lucky flag 213i, and start flag 213j notified (received) from the frame overall control device 111. And a process of writing (overwriting) to 300g (S4054).

  Specifically, in the process of S4002, when it is determined that the membership card 300 is inserted (S4002: Yes), the authentication process is executed after executing the processes of S4003 to S4005 (S4051). This authentication process will be described later. If it is determined in the process of S4011 that the return button 75 has been operated by the player (S4011: Yes), ID information based on the gaming machine information 212b notified (received) from the frame overall control device 111 is obtained as a membership card. 300 is written in the gaming machine information memory 300f (S4052). Thereafter, after executing the process of S4012, the possession ball data relating to the lucky ball stored in the lucky central ball counter 213d notified (received) from the frame overall control device 111 is added to the lucky memory 300e of the member card 300. (S4053). Thereafter, the processing of S4014 is performed, and then the set value data based on the values of the unlimited flag 213h, the lucky flag 213i, and the start flag 213j notified (received) from the frame overall control device 111 is stored in the flag memory 300g of the member card 300. Writing (S4054) and the process proceeds to S4015.

  In this way, when the player operates the return button 75 with the card sand device 70, the membership card 300 stores the game table information 212b of the pachinko machine 10 at that time, and the normal time base counter 213c. Is stored as a sharable ball, the value of the lucky central ball counter 213d is stored as a lucky ball, the value of the unusable area 213e is stored as a game unusable ball, and each flag 213h to lucky period is stored. The set value of 213j is stored in the flag memory 300g. By configuring in this way, game information such as the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 when the membership card 300 is returned can be linked to the possession ball data related to the lucky period and lucky balls, and stored in the membership card 300. When the membership card 300 is reinserted into the card insertion slot 72 of the card sanding device 70 corresponding to the same pachinko machine 10, the gaming state based on the gaming information can be resumed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, an authentication process (S4051) executed by the MPU 271 in the card sand apparatus 70 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this authentication process (S4051). This authentication process (S4051) is stored in the game machine information memory 300f of the member card 300 when the member card 300 is inserted into the card insertion slot 72 of the card sand device 70 in the main process of the card sand device 70. The ID information is transmitted to the frame overall control device 111, and processing according to the coincidence determination result in the frame overall control device 111 is executed.

  Specifically, first, the ID information stored in the gaming machine information memory 300f of the membership card 300 is transmitted to the frame overall control device 111 (S4101), and then the frame overall control device 111 stores the game machine information memory 300f in the gaming machine information memory 300f. It is determined whether or not the match information transmitted when the ID information matches is received (S4102), or whether or not the mismatch information transmitted when the ID information does not match the ID information of the game machine information memory 300f is received. (S4103), and waits until matching information or mismatch information is received from the frame overall control device 111 (S4102: No, 4103: No). If the coincidence information is received as a result of the determination (S4102: Yes), the ID information stored in the gaming machine information memory 300f of the membership card 300 and the gaming machine information 212b stored in the ROM 212 of the frame overall control device 111 are obtained. Since it means that they match, the possessed ball data relating to the lucky ball stored in the lucky memory 300e of the membership card 300 is transmitted to be added to the lucky central ball counter 213d of the frame overall control device 111 (S4104). ), The set value data of each flag 213h to 213j stored in the flag memory 300g of the member card 300 is transmitted to the frame overall control device 111 (S4105), and the process proceeds to S4107.

  On the other hand, when the discrepancy information is received from the frame overall control device 111 during the standby of S4102 or S4103 (S4103: Yes), the ID information stored in the gaming machine information memory 300f of the membership card 300 and the frame overall control device This means that the game table information 212b stored in the ROM 212 of 111 does not match, so the possession ball data related to the lucky ball stored in the during-lucky memory 300e of the membership card 300 is used as the game usage of the membership card 300. Addition to the impossible memory 300d (S4016), and the process proceeds to S4107. In the process of S4107, the value in the lucky memory 300e of the membership card 300 is cleared to “0” (S4107), and the value of the flag memory 300g is cleared to “0” (S4108). Return to processing. Therefore, in the authentication process, when the ID information stored in the membership card 300 and the ID information of the pachinko machine 10 do not match, the possession ball data related to the lucky ball stored in the lucky memory 300e is stored in the game unusable memory. If the pachinko machine 10 that acquired the lucky ball is different from the pachinko machine that is going to play the game, the use of the lucky ball in the game will be prevented can do.

  In this way, if the pachinko machine that interrupted the previous game matches the pachinko machine that is going to play this time, the game situation when the previous game was interrupted stored in the membership card 300 is restored, If it is during the period, the lucky period is resumed, and the possession ball data relating to the lucky ball stored in the lucky central ball counter 213d can be restored. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine that interrupted the previous game does not match the pachinko machine that is supposed to play this time, the game situation when the previous game stored in the membership card 300 is interrupted is not restored. Therefore, when playing with a different pachinko machine, it is possible to play a new game without reflecting the game situation of the pachinko machine where the previous game was played to the other pachinko machine. It is possible to maintain the single-player and single-player gameability of the number system.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the return button 75 is operated by the player during the lucky period, information during the lucky period and the identification information of the platform related to the pachinko machine 10 ( (Game table information) is associated and stored in the member card 300, and when the member card 300 is inserted again into the card sanding device 70 attached to the pachinko machine 10, the game table information is authenticated and the authentication is performed. If it is properly performed, the period during the lucky period is resumed, and the state before the operation of the return button 75 is restored. By configuring in this way, the player can restore the lucky period when the game is resumed even if the member card 300 is returned even if the player wishes to take a rest or a meal break even during the lucky period. Therefore, while preventing the member card 300 from being stolen, a comfortable gaming environment can be constructed by appropriately acquiring toilet breaks and the like.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the membership card 300 is inserted into the card sanding device 70 attached to the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine that has played the current game with the pachinko machine that interrupted the previous game. When the game does not match, the game situation when the previous game saved in the membership card 300 is interrupted is not restored, so that when playing with a different pachinko machine, the previous game is played. Since a new game can be performed without reflecting the game situation of the pachinko machine that has been used to the other pachinko machine, it is possible to maintain the single-player and single-player gameability of the lucky number system. The gameability of the lucky number system is exclusively for the pachinko machine that has acquired the lucky period, and is a gameability that is set to allow continuous play based on the lucky ball only in the pachinko machine that has acquired the lucky period. If the lucky ball acquired with the other pachinko machine can be used with other pachinko machines, the game purpose of the lucky number system will collapse. Therefore, the lucky balls acquired with one pachinko machine can be used with other pachinko machines so that the gameability of the lucky number system can be maintained.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in 2nd Embodiment, there exists the same effect as the effect show | played by the pachinko machine 10 in 1st Embodiment by the structure same as the pachinko machine 10 in 1st Embodiment.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 50. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated centering on the point which is different from the pachinko machine 10 in 2nd Embodiment. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the second embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, when the member card 300 is inserted into the card insertion slot 72 of the card sand device 70, there are a pachinko machine that interrupted the previous game and a pachinko machine that is going to play this time. If they match, the game situation at the time of the previous game interruption is revived, and the game is resumed from the revived state. Therefore, even when straddling the date, if the pachinko machine that plays the game is the same, the game will be resumed from the game situation at the time of the previous day's game interruption, for example, in the `` unlimited '' lucky period As long as the game is played with the same pachinko machine, it becomes possible to play the game as a lucky period semi-permanently without ending the lucky period. There is a risk of covering.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is configured to restore the lucky period without omission if the backup is valid when the power is turned on when the power is off. In the case of this configuration, when the amusement hall is closed for the day, the pachinko machine that was in the lucky period will be restarted at the start of the next day's business, and the amusement hall will release the lucky period The RAM 213 must be initialized and the work load of the game hall staff may increase.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when the player operates the return button 75 during the lucky period, information during the lucky period, gaming machine information regarding the pachinko machine 10, date information, Are stored in the membership card 300 in association with each other, and when the membership card 300 is inserted again into the card sanding device 70 attached to the pachinko machine 10, the game machine information is authenticated and the date information is authenticated. And the gaming machine information stored in the membership card 300 matches the gaming machine information stored in the pachinko machine 10, and the date information stored in the membership card 300 and the date information stored in the pachinko machine 10 are matched. Is matched (in the third embodiment, whether or not the dates match), the lucky period is resumed and the state before the return button 75 is operated is returned. Is constructed sea urchin. By configuring in this way, even if the player wishes to take a rest or a meal break even during the lucky period, even if the member card 300 is returned, the lucky period can be restored when the game is resumed. Thus, it is possible to construct a comfortable gaming environment while preventing the membership card 300 from being stolen. Moreover, since it is possible to prevent a lucky period from being given over a date as a game hall, it is possible to maintain the gameability of the lucky number system and prevent the game hall from suffering a disadvantage.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the date information of the backed-up timer counter 213o and the date information of the RTC 220 are determined to coincide with each other. Each flag 213h to 213j is configured to be turned off. By configuring in this way, when the date information of the timer counter 213o is different from the date information of the RTC 220, it means that the current power-on date is different from the date when the lucky period is given. In particular, the flags 213h to 213j related to the lucky period can be set to OFF, thereby reducing the work burden on the staff at the game hall.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  FIG. 43 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the frame overall control device 111, the card sand device 70, and the membership card 300 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment differs from the first embodiment and the second embodiment in that a timer counter 213o is provided in the RAM 213 of the frame overall control device 111, and the frame overall The RTC (real time clock) 220 is connected to the input / output port 215 of the control device 111, and the date memory 300h is provided in the member card 300.

  The timer counter 213o of the RAM 213 is a storage unit that stores date information input from the RTC 220. The frame overall control device 111 is configured to perform a rewrite process of reading the date information of the RTC 220 and rewriting the value of the timer counter 213o in the start-up process (see FIG. 46) performed only when the power is turned on. The date information written in the timer counter 213o is determined to match the date information in the RTC 220 before the rewriting process when the backup is valid when the power is restored after a power interruption. When it is determined that the information matches the date information of the RTC 220, since the power is turned on and off on the same day, the setting values of the flags 213h to 213j related to the lucky period are restored as they are. . On the other hand, if the date information of the timer counter 213o and the date information of the RTC 220 do not match, the power is turned on / off on a different day, so the values of the flags 213h to 213j are set to OFF to end the lucky period. It is configured as follows.

  The date information of the timer counter 213o is configured to be written (overwritten) in the date memory 300h of the member card 300 when the return button 75 of the card sand device 70 is operated by the player. When the membership card 300 is inserted into the card sand device 70, it is determined whether or not the date information in the date memory 300h stored in the membership card 300 matches the date information stored in the timer counter 213o. The

  The RTC 220 is a counter for measuring and outputting real time, and includes a backup power source (not shown). Thereby, the RTC 220 is configured to manage the passage of time even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off. The date information of the RTC 220 is read when the backup is valid in the startup process at power-on (see FIG. 46), and it is determined whether or not the read date information matches the date information stored in the timer counter 213o. The In addition, after the match determination process, the value of the RTC 220 is read again regardless of whether the match determination results match or not, and the read value is written to the timer counter 213o.

  The date memory 300h of the member card 300 is a storage area for storing date information when the return button 75 of the card sand device 70 is operated by the player. The date memory 300h is configured to store date information of the timer counter 213o of the frame overall control device 111 when the return button 75 is operated by the player. The date information stored in the date memory 300h is determined to match the date information stored in the timer counter 213o of the frame overall control device 111 when the member card 300 is inserted into the card sand device 70, and the date memory 300h. And the timer counter 213o coincide with each other and the gaming machine information memory 300f and the gaming machine information 212b coincide with each other, based on the value of the lucky memory 300e and the value of the flag memory 300g, 111 lucky center ball counters 213d and flags 213h to 213j are set, and the game state before the return button 75 is operated can be restored.

  In the third embodiment, the date information stored in the timer counter 213o of the frame overall control device 111 is written in the date memory 300h of the member card 300 when the return button 75 is operated. It was. On the other hand, when the return button 75 is operated, the date information held in the RTC 220 of the frame overall control device 111 may be written into the date memory 300h of the member card 300. Further, an RTC may be provided in the card sand device 70 or the hall computer 263, and the value of the RTC may be written in the date memory 300h.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 44 and 45, the contents of command and response transmission / reception with the pachinko machine 10, the card sand device 70, and the membership card 300 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing exchange of information of the pachinko machine 10, the card sand device 70, and the member card 300 when the member card 300 is inserted and when the return button 75 is pressed, and is stored in the game machine information memory 300f of the member card 300. And the ID information of the gaming machine information 212b of the frame overall control device 111 coincide with each other, the date information stored in the date memory 300h of the membership card 300, and the timer counter 213o of the frame overall control device 111 are stored. It is the figure which showed the case where the date information matched. 45, like FIG. 44, is a diagram showing information exchange of the pachinko machine 10, the card sand device 70 and the member card 300 when the member card 300 is inserted and when the return button 75 is pressed. Whether the ID information stored in the gaming machine information memory 300f does not match the ID information in the gaming machine information 212b of the frame overall control device 111, the date information stored in the date memory 300h of the membership card 300, and the frame overall control It is the figure which showed whether the date information memorize | stored in the timer counter 213o of the apparatus 111 does not correspond. In FIG. 44 and FIG. 45, the action of <pressing a ball rental button> is the same as that in the first embodiment, and therefore description and description thereof are omitted. 44 and 45, the processing of <return button pressing> is the same.

<Insert membership card (third embodiment)>
When the player has inserted the member card 300 owned by the player into the card insertion slot 72 of the card sand device 70, first, an authentication process with the hall computer 263 is performed (not shown), and the legitimate member card 300 is obtained. The possessed ball data relating to the sharable balls stored in the normal memory 300c of the membership card 300 is read into the card sand device 70. Thereafter, the card sand device 70 transmits an insertion signal indicating that the member card 300 has been inserted into the card sand device 70 to the pachinko machine 10. Then, possessed ball data related to the sharable balls stored in the normal time memory 300 c of the read membership card 300 is transmitted to the pachinko machine 10. When the pachinko machine 10 receives possessed ball data related to a sharable ball stored in the normal memory 300c of the membership card 300 from the card sand device 70, the pachinko machine 10 transmits the possessed ball data of the normal memory 300c to the frame overall control device 111. Is added to the normal time counter 213c. After transmitting the possession ball data in the normal time memory 300c, the card sand device 70 clears the value of the normal time memory 300c of the membership card 300 to “0”.

  Thereafter, the ID information stored in the game machine information memory 300 f of the membership card 300 is read into the card sand device 70. Then, the card sand device 70 notifies the pachinko machine 10 of the ID information of the game table information memory 300f. Furthermore, the date information stored in the date memory 300h of the member card 300 is read into the card sand device 70, and the card sand device 70 notifies the pachinko machine 10 of the date information in the date memory 300h. The pachinko machine 10 determines whether the ID information in the gaming table information memory 300f notified from the card sand device 70 matches the ID information in the gaming table information 212b of the frame overall control device 111, and also from the card sand device 70. It is determined whether the notified date information in the date memory 300h matches the date information in the timer counter 213o of the frame overall control device 111, and if both the ID information and the date information match, the pachinko machine 10 ( The frame overall control device 111) transmits the coincidence information to the card sand device 70. The card sand device 70 that has received the match information reads possession ball data related to the lucky ball stored in the lucky memory 300e of the membership card 300, transmits the possession ball data related to the lucky ball to the frame overall control device 111, and The overall control device 111 adds the possessed ball data relating to the received lucky ball to the value of the lucky central ball counter 213d.

  Subsequently, the card sand device 70 reads flag setting information related to the lucky period stored in the flag memory 300g of the membership card 300, transmits the flag setting information to the frame overall control device 111, and the frame overall control device 111 Based on the received flag setting information, the values of the unlimited flag 213h, the lucky flag 213i, and the start flag 213j are set. Thereafter, the card sand device 70 clears the value in the lucky memory 300e of the membership card 300 to “0” and also clears the value in the flag memory 300g to “0”.

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the ID information in the gaming table information memory 300f notified from the card sand device 70 matches the ID information in the gaming table information 212b in the frame overall control device 111, and When it is determined whether or not the date information in the date memory 300h notified from the card sand device 70 and the date information stored in the timer counter 213o of the frame overall control device 111 match, neither of them matches The pachinko machine 10 (the frame overall control device 111) transmits the mismatch information to the card sand device 70 (see FIG. 45). The card sand device 70 that has received the mismatch information adds the possessed ball data related to the lucky ball stored in the lucky memory 300e of the membership card 300 to the game unusable memory 300d, and then sets the value of the lucky memory 300e to “0”. "And clear the value of the flag memory 300g to" 0 ".

<Return button pressed (third embodiment)>
When the return button 75 of the card sand device 70 is operated by the player, first, the card sand device 70 transmits a return signal to the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 that has received the return signal transmits the ID information of the gaming machine information 212b stored in the ROM 212 of the frame overall control device 111 to the card sand device 70. The card sand device 70 that has received the ID information of the gaming machine information 212 b writes the received ID information in the gaming machine information memory of the membership card 300.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 transmits the date information stored in the timer counter 213o of the frame overall control device 111 to the card sand device 70. The card sand device 70 that has received the date information of the timer counter 213 o writes the received date information into the date memory 300 h of the membership card 300.

  Then, the possessed ball data relating to the sharable ball of the normal time ball counter 213c is transmitted to the card sand device 70, and the value of the normal time ball counter 213c is cleared to “0”. The card sand device 70 that has received the possessed ball data related to the balls that can be commonly used by the normal time ball counter 213c stores the contents of the possessed ball data related to the balls that can be commonly used by the normal time ball counter 213c in the normal time memory 300c of the member card 300. to add.

  Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 transmits possessed ball data relating to the lucky ball of the lucky central ball counter 213d to the card sand device 70, and clears the value of the lucky central ball counter 213d to “0”. The card sand device 70 that has received the possessed ball data related to the lucky ball of the lucky central ball counter 213d adds the content of the possessed ball data related to the lucky ball of the lucky central ball counter 213d to the lucky memory 300e of the membership card 300.

  Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 transmits possessed ball data regarding the game unusable balls in the unusable area 213e to the card sand device 70, and clears the value of the unusable area 213e to “0”. The card sand device 70 that has received the possessed ball data related to the game unusable ball in the unusable area 213e stores the content of the possessed ball data related to the game unusable ball in the unusable area 213e in the game unusable memory 300d of the membership card 300. to add.

  After that, the pachinko machine 10 transmits the flag setting information of the unlimited flag 213h, the lucky flag 213i and the start flag 213j to the card sand device 70, and turns off all the values of the unlimited flag 213h, the lucky flag 213i and the start flag 213j. Set. The card sand device 70 that has received the flag setting information writes the flag setting information in the flag memory 300g of the member card 300.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 211 in the frame overall control device 111 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is a process that is started after the power is turned on, as in the first embodiment.

  The start-up process in the third embodiment is different from the start-up process in the first embodiment. When the backup is valid, the date information of the backed-up timer counter 213o and the date information of the RTC 220 are determined to coincide (S2051). In the case of non-coincidence (S2051: No), the processing for setting each flag 213h to 213j related to the lucky period to off (S2052) is executed, and the date information of the RTC 220 is set to the timer after the above match determination or initial setting. And a process of writing (setting) to the counter 213o (S2053).

  Specifically, when it is determined in the process of S2005 that the RAM determination value is normal (S2005: Yes), the information on occurrence of power interruption is cleared (S2006), and then the date stored in the timer counter 213o It is determined whether the information matches the date information indicated by the RTC 220 (S2051). If it is determined that they match (S2051), it indicates that the date when the power is turned off and the power is turned on is the same day, so that the flags 213h to 213j related to the lucky period are set to the state before the power is turned off. The process is skipped and the process proceeds to S2010. On the other hand, when the date information stored in the timer counter 213o and the date information indicated by the RTC 220 do not match (S2051: No), it means that the date when the power is turned off and the power is turned on is different. The values of the flag 213h, the lucky flag 213i, and the start flag 213j are set to OFF (S2052), the lucky period is initialized, and the process proceeds to S2010.

  In the third embodiment, after the processing in S2011, the date information indicated by the RTC 220 is written to the timer counter 213o (S2053), and the date information stored in the timer counter 213o is updated to the current day data.

  In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, if the backup is valid when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the setting values of the flags 213h to 213j related to the lucky period have also been restored. When the pachinko machine that was in the lucky period when the day ended, the lucky period was resumed at the start of the next day's business, and the amusement arcades initialized the RAM 213 to release the lucky period. The work burden on the amusement hall staff has increased.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the date information of the backed-up timer counter 213o and the date information of the RTC 220 are determined to match. Each flag 213h to 213j is configured to be turned off. By configuring in this way, when the date information of the timer counter 213o is different from the date information of the RTC 220, the flags 213h to 213j relating to the lucky period are automatically set off, and the work load of the staff at the game hall is reduced. Can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the clearing process (S2105) executed by the MPU 211 in the frame overall control device 111 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the settlement process. This settlement process (S2105) is executed in the main process of the frame overall control device 111, as in the first and second embodiments.

  As in the second embodiment, the clearing process in the third embodiment writes the ID information of the game table information 212b in the game table information memory 300f of the member card 300 when a return signal is received from the card sand device 70. The value of the normal time ball counter 213c, the value of the lucky central ball counter 213d and the value of the unusable area 213e are added (written) to the normal time memory 300c, the lucky memory 300e, and the game unusable memory 300d of the member card 300. (S2852, S2804 and S2805, S2806, S2853, S2808, S2809 to S2811). Further, in the process of S2854, the card sand device 70 is notified to write each set value of the flags related to the lucky period, that is, the unlimited flag 213h, the lucky flag 213i, and the start flag 213j, to the flag memory 300g of the member card 300. (S2854) In the processing of S2812, the values of the flags 213h to 213j related to the lucky period are set to off (S2812). Since these processes are the same as those in the second embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the clearing process in the third embodiment, when the insertion signal is received from the card sand device 70, the values of the game table information memory 300f of the member card 300 and the game table information 212b of the frame overall control device 111 are discriminated. A table and date information confirmation process for discriminating values between the date memory 300h of the card 300 and the timer counter 213o of the frame overall control device 111 is executed (S2881). When the return signal is received from the card sand device 70, the card sand device 70 is notified to write the date information of the timer counter 213o of the frame overall control device 111 into the date memory 300h of the member card 300 (S2882).

  Specifically, in the process of S2801, when the insertion signal of the membership card 300 is received from the card sand device 70, the stand and date information confirmation process is executed (S2881). This table and date information confirmation processing will be described later. Further, in the processing of S2803, when the return signal of the member card 300 is received from the card sand device 70, the card sand device so as to write the game table information 212b stored in the ROM 212 into the game table information memory 300f of the member card 300. 70 (S2852), and then notifies the card sand device 70 to write the date information of the timer counter 213o into the date memory 300h of the membership card 300 (S2882).

  As described above, when the return button 75 is operated by the card sanding device 70 by the player, the game card information 212b of the pachinko machine 10 at that time is stored in the member card 300, and the date of the timer counter 213o is stored. Information is stored, the value of the normal ball counter 213c is stored as a shareable ball, the value of the lucky central ball counter 213d is stored as a lucky ball, and the value of the unusable area 213e is stored as a game unusable ball Further, the setting values of the flags 213h to 213j related to the lucky period are stored in the flag memory 300g. By configuring in this way, game information such as the game state (ID information and date information of the machine) of the pachinko machine 10 when the member card 300 is returned can be stored in the member card 300, so the same pachinko machine When the member card 300 is reinserted into the card insertion slot 72 of the card sand device 70 corresponding to 10 and the date when the member card 300 is returned matches the reinserted date, the game information is used. It becomes possible to resume the gaming state and the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 48, the stand and date information confirmation processing (S2881) executed by the MPU 211 in the frame overall control apparatus 111 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this table and date information confirmation processing. This table and date information confirmation process (S2881) was played last time when the membership card 300 was inserted into the card insertion slot 72 of the card sand device 70 in the settlement process (S2105) (S2801: Yes). It is executed to check whether or not the pachinko machine and the pachinko machine to be played this time match, and whether or not the date of the previous game and the date of the current game match. The stand and date information confirmation processing (S2881) is different from the stand information confirmation processing (S2851) of the second embodiment in that the date information stored in the timer counter 213o and the date memory 300h of the membership card 300 are different. It is a point to determine whether or not the values match.

  Specifically, when it is determined in the process of S2872 that the ID information of the gaming machine information 212b of the frame overall control device 111 matches the ID information of the gaming machine information memory 300f of the membership card 300 (S2872: Yes). Then, it is determined whether or not the date information stored in the timer counter 213o of the frame overall control device 111 matches the date information stored in the date memory 300h of the member card 300 (S2891). When the date information in the timer counter 213o and the date information in the date memory 300h match (S2891: Yes), it means that both the game machine information and the date information match, and therefore the match information is used as the card sand device 70. (S2873), the data relating to the lucky ball and the set value data relating to the lucky period stored in the membership card 300 are received, and the lucky central ball counter 213d and the flags 213h to 213j are set (S2875- S2878). On the other hand, if the date information in the timer counter 213o and the date memory 300h do not match (S2891: No), the mismatch information is transmitted to the card sand device 70 (S2874), and the table and date information confirmation processing is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, a main process executed by the MPU 271 in the card sand apparatus 70 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this main process. As in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the main processing of the card sand apparatus 70 of the third embodiment includes a reception process when the membership card 300 is inserted, a return process when returning, and the like.

  The main process in the third embodiment is different from the main process in the first and second embodiments. When the player inserts the membership card 300 from the card insertion slot 72, the frame overall control device 111 From the match information or the mismatch information indicating whether or not the game table information memory 300f and the game table information 212b match, and whether or not the date information of the date memory 300h and the timer counter 213o match. The member executes the date information stored in the timer counter 213o notified from the frame overall control device 111 when the player executes the authentication process (S4051) depending on whether or not the return button 75 is operated by the player. And a process of writing to the date memory 300h of the card 300 (S4071).

  Specifically, in the process of S4002, when it is determined that the membership card 300 is inserted (S4002), the authentication process is executed (S4051) after executing the processes of S4003 to S4005. This authentication process will be described later. Also, in the process of S4011, when it is determined that the return button 75 is operated by the player (S4011: Yes), the date stored in the timer counter 213o notified from the frame overall control device 111 after the process of S4052 Information is written in the date memory 300h of the member card 300 (S4071), and the process proceeds to S4012.

  As described above, when the player operates the return button 75 by the card sand device 70, the membership card 300 stores the gaming machine information 212b of the pachinko machine 10 at that time and the date of the timer counter 213o. Information is stored, the value of the normal ball counter 213c is stored as a shareable ball, the value of the lucky central ball counter 213d is stored as a lucky ball, and the value of the unusable area 213e is stored as a game unusable ball Further, the setting values of the flags 213h to 213j related to the lucky period are stored in the flag memory 300g. With this configuration, the game information such as the game state of the pachinko machine 10 when the member card 300 is returned, the date information, and the possession ball data relating to the lucky period and the lucky ball can be linked and stored in the member card 300. Since the member card 300 is reinserted into the card insertion slot 72 of the card sand apparatus 70 corresponding to the same pachinko machine 10, the date when the member card 300 is returned matches the date when it is reintroduced. In addition, it is possible to resume the gaming state based on the gaming information.

  Next, an authentication process (S4051) executed by the MPU 271 in the card sand apparatus 70 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this authentication process. This authentication process (S4051) is stored in the game machine information memory 300f of the member card 300 when the member card 300 is inserted into the card insertion slot 72 of the card sand device 70 in the main process of the card sand device 70. The ID information is transmitted to the frame general control device 111, and the date information stored in the date memory 300h of the member card 300 is transmitted to the frame general control device 111, and processing according to the match determination result in the frame general control device 111 is performed. It is something to execute.

  Specifically, after transmitting the ID information stored in the game machine information memory 300f of S4101 to the frame overall control device 111 (S4101), the date information stored in the date memory 300h is then sent to the frame overall control device 111. Transmitted (S4151), and then received from the frame overall control device 111 when the ID information and the date information match, or when the ID information or the date information does not match. If the matching information is received (S4102: Yes), the processes of S4104, S4105, S4107, and S4108 are executed. On the other hand, when mismatch information is received (S4103: Yes), the processing of S4106, S4107, and S4108 is executed.

  In this way, if the pachinko machine that interrupted the previous game matches the pachinko machine that is going to play the current game, and the date when the previous game was interrupted and the date when the current game is going to match, The game situation at the time when the previous game was interrupted saved in the card 300 is restored, and if it is during the lucky period, the lucky period is resumed, and the possession regarding the lucky ball stored in the lucky central ball counter 213d Ball data can also be revived. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine that interrupted the previous game does not match the pachinko machine that is going to play the current game, or if the date when the previous game was interrupted and the date that the current game is going to run do not match, the membership card 300 By configuring the game status so that it does not revive when the previous game is interrupted, the previous game is played when playing with a different pachinko machine, or when playing with a different date. It is possible to play a new game without reflecting the game situation of the other pachinko machine to the other pachinko machine. it can.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when the return button 75 is operated by the player during the lucky period, information during the lucky period and the identification information of the platform related to the pachinko machine 10 ( Game table information) and date information are associated with each other and stored in the member card 300. When the member card 300 is inserted again into the card sanding device 70 attached to the pachinko machine 10, it is stored in the member card 300. The game table information and the game table information stored in the pachinko machine 10 match, and the date information stored in the membership card 300 and the date information stored in the pachinko machine 10 match (in the third embodiment, If the dates match), the lucky period is resumed to return to the state before the return button 75 is operated. By configuring in this way, the player can restore the lucky period when the game is resumed even if the member card 300 is returned even if the player wishes to take a rest or a meal break even during the lucky period. Therefore, while preventing the member card 300 from being stolen, a comfortable gaming environment can be constructed by appropriately acquiring toilet breaks and the like. Moreover, since it is possible to prevent a lucky period from being given over a date as a game hall, it is possible to maintain the gameability of the lucky number system and prevent the game hall from suffering a disadvantage.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the date information of the backed-up timer counter 213o and the date information of the RTC 220 are determined to coincide with each other. Each flag 213h to 213j is configured to be turned off. By configuring in this way, when the date information of the timer counter 213o is different from the date information of the RTC 220, it means that the current power-on date is different from the date when the lucky period is given. Therefore, the flags 213h to 213j related to the lucky period are set to OFF. Thereby, even if the staff does not perform the reset operation of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to prevent the lucky period from continuing across dates, and to reduce the work burden of the staff at the game hall. It should be noted that the date information stored in the timer counter 213o and the date information stored in the timer counter 213o can be determined by determining whether the date information stored in the timer counter 213o and the date information stored in the RTC 220 coincide with each other before the RTC 220 update process in the start-up process. The difference from the date information can be determined.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, the same effect as the effect of the pachinko machine 10 in the corresponding embodiment is obtained by the same configuration as the pachinko machine 10 in either the first embodiment or the second embodiment. Play.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54. The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment is configured to give one lucky period according to the type of jackpot symbol in the variable symbol display of the third symbol. Specifically, when the first time is a big hit with “7 symbols (Dugong)”, the “unlimited” state is given, and “3 symbols (turtle)” or “5 symbols (shrimp)” is also given to “first time”. When a big hit is made, a “lucky” state is given, and when a big win is made with a third symbol other than the above, a “start” state is given. In the case of such a configuration, the game number of the lucky number system is given, but the start condition or the end condition is fixed. On the other hand, for example, if you want to grant a lucky period longer than the “Lucky” state to the jackpot that is given the “probability variation state”, or the lucky period according to the position of the effective line that hit the jackpot instead of the type of jackpot symbol There is a demand for a configuration that can adopt game characteristics including a lucky number system that is characteristic for each game hall, depending on the intent of the game hall, such as when it is desired to give the game number, or when it is not desired to adopt the lucky number system at all.

  Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, a condition setting switch 280 that can set the start condition and end condition of the lucky period is provided, and the lucky period is given or ended based on the setting content of the condition setting switch 280. Configure. With such a configuration, it is possible to create various game properties according to the set contents, and it is possible to realize game properties according to the intention of the game hall.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to third embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to third embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  FIG. 51 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. The back configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is different from the first to third embodiments in that a condition setting switch 280 is provided in the board box of the frame overall control device 111.

  The condition setting switch 280 provided in the board box of the frame overall control device 111 is a lucky period setting switch for setting a start condition of the lucky period, and is a slide type switch that can be set in a plurality of stages for each condition. It consists of dip switches. This condition setting switch 280 is provided in the board box of the frame overall control device 111 and is mounted on the circuit board of the frame overall control device 111, so that it cannot be operated from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and It is configured that the condition setting switch 280 can be operated after the staff at the venue performs the unlocking operation of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the configuration of the condition setting switch 280 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 52A is a front view of the condition setting switch 280, and FIG. 52B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each number corresponding to the switches 281 to 294 of the condition setting switch 280. is there.

  The condition setting switch 280 includes symbol setting switches 281 to 289 for determining a start condition and an end condition for a lucky period for each jackpot symbol, and line setting switches 290 to 294 for determining a start condition and an end condition for the lucky period for each jackpot line. Are provided (see FIG. 52A). Each switch 281 to 294 can be set in five steps, and corresponds to items “unlimited”, “lucky”, “lucky end”, “start” and “unset” in order from the top. Configured.

  Specifically, when each of the switches 281 to 294 is set to “unlimited”, it is a start condition for the “unlimited” state, and when it is set to “lucky”, it is a start condition for the “lucky” state. If it is set to “Lucky end”, it will be the end condition for “Lucky” state. If it is set to “Start”, it will be the start condition for “Start” state. If it is set to “Not set” According to the conditions, the lucky period is not granted. When “not set” is set, the start condition of the lucky period is not satisfied, and the end condition is not satisfied.

  Note that the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment has a configuration in which an end condition of the “unlimited” state is not set and is not ended unless the membership card 300 is returned. Further, the end condition of the “start” state is configured such that the end of the “time reduction state”, that is, the end of the 100th variation display of the third symbol in the “time reduction state” is set by default. ing.

  In addition, numbers are assigned to the upper portions of the switches 281 to 294 in ascending order from the left, and each number indicates the contents of the jackpot symbol or jackpot line for each number shown in FIG. A jackpot line is a jackpot when three identical 3rd symbols are arranged in a straight line (or when a combination of predetermined symbols (eg, “3”, “4” and “1”) is arranged). In the fourth embodiment, five effective lines, that is, the left line L1, the middle line L2, the right line L3, the lower right line L4, and the left line are generated on the display screen. A falling line L5 is set (see FIG. 7).

  The condition setting switch 280 is specifically the “1” switch 281 provided at the left end of the condition setting switch 280 corresponding to “1 symbol (octopus symbol)” of the third symbol, and the “2” switch on the right side thereof. 282 corresponds to “3 symbol (Harisenbon symbol)” of the third symbol, “3” switch 283 on the right side corresponds to “3 symbol (turtle symbol)” on the third symbol, and “4” switch on the right side thereof 284 corresponds to “4 symbol (shark symbol)” of the third symbol, “5” switch 285 on the right side corresponds to “5 symbol (shrimp symbol)” on the third symbol, and “6” switch on the right side thereof. “286” corresponds to “6 symbol (ancho symbol)” of the third symbol, “7” switch 287 on the right side corresponds to “7 symbol (Dugong symbol)”, and “8” switch 288 on the right side corresponds to “8”. Corresponds to "design (angel fish pattern)" , "9" switch 289 of the right-hand side corresponds to the "9 symbol (crab pattern)". The “10” switch 290 on the right side corresponds to the left line L1 in the third symbol display device 81, and the “11” switch 291 on the right side corresponds to the middle line L2 in the third symbol display device 81. The “12” switch 292 corresponds to the right line L3 in the third symbol display device 81, and the “13” switch 293 on the right side corresponds to the right downward line L4 in the third symbol display device 81, and “14” on the right end. The switch 294 corresponds to the left downward line L5 in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the example of the condition setting switch 280 shown in FIG. 52A, the “7” switch 287 is set to “unlimited” as the start condition for the “unlimited” state. As a start condition for the “lucky” state, the “3” switch 283 and the “5” switch 285 are set to “lucky”. Further, the “4” switch 284 is set to “lucky end” as the end condition (and start condition) of the “lucky” state. Further, “1” switch 281, “2” switch 282, “6” switch 286, “8” switch 288, and “9” switch 289 are set to “start” as a start condition in the “start” state. In the fourth embodiment, the “10” to “14” switches 290 to 294 corresponding to the jackpot line are set to “not set” so that the lucky period is not given according to the type of jackpot line. Is set. When each of the switches 281 to 294 is set to “Lucky end”, it is set as an end condition in the “Lucky” state and set as a start condition in the “Start” state. Yes.

  In the fourth embodiment, the configuration of the condition setting switch 280 is configured by a slide type dip switch. Instead of this configuration, it is possible to set the start condition of the lucky period using a rotary rotary switch (thum rotary switch) or to set the start condition of the lucky period using a touch panel or the like. Any structure or function may be used as long as the input mechanism can set the start condition or end condition of the lucky period in a plurality of stages. In addition, a plurality of condition tables storing the start and end conditions of the lucky period are provided, and by selecting and setting one of the condition tables using a dial switch or the like, the start and end conditions of the lucky period are collectively You may comprise so that it can set.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is configured such that the end condition in the “unlimited” state and the end condition in the “start” state cannot be set. Instead of this configuration, the “unlimited” state or “ An end condition in the “start” state may be settable. For example, as the end condition of the “start” state, instead of 100 times of the 3rd symbol variation display in the “time shortening state”, 100 times of the 3rd symbol variation display after the “time shortening state” ends. That is, it may be configured so that the third symbol can be set 200 times after the jackpot is displayed 200 times. In this case, it may be configured such that a condition can be additionally set with respect to an existing condition, such as an additional setting of 100 times of change display for 100 times of change display.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 53 is a block diagram showing electrical configurations of the frame overall control device 111, the card sand device 70, and the membership card 300 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that a start condition memory 213p is provided in the RAM 213 of the frame overall control device 111, and the frame overall control device 111 The condition setting switch 280 is connected to the input / output port 215.

  The start condition memory 213p of the RAM 213 is a memory that stores a condition for entering the “start” state. When the power is turned on, the start condition memory 213p does not store information on occurrence of power interruption (S2003: No in FIG. 54), or when it is determined that the stored contents of the RAM 213 are destroyed After the initial setting process of the RAM 213 (S2008 of FIG. 54) executed in (S2005 of FIG. 54: S2008), the contents of the switches 281 to 294 set to “START” among the condition setting switches 280 are displayed. Remembered.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52A, a “1” switch 281, a “2” switch 282, a “6” switch 286, an “8” switch 288 and a “9” switch 289 are provided. It is set to “Start”. Further, the “4” switch 284 is set to “lucky end”. Therefore, in this start condition memory 213p, “1 symbol (octopus symbol)”, “2 symbol (harisenbon symbol)”, “4 symbol (shark symbol)”, “6 symbol (ancho symbol)”, “8 symbol (angel) The setting information relating to “Fish Symbol” ”and“ 9 Symbol (Crab Symbol) ”is stored, and a“ start ”state is given when a big hit is made with the symbol.

  As described above, the condition setting switch 280 is a switch for setting the start condition and end condition of the lucky period, and is connected to the input / output port 215 of the frame overall control device 111. The MPU 211 sets this condition when the power is turned on. The setting contents of the switch 280 are read, and the contents of the unlimited condition memory 213m, the lucky condition memory 213n, and the start condition memory 213p are set.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 211 in the frame overall control device 111 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is a process that is activated after the power is turned on, as in the first and third embodiments.

  The start-up process in the fourth embodiment is different from the start-up process in the first embodiment or the third embodiment. After the initial setting process of the RAM 213 (S2008), the setting contents of the condition setting switch 280 are read. After executing the process of setting the unrestricted condition memory 213m, the lucky condition memory 213n, and the start condition memory 213p (S2071) and the initial setting process of the peripheral device of the MPU 211 (S2010), the unrestricted condition memory 213m, the lucky condition memory 213n, and And a process of transmitting a condition command based on the setting content of the start condition memory 213p to the sound lamp control device 113 (S2072).

  Specifically, in the process of S2008, after executing the initial setting process of the RAM 213 (S2008), the setting contents of the switches 281 to 294 of the condition setting switch 280 are read, and the unlimited condition memory 213m is read according to the read contents. The contents of the lucky condition memory 213n and the start condition memory 213p are set (S2071). In the fourth embodiment, a big hit with “7 symbols (Dugong symbols)” is set as a start condition in the unlimited condition memory 213m. In addition, the lucky condition memory 213n is set with a jackpot of “3 symbols (turtle symbol)” or “5 symbols (shrimp symbol)” as the start condition, and “4 symbols (shark symbol)” as the end condition. The jackpot is set. Furthermore, in the start condition memory 213p, “1 symbol (octopus symbol)”, “2 symbol (harisenbon symbol)”, “4 symbol (shark symbol)”, “6 symbol (ancho symbol)”, “8” The jackpot is set for “design (angel fish design)” and “9 design (crab design)”. In the fourth embodiment, the end condition in the “start” state is configured to default to the end of the “time reduction state”.

  In the processing of S2010, after initial setting processing of the MPU 211 peripheral device (S2010), a condition command based on the setting values of the unlimited condition memory 213m, the lucky condition memory 213n, and the start condition memory 213p set in S2071 is generated. The condition command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (S2072). When the sound lamp control device 113 receives a condition command from the frame overall control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the condition command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 responds to the condition command with a status display device. The start condition and end condition of each lucky period are displayed in the 85 lucky number display area 85b.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the condition setting switch 280 that can set the start condition of the lucky period in the game hall is provided, and the lucky period is set based on the setting content of the condition setting switch 280. Configure to grant. With such a configuration, it is possible to create various game properties according to the set contents, and it is possible to realize game properties according to the intention of the game hall.

  Further, the condition setting switch 280 is provided on the board box of the frame overall control device 111 and is mounted on the circuit board of the frame overall control device 111, so that it cannot be operated from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the setting cannot be changed by the player, and the condition setting switch 280 can be operated only after the staff of the game hall unlocks the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, by preventing the lucky number from being changed by the player, it is possible to prevent a disadvantage caused by giving a lucky period unintended by the game hall.

  In the fourth embodiment, when the power is turned on, the setting contents of the start condition and end condition of the lucky period in the condition setting switch 280 are confirmed, and whether the start condition and end condition are acquired in the subsequent periodic control. It was always determined. On the other hand, for example, if all the switches 281 to 294 are set to “unset” in the condition setting switch 280, the game room does not want to adopt the lucky number system. Control regarding the end condition is not required. Therefore, in such a case, processing related to the lucky period such as setting and confirmation of each flag 213h to 213j and setting and confirmation of the jackpot result memory 213g can be omitted in periodic control, thereby reducing the control burden. be able to.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, in the variation display of the third symbol, the start condition or end condition of the lucky period can be set based on the type or effective line of the winning symbol. On the other hand, you may comprise so that the start condition or end condition of a lucky period may be set on the conditions different from the jackpot classification or effective line of the variable display of a 3rd symbol. Specifically, the start or end of the lucky period may be set based on a temporal factor. For example, an “unlimited” condition may be assigned when a big hit is made in the morning, or a “lucky” state may be given when a big hit is made in the evening 5 o'clock. Also, the start or end of the lucky period may be set based on the variable display of the second symbol rather than the variable display of the third symbol. For example, it may be set such that an “unlimited” state is given when the number of normal symbol hits exceeds 100 cumulative times. The start condition and end condition of the lucky period can also be employed in the first to third embodiments.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in 4th Embodiment, there exists the same effect as the effect show | played by the pachinko machine 10 in corresponding embodiment by the structure same as the pachinko machine 10 in either of 1st-3rd embodiment.

  The first to fourth embodiments may be combined with each other. For example, the configuration described in the first embodiment and the configuration described in the fourth embodiment may be used, or the configuration described in the third embodiment and the configuration described in the fourth embodiment may be used. Good.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed. For example, in each embodiment, a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of the other embodiments are added to the embodiment or replaced with a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of the embodiment. The embodiment may be modified and configured. Moreover, the numerical value quoted in each said embodiment is an example, and it is naturally possible to employ | adopt another numerical value.

<Modification 1>
In each of the embodiments described above, the winning balls acquired during the lucky period are all added to the lucky central ball counter 213d regardless of the types of the winning winning openings 3, 4, 5a. In this configuration, when managing the winning balls in the frame overall control device 111, it is not necessary to discriminate and manage the types of winning winning openings 3, 4, 5a, and the control related to winning ball management during the lucky period is complicated. There was an advantage that it was not necessary. However, since the ball data stored in the lucky ball counter 213d can no longer be used for the game after the lucky period, the ball data of the normal ball counter 213c is less versatile and has a lower game value for the player. Is. The lucky period is due to the jackpot, and it is the winning to the specific winning opening 5a that is directly related to the lucky period, and the winning to the general winning opening 3 or the starting winning opening 4 is lucky. It is an event that can occur even in a “normal gaming state (low probability state)” other than the period, and is not directly related to the lucky period. Accordingly, when all the winning balls generated during the lucky period are stored in the lucky central ball counter 213d, the general winning opening 3 that can be generated regardless of the lucky period and should be stored in the normal time ball counter 213c. Alternatively, since the winning ball of the start winning opening 4 is stored in the lucky central ball counter 213d, there is a possibility that the game value of the player may be damaged. Therefore, the winning ball to be added to the lucky central ball counter 213d is only the winning ball based on the winning to the specific winning port 5a, and the winning ball based on the winning to the general winning port 3 or the starting winning port 4 is the normal time ball. You may comprise so that it may add to the counter 213c. With this configuration, even during the lucky period, the winning ball based on winning in the general winning port 3 or the starting winning port 4 is stored in the normal time ball counter 213c that can be used in other pachinko machines. Therefore, a suitable gaming environment can be constructed without detracting from the player's gaming value.

<Modification 2>
In each of the above embodiments, the end of the lucky period is performed when the end condition of the “start” state is achieved (the third symbol variation 100 ends in the “time reduction state”). On the other hand, the end of the lucky period may be configured to end in accordance with the number of prize balls acquired during the lucky period (so-called quantitative system). By configuring in this way, the lucky period can be ended according to the number of acquired balls regardless of the transition of the gaming state, and the gaming specifications of various lucky numbers are realized, thereby enhancing the interest of the game be able to.

  In the conventional use of a game with a fixed quantity system, the game staff determines the number of balls acquired during the lucky period based on its own amount and finishes the lucky period (stopping work, ball exchange work and game resumption work) I was going. Therefore, since the end of the lucky period is determined by the subjectivity of each staff at the game hall, the determination of the end of the lucky period may be different for each staff, causing the player to have doubts about the game, and the willingness to continue the game May be reduced. Further, the staff of the game hall must perform an operation to end the lucky period of the lucky period, and there is a possibility that a great work burden is placed on the staff of the game hall. Therefore, by utilizing the functions of the in-flight circulation pachinko machine 10 and adopting a quantitative lucky number system under the control of the pachinko machine 10 and the card sand device 70, the number of balls acquired during the lucky period is determined by the player. The game can be performed without making the player dissatisfied with the end of the lucky period. In addition, there is no need to increase the work load on the game hall staff, and there is no need to increase the number of staff. Gameability can be realized. In addition, when adopting the quantitative system, it may be configured such that the game hall can set the number of winning balls as the end condition.

<Modification 3>
In each of the above embodiments, value information such as card balance, shareable balls, and lucky balls is recorded on the member card 300. On the other hand, the value information is not directly recorded on the member card 300 but stored in the hall computer 263 of the game hall in association with the member ID of the member card, and the corresponding value information is searched based on the member ID of the member card 300. And may be configured to be used. In addition, the configuration is not limited thereto, and only one piece of value information (for example, only lucky balls) may be managed (stored) in association with the member ID by the hall computer 263. With this configuration, since it is not necessary to store the possession ball data in the membership card 300, for example, even if the membership card 300 is lost, the lost membership card 300 cannot be used and the membership card 300 can be used. By performing the reissuing procedure of 300, the player's possession ball data can be revived.

<Modification 4>
In each of the above embodiments, when the lucky period ends, the use of the lucky ball acquired so far is stored as a game unusable ball, and it is configured so that it cannot be used in any subsequent game. Was configured to only exchange prizes at the amusement hall window. On the other hand, even if it is a game unusable ball, it may be configured to be allowed to be used in a vending machine installed in a wagon service or a game hall. Specifically, for example, when a “wagon service” icon displayed in the menu display area 85a of the status display device 85 is operated by the player and a predetermined food or drink (for example, coffee) is selected, the use of the game The value of the predetermined food and drink menu is subtracted from the ball data of the unusable balls so that the unusable balls can be used at other than the game hall window. With this configuration, when a player plays a continuous game, the ball data that has become unusable can be used as an auxiliary part of the game, and the game can be continued without stopping the game. An easy-to-use environment can be prepared.

  In addition, when ordering food and drink by the wagon service, if the ball data exists in the lucky ball counter 213d, the value of the lucky ball counter 213d is used in preference to the ball data of the normal hour ball counter 213c. It may be configured to order a wagon service. With this configuration, it is possible to preferentially use the ball data having a low game value without the player performing complicated operations.

<Modification 5>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the start or end of the lucky period is configured to be performed on the condition that the gaming state is changed or the membership card 300 is inserted or discharged. On the other hand, you may comprise so that the start or completion | finish of a lucky period may be changed with the time element at the time of playing a game. Specifically, for example, from 9 am to 12:00 noon, the actual time value of the RTC is set so that the “unlimited” state or the “lucky” state is started even if the big win is drawn in any of the third symbols. The lucky period is started in response to the occurrence of the jackpot based on the jackpot. With this configuration, the jackpot is triggered, but the lucky period can be generated by a time factor regardless of the type of jackpot. By comprising in this way, the operation rate of a pachinko machine can be raised by setting the said conditions at the time when the operation of the pachinko machine is likely to drop.

<Modification 6>
In the third embodiment, the value of the RTC 220 is read only when the power is turned on. In this configuration, the value of the RTC 220 is not read unless the power is turned on and off. For example, in a game hall where the business hours extend to midnight, the lucky period is maintained until the business hours end. Is possible. However, in the case of a game hall where the business hours exceed 24 hours, the lucky period that continues is extended to the next day, and in order to maintain the gameability of the lucky number system only for the day, There is a possibility that the power of the pachinko machine must be turned on and off after 0:00. On the other hand, the value of the RTC 220 may be determined at any time, and the ongoing lucky period may be terminated when the time exceeds midnight. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a lucky period from being given across dates, so that the gameability of the lucky number system that is limited to the current day can be maintained.

<Modification 7>
In the third embodiment, since the RTC 220 is managed by the frame overall control device 111, if the value of the RTC 220 deviates from the current time due to an abnormality such as noise with respect to the frame overall control device 111, the lucky period is set. There is a risk that it will not be able to be given accurately. On the other hand, the RTC 220 may be mounted on the card sand device 70 or the hall computer 263 so that the frame overall control device 111 communicates with the card sand device 70 or the hall computer 263 to correct the value of the RTC 220. Good. With this configuration, the value of the RTC 220 of the frame overall control device 111 can be maintained normally, and a lucky period based on a temporal element can be given accurately.

<Modification 8>
In each of the above embodiments, when the “start” state, which is a lucky period, ends, the ball data stored in the lucky central ball counter 213d is stored in the unusable area 213e of the frame overall control device 111, The value of the unusable area 213e is configured to be stored in the game unusable memory 300d of the member card 300 when the player operates the return button 75. On the other hand, when the “start” state ends, the value of the lucky central ball counter 213d may be directly written (added) to the game unusable memory 300d of the member card 300. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to centrally manage ball data that cannot be used for games on the member card 300 side, and it is not necessary to manage ball data that cannot be used for games on the pachinko machine 10 side, so the control burden of the pachinko machine 10 is reduced. It can be reduced.

<Modification 9>
In each of the above embodiments, when the membership card 300 is returned during the lucky period, the lucky period is extinguished or the lucky period is restored only when the game is resumed with the same pachinko machine 10. Other than the pachinko machine that won the period, the lucky period cannot be taken over. On the other hand, when a lucky period is acquired with one pachinko machine, the game may be performed as a lucky period when a game is played with another pachinko machine. By configuring in this way, a player who is given a lucky period plays a game as a lucky period regardless of which pachinko machine is played unless the end condition (for example, jackpot with a specific symbol) is achieved. Even if you get tired of playing with a pachinko machine that won the lucky period, you can motivate to move to another pachinko machine and play games because the lucky period has been granted, The operating rate can be improved.

<Modification 10>
In each of the above-described embodiments, when a big hit is made, one of the lucky periods is given according to the type of the third winning symbol. On the other hand, a lucky period lottery device dedicated to the lucky number, which is different from the third symbol display device 81, is provided. When a big hit is made, the lucky period lottery device is changed, and one of the lucky periods is set according to the change result. You may comprise so that it may provide. Further, the end of the lucky period may be determined by the lucky period lottery device. Further, for example, the start condition is determined by the lucky period lottery device, and the end condition is determined by the jackpot symbol of the third symbol variation display, and the lucky period lottery device and the display result of the third symbol variation display are used. The start and end of the lucky period may be determined.

<Modification 11>
In each of the above embodiments, the normal time ball counter 213c, the lucky central ball counter 213d and the unusable area 213e of the pachinko machine 10, and the normal time memory 300c, the game unusable memory 300d and the lucky middle memory 300e of the membership card 300 can be shared. When the possessed ball data related to the ball, the lucky ball, or the game unusable ball is written, the possessed ball data is stored in each counter or the like by the addition process. On the other hand, each counter is configured in a buffer format, and when it is stored in response to a write request for possession ball data, it is stored in the buffer area for each write request, and the possession ball data for each write request is stored in an identifiable manner. You may make it do. By configuring in this way, for example, the number of lucky balls acquired in one lucky period and the next lucky period can be identified and recognized, and the total amount of possessed ball data possessed, It becomes possible to recognize simultaneously the number of each lucky ball acquired for every period.

<Modification 12>
In each of the above embodiments, the winning ball acquired during the lucky period is stored as a lucky ball, the winning ball acquired during the “normal gaming state” is stored as a sharable ball, and the sharable ball and the lucky ball are identified. It is configured to be able to play a game with a sharable ball even after the lucky period ends. On the other hand, when the lucky period is started, the sharable balls and the lucky balls are not discriminated and accumulated as a total prize ball, and after the lucky period, all the total prize balls are marked as unusable balls. You may comprise. Such a configuration eliminates the need for control for identifying the sharable ball and the lucky ball during the lucky period in the pachinko machine 10, and the configuration and control of the membership card 300 such as storage of the lucky ball and the lucky period type. Therefore, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10, the card sand device 70, and the membership card 300 can be simplified, and the control burden on the pachinko machine 10 and the card sand device 70 can be reduced.

<Modification 13>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the start condition of the “unlimited” state that is advantageous even during the lucky period is set as a case where a big hit with “7 symbols (Dugong)” occurs in the third symbol display device 81. The jackpot of “7 symbols (Dugong)” is a big hit of 15R, more rounds than the big hit of 2R, and “probability variation state” is given after the jackpot state ends, so this pachinko machine 10 is the most gaming It is a jackpot with a high value. Therefore, a lucky period with the highest game value is additionally given to the jackpot with the highest game value. On the other hand, the game value given to the player such as a jackpot with a low game value (for example, a jackpot of 2R), a latent jackpot that is not informed of being in a “probability fluctuation state”, or a jackpot that is hardly given a game value, etc. You may comprise so that the lucky period with high game value may be provided when it is low. The 2R jackpot is a jackpot with a low game value, so the player's willingness to play declines despite the fact that it is a big jackpot, so additional game value can be given by the lucky number system. The motivation of the game can be enhanced by continuing motivation. In addition, by realizing the lucky number system in modern gaming machines equipped with game specifications such as hidden jackpots and small hits, it is possible to link new gaming specifications and lucky number systems of modern gaming machines that were not found in previous gaming machines A variety of gameplay can be realized. In addition, when it is configured to give a lucky period to one of the latent big hit or small hit, it is difficult to discriminate between the latent big hit and the small hit and to make it difficult or delayed to give the lucky period. May be.

<Modification 14>
In each said embodiment, in the value information display area 85c of the status display apparatus 85, it is comprised so that a shareable ball | bowl, a lucky ball | bowl, a game unusable ball | bowl, etc. can each be identified and alert | reported, The notification content is a frame integrated control apparatus. When the possessed ball command transmitted from 111 is output, the contents of the shareable ball, the lucky ball, and the game unusable ball based on the possessed ball command were displayed by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. . In this case, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the possessed ball command from the frame overall control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the possessed ball command to the display control device 114 and transmits a predetermined effect command, You may comprise so that a predetermined | prescribed effect may be performed in the value information display area 85c of the status display apparatus 85. FIG. For example, when the lucky period ends and the lucky ball becomes a game-unusable ball, the character or the like may be used to produce a change in the number of lucky balls as the number of game-unusable balls.

<Modification 15>
In each of the above-described embodiments, even in the case of winning the jackpot corresponding to the start condition of the “lucky” state or the “unlimited” state during the “start” state, the “start” state is maintained because it is not the “first” jackpot. Only did not change to "Lucky" state or "Unlimited" state. In such a configuration, because there is a rule of “first time”, when the player wins a jackpot that matches the start condition of the upper lucky period other than “first time”, the player feels dissatisfied, May be awakened. On the other hand, when the start condition of the upper lucky period such as the “lucky” state is satisfied during the lower lucky period such as the “start” state, the promotion may be promoted to the upper lucky period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game without the player being awakened to the game.

<Modification 16>
In each of the above-described embodiments, even when a big hit corresponding to the start condition of the “start” state is won during the “start” state, the “start” state is only started again. On the other hand, when a jackpot corresponding to the start condition of the “Start” state is won during the “Start” state, it is promoted to the “Lucky” state, which is a lucky period higher than the “Start” state. May be.

<Modification 17>
In each of the above embodiments, when the “time reduction state” that is the end condition of the “start” state is completed, that is, when the variation display of the third symbol after the big hit is performed 100 times in the “start” state. In addition, the “start” state is configured to end. In such a case, in the “time shortened state”, since the electric winning combination of the start winning opening 4 is driven, when the variable display is executed 100 times, four variable display suspensions of the third symbol are held. May have accumulated. Therefore, for example, when the winning condition that satisfies the start condition of the “start” state is again won by the variable display held during the “start” state after the “start” state ends, in particular, as in the above-described modification example 16. If the specifications are not satisfactory, the promotion of the lucky period cannot be obtained and the player may be dissatisfied. Therefore, when the start condition of the “Start” state is subtracted again in the variable display held during the “Start” state, it is determined that the “Start” state is added during the “Start” state, and the “Start” state is added. "" Status may be promoted to a higher lucky period such as "Lucky" status.

<Modification 18>
In each of the above embodiments, the values of the normal time ball counter 213c, the lucky central ball counter 213d, and the unusable area 213e are configured to be written to the member card 300 when the return button 75 is operated. On the other hand, each possession ball data of the normal time ball counter 213c, the lucky central ball counter 213d, and the unusable area 213e may be written in the member card 300 at the time of power-off processing at the time of power-off due to a power failure or the like. . With this configuration, even if the data in the RAM 213 is abnormal due to noise or the like when the power is turned off, the game value possessed by the player can be stored in the member card 300. The player's gaming value is not lost. In this case, in the process at the time of turning on the power, the possession ball data written in the membership card 300 is configured to execute a process of writing in the normal time ball counter 213c, the lucky central ball counter 213d and the unusable area 213e. May be. Moreover, you may comprise so that the possession ball | bowl data of the normal time ball counter 213c, the lucky center ball counter 213d, and the unusable area 213e may be written in the member card 300 regularly (for example, every second). Even with this configuration, even when the RAM 213 is destroyed due to a power failure due to a power failure or the like, it is possible to prevent the game value possessed by the player from being lost.

<Modification 19>
In each of the above embodiments, a jackpot symbol command indicating the contents of the jackpot symbol of the third symbol determined by the sound lamp control device 113 at the start of the jackpot state is transmitted to the frame overall control device 111 and set in the jackpot result memory 213g ( It was configured to be overwritten). On the other hand, when a lottery is performed during the jackpot state and the content of the jackpot symbol changes, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a jackpot symbol command to the frame overall control device 111 again, and the frame overall control device 111. The jackpot symbol command received anew may be set in the jackpot result memory 213g, and the lucky period may be reset according to the contents of the jackpot result memory 213g. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to perform the promotion effect of the lucky period along with the effect of the re-lottery, the notification timing of the contents of the lucky period to be given can be diversified, and the interest of the game is enhanced be able to.

<Modification 20>
In the second embodiment or the third embodiment, when the return button 75 is operated by a player who desires a toilet break or the like during the lucky period, information on the lucky period is stored in the membership card 300, and the membership card is stored. When 300 is inserted into the card sand device 70 corresponding to the same (same day) pachinko machine 10, the lucky period is resumed. However, for example, during the lucky period and in the “high probability state”, the player operates the return button 75 to discharge the membership card 300 and leaves the seat by desiring a toilet break or the like. If another player can insert another player's membership card into the card sanding device 70 corresponding to the pachinko machine 10, even if the lucky period is not granted, the “high probability state” remains in the other game. May be given to a player and may give an unfair gain to other players. Therefore, when the player who desires a rest room break is operated during the lucky period and the return button 75 is operated, a break bill character appears so as to block the card insertion slot 72 of the card sand device 70, and a break is acquired. It may be configured such that the break bill combination is released only with the player's membership card 300. By comprising in this way, it can prevent that the advantageous game value in the pachinko machine 10 during a break is taken away by other players.

<Modification 21>
In the fourth embodiment, the condition setting switch 280 provided in the frame overall control device 111 is configured to be able to set the start condition and end condition of the lucky period. On the other hand, the hall computer 263 may be configured to be able to set the start condition and end condition of the lucky period. By configuring in this way, when setting the start condition and end condition of the lucky period, there is no need to unlock the lock for each pachinko machine 10 and set the start condition and end condition of the lucky period, Since the hall computer 263 can be set in a lump, it is possible to reduce the work burden of the game hall staff.

<Modification 22>
In each of the above embodiments, the lucky number system is realized by three types of lucky periods of “unlimited” state, “lucky” state, and “start” state as lucky periods. On the other hand, the lucky number system may be realized by adopting any one or two lucky periods as the lucky period, and a combination of a plurality of types of lucky periods may be used as appropriate for realizing the lucky number system. Also, a lucky number system may be realized by providing four or more lucky periods.

<Modification 23>
In each of the above-described embodiments, regarding the game unusable balls, the possessed ball data once processed as the game unusable balls is set so that it cannot be used outside the game hall window. On the other hand, the ball that cannot be used for the game may be changed to a lucky ball or a sharable ball when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the ball may be used for the game. As the predetermined condition, for example, it may be possible to use it in the case of a big hit with “7 symbols (Dugong)” or lucky time (for example, a game after 10 pm).

<Modification 24>
In the above embodiments, the start condition and end condition of the lucky period are always displayed in the lucky number display area 85b of the status display device 85. On the other hand, you may comprise so that the display content of the status display apparatus 85 may be changed according to a game state. Specifically, for example, when the “unlimited” state without the end condition is started, it is not necessary to display the start condition and end condition of the lucky period in the lucky number display area 85b, so the lucky number display area 85b The display content may be changed to a special effect (for example, a blessing video) and displayed.

<Modification 25>
In each of the above embodiments, the player is notified of the digestion status (elapsed status) in the “start” state based on the driving mode of the shutter accessory 228 and the display mode of the third symbol display device 81. It was. On the other hand, you may comprise so that the digest condition of a "start" state may be alert | reported only by the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. Specifically, it is also good to produce a display object that imitates the shutter from the left and right sides of the display screen to reduce the display area, and gradually change the background color of the display area (for example, from the cold color system) You may comprise so that a warm color system may be carried out.

<Modification 26>
In each of the above embodiments, in order to notify the type of the lucky period, any one of the movable movable objects 95 to 97 of the unlimited movable combination 95, the lucky movable combination 96, or the start movable combination 97 is attached to the door frame 14. By making it appear from the top, the player was notified of the type of lucky period. On the other hand, you may comprise so that the classification | category of a lucky period can be alert | reported by one movable accessory and one display means. Specifically, for example, a display device for informing the lucky period type may be provided, and the type of the lucky period may be displayed on the display screen.

<Modification 27>
In the said 2nd Embodiment and 3rd Embodiment, regarding the lucky ball acquired with one pachinko machine, it was comprised so that the use with another pachinko machine might be restrict | limited. Instead of this, a possession ball other than the lucky ball acquired by one pachinko machine 10, that is, a sharable ball, may be configured to be restricted (prohibited) in other pachinko machines. By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a game that cannot be used by other pachinko machines with possession balls acquired by one pachinko machine, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

<Modification 28>
In the third embodiment, when a game is interrupted in the pachinko machine 10 that is in the lucky period, when the game is resumed in the pachinko machine 10 again, the lucky period is limited to the day when the lucky period is acquired. In addition to being resumed, the game can be executed based on the lucky balls acquired during the lucky period. Alternatively, the possessed balls other than the lucky balls acquired by the pachinko machine 10, that is, the shareable balls may be configured to be restricted (prohibited) after the next day when the shareable balls are acquired. . By comprising in this way, the gameability which cannot use the possession ball acquired with one pachinko machine 10 after the next day can be created, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

<Modification 29>
In the second embodiment or the third embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 where the game is interrupted is different from the pachinko machine where the game is resumed, the information related to the lucky period stored in the membership card 300 is erased, and the game When the pachinko machine that resumed was different, the lucky period was not reflected. Instead, when the pachinko machine 10 where the game is interrupted is different from the pachinko machine where the game is resumed, the information related to the lucky period stored in the membership card 300 is not reflected in the pachinko machine where the game is resumed. Any configuration is possible as long as the lucky period is not resumed. Specifically, for example, a configuration in which the information related to the lucky period stored in the membership card 300 is not transmitted to the pachinko machine that resumes the game, or the information related to the lucky period stored in the membership card 300 is rewritten to other information. There may be.

<Modification 30>
In each of the above embodiments, as one of the lucky period start conditions, when one of the jackpots occurs, one of the lucky periods is started based on the game result of the third symbol, that is, the type of the jackpot symbol. It was. On the other hand, the lucky period may be configured to start based on a predetermined condition not related to the game result of the third symbol as the lucky period start condition. Specifically, for example, when the number of times of normal symbol (2nd symbol) accumulation is reached (for example, when the number of normal symbol hits occurs 1000 times), a lucky period is given, or the number of visits to the game hall is a predetermined number of days If you reach the day, if you give a lucky period all day on the day, if you give a lucky period when the number of shot balls exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 3000 shots), or several hours from the start of the game hall (For example, 3 hours) includes a case where a lucky period is used without exception.

<Modification 31>
In each of the above-described embodiments, as a condition for ending the lucky period, if “Lucky” state is reached, if the first symbol is a big hit with “4 symbols (shark)” in the “first”, or in the “Start” state. If there is a “time reduction state” in the variable display of the third symbol, each lucky period ends. On the other hand, as a condition for ending the lucky period, the lucky period may be ended based on a predetermined condition not related to the game result of the third symbol. Specifically, for example, when a few hours (for example, 3 hours) have passed since the game hall started business, the lucky period is ended, or the number of accumulated loses of the normal symbol (second symbol) (for example, the normal symbol) This includes a case where the lucky period ends when the number of misses occurs 1000 times, or a case where the lucky period ends when the number of shot balls exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 3000 shots).

<Modification 32>
In the second embodiment or the third embodiment, when the return button 75 is operated by the player, regardless of whether or not it is during the lucky period, information (data) regarding the game table information 212b or the timer counter 213o, Information related to possession ball data (normal time ball counter 213c, lucky central ball counter 213d, etc.) was stored in the membership card 300. On the other hand, the membership card 300 may be configured to store information regarding the gaming machine information 212b or the timer counter 213o only during the lucky period. The game machine information 212b or the timer counter 213o is used for authentication when the lucky period is restarted, and is therefore not used outside the lucky period. Therefore, by storing information about the gaming machine information 212b or the timer counter 213o in the membership card 300 only during the lucky period, the gaming machine information 212b or the timer counter 213o can be used in the return process accompanying the operation of the return button 75 outside the lucky period. Can be reduced in the membership card 300.

<Modification 33>
In the second embodiment or the third embodiment, even when the player operates the return button 75 in the “start” state, when the game is resumed on the same table, It was configured to be able to resume the lucky period. In this configuration, for example, while the player himself operates the return button 75 during the “start” state and interrupts the “start” state, the “time reduction state” is maintained. In the state, the game of the pachinko machine 10 is executed by another person, the other person stops the game after the “time saving state” is finished by the game of the other person, and then the player himself resumes the game with the pachinko machine 10 In this case, the end condition of the “start” state is the end condition of the “start” state, and the end condition of the “start” state ends the next “time reduction state”. It was possible to extend the state. On the other hand, when the return button 75 is operated by the player in the “start” state and the game is interrupted, the information of the game table information 212b is stored in the member card 300, and the game state at the time of the game interruption is also stored. You may comprise so that it may memorize | store in the membership card 300. FIG. With this configuration, when the game is resumed (when the membership card 300 is inserted), authentication based on the gaming machine information 212b stored in the membership card 300 is performed, and the game at the time of game interruption stored in the membership card 300 is performed. The game table information stored in the member card 300 matches the game table information stored in the pachinko machine 10 by performing authentication based on the state, and the game at the time of game interruption stored in the member card 300 The “start” state is resumed only when the information based on the state matches the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, when the gaming machine information stored in the membership card 300 and the gaming machine information stored in the pachinko machine 10 do not match, or information based on the gaming state at the time of gaming interruption stored in the membership card 300 If the game state of the pachinko machine 10 does not match, the “start” state can be prevented from being resumed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the “start” state from being extended and maintain the gameability of the lucky number system. The game state information is authenticated when the game is interrupted by storing the RAM determination value of the game state of the pachinko machine 10 at that time in the member card 300 and when the game is resumed (when the member card 300 is inserted). For example, authentication of whether or not the RAM determination value calculated based on the ten gaming states matches the RAM determination value stored in the member card 300 is determined. If they match, it is determined that the authentication is valid.

<Modification 34>
In the second embodiment or the third embodiment, when the return button 75 is operated by the player during the lucky period, information relating to the lucky period being executed is stored in the member card 300, and the game can be interrupted. And the lucky period memorize | stored in the membership card 300 can be restarted based on establishment of predetermined conditions (game resumption on the same stand or the same day). On the other hand, if the game data is exchanged for ball data prizes stored in the membership card 300 at the game hall window while the game is interrupted, it is assumed that the player does not want to continue the lucky period. You may comprise so that the lucky period memorize | stored in the card | curd 300 may be cleared.

<Modification 35>
In the second embodiment or the third embodiment, when the return button 75 is operated by the player during the lucky period, information on the lucky period being executed is stored in the member card 300, and the predetermined condition (same or The lucky period stored in the membership card 300 can be resumed based on the establishment of (Resume game on the same day). On the other hand, when the membership card 300 is returned, the valid condition is written into the membership card 300, and the lucky period stored in the membership card 300 is resumed when the above-mentioned predetermined condition is satisfied after satisfying the valid condition. You may comprise. Specifically, for example, when the membership card 300 is returned, time information (for example, 1 hour) is written to the membership card 300 as an effective condition, and the predetermined condition cannot be established within the time stored in the time information. The information on the lucky period stored in the membership card 300 is cleared. When a game is interrupted during a lucky period, a resting break or a meal break is assumed. It can be. Therefore, by setting a time that can be interrupted when the game is interrupted during the lucky period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the operation of the pachinko machine 10 and to manage the game hall soundly.

<Modification 36>
In the second embodiment or the third embodiment, when the return button 75 is operated by the player during the lucky period, information on the lucky period being executed is stored in the member card 300, and the predetermined condition (same or The lucky period stored in the membership card 300 can be resumed based on the establishment of (Resume game on the same day). On the other hand, when the player operates the return button 75 in a situation where the lucky period continues for a predetermined period or longer (for example, 5 hours or longer), the game is ended without carrying over the lucky period being executed. You may comprise. For example, if a game is played for too long in an “unlimited” state, a state advantageous to the player may continue for a long time, which may result in an unintended game result. Therefore, in the lucky period where there is no end condition such as “unlimited” state, when the return button 75 is operated by the player in a situation where the lucky period continues for a predetermined period or longer, the “unlimited” state is terminated. It is possible to prevent a loss that is not intended by the game arcade.

<Modification 37>
In the second embodiment or the third embodiment, when the return button 75 is operated by the player during the lucky period, information on the lucky period being executed is stored in the member card 300, and the predetermined condition (same or The lucky period stored in the membership card 300 can be resumed based on the establishment of (Resume game on the same day). On the other hand, according to the kind of lucky period, you may provide the lucky period which can be restarted, and the lucky period which cannot be restarted. For example, the “unlimited” state is completely terminated when the return button 75 is operated, and the “lucky” state or the “start” state is based on establishment of a predetermined condition even when the return button 75 is operated. The “lucky” state or the “start” state may be resumed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize a variety of lucky number-based game specifications and enhance the interest of the game.

<Modification 38>
In the third embodiment, when the return button 75 is operated by the player during the lucky period, information regarding the lucky period being executed is stored in the membership card 300, and the game is resumed on the same day (same machine). The lucky period stored in the membership card 300 can be resumed. On the other hand, according to the kind of lucky period, you may provide the lucky period which can be carried over to the next day and the lucky period only for the day. For example, the “unlimited” state may be set as a lucky period only for the current day, and the “lucky” state or the “start” state may be configured to be resumable even in the game of the next day. By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize a variety of lucky number-based game specifications and enhance the interest of the game.

<Modification 39>
In the second embodiment or the third embodiment, when the return button 75 is operated by the player during the lucky period, information regarding the lucky period being executed is stored in the member card 300 and the game is resumed on the same platform. The lucky period stored in the membership card 300 can be resumed on condition that On the other hand, if the game is resumed on the same day, the pachinko machine other than the pachinko machine 10 that acquired the lucky period is configured to resume the lucky period based on the information of the lucky period stored in the membership card 300. May be. In addition, when restarting the lucky period with a pachinko machine other than the pachinko machine 10 that has won the lucky period, restart the lucky period in consideration of the specifications of the pachinko machine (such as jackpot probability and probability fluctuation entry rate) and manufacturers It may be configured to determine availability.

<Modification 40>
In the second embodiment or the third embodiment, when the return button 75 is operated by the player during the lucky period, information on the lucky period being executed is stored in the member card 300, and the predetermined condition (same or The lucky period stored in the membership card 300 can be resumed based on the establishment of (Resume game on the same day). On the other hand, when the player operates the return button 75, a two-dimensional code or PIN code generated based on the current gaming state is displayed on a display device or the like, and information or PIN based on the two-dimensional code is displayed when the game is resumed. You may comprise so that a lucky period may be restarted based on the input of a code | cord | chord. Specifically, for example, when the return button 75 is operated, a two-dimensional code generated based on the current gaming state is displayed on a display device (for example, the third symbol display device 81), and the player's mobile phone The above two-dimensional code is read into a mobile device such as a telephone. When the game is resumed, the player operates the mobile device, issues a password based on the read two-dimensional code, and inputs the password to the pachinko machine 10 so that the game state before the return button 75 is operated. Configure to revive.

<Modification 41>
In each said embodiment, when the lucky period was complete | finished, it was comprised so that use of the lucky ball acquired during the lucky period might be prohibited. On the other hand, it is configured so as to restrict the situation where the lucky balls can be used, limited so that the number of lucky balls can be used, or the use of lucky balls is temporarily reserved. You may comprise as follows. “Restricting the situation where the lucky ball can be used” is exemplified by, for example, a case where a limit is imposed on the time when the lucky ball can be used, or a case where the use of other lucky balls is restricted. Also, “Temporarily reserve the specifications of the lucky ball” means, for example, that the use of the lucky ball is temporarily prohibited and then the use of the lucky ball that has been once prohibited is resumed when a specific gaming state is started thereafter. The case of making it etc. is illustrated.

<Modification 42>
In each of the above embodiments, when the lucky period is over, the use of the lucky balls acquired during the lucky period is prohibited, and even if the lucky period is started again, the lucky balls once prohibited from being used are used again It was configured not to be able to. On the other hand, when the lucky period is started again, the lucky ball acquired in the previous lucky period may be used in the newly acquired lucky period.

<Modification 43>
In each of the above-described embodiments, when the lucky period of the “lucky” state is started, when the end condition of the “lucky” state is satisfied, the “start” state is temporarily terminated after passing through the “start” state. Thus, the lucky period acquired by the start of the “lucky” state ends. On the other hand, when the lucky period in the “lucky” state is started, the lucky period ends without passing through the “start” state when the end condition for the “lucky” state is satisfied. May be.

<Modification 44>
In each of the above embodiments, the status display device 85 is configured to simultaneously display the display content of the lucky number display area 85b and the display content of the value information display area 85c. On the other hand, the display contents of the lucky number display area 85c and the display contents of the value information display area 85c may be appropriately switched and displayed. In addition, as a method of appropriately switching the display content of the lucky number display area 85c and the display content of the value information display area 85c, for example, based on the operation of buttons or a touch panel arranged in the vicinity of the status display device 85, The case where the display contents are switched every predetermined time is exemplified.

<Modification 45>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the unlimited movable combination 95, the lucky movable combination 96, and the start movable combination 97 are stored in the upper part of the door frame 14, and when any lucky period starts, the corresponding movable combination 95-97 were revealed and the type of lucky period was reported. On the other hand, when the movable combination items 95 to 97 are disposed at a place where they are always visible, and when the lucky period is started, the corresponding movable combination items 95 to 97 are driven or light-emitted, and the type of the lucky period. May be configured to be notified.

  In each of the above embodiments, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, processes such as a fluctuation process, a prize ball process, and a start winning process are executed. All the processes may be executed in the regular process (process executed every 4 milliseconds) of the main process (see FIG. 19) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In the above embodiment, the jackpot control process is executed in the regular process of the main process (see FIG. 19) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. This is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. You may make it perform in a timer interruption process (refer FIG. 14).

  In each of the above embodiments, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the frame overall control device 111, transmitted from the frame overall control device 111 to the audio lamp control device 113, and from the audio lamp control device 113. Although the display instruction is given to the display control device 114, a command may be directly transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. In addition, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command instructing the output of each sound and the lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device to the audio lamp control device. Further, the main control device 110 and the frame overall control device 111 may be configured to be capable of bidirectional communication.

  Furthermore, the sound lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. When the sound lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, various flags are generated instead of the commands generated by the sound lamp control device 113 and notified to the display control device 114, and based on the flags. Thus, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be controlled. The frame overall control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 may be configured as one control device. When the frame overall control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 are configured as a single control device, command transmission / reception control such as the jackpot symbol type that is the start condition of the lucky period is not required, so the control burden of each control device Can be reduced.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when the variable display is executed, the case where the high-speed fluctuation is displayed in which all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed so that the player cannot visually recognize the high-speed fluctuation is displayed. Instead, all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a reduced size so that they cannot be visually recognized, or all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed as snow noise-like images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed. Also good.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where one start winning opening 4 is provided in the game board 13 for starting a big win lottery when a ball enters the game board 13 is not necessarily limited thereto. The game board 13 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) winning winning openings at which a winning ball is detected independently and a jackpot lottery is started. In this case, when there is a hold at each start winning opening, the hold ball number command that the main control device 110 transmits to the voice lamp control device 113 via the frame overall control device 111 is a hold by any start winning opening. Information indicating whether or not it exists may be included. In addition, in the variation pattern command that the main control device 110 transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 via the frame overall control device 111 when the variation is started, it is indicated which start variation is held by the start winning award. Information to be shown may be included. As a result, in the sound lamp control device 113, when a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each start winning opening and a held ball number command is received, the reserved ball for the starting winning hole indicated by the held ball number command is stored. When the number of held balls is set in the number counter and a variation pattern command is received, the number of held balls is counted for each start winning port by subtracting one from the reserved ball number counter for the starting winning port indicated in the variation pattern command. be able to.

  In each of the above embodiments, the winning winning opening 4 and the passing through the through gate 7 are configured to be held up to 4 times each, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to 4 times. You may set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of the suspended balls in the variable display based on the winning to the start winning opening 4 is different in the part of the 3rd symbol display device 81 by the number or the area divided into four by the number of the retained balls. (For example, a color or lighting pattern) may be displayed, and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 87, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. May be.

  Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as identification information in the horizontal direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, It may be performed by moving and displaying symbols along a predetermined route such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. In addition, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the display of variation of the symbol. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed in various manners together with the symbol or displayed in a variety of manners separately from the symbol. The effect display etc. which are displayed are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition that a special ball is awarded to the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments are shown.

<Group A>
A game medium counting means (for example, a normal time ball counter 213c or a lucky central ball counter 213d) for counting the number of game media usable in the game;
Game execution means (for example, ball launching unit 66) for playing a game based on the game media counted by the game media counting means;
A game medium giving means (for example, a specific prize opening 5a) for giving a game medium to a player based on a game result by the game execution means;
A gaming machine comprising gaming state changing means (for example, unlimited flag 213h) for changing the gaming state based on a predetermined opportunity,
The game execution means includes
Use restriction means (for example, unusable area 213e) for restricting the use of the game medium given to the player by the game medium giving means based on the change of the game state by the game state change means. A gaming machine A0 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine A0, the number of game media that can be used in the game is counted by the game medium counting means, and the game is executed by the game execution means based on the game media counted by the game medium counting means. A game medium is given to the player by the game medium giving means based on the game result by the executing means, and the game state is changed by the game state changing means based on a predetermined opportunity. Further, based on the change of the game state by the game state changing means, the use restricting means provided in the game executing means restricts the use of the game medium given to the player by the game medium giving means to the game. Thereby, it is possible to create a game medium whose use is restricted based on the game state. Therefore, by creating a new gameability in which there is a game medium whose use is restricted based on the game state, a game property of how long a game state that is not restricted to use will be created, and the interest of the game will be enhanced. There is an effect that can be. “Restricting the use of game media” means, for example, limiting the number of game media that can be used when prohibiting the use of game media or restricting the conditions in which game media can be used. Or a case where the use of the game medium is temporarily reserved.

In gaming machine A0,
The game medium counting means includes individual counting means (for example, a lucky central ball counter 213d) that counts game media given to a player in a specific gaming state,
The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the use restricting means is configured to restrict the use of the game medium counted by the individual counting means in a game other than the specific gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine A1, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A0, the following effects are achieved. That is, the game media provided to the player in a specific gaming state is counted by the individual counting device provided in the game media counting device. Then, the use of the game medium counted by the individual counting means for the game is restricted by the use restricting means except for a specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the game media counted in a specific gaming state cannot be used. Therefore, by creating a new gameability in which there is a game medium that cannot be used based on the game state, a game property of how long a specific game state that is not restricted to use will be continued, and the interest of the game will be enhanced There is an effect that can be.

In the gaming machine A1,
The gaming state changing means is
First gaming state changing means for changing from a first gaming state (for example, “normal gaming state”) to a second gaming state (for example, lucky period) based on a first predetermined opportunity;
A second gaming state changing means for changing from the second gaming state to the first gaming state based on a second predetermined opportunity,
The individual counting means includes
First counting means (for example, a normal time ball counter 213c) for storing first game medium information (for example, sharable balls) related to the game medium given to the player by the game medium giving means in the first gaming state; ,
Second counting means (for example, a lucky central ball counter 213d) for storing second game medium information (for example, lucky balls) related to the gaming medium given to the player by the gaming medium giving means in the second gaming state; With
The gaming machine A2, wherein the use restricting means prohibits a game based on the second game medium information stored in the second counting means in the first gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first game medium changing means provided in the gaming state changing means changes the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the first predetermined trigger, and the gaming state changing means is provided. The gaming state is changed from the second gaming state to the first gaming state based on the second predetermined opportunity by the second gaming state changing means. In addition, the first counting means provided in the individual counting means counts the first game medium information related to the game medium given to the player by the game medium giving means in the first gaming state. Further, the second counting means provided in the individual counting means counts the second game medium information relating to the game medium given to the player by the game medium giving means in the second gaming state. And the game based on the 2nd game medium information memorize | stored in the 2nd counting means in the 1st game state is prohibited by a use restriction means. Thereby, regarding the game media individually counted in the first game state and the second game state, it is possible to create a situation that cannot be used in the second game medium information stored in the second counting means in the first game state. it can. Therefore, a difference can be provided in the game media counted for each gaming state. Since the game can be changed based on this difference, the second game state is continued in the second game state, and the game medium counted by the second counting means is continuously played. There is an effect that it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by creating a new gameability of whether or not to use it. The first predetermined opportunity and the second predetermined opportunity may be different from each other, or may be the same opportunity.

In gaming machine A2,
The gaming machine is configured to execute a game based on the first game medium information stored in the first counting unit in the first gaming state and the second gaming state. A3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the following effects are produced. That is, the game execution means is configured to be able to execute a game based on the first game medium information stored in the first counting means in the first game state and the second game state. Thereby, with respect to the game media individually counted in the first game state and the second game state, the game media stored in the first counting means in both the first game state and the second game state are stored. Can be used. Accordingly, the first game medium information stored in the first counting means has a higher game value for the player than the second game medium information stored in the second counting means because there is no restriction on the gaming state that can be used. Therefore, a difference can be provided in the game media counted for each gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect played by the gaming machine A2 can be made more remarkable.

  Also, if the gaming media granted in the second gaming state and the gaming media granted in the first gaming state before the change to the second gaming state are counted together, the second gaming state When changed to the first gaming state, not only gaming media granted during the second gaming state, but also gaming media granted in the first gaming state before the change to the second gaming state are used in subsequent games. Therefore, the game value of the game medium provided in the first game state that can be used in any game state may be damaged. Therefore, when the game medium given in the first gaming state and the game medium given in the second gaming state are respectively identified and stored, and the game state is changed from the second gaming state to the first gaming state. The game medium granted in the second game state is prohibited from use of the game thereafter, and the game medium granted in the first game state is configured not to limit the use in the game. It is not necessary to damage the value of the game medium given in one game state. Further, even when the game state is changed from the second game state to the first game state, the game can be started immediately if there is a game medium provided in the first game state. There is an effect that the game can be continuously performed based on the medium.

In gaming machine A2 or A3,
The game execution means includes
Storage means for storing game media (for example, supply passage 65);
Launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 66) for launching the game medium supplied from the storage means;
A collecting means (for example, a collecting passage 41a) for collecting the game medium launched by the emitting means;
A sending means (for example, a discharge passage 42a) for sending the game medium collected by the collecting means to the storing means;
A gaming machine A4, which plays a game while circulating a predetermined game medium in the machine.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2 or A3, the following effects are produced. That is, the game medium is stored by the storage means provided in the game execution means, the game medium supplied from the storage means is launched by the launch means, the game medium launched by the launch means is collected by the collection means, The game medium collected by the collecting means is sent to the storing means by the sending means, so that a game is played while circulating a predetermined game medium in the machine. As a result, a system that digitizes and manages game media, which is a characteristic function of an in-flight circulation game machine (so-called enclosed game machine), is effectively used to determine whether or not the game media can be used based on the game state. There is an effect that a game specification (so-called lucky number system) can be added.

  In more detail, conventionally, in a game hall that employs a lucky number game specification, the staff of the game hall sequentially confirms the start condition of the second game state, and based on the establishment of the start condition, the upper part of the gaming machine In the second gaming state, whether or not the condition for changing from the second gaming state to the first gaming state has been achieved is monitored. It is necessary to perform an operation to end the second gaming state, or to prompt the player to exchange the assigned game medium when the second gaming state ends.

  When the above-mentioned work is performed by a staff at a game hall, work related to the above game specifications is added in addition to normal work such as abnormality check and cleaning of the gaming machine, so there is a risk that the staff will be burdened with a large work load. is there. On the other hand, even if the number of staff is increased to cope with the above-mentioned game specifications, personnel costs for the increased staff increase, and there is a risk that the management of the amusement hall may be tightened. Therefore, even in an environment where the game specifications that can improve the gameability of the lucky number system can be realized, the game hall does not adopt the lucky number system in consideration of the above-mentioned fears, and is in a normal business form. As a result, the gameability was not improved.

  Therefore, by utilizing the functions of the in-flight circulation type gaming machine, the given game media are digitized and managed, and the game media given based on the game status are individually managed and can be used based on the game status By determining the medium, even if the above game specifications are adopted, the management of the amusement hall is sound without reducing the labor costs without placing a heavy work burden on the amusement hall staff and increasing the number of staff. This is advantageous in that various games can be realized while maintaining the conventional environment.

In gaming machine A4,
The firing means includes
In the second game state, when the first game medium information or the second game medium information is stored in either the first counting means or the second counting means, the game supplied from the storage means Allow the launch of the medium,
In the first gaming state, based on the first game medium information stored in the first counting means, the game medium supplied from the storage means is permitted to be launched, while stored in the second counting means. The gaming machine A5 is configured to prohibit the launch of game media based on the second game media information.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A4, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the second gaming state, when the first game medium information or the second game medium information is stored in either the first counting means or the second counting means, the gaming medium supplied from the storing means by the launching means Is allowed to fire. On the other hand, when the first game medium information is stored in the first counting means in the first gaming state, the game medium supplied to the storage means by the launching means is permitted to be launched, while stored in the second counting means. Launching of game media based on the second game media information is prohibited. Thereby, the game media provided for each game state is counted individually, and in the first game state, the launch of the game media based on only the first game media information stored in the first counting means is permitted. In the two gaming state, it is possible to create a situation in which the launch of the game medium based on the first game medium information or the second game medium information stored in the first counting means or the second counting means is permitted. There is an effect that can be realized. Note that, for example, after the gaming state is changed from the previous second gaming state to the first gaming state based on the establishment of the second condition, the first condition is established and the next second gaming is performed from the first gaming state. When the state is changed to the state, the launching unit permits the launch of the game medium based on the first game medium information stored in the first counting unit in the next second gaming state, You may comprise so that discharge | release of a game medium may be permitted based on the 2nd game medium information memorize | stored in a 2nd count means in a 2nd game state.

In gaming machine A5,
The first gaming state changing means changes from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on establishment of a first condition (for example, start of jackpot),
The second gaming state changing means changes from the second gaming state to the first gaming state based on establishment of a second condition (for example, completion of the “time reduction state”),
The firing means includes
When the first gaming state is changed from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the establishment of the first condition, either the first counting means or the second counting means When the first game medium information or the second game medium information is stored in the memory, the game medium supplied from the storage unit is permitted to be launched,
When the second gaming state changing means changes from the second gaming state to the first gaming state based on the establishment of the second condition, it is stored in the first counting means in the subsequent game. Based on the first game medium information, the game medium supplied from the storage unit is allowed to be released, while the game medium based on the second game medium information stored in the second counting unit is prohibited from being released. A gaming machine A6 that is configured as described above.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first gaming state changing means changes the first gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the establishment of the first condition, and the second gaming state changing means changes the second game based on the establishment of the second condition. The state is changed to the first gaming state. Further, when the first gaming state changing means changes the first gaming state to the second gaming state, the first gaming medium information or the second gaming medium information is stored in either the first counting means or the second counting means. When stored, the launching means permits the launch of the game medium supplied from the storage means. On the other hand, when the second gaming state is changed from the second gaming state to the first gaming state by the second gaming state changing means, in the subsequent game, when the first game medium information is stored in the first counting means, the emitting means While allowing the game medium supplied to the storage means to be launched, launching of the game medium based on the second game medium information stored in the second counting means is prohibited. Thereby, the game media provided for each game state is counted individually, and in the first game state, the launch of the game media based on only the first game media information stored in the first counting means is permitted. In the two gaming state, it is possible to create a situation in which the launch of the game medium based on the first game medium information or the second game medium information stored in the first counting means or the second counting means is permitted. There is an effect that can be realized.

In any of the gaming machines A4 to A6,
When the second game medium information is stored in the second counting means in the second gaming state, the launching means is configured to obtain the first game medium information stored in the first counting means based on the first game medium information. A gaming machine A7, wherein the second gaming medium information stored in the second counting means is preferentially used to execute the launching of the gaming medium.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A4 to A6, the following effects are produced. That is, in the second gaming state, when the second game medium information is stored in the second counting means, the launching means causes the first counting medium information stored in the first counting means to be transferred to the second counting means. The game medium is launched using the stored second game medium information preferentially. Thereby, the first game medium information stored in the first counting means has a game value for the player from the second game medium information stored in the second counting means, because there is no restriction on the usable game state. In the second gaming state, the second gaming medium information having a gaming value lower than that of the first gaming medium information can be consumed first, so that the gaming value possessed by the player can be protected without being unnecessarily damaged. There is an effect that.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A7,
The game medium counting means stores the number of pieces of game medium information based on the rental request as the first game medium information in the first counting means when there is a game medium rental request from a player. Characteristic gaming machine A8.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A2 to A7, the following effects are produced. That is, when there is a game medium rental request from the player, the game medium counting means stores the number of game medium information based on the rental request as first game medium information in the first counting means. Thereby, since the first game medium information is not restricted in use depending on the game state, there is an effect that the rented game medium can be used in any game state without being restricted in use.

  In addition, the gaming characteristics of the above game specifications are likely to produce a more remarkable effect because the rental rate of the game media is different from the prize conversion rate at the game hall window. Specifically, for example, when there is a prize conversion gap such as “lending rate> prize conversion rate”, a prize is exchanged for one game medium in a game with a rented game medium and a game with a given game medium. There will be a difference in game value equivalent to the gap. In such a situation, the player is given a way to play a game using the rented game medium, and continuously playing the game medium using the game medium provided for the game leads to his own benefit. Whether or not the game based on the game medium is continuously performed is a factor that divides the game. In a game hall with such a prize conversion gap, it is possible to acquire the second game state by adopting the above-mentioned game specifications, and whether or not the game can be continuously played with the game medium provided during that time. There is an effect that the effect of the specification can be made remarkable and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A8,
Medium information notifying means (for example, status display) capable of notifying the contents of the first game medium information stored in the first counting means and the contents of the second game medium information stored in the second counting means. A gaming machine A9 comprising a device 85).

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A2 to A8, the following effects are produced. That is, the contents of the first game medium information stored in the first counting means and the contents of the second game medium information stored in the second counting means can be notified by the medium information notifying means. Accordingly, the first game medium information stored in the first counting means usable in the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and the second gaming means stored in the second counting means usable only in the second gaming state. 2 game media information can be recognized by each player, for example, how much game media was granted during the second game state, or changed from the second game state to the first game state In this case, there is an effect that it is possible to clearly recognize how much the game can be continued based on the game medium information stored in the first counting means in the first game state.

In any of the gaming machines A6 to A9,
The first condition is:
A predetermined first condition established by the predetermined condition (for example, a big hit with an even number of “first time”), and
A special first condition that is difficult to be established from the predetermined first condition (e.g., a big hit with "3 symbols (turtle)" of "first time"),
The second gaming state includes a special second gaming state (for example, a “lucky” state) and a disadvantageous second gaming state (for example, a “start” state) that is more disadvantageous for the player than the special second gaming state. Prepared,
The first gaming state changing means includes
First disadvantage changing means for changing to the disadvantage second gaming state based on establishment of the predetermined first condition;
First special changing means for changing to the special second gaming state based on establishment of the special first condition;
A gaming machine A10, comprising:

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A6 to A9, the following effects are produced. That is, the first disadvantageous change means provided in the first gaming state change means changes to the disadvantageous second gaming state based on the establishment of the predetermined first condition. Further, the first special change means provided in the first game state change means is changed to the special second game state based on the establishment of the special first condition. Thereby, regarding the second gaming state, it is possible to provide a special second state that is difficult to start and a disadvantageous second gaming state that is likely to be started. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be enhanced by the nature.

  The gaming machine A10 includes second gaming state type notifying means (for example, a lucky movable accessory 96 and a start movable accessory 97) that informably distinguish between the special second gaming state and the disadvantageous second gaming state. A gaming machine A11,

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A10, the following effects are produced. That is, the second gaming state type notifying means notifies the special second gaming state and the disadvantageous second gaming state in an identifiable manner. As a result, it is possible to clearly recognize whether the game is in the special second gaming state or the disadvantaged second gaming state, and performing the game while being aware of the change condition to the first gaming state that is different for each second gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the entertainment in each second gaming state can be fully enjoyed. In addition, “notifying in an identifiable manner” means, for example, arranging a plurality of indication objects (for example, movable accessories) provided for each second gaming state so that the player can visually recognize them, When the second gaming state is started, informing the player by making the player visible in accordance with the type of the second gaming state, or for each second gaming state in one display means The case where the displayed display mode is displayed and notified is included.

In the gaming machine A10 or A11,
The second condition is:
A prescribed second condition established by the prescribed condition (end of "time reduction state");
A special second condition (for example, a big hit with “4 symbols (shark)” of “first time”) that is difficult to be established from the prescribed second condition,
The second gaming state changing means is
Second disadvantageous change means for ending the disadvantageous second gaming state based on establishment of the prescribed second condition;
Second special changing means for ending the special second gaming state based on establishment of the special second condition;
A gaming machine A12, comprising:

  According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A10 or A11, the following effects are produced. That is, the disadvantageous second gaming state is terminated by the second gaming state changing means based on the establishment of the prescribed second condition. Further, the second game state changing means ends the special second game state based on the establishment of the special second condition. Thereby, regarding the second gaming state, it is possible to provide a special second state that is difficult to start and difficult to finish, and a disadvantageous second gaming state that is easy to start and difficult to finish, and each start condition and end By creating game states with different conditions, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be enhanced by various game characteristics. In addition, by providing a plurality of types of second gaming state, the period in which the second gaming medium information counted separately from the first gaming medium information acquired in the first gaming state can be varied, There is an effect that the fun of the game can be enhanced by various game characteristics.

In gaming machine A12,
The second disadvantage changing means changes the disadvantage second gaming state to the first gaming state based on the establishment of the prescribed second condition,
The gaming machine A13, wherein the second special changing means changes the special second gaming state to the disadvantageous second gaming state based on the establishment of the special second condition.

  According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A12, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second disadvantageous changing means changes the disadvantageous second gaming state to the first gaming state based on the establishment of the prescribed second condition, and the second special changing means changes the special second condition based on the establishment of the special second condition. The two gaming state is changed to the disadvantageous second gaming state. As a result, regarding the second gaming state, even if it is difficult to start and finishes, it is disadvantageous that the special second state ends via the second gaming state, and the disadvantage is that the first gaming state is immediately changed when it is easily started. Such as a disadvantageous second gaming state can be provided, and by creating a gaming state having different start conditions and ending conditions, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be enhanced by various game characteristics. In addition, by providing a plurality of types of second gaming state, the period in which the second gaming medium information counted separately from the first gaming medium information acquired in the first gaming state can be varied, There is an effect that the fun of the game can be enhanced by various game characteristics.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A13,
A gaming machine A14, comprising: condition notifying means (situation display device 85) for notifying the game state changing condition by the gaming state changing means.

  According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A0 to A13, the following effects are produced. That is, the condition notification means notifies the game state change condition by the game state change means. This allows the player to recognize the condition for changing the game state. For example, when the game by the second counting means is prohibited when the game state is changed from the second game state to the first game state. However, by recognizing the conditions in advance, it is possible to construct a comfortable gaming environment without giving the player unnecessary confusion regarding the game specifications.

In gaming machine A14,
The gaming machine A15 is characterized in that the condition notifying means is constituted by an electric display means capable of electrically changing display contents.

  According to the gaming machine A15, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A14, the following effects are achieved. That is, the condition notifying means is constituted by an electric display means capable of electrically changing display contents. As a result, the contents can be changed and displayed in accordance with the condition for changing the game state, so that the player can appropriately recognize the condition for changing the game state with a simple configuration. is there.

In any of the gaming machines A9 to A15,
The notification by the medium information notification means and the notification by the condition notification means are displayed on one status display means (the lucky number display area 85b and the value information display area 85c of the status display device 85). A16.

  According to the gaming machine A16, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A9 to A15, the following effects are produced. That is, the notification by the medium information notification unit and the notification by the condition notification unit are displayed by one status display unit. That is, the first game medium information and the second game medium information and the game state change condition by the game state change means are displayed on one status display means. Thus, the player can recognize the number of game media owned by the player and the conditions for changing to the second game state by the status display means, so that the extra cost is eliminated without using other devices. There is an effect that the player can recognize the gameability and the game situation of the lucky number system without spending.

In gaming machine A16,
In the situation display means, the notification by the medium information notification means and the notification by the condition notification means are executed simultaneously.

  According to the gaming machine A17, in addition to the effects produced by A16, the following effects are produced. That is, the notification by the medium information notification unit and the notification by the condition notification unit are simultaneously executed by one status display unit. That is, the first game medium information and the second game medium information, and the game state change condition by the game state change means are simultaneously displayed on one display means. Accordingly, the player can recognize the number of game media owned by the player and the conditions for changing to the second gaming state by looking at the notification content of the display means, so that the gameability of the lucky number system is achieved. Can be uniquely recognized by the player.

In gaming machine A16 or A17,
The gaming machine is composed of a gaming board (for example, gaming board 13) and a frame member (for example, an overhanging portion 16) to which the gaming board is replaceably attached.
The game machine A18, wherein the status display means is provided on the frame member.

  According to the gaming machine A18, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A16 or A17, the following effects are produced. In other words, the status display means is provided on a frame member to which the game board is replaceably attached. Accordingly, even when the game board is replaced, the status display means can be used continuously with the frame member being provided, and it is not necessary to provide the status display means on the game board to be replaced. There is an effect that the cost of the entire game board can be reduced as compared with the case where is installed.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A18,
The game medium giving means is
A first entry means (for example, a start winning opening 4) and a second entry means (for example, a specific winning opening 5a) capable of entering a game medium used in the game,
The first entry means is configured to allow entry of game media in the first game state and the second game state,
The second entry means is configured to allow entry of a game medium only in a predetermined game state (for example, a big hit state),
In the second gaming state, the second counting means updates the second game medium information based on the game medium entering the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means. A gaming machine A19 comprising an updating means.

  According to the gaming machine A19, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A2 to A18, the following effects are produced. In other words, the first medium entry means and the second ball entry means provided in the game medium provision means are configured such that the game medium used for the game can enter, and the first game state and the second game state are the first in the first game state and the second game state. The game medium can be entered into the ball entry means, and the game medium can be entered into the second ball entry means only in a predetermined game state. In the second game state, the second game medium information is updated based on the game medium entering the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means. Thereby, in the second gaming state, the game medium is given based on the game medium entering the first ball entry means, and the game medium is given based on the game medium having entered the second ball entry means. Since it is not necessary to distinguish and count the game media to be played, it is not necessary to complicate the control related to the update processing of the game media information given during the second game state, and the control load can be reduced. There is.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A18,
The game medium giving means is
A first entry means (for example, a start winning opening 4) and a second entry means (for example, a specific winning opening 5a) capable of entering a game medium used in the game,
The first entry means is configured to allow entry of game media in the first game state and the second game state,
The second entry means is configured to allow entry of a game medium only in a predetermined game state (for example, a big hit state),
The second counting means includes a second single update means for updating the second game medium information based on a game medium entering the second ball entry means in the second game state,
The first counting means includes a first single update means for updating the first game medium information based on a game medium entering the first ball entry means in the second game state. A gaming machine A20 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine A20, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A2 to A18, the following effects are produced. In other words, the first medium entry means and the second ball entry means provided in the game medium provision means are configured such that the game medium used for the game can enter, and the first game state and the second game state are the first in the first game state and the second game state. The game medium is configured to be able to enter the entrance means, and the game medium is configured to be able to enter the second entrance means only in a predetermined gaming state, and the second single update means provided in the second counting means In the second game state, the second game medium information is updated based on the game medium entering the second ball entry means, and the second game state is updated by the first single update means provided in the first count means. The first game medium information is updated based on the game medium entering the first ball entry means.

  Since the second game medium information stored in the second counting means cannot be used for the game after the end of the second gaming state, it is less versatile than the first game medium information stored in the first counting means. The game value is low for the player. Further, since the second entry means is configured so that the game medium can enter only in the predetermined game state of the second game state, the second entry means is directly related to the second game state. The ball means is configured to allow the game medium to enter even in the first game state other than the second game state, and is not directly related to the second game state. Therefore, when a game medium enters the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means during the second game state, all the game medium information based on the ball entry is stored in the second counting means. At this time, if the second counting means stores a game medium entry into the first entering means that can occur independently of the second gaming state and should be stored in the first counting means, the player's game It will damage value. Accordingly, the second game medium information is updated based on the game medium that has entered the second entry means by the second single update means provided in the second count means, and the first count means provided in the first count means. The single update means is configured to update the first game medium information based on the game medium that has entered the first entry means. Thereby, even if it is a 2nd game state, when a game medium enters by the 1st entrance means, it can memorize | store as 1st game medium information with a high game value, Therefore A player's game value is obtained. There is an effect that a suitable gaming environment can be constructed without any damage.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A20,
The gaming state changing means is a fixed amount for changing from the second gaming state to the first gaming state when the second gaming medium information stored in the second counting means reaches a predetermined number. A gaming machine A21, comprising a termination means.

  According to the gaming machine A21, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A2 to A20, the following effects are produced. That is, when the second game medium information stored in the second counting unit reaches a predetermined number by the fixed amount ending unit provided in the gaming state changing unit, the first gaming state is changed from the second gaming state. Changed to Accordingly, it is possible to realize a gameability (so-called quantitative system) for ending the second game state when the number of game media provided during the second game state reaches a certain number. In the conventional quantitative system, the game media staff decides the stop by judging the game media possessed by the player based on the estimated amount, but the given game media is managed numerically and managed with accurate numeric judgment By deciding on the stop, the grounds for the stop will be clarified, so the work of the game hall staff will be reduced, and a gaming environment according to the specifications of the game will be provided without causing any doubt to the player There is an effect that can be.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A20,
The gaming machine A22 is characterized in that the gaming state changing unit changes the gaming state based on a game result by the game executing unit.

  According to the gaming machine A22, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A0 to A20, the following effects are produced. That is, the game state is changed by the game state changing means based on the game result by the game executing means. Thus, the gaming state is changed based on the gaming result, and a new gaming property in which there is a gaming medium whose use is restricted based on the gaming state is created. There is an effect that the playability of the game is born and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

<Group B>
A game medium counting means (for example, a normal time ball counter 213c or a lucky central ball counter 213d) for counting the number of game media usable in the game;
Game execution means (for example, ball launching unit 66) for playing a game based on the game media counted by the game media counting means;
A game machine provided with a game medium giving means (for example, a specific prize opening 5a) for giving a game medium to a player based on a game result by the game execution means,
The game execution means includes other machine use restriction means (for example, an unusable area 213e) for restricting the use of the game medium in another game machine with respect to the game medium given by the game medium giving means. A gaming machine B0 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine B0, the number of game media that can be used for the game is counted by the game medium counting means, and the game is executed by the game execution means based on the game media counted by the game medium counting means. Based on the game result by the executing means, the game medium is given to the player by the game medium giving means. In addition, the use of other game machines with respect to the game medium provided by the game medium providing means is restricted by the other machine use restriction means provided in the game execution means. Thereby, a game medium that cannot be used by the gaming machine can be created. Therefore, by creating a new gameability in which there is a game medium that is restricted in use depending on the gaming machine that performs the game, a gameability of how long the game continues in a game machine that is not restricted in use is born. There is an effect that the interest can be enhanced. Note that “restricting the use of other game machines” means, for example, that the number of game media that can be used is limited when the use of game media is prohibited or the situation where game media can be used is limited. Or a case where the use of a game medium is temporarily reserved.

In gaming machine B0,
Game state changing means for changing the game state based on a predetermined opportunity (for example, unlimited flag 213h),
The game medium counting means includes individual counting means (for example, a lucky central ball counter 213d) that counts game media given to a player in a specific gaming state,
The other machine use restriction means is configured to restrict the use of the game medium counted by the individual counting means to a game with another game machine.

  According to the gaming machine B1, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B0, the following effects are achieved. That is, the gaming state is changed by the gaming state changing unit based on a predetermined opportunity, and the gaming media provided to the player in the specific gaming state is counted by the individual counting unit provided in the gaming medium counting unit. Then, the use of the game media counted by the individual counting means for use in the game is restricted by the other machine use restriction means for use in other games by the game machine. Thereby, it is possible to create a gaming machine that cannot be used with respect to the gaming media counted in a specific gaming state. Therefore, by creating a new gameability in which there is a game medium that cannot be used depending on the gaming machine that performs the game, a game characteristic of how long the game continues in the game machine to which the game medium is given is born. There is an effect that can enhance the interest of.

In the gaming machine B0 or B1,
The gaming state changing means is
First gaming state changing means for changing from a first gaming state (for example, “normal gaming state”) to a second gaming state (for example, lucky period) based on a first predetermined opportunity;
A second gaming state changing means for changing from the second gaming state to the first gaming state based on a second predetermined opportunity,
The individual counting means includes
First counting means (for example, a normal time ball counter 213c) for storing first game medium information (for example, sharable balls) related to the game medium given to the player by the game medium giving means in the first gaming state; ,
Second counting means (for example, a lucky central ball counter 213d) for storing second game medium information (for example, lucky balls) related to the gaming medium given to the player by the gaming medium giving means in the second gaming state; With
The other machine use restriction means prohibits a game based on the second game medium information stored in the second counting means in a gaming machine other than the gaming machine that has acquired the second gaming state. A gaming machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B0 or B1, the following effects are produced. That is, the first gaming state changing means provided in the gaming state changing means changes the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the first predetermined opportunity, and the gaming state changing means is provided. The gaming state is changed from the second gaming state to the first gaming state based on the second predetermined opportunity by the second gaming state changing means. In addition, the first counting means provided in the individual counting means counts the first game medium information related to the game medium provided by the game medium providing means in the first gaming state. Further, the second game medium information relating to the game medium given by the game medium giving means in the second gaming state is counted by the second counting means provided in the individual counting means. Then, the game based on the second game medium information stored in the second counting means is prohibited in the gaming machines other than the gaming machine that has acquired the second gaming state by the other machine use restricting means. This creates a situation in which the second game medium information stored in the second counting means cannot be used in other game machines with respect to the game media individually counted in the first game state and the second game state. Can do. Therefore, a difference can be provided in the game media counted for each gaming state. And since the game can be changed based on this difference, a new game characteristic of how to continue the game with the game machine that has acquired the second game medium information is created, and the game is interesting. There is an effect that it can be increased. The first predetermined opportunity and the second predetermined opportunity may be different from each other, or may be the same opportunity.

In gaming machine B2,
The game execution means relates to the first game medium information stored in the first counting means, and the first game is also applied to a game machine other than the game machine to which the game medium is given by the game medium giving means. A gaming machine B3 configured to be able to execute a game based on medium information.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first game medium information stored in the first counting means by the game execution means is also included in the first game medium information in other game machines to which the game medium is given by the game medium giving means. Based on the game is configured to be executable. As a result, regarding the game media individually counted in the first game state and the second game state, even if the game medium is a game machine other than the game machine to which the game medium is given by the game medium giving means, the first count is given. The game medium stored in the means can be configured to be usable. Accordingly, the first game medium information stored in the first counting means has a higher game value for the player than the second game medium information stored in the second counting means because there is no restriction on the gaming machines that can be used. Therefore, a difference can be provided in the game media counted for each gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect played by the gaming machine B2 can be made more remarkable.

In gaming machine B2 or B3,
A game permission means (for example, table information) that permits the execution of a game based on the insertion of a player-owned storage medium (for example, a membership card 300) into an external device (for example, the card sand device 70) outside the gaming machine. Confirmation processing (S2851)),
Unique information storage means for storing identification information unique to the gaming machine (for example, gaming machine information 212b);
An interruption information storage means (for example, a clearing process (S2105)) for storing the identification information stored in the unique information storage means in the storage medium when there is a game interruption instruction;
When there is an instruction to resume the game, a table information determination unit (for example, a table) that determines whether or not the identification information stored in the storage medium matches the identification information stored in the unique information storage unit. Information confirmation processing (S2851) in S2851),
The other-device usage restricting means determines that the second counting is performed when the stand information discriminating means determines that the identification information stored in the storage medium matches the identification information stored in the unique information storage means. A gaming machine B4 configured to be able to execute a game based on the second game medium information stored in the means.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2 or B3, the following effects are produced. That is, the game permission means permits the execution of the game on the basis that the storage medium owned by the player is inserted into an external device outside the gaming machine. Further, the identification information unique to the gaming machine is stored in the unique information storage means, and when there is a game interruption instruction, the identification information stored in the unique information storage means is stored in the storage medium by the interruption information storage means. Further, when a game restart instruction is given, it is determined by the table information determining means whether or not the identification information stored in the storage medium matches the identification information stored in the unique information storage means. Then, when the identification information stored in the storage medium by the table information determination unit matches the identification information stored in the unique information storage unit, the second device stored in the second counting unit by the other-device usage limiting unit. A game based on the game medium information is configured to be executable.

  When the player wishes to interrupt the game during the second gaming state, for example, if the game is interrupted, for example, if the game is interrupted, the second gaming state being executed is terminated, A specification that prohibits the use of the second game medium information stored in the second counting means assigned during the second game state in any gaming machine is conceivable. In the case of this specification, if the player interrupts the game, there is a fear that the second gaming state obtained at the corner may end, and even if he wants to take a rest or a meal break during the second gaming state, There is a possibility that he / she can hesitate to interrupt the game and cannot maintain a comfortable gaming environment. Further, if the user leaves the gaming machine with a toilet break or the like while the storage medium is inserted into the external device, the storage medium may be stolen by another person while the user is away.

  Therefore, when there is an instruction to suspend the game, the identification information unique to the gaming machine is stored in the storage medium, and when there is an instruction to resume the game, the identification information stored in the storage medium matches the identification information of the gaming machine. When the game is to be performed, the game is based on the second game medium information stored in the second counting means, so that the player desires a toilet break or a meal break even in the second game state. In this case, even if the game is interrupted, it is possible to execute a game based on the second game medium information stored in the second counting means when the game is resumed. A comfortable gaming environment can be constructed while acquiring as appropriate. Note that “when there is an instruction to suspend a game” means, for example, when the player performs a return operation of the storage medium and ejects the storage medium to the outside of the external device, or is provided in the gaming machine or the external device. A case where the progress of the game is stopped by a game stop means (for example, a game stop button with an authentication function) or a case where the operation of the gaming machine is stopped due to a power failure or the like is included. Also, “when there is an instruction to restart the game” means, for example, a case where a storage medium is inserted into the external device so that the game can be executed, or a game restart means provided in the gaming machine or the external device This includes a case where the progress of the game is permitted (for example, a game restart button with an authentication function) or a case where the operation of the gaming machine is resumed due to a power recovery from a power failure.

In gaming machine B4,
A state storage unit (for example, a clearing process (S2105)) that stores state information related to the second game state in the storage medium when a game interruption instruction is given;
The other-device usage restricting unit is configured to detect the state storage unit when the table information determining unit determines that the identification information stored in the storage medium matches the identification information stored in the unique information storage unit. The gaming machine B5 is configured to resume the second gaming state based on the state information stored in the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the game is instructed to be interrupted by the status storage means, the status information related to the second game status is stored in the storage medium, and when the game is resumed, the identification stored in the storage medium by the stand information discrimination means When the information matches the identification information stored in the unique information storage means, the second game state is resumed based on the state information stored in the state storage means by the other device use restriction means. Thus, the second gaming state can be resumed when the gaming machines match when the game is interrupted and when the game is resumed. Therefore, even if the player wishes to take a toilet break or a meal break even in the second gaming state, even if the game is interrupted, the player can resume the second gaming state when the game is resumed. A comfortable gaming environment can be constructed while preventing the storage medium from being stolen. Also, for example, when the state information related to the second gaming state is stored in the game place management means (for example, the hall computer 263), an abnormality occurs in the state information stored in the management means due to the influence of a power failure or the like. There is a risk that the gaming value that should be originally obtained may disappear. Therefore, by storing the state information related to the second gaming state in the storage medium possessed by the player, it is possible to manage the gaming value obtained at the player's own responsibility, so even if a power outage or the like occurs There is an effect that it is possible to construct a suitable gaming environment without detracting from the gaming value of the player.

In gaming machine B5,
The other-device usage restricting means determines that the second information use determining means determines that the identification information stored in the storage medium and the identification information stored in the unique information storage means do not coincide with each other. A gaming machine B6 comprising a state restricting means that does not resume the gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5, the following effects are produced. That is, when it is determined that the identification information stored in the storage medium and the identification information stored in the unique information storage means do not match by the stand information determination means, the state restriction means provided in the other device use restriction means The second gaming state is configured not to resume. Thus, for example, when a new game is being played on another gaming machine different from the gaming machine that has acquired the second gaming state, the second gaming state is resumed on the other gaming machine that is newly playing the game. You can avoid it. Therefore, the gaming situation of the gaming machine that was playing the last time is not reflected in the gaming of other gaming machines, and a new game can be played. There is an effect that the playability can be maintained.

In gaming machine B6,
The state restricting means stores the state storage means when the table information determining means determines that the identification information stored in the storage medium and the identification information stored in the unique information storage means do not match. A gaming machine B7, wherein the stored state information is erased.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the state stored in the state storage means by the state restriction means when the identification information stored in the storage medium by the base information determination means does not match the identification information stored in the unique information storage means when the game is resumed Information is erased. As a result, if the gaming machine that has acquired the second gaming state is different from the gaming machine that is going to play this time, the second gaming machine that is going to play a new game based on the fact that the state information is deleted. It can be configured not to resume the gaming state. Therefore, since the data related to the gaming situation of the gaming machine that was playing the previous game is deleted, the basis for reflecting the gaming situation of the gaming machine that was playing the previous game to another different gaming machine is eliminated. Since a new game can be performed without restarting, there is an effect that the effect played by the gaming machine B6 can be made more remarkable.

In any of gaming machines B2 to B7,
The game execution means includes
Storage means for storing game media (for example, supply passage 65);
Launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 66) for launching the game medium supplied from the storage means;
A collecting means (for example, a collecting passage 41a) for collecting the game medium launched by the emitting means;
A sending means (for example, a discharge passage 42a) for sending the game medium collected by the collecting means to the storing means;
A gaming machine B8 characterized in that a game is played while circulating a predetermined game medium in the machine.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B2 to B7, the following effects are produced. That is, the game medium is stored by the storage means provided in the game execution means, the game medium supplied from the storage means is launched by the launch means, the game medium launched by the launch means is collected by the collection means, The game medium collected by the collecting means is sent to the storing means by the sending means, so that a game is played while circulating a predetermined game medium in the machine. As a result, a system that digitizes and manages game media, which is a characteristic function of an in-flight circulation game machine (so-called enclosed game machine), is effectively used to determine whether or not the game media can be used based on the game state. There is an effect that a game specification (so-called lucky number system) can be added.

  In more detail, conventionally, in a game hall that employs a lucky number game specification, the staff of the game hall sequentially confirms the start condition of the second game state, and based on the establishment of the start condition, the upper part of the gaming machine In the second gaming state, whether or not the condition for changing from the second gaming state to the first gaming state has been achieved is monitored. It is necessary to perform an operation to end the second gaming state, or to prompt the player to exchange the assigned game medium when the second gaming state ends.

  When the above-mentioned work is performed by a staff at a game hall, work related to the above game specifications is added in addition to normal work such as abnormality check and cleaning of the gaming machine, so there is a risk that the staff will be burdened with a large work load. is there. On the other hand, even if the number of staff is increased to cope with the above-mentioned game specifications, personnel costs for the increased staff increase, and there is a risk that the management of the amusement hall may be tightened. Therefore, even in an environment where the game specifications that can improve the gameability of the lucky number system can be realized, the game hall does not adopt the lucky number system in consideration of the above-mentioned fears, and is in a normal business form. As a result, the gameability was not improved.

  Therefore, by utilizing the functions of the in-flight circulation type gaming machine, the given game media are digitized and managed, and the game media given based on the game status are individually managed and can be used based on the game status By determining the medium, even if the above game specifications are adopted, the management of the amusement hall is sound without reducing the labor costs without placing a heavy work burden on the amusement hall staff and increasing the number of staff. This is advantageous in that various games can be realized while maintaining the conventional environment.

In gaming machine B8,
The firing means includes
In the second gaming state, when the first game medium information or the second game medium information is stored in either the first counting means or the second counting means, it is supplied from the storage means Allow the launch of game media,
In the first gaming state, based on the first game medium information stored in the first counting means, the game medium supplied from the storage means is permitted to be launched, while stored in the second counting means. A gaming machine B9, which is configured to prohibit the launch of game media based on the second game media information.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B8, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the second gaming state, when the first game medium information or the second game medium information is stored in either the first counting means or the second counting means, the game supplied from the storage means by the launching means Medium launch is allowed. On the other hand, in the first gaming state, when the first game medium information is stored in the first counting means, the launch of the game medium supplied to the storage means by the launching means is permitted while the first counting medium information is stored in the second counting means. Launching of game media based on the second game media information is prohibited. As a result, whether or not the second game medium information stored in the second counting means can be used is determined based on whether or not the game state is in the second game state. Therefore, in other gaming machines that have not acquired the second game state. It is possible to maintain the single game and the single game of the above game specification without using the second game medium information stored in the second counting means in the gaming machine that has acquired the second game state. effective. Note that, for example, after the gaming state is changed from the previous second gaming state to the first gaming state based on the establishment of the second condition, the first condition is established and the next second gaming is performed from the first gaming state. When the state is changed to the state, the launching unit permits the launch of the game medium based on the first game medium information stored in the first counting unit in the next second gaming state, You may comprise so that discharge | release of a game medium may be permitted based on the 2nd game medium information memorize | stored in a 2nd count means in a 2nd game state.

In gaming machine B9,
The first gaming state changing means changes from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on establishment of a first condition (for example, start of jackpot),
The second gaming state changing means changes from the second gaming state to the first gaming state based on establishment of a second condition (for example, completion of the “time reduction state”),
The firing means includes
When the first gaming state is changed from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the establishment of the first condition, either the first counting means or the second counting means The first game medium information or the second game medium information is stored in the storage device, the game medium supplied from the storage means is permitted to be launched,
When the second gaming state changing means changes from the second gaming state to the first gaming state based on the establishment of the second condition, it is stored in the first counting means in the subsequent game. Based on the first game medium information, the game medium supplied from the storage unit is allowed to be released, while the game medium based on the second game medium information stored in the second counting unit is prohibited from being released. A gaming machine B10 configured as described above.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B9, the following effects are produced. That is, the first gaming state changing means changes the first gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the establishment of the first condition, and the second gaming state changing means changes the second game based on the establishment of the second condition. The state is changed to the first gaming state. Further, when the first gaming state changing means changes the first gaming state to the second gaming state, the first gaming medium information or the second gaming medium information is stored in either the first counting means or the second counting means. When being done, launching of the game medium supplied from the storing means is permitted by the launching means. On the other hand, when the second gaming state is changed from the second gaming state to the first gaming state by the second gaming state changing means, in the subsequent game, when the first game medium information is stored in the first counting means, the emitting means While allowing the game medium supplied to the storage means to be launched, launching of the game medium based on the second game medium information stored in the second counting means is prohibited. As a result, whether or not the second game medium information stored in the second counting means can be used is determined based on whether or not the game state is in the second game state. Therefore, in other gaming machines that have not acquired the second game state. It is possible to maintain the single game and the single game of the above game specification without using the second game medium information stored in the second counting means in the gaming machine that has acquired the second game state. effective.

In any of gaming machines B8 to B10,
When the second game medium information is stored in the second counting means in the second gaming state, the launching means is configured to obtain the first game medium information stored in the first counting means based on the first game medium information. A gaming machine B11, wherein the second gaming medium information stored in the second counting means is preferentially used to execute the launching of the gaming medium.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B8 to B10, the following effects are produced. That is, in the second gaming state, when the second game medium information is stored in the second counting means, the launching means causes the first counting medium information stored in the first counting means to be transferred to the second counting means. The game medium is launched using the stored second game medium information preferentially. Thereby, the first game medium information stored in the first counting means has a game value for the player from the second game medium information stored in the second counting means, because there is no restriction on the usable game state. In the second gaming state, the second gaming medium information having a gaming value lower than that of the first gaming medium information can be consumed first, so that the gaming value possessed by the player can be protected without being unnecessarily damaged. There is an effect that.

In any of gaming machines B2 to B11,
The game medium counting means stores the number of pieces of game medium information based on the rental request as the first game medium information in the first counting means when there is a game medium rental request from a player. Characteristic gaming machine B12.

  According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B2 to B11, the following effects are produced. That is, when there is a game medium rental request from the player, the game medium counting means stores the number of game medium information based on the rental request as first game medium information in the first counting means. Thereby, since the first game medium information is not restricted in use depending on the game state, there is an effect that the rented game medium can be used in any game state without being restricted in use.

  In addition, the gaming characteristics of the above game specifications are likely to produce a more remarkable effect because the rental rate of the game media is different from the prize conversion rate at the game hall window. Specifically, for example, when there is a prize conversion gap such as “lending rate> prize conversion rate”, a prize is exchanged for one game medium in a game with a rented game medium and a game with a given game medium. There will be a difference in game value equivalent to the gap. In such a situation, the player is given a way to play a game using the rented game medium, and continuously playing the game medium using the game medium provided for the game leads to his own benefit. Whether or not the game based on the game medium is continuously performed is a factor that divides the game. In a game hall with such a prize conversion gap, it is possible to acquire the second game state by adopting the above-mentioned game specifications, and whether or not the game can be continuously played with the game medium provided during that time. There is an effect that the effect of the specification can be made remarkable and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In any of gaming machines B2 to B12,
Medium information notifying means (for example, status display) capable of notifying the contents of the first game medium information stored in the first counting means and the contents of the second game medium information stored in the second counting means. A gaming machine B13 comprising a device 85).

  According to the gaming machine B13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B2 to B12, the following effects are produced. That is, the contents of the first game medium information stored in the first counting means and the contents of the second game medium information stored in the second counting means can be notified by the medium information notifying means. Accordingly, the first game medium information stored in the first counting means usable in the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and the second gaming means stored in the second counting means usable only in the second gaming state. 2 game media information can be recognized by the player, for example, how much game media was given during the second game state, or changed from the second game state to the first game state In this case, there is an effect that it is possible to clearly recognize how long the game can be continued based on the game medium information stored in the first counting means in the first game state.

In any of gaming machines B10 to B13,
The first condition is:
A predetermined first condition established by the predetermined condition (for example, a big hit with an even number of “first time”), and
A special first condition that is difficult to be established from the predetermined first condition (e.g., a big hit with "3 symbols (turtle)" of "first time"),
The second gaming state includes a special second gaming state (for example, a “lucky” state) and a disadvantageous second gaming state (for example, a “start” state) that is more disadvantageous for the player than the special second gaming state. Prepared,
The first gaming state changing means includes
First disadvantage changing means for changing to the disadvantage second gaming state based on establishment of the predetermined first condition;
First special changing means for changing to the special second gaming state based on establishment of the special first condition;
A gaming machine B14 characterized by comprising:

  According to the gaming machine B14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B10 to B13, the following effects are produced. That is, the first disadvantageous change means provided in the first gaming state change means changes to the disadvantageous second gaming state based on the establishment of the predetermined first condition. Further, the first special change means provided in the first game state change means is changed to the special second game state based on the establishment of the special first condition. Thereby, regarding the second gaming state, it is possible to provide a special second state that is difficult to start and an unfavorable second gaming state that is likely to be started. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be enhanced by the nature.

  The gaming machine B14 includes second gaming state type notifying means (for example, a lucky movable accessory 96 and a start movable accessory 97) for notifying the special second gaming state and the disadvantageous second gaming state in an identifiable manner. A gaming machine B15 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine B15, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B14, the following effects are produced. That is, the second gaming state type notifying means notifies the special second gaming state and the disadvantageous second gaming state in an identifiable manner. As a result, it is possible to clearly recognize whether the game is in the special second gaming state or the disadvantaged second gaming state, and performing the game while being aware of the change condition to the first gaming state that is different for each second gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the entertainment in each second gaming state can be fully enjoyed. In addition, “notifying in an identifiable manner” means, for example, arranging a plurality of indication objects (for example, movable accessories) provided for each second gaming state so that the player can visually recognize them, When the second gaming state is started, informing the player by making the player visible in accordance with the type of the second gaming state, or for each second gaming state in one display means The case where the displayed display mode is displayed and notified is included.

In gaming machine B14 or B15,
The second condition is:
A prescribed second condition established by the prescribed condition (end of "time reduction state");
A special second condition (for example, a big hit with “4 symbols (shark)” of “first time”) that is difficult to be established from the prescribed second condition,
The second gaming state changing means is
Second disadvantageous change means for ending the disadvantageous second gaming state based on establishment of the prescribed second condition;
Second special changing means for ending the special second gaming state based on establishment of the special second condition;
A gaming machine B16, comprising:

  According to the gaming machine B16, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B14 or B15, the following effects are produced. That is, the disadvantageous second gaming state is terminated by the second gaming state changing means based on the establishment of the prescribed second condition. Further, the second game state changing means ends the special second game state based on the establishment of the special second condition. Thereby, regarding the second gaming state, it is possible to provide a special second state that is difficult to start and difficult to finish, and a disadvantageous second gaming state that is easy to start and difficult to finish, and each start condition and end By creating a gaming state with different conditions, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be enhanced by various gaming characteristics. In addition, by providing a plurality of types of second gaming state, the period in which the second gaming medium information counted separately from the first gaming medium information acquired in the first gaming state can be varied, There is an effect that the fun of the game can be enhanced by various game characteristics.

In gaming machine B16,
The second disadvantage changing means changes the disadvantage second gaming state to the first gaming state based on the establishment of the prescribed second condition,
The gaming machine B17, wherein the second special changing means changes the special second gaming state to the disadvantageous second gaming state based on the establishment of the special second condition.

  According to the gaming machine B17, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B16, the following effects are produced. That is, the second disadvantageous changing means changes the disadvantageous second gaming state to the first gaming state based on the establishment of the prescribed second condition, and the second special changing means changes the special second condition based on the establishment of the special second condition. The two gaming state is changed to the disadvantageous second gaming state. As a result, regarding the second gaming state, even if it is difficult to start and finishes, it is disadvantageous that the special second state ends via the second gaming state, and the disadvantage is that the first gaming state is immediately changed when it is easily started. Such as a disadvantageous second gaming state can be provided, and by creating a gaming state having different start conditions and ending conditions, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be enhanced by various game characteristics. In addition, by providing a plurality of types of second gaming state, the period in which the second gaming medium information counted separately from the first gaming medium information acquired in the first gaming state can be varied, There is an effect that the fun of the game can be enhanced by various game characteristics.

In any of gaming machines B1 to B17,
A gaming machine B18 comprising condition notifying means (situation display device 85) for notifying the game state changing condition by the gaming state changing means.

  According to the gaming machine B18, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B17, the following effects are produced. That is, the condition notification means notifies the game state change condition by the game state change means. This allows the player to recognize the condition for changing the game state. For example, when the game by the second counting means is prohibited when the game state is changed from the second game state to the first game state. However, by recognizing the conditions in advance, there is an effect that it is possible to construct a comfortable gaming environment without giving the player unnecessary confusion regarding the game specifications.

In gaming machine B18,
The gaming machine B19 is characterized in that the condition notifying means is constituted by an electric display means capable of electrically changing display contents.

  According to the gaming machine B19, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B18, the following effects are produced. That is, the condition notifying means is constituted by an electric display means capable of electrically changing display contents. As a result, the contents can be changed and displayed in accordance with the condition for changing the game state, so that the player can appropriately recognize the condition for changing the game state with a simple configuration. is there.

In any of gaming machines B13 to B19,
The notification by the medium information notification means and the notification by the condition notification means are displayed on one status display means (the lucky number display area 85b and the value information display area 85c of the status display device 85). B20.

  According to the gaming machine B20, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B13 to B19, the following effects are produced. That is, the notification by the medium information notification unit and the notification by the condition notification unit are displayed by one status display unit. That is, the first game medium information and the second game medium information and the game state change condition by the game state change means are displayed on one status display means. Thus, the player can recognize the number of game media owned by the player and the conditions for changing to the second game state by the status display means, so that the extra cost is eliminated without using other devices. There is an effect that the player can recognize the gameability and the game situation of the lucky number system without spending.

In gaming machine B20,
The gaming machine B21, wherein the status display means simultaneously performs notification by the medium information notification means and notification by the condition notification means.

  According to the gaming machine B21, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B20, the following effects are produced. That is, the notification by the medium information notification unit and the notification by the condition notification unit are simultaneously executed by one status display unit. That is, the first game medium information and the second game medium information and the game state change condition by the game state change means are simultaneously displayed on one status display means. Thus, the player can recognize the number of game media owned by the player and the conditions for changing to the second game state by looking at the notification content of the status display means. There is an effect that the player can uniquely recognize the sex.

In the gaming machine B20 or B21,
The gaming machine is composed of a gaming board (for example, gaming board 13) and a frame member (for example, an overhanging portion 16) to which the gaming board is replaceably attached.
The gaming machine B22, wherein the status display means is provided on the frame member.

  According to the gaming machine B22, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B20 or B21, the following effects are produced. In other words, the status display means is provided on a frame member to which the game board is replaceably attached. Accordingly, even when the game board is replaced, the status display means can be used continuously with the frame member being provided, and it is not necessary to provide the status display means on the game board to be replaced. There is an effect that the cost of the entire game board can be reduced as compared with the case where is installed.

In any of gaming machines B2 to B22,
The game medium giving means is
A first entry means (for example, a start winning opening 4) and a second entry means (for example, a specific winning opening 5a) capable of entering a game medium used in the game,
The first entry means is configured to allow entry of game media in the first game state and the second game state,
The second entry means is configured to allow entry of a game medium only in a predetermined game state (for example, a big hit state),
In the second gaming state, the second counting means updates the second game medium information based on the game medium entering the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means. A gaming machine B23 comprising an updating means.

  According to the gaming machine B23, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B2 to B22, the following effects are produced. In other words, the first medium entry means and the second ball entry means provided in the game medium provision means are configured such that the game medium used for the game can enter, and the first game state and the second game state are the first in the first game state and the second game state. The game medium can be entered into the ball entry means, and the game medium can be entered into the second ball entry means only in a predetermined game state. In the second game state, the second game medium information is updated based on the game medium entering the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means. Thereby, in the second gaming state, the game medium is given based on the game medium entering the first ball entry means, and the game medium is given based on the game medium having entered the second ball entry means. Since it is not necessary to distinguish and count the game media to be played, it is not necessary to complicate the control related to the update processing of the game media information given during the second game state, and the control load can be reduced. There is.

In any of gaming machines B2 to B22,
A first entry means (for example, a start winning opening 4) and a second entry means (for example, a specific winning opening 5a) capable of entering a game medium used in the game,
The first entry means is configured to allow entry of game media in the first game state and the second game state,
The second entry means is configured to allow entry of a game medium only in a predetermined game state (for example, a big hit state),
The second counting means includes a second single update means for updating the second game medium information based on a game medium entering the second ball entry means in the second game state,
The first counting means includes a first single update means for updating the first game medium information based on a game medium entering the first ball entry means in the second game state. A gaming machine B24 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine B24, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B2 to B22, the following effects are produced. In other words, the first medium entry means and the second ball entry means provided in the game medium provision means are configured such that the game medium used for the game can enter, and the first game state and the second game state are the first in the first game state and the second game state. The game medium is configured to be able to enter the entrance means, and the game medium is configured to be able to enter the second entrance means only in a predetermined gaming state, and the second single update means provided in the second counting means In the second game state, the second game medium information is updated based on the game medium entering the second ball entry means, and the second game state is updated by the first single update means provided in the first count means. The first game medium information is updated based on the game medium entering the first ball entry means.

  Since the second game medium information stored in the second counting means cannot be used for the game after the end of the second gaming state, the game value for the player compared to the first game medium information stored in the first counting means. Is low. Further, since the second entry means is configured so that the game medium can enter only in the predetermined game state of the second game state, the second entry means is directly related to the second game state. The ball means is configured to allow the game medium to enter even in the first game state other than the second game state, and is not directly related to the second game state. Therefore, when a game medium enters the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means during the second game state, all the game medium information based on the ball entry is stored in the second counting means. At this time, if the second counting means stores a game medium entry into the first entering means that can occur independently of the second gaming state and should be stored in the first counting means, the player's game It will damage value. Accordingly, the second game medium information is updated based on the game medium that has entered the second entry means by the second single update means provided in the second count means, and the first count means provided in the first count means. The single update means is configured to update the first game medium information based on the game medium that has entered the first entry means. Thereby, even if it is a 2nd game state, when a game medium enters by the 1st entrance means, it can memorize | store as 1st game medium information with a high game value, Therefore A player's game value is obtained. There is an effect that a suitable gaming environment can be constructed without any damage.

In any of gaming machines B2 to B24,
The gaming state changing means is a fixed amount for changing from the second gaming state to the first gaming state when the second gaming medium information stored in the second counting means reaches a predetermined number. A gaming machine B25 characterized by comprising an ending means.

  According to the gaming machine B25, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B2 to B24, the following effects are produced. That is, when the second game medium information stored in the second counting unit reaches a predetermined number by the fixed amount ending unit provided in the gaming state changing unit, the first gaming state is changed from the second gaming state. Changed to Accordingly, it is possible to realize a gameability (so-called quantitative system) for ending the second game state when the number of game media provided during the second game state reaches a certain number. In the conventional quantitative system, the game media staff decides the stop by judging the game media possessed by the player based on the estimated amount, but the given game media is managed numerically and managed with accurate numeric judgment By deciding on the stop, the grounds for the stop will be clarified, so the work of the game hall staff will be reduced, and a gaming environment according to the specifications of the game will be provided without causing any doubt to the player There is an effect that can be.

In any of gaming machines B0 to B24,
The gaming machine B26, wherein the gaming state changing means changes the gaming state based on a game result by the game executing means.

  According to the gaming machine B26, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B0 to B24, the following effects are produced. That is, the game state is changed by the game state changing means based on the game result by the game executing means. Thus, the gaming state is changed based on the gaming result, and a new gaming property in which there is a gaming medium whose use is restricted based on the gaming state is created. There is an effect that the playability of the game is born and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

<Group C>
A game medium counting means (for example, a normal time ball counter 213c or a lucky central ball counter 213d) for counting the number of game media usable in the game;
Game execution means (for example, ball launching unit 66) for playing a game based on the game media counted by the game media counting means;
A game machine provided with a game medium giving means (for example, a specific prize opening 5a) for giving a game medium to a player based on a game result by the game execution means,
The gaming machine C0 is characterized in that the game execution means includes time restriction means (for example, an unusable area 213e) for restricting a time during which the game medium provided by the game medium provision means can be used for a game.

  According to the gaming machine C0, the number of game media that can be used for the game is counted by the game medium counting means, and the game is executed by the game execution means based on the game media counted by the game medium counting means. Based on the game result by the executing means, the game medium is given to the player by the game medium giving means. In addition, the time limit means provided in the game execution means limits the time during which the game medium provided by the game medium providing means can be used for the game. As a result, by creating a new game where there is a game medium whose use is restricted depending on the time during which the game is played, a game that shows how long the game continues in a time when use is not restricted is created. There is an effect that can be increased. Note that “restrict the time that can be used” means, for example, when the use of a game medium is prohibited at that time, or when the situation where the game medium can be used at that time is limited, This includes a case where a limit is imposed on the number that can be used, or a case where the use of a game medium is temporarily reserved at that time.

In gaming machine C0,
Game state changing means for changing the game state based on a predetermined opportunity (for example, unlimited flag 213h),
The game medium counting means includes individual counting means (for example, a lucky central ball counter 213d) that counts game media given to a player in a specific gaming state,
The gaming machine C1 is characterized in that the time limit means is configured to limit a time during which the game medium counted by the individual counting means can be used.

  According to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C0, the following effects are achieved. That is, the gaming state is changed by the gaming state changing unit based on a predetermined opportunity, and the gaming media provided to the player in the specific gaming state is counted by the individual counting unit provided in the gaming medium counting unit. And the time which can use the game medium counted by the individual counting means is restricted by the time restriction means. Thereby, the time which cannot be used regarding the game media counted in the specific game state can be created. Therefore, by creating a new gameability where there is a game medium that cannot be used depending on the time of the game, the gameability of how long the game will continue in the time when the use is not restricted is created, and the interest of the game is enhanced There is an effect that can be.

In the gaming machine C0 or C1,
The gaming state changing means is
First gaming state changing means for changing from a first gaming state (for example, “normal gaming state”) to a second gaming state (for example, lucky period) based on a first predetermined opportunity;
A second gaming state changing means for changing from the second gaming state to the first gaming state based on a second predetermined opportunity,
The individual counting means includes
First counting means (for example, a normal time ball counter 213c) for storing first game medium information (for example, sharable balls) related to the game medium given to the player by the game medium giving means in the first gaming state; ,
Second counting means (for example, a lucky central ball counter 213d) for storing second game medium information (for example, lucky balls) related to the gaming medium given to the player by the gaming medium giving means in the second gaming state; With
The time limiting means is
On the day when the second gaming state is acquired, when the second gaming state ends, a game based on the second gaming medium information stored in the second counting means during the second gaming state is prohibited. On the day prohibited means,
And a next day prohibiting means for prohibiting a game based on the second game medium information stored in the second counting means on the day after acquiring the second gaming state after the next day when the second gaming state is acquired. A gaming machine C2 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C0 or C1, the following effects are produced. That is, the first gaming state changing means provided in the gaming state changing means changes the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the first predetermined opportunity, and the gaming state changing means is provided. The gaming state is changed from the second gaming state to the first gaming state based on the second predetermined opportunity by the second gaming state changing means. In addition, the first counting means provided in the individual counting means counts the first game medium information related to the game medium provided by the game medium providing means in the first gaming state. Further, the second game medium information relating to the game medium given by the game medium giving means in the second gaming state is counted by the second counting means provided in the individual counting means. When the second gaming state is completed on the day when the second gaming state is acquired by the day prohibiting unit provided in the time limiting unit, the second counting unit stores the second gaming state during the second gaming state. A game based on the second game medium information is prohibited. The game based on the second game medium information stored in the second counting means on the day when the second game state is acquired after the next day when the second game state is acquired by the next day prohibition means provided in the time limit means. Is prohibited. Accordingly, when the second gaming state is ended on the day when the second gaming state is acquired on the game media counted separately in the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the second gaming state is obtained. The second game medium information stored in the second counting means cannot be used and the next day after acquiring the second gaming state, the second counting means stored in the second counting means on the day of acquiring the second gaming state. 2 It is possible to create a situation where game media information cannot be used. Therefore, a difference can be provided in the game media counted for each gaming state. And since the game can be changed based on this difference, a new game characteristic of how to continue the game on the day when the second game medium information is acquired is created, and the interest of the game is enhanced. There is an effect that can be. The first predetermined opportunity and the second predetermined opportunity may be different from each other, or may be the same opportunity.

In the gaming machine C2,
The game executing means is configured to be able to execute a game based on the first game medium information stored by the first counting means even after the next day after the game medium is given by the game medium giving means. A gaming machine C3.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the following effects are produced. That is, the game execution means is configured to be able to execute a game based on the first game medium information stored by the first counting means even after the next day after the game medium is given by the game medium giving means. As a result, regarding the game media individually counted in the first game state and the second game state, the game media stored in the first count means even after the next day when the game media is given by the game medium giving means. Can be configured to be usable. Accordingly, the first game medium information stored in the first counting means has a higher game value for the player than the second game medium information stored in the second counting means, because there is no restriction on the usable time. Therefore, a difference can be provided in the game media counted for each gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of the gaming machine C2 can be made more remarkable.

In gaming machine C2 or C3,
A game permission means (for example, a table and a player) that allows the player to execute a game based on a storage medium (for example, a membership card 300) owned by the player being inserted into an external device (for example, the card sand device 70) outside the gaming machine. Date information confirmation processing (S2881)),
Time information storage means (for example, timer counter 213o) for storing information about time;
An interruption time storage means (for example, a clearing process (S2105)) for storing information on the time stored in the time information storage means in the storage medium when a game interruption instruction is given;
Time information determination for determining whether or not the information related to the time stored in the storage medium and the information related to the time stored in the time information storage means have a predetermined relationship when a game restart instruction is given Means (for example, S2872 in the platform and date information confirmation process (S2881)),
When the time information determining means determines that the information related to the time stored in the storage medium and the information related to the time stored in the time information storage means are not in the predetermined relationship by the time information determining means. A gaming machine C4, which prohibits a game based on the two game medium information stored in the second counting means.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2 or C3, the following effects are produced. That is, the game permission means permits the execution of the game based on the fact that the player-owned storage medium is inserted into an external device outside the game machine. In addition, information related to time is stored in the time information storage means, and information related to time stored in the time information storage means is stored in the storage medium when there is a game interruption instruction by the interruption time storage means. Further, when the game information is instructed to be resumed by the time information determination means, it is determined that the information related to the time stored in the storage medium and the information related to the time stored in the time information storage means are not in a predetermined relationship. In this case, the game based on the second game medium information stored in the second counting unit is prohibited by the time limiting unit.

  When the player wishes to suspend the game during the second gaming state, the identification information unique to the gaming machine is stored in the storage medium, and the identification information stored in the storage medium and the identification of the gaming machine are resumed when the game is resumed. When the information matches the game, the game can be constructed with a comfortable game environment for the player by resuming the second game state and enabling the game based on the second game medium information stored in the second counting means. There is a machine. In such a gaming machine, for example, when a game is played with the same gaming machine across dates, if the gaming machine performing the game is the same, the game is resumed from the gaming situation at the previous game interruption. Thus, for example, if the player is in the second gaming state, as long as a game is played with the same gaming machine, the second gaming state can be continued without ending, and the game field is created by unintentionally giving the second gaming state. There is a risk of suffering a great disadvantage.

  Therefore, when the game is interrupted, information related to the time is stored in the storage medium, and when the game is resumed, the information related to the time stored in the storage medium and the information related to the time of the time information storage means are in a predetermined relationship. If there is not, the game is configured to be prohibited (cannot be executed) based on the second game medium information stored in the second counting means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the playground from being disadvantaged while maintaining the gameability of the lucky number system. Note that “when there is an instruction to suspend a game” means, for example, when the player performs a return operation of the storage medium and ejects the storage medium to the outside of the external device, or is provided in the gaming machine or the external device. A case where the progress of the game is stopped by a game stop means (for example, a game stop button with an authentication function) or a case where the operation of the gaming machine is stopped due to a power failure or the like is included. Also, “when there is an instruction to restart the game” means, for example, a case where a storage medium is inserted into the external device so that the game can be executed, or a game restart means provided in the gaming machine or the external device This includes a case where the progress of the game is permitted (for example, a game restart button with an authentication function) or a case where the operation of the gaming machine is resumed due to a power recovery from a power failure. Further, “determining whether or not the information related to the time stored in the storage medium and the information related to the time stored in the time information storage means have a predetermined relationship” means, for example, the date stored in the storage medium The time information stored in the storage medium and the hour / minute information stored in the time information storage means when determining whether or not the information matches the date information stored in the time information storage means The case where it is determined whether or not it is less than a predetermined interval (for example, 2 hours) is exemplified.

In gaming machine C4,
A state storage unit (for example, a clearing process (S2105)) that stores state information related to the second game state in the storage medium when a game interruption instruction is given;
The time limiter is configured such that when there is an instruction to resume a game, the time information determination unit stores information related to the time stored in the storage medium and information related to the time stored in the time information storage unit. When it is determined that the relationship is, the gaming machine C5 restarts the second gaming state based on the state information stored in the state storage means.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the following effects are produced. That is, when there is a game interruption instruction by the state storage means, state information relating to the second gaming state is stored in the storage medium, and when there is a game restart instruction, it is stored in the storage medium by the time information determination means. When the information relating to the time to be played and the information relating to the time stored in the time information storage means are in a predetermined relationship, the second gaming state is resumed by the time restriction means based on the state information stored in the state storage means The Thereby, the second gaming state can be resumed when the information about the time when the game is interrupted and when the game is resumed has a predetermined relationship, so that the player is in the second gaming state. Even if you want to take a rest or meal break, you can resume the second gaming state when you resume the game, so you can enjoy a comfortable gaming environment while preventing storage media theft. Can be built. Also, for example, when the state information related to the second gaming state is stored in the game place management means (for example, the hall computer 263), an abnormality occurs in the state information stored in the management means due to the influence of a power failure or the like. There is a risk that the gaming value that should be originally obtained may disappear. Therefore, by storing the state information related to the second gaming state in the storage medium possessed by the player, it is possible to manage the gaming value obtained at the player's own responsibility, so even if a power outage or the like occurs There is an effect that it is possible to construct a suitable gaming environment without detracting from the gaming value of the player.

In gaming machine C5,
When the time information determining means determines that the information related to the time stored in the storage medium and the information related to the time stored in the time information storage means are not in the predetermined relationship by the time information determining means. A gaming machine C6, further comprising state limiting means for preventing the second gaming state from being resumed.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C5, the following effects are produced. That is, when the time information determining means determines that the information related to the time stored in the storage medium and the information related to the time stored in the time information storage means are not in a predetermined relationship, the state provided in the time limiting means The limiting means is configured not to resume the second gaming state. As a result, the game situation of the gaming machine that was playing on the previous day etc. will not be reflected in the game on the next day, etc., and a new game can be played. There is an effect that the playability can be maintained.

In gaming machine C6,
The state limiting unit is configured to determine that the time information determination unit determines that the information related to the time stored in the storage medium and the information related to the time stored in the time information storage unit are not in the predetermined relationship. The gaming machine C7, wherein the state information stored in the state storage means is erased.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C6, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the game is resumed, when the information related to the time stored in the storage medium by the time information determination means and the information related to the time stored in the time information storage means are not in a predetermined relationship, the state storage means The state information stored in is deleted. Thereby, it can comprise so that a 2nd game state may not be restarted. Therefore, since the data related to the gaming status of the gaming machine that was playing the previous day etc. is erased, the basis for reflecting the gaming status of the gaming machine that was playing the previous game to the next day etc. Since a new game can be performed without restarting, there is an effect that the effect played by the gaming machine C6 can be made more remarkable.

In any of the gaming machines C4 to C7,
A power interruption holding means (for example, main processing (see FIG. 23)) capable of storing and holding the game state at the time of power interruption,
A recovery means (for example, start-up processing (see FIG. 46)) for recovering the gaming state stored and held by the power interruption holding means by satisfying a recovery condition at power-on;
A time counter (RTC 220) for measuring the current time;
Time holding means (for example, S2053 of start-up processing (see FIG. 46)) for storing information related to the time before the power-off in the time information storage means;
At the time of recovery by the recovery means, information on the time stored in the time information storage means by the time holding means and the current time measured by the time clock means (for example, start-up processing ( 46)), and
The gaming state changing means, when the comparison result between the time information stored in the time information storage means and the current time measured by the time counting means is a predetermined result by the time comparison means, The gaming machine C8 is configured to change from the second gaming state to the first gaming state after the gaming state is restored by the restoration means.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C4 to C7, the following effects are produced. That is, the game state at the time of power-off is stored and held by the power-off holding means, and the game state stored and held in the power-time holding means is restored by satisfying the restoration condition when the power is turned on by the restoration means. In addition, the current time is measured by the time measuring means, and the information related to the time before the power-off is stored in the time information storing means by the time holding means. Further, the time comparison means compares the time information stored in the time information storage means by the time holding means with the current time measured by the time counting means at the time of recovery by the recovery means. Then, after the game state is restored by the restoration means when the comparison result between the information related to the time stored in the time information storage means by the time comparison means and the current time measured by the time counting means becomes a predetermined result. The game state changing means changes the game state from the second game state to the first game state.

  In a gaming machine having a so-called backup function, if the game state is in the second gaming state when the power is turned off, there is a possibility that the second gaming state is restarted without omission by satisfying the recovery condition when the power is turned on. In such a case, for the gaming machine that was in the second gaming state when the business of that day was terminated, the game room would prevent the second gaming state from being resumed at the start of business on the next day. For each gaming machine, it is necessary to initialize the storage means and the like, which increases the work burden on the staff at the game hall.

  Therefore, when the power is restored, the comparison result between the information about the time stored in the time information storage means and the current time measured by the time measuring means by the time comparing means before the time when the power is turned off becomes a predetermined result. Since the game state changing means is configured to change the game state from the second game state to the first game state, the second game state can be automatically terminated, thereby reducing the work load of the game hall staff. can do. Note that “before power-off” may be any time from when the gaming machine is turned on until the gaming machine is turned off. It may be a timer interruption process during a normal game or a power interruption process when the power is turned off. Further, “the comparison result between the information related to the time stored in the time information storage means and the current time measured by the time counting means is a predetermined result” means, for example, information related to the time stored in the time information storage means The time difference between the result of determining that the date is different from the current time measured by the time measuring means, the information on the time stored in the time information storage means, and the current time measured by the time measuring means is 5 hours. The result etc. judged that it is different above are illustrated.

In any of gaming machines C2 to C8,
The game execution means includes
Storage means for storing game media (for example, supply passage 65);
Launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 66) for launching the game medium supplied from the storage means;
A collecting means (for example, a collecting passage 41a) for collecting the game medium launched by the emitting means;
A sending means (for example, a discharge passage 42a) for sending the game medium collected by the collecting means to the storing means;
A gaming machine C9 which plays a game while circulating a predetermined game medium in the machine.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C2 to C8, the following effects are produced. That is, the game medium is stored by the storage means provided in the game execution means, the game medium supplied from the storage means is launched by the launch means, the game medium launched by the launch means is collected by the collection means, The game medium collected by the collecting means is sent to the storing means by the sending means, so that a game is played while circulating a predetermined game medium in the machine. As a result, a system that digitizes and manages game media, which is a characteristic function of an in-flight circulation game machine (so-called enclosed game machine), is effectively used to determine whether or not the game media can be used based on the game state. There is an effect that a game specification (so-called lucky number system) can be added.

  In more detail, conventionally, in a game hall that employs a lucky number game specification, the staff of the game hall sequentially confirms the start condition of the second game state, and based on the establishment of the start condition, the upper part of the gaming machine In the second gaming state, whether or not the condition for changing from the second gaming state to the first gaming state has been achieved is monitored. It is necessary to perform an operation to end the second gaming state, or to prompt the player to exchange the assigned game medium when the second gaming state ends.

  When the above-mentioned work is performed by a staff at a game hall, work related to the above game specifications is added in addition to normal work such as abnormality check and cleaning of the gaming machine, so there is a risk that the staff will be burdened with a large work load. is there. On the other hand, even if the number of staff is increased to cope with the above-mentioned game specifications, personnel costs for the increased staff increase, and there is a risk that the management of the amusement hall may be tightened. Therefore, even in an environment where the game specifications that can improve the gameability of the lucky number system can be realized, the game hall does not adopt the lucky number system in consideration of the above-mentioned fears, and is in a normal business form. As a result, the gameability was not improved.

  Therefore, by utilizing the functions of the in-flight circulation type gaming machine, the given game media are digitized and managed, and the game media given based on the game status are individually managed and can be used based on the game status By determining the medium, even if the above game specifications are adopted, the management of the amusement hall is sound without reducing the labor costs without placing a heavy work burden on the amusement hall staff and increasing the number of staff. This is advantageous in that various games can be realized while maintaining the conventional environment.

In gaming machine C9,
The firing means includes
On the day when the second gaming state is acquired, during the second gaming state, the first gaming medium information or the second gaming medium information is stored in either the first counting means or the second counting means. The game medium supplied from the storage means is allowed to fire,
The game medium supplied from the storage means based on the first game medium information when the first game medium information is stored in the first counting means after the next day after acquiring the second game state. While allowing the launch of
On the day when the second game state is acquired, when the second game state is ended, the game medium is released based on the second game medium information stored in the second counting means during the second game state. Ban
On the day after the second gaming state is acquired, the game medium is prohibited from being launched based on the second gaming medium information stored in the second counting means on the day when the second gaming state is acquired. A gaming machine C10 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C9, the following effects are produced. That is, on the day when the second gaming state is acquired, in the second gaming state, when the first game medium introduction is stored in the first counting means, or during the second gaming state, the gaming medium giving means The game medium supplied from the storing means by the launching means on the basis of the first game medium information or the second game medium information when the game medium provided by is stored as second game medium information in the second counting means Is allowed to fire. In addition, when the first game medium information stored in the first counting means is stored after the next day when the second game state is acquired, it is supplied from the storage means by the launching means based on the first game medium information. Launching of game media is permitted. On the other hand, when the second gaming state is completed on the day when the second gaming state is acquired, the game medium is released based on the second gaming medium information stored in the second counting means during the second gaming state. On the day after the second game state is acquired, the game medium is prohibited from being launched based on the second game medium information stored in the second counting means on the day the second game state is acquired. Accordingly, whether or not the second game medium information stored in the second counting means can be used is determined based on whether or not the second game state is acquired on the same day, so that the second game state is not acquired. (For example, on the next day), the second game medium information stored in the second counting means is not used, and there is an effect that the game specification can be maintained and the game characteristics only for the day can be maintained. Note that, for example, after the gaming state is changed from the previous second gaming state to the first gaming state based on the establishment of the second condition, the first condition is established and the next second gaming is performed from the first gaming state. When the state is changed to the state, the launching unit permits the launch of the game medium based on the first game medium information stored in the first counting unit in the next second gaming state, You may comprise so that discharge | release of a game medium may be permitted based on the 2nd game medium information memorize | stored in a 2nd count means in a 2nd game state.

In the gaming machine C10,
The first gaming state changing means changes from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on establishment of a first condition (for example, start of jackpot),
The second gaming state changing means changes from the second gaming state to the first gaming state based on establishment of a second condition (for example, completion of the “time reduction state”),
The firing means includes
On the day when the second gaming state is acquired, during the second gaming state, the first gaming medium information or the second gaming medium information is stored in either the first counting means or the second counting means. The game medium supplied from the storage means is allowed to fire,
The game medium supplied from the storage means based on the first game medium information when the first game medium information is stored in the first counting means after the next day after acquiring the second game state. While allowing the launch of
When the second gaming state ends on the day when the second gaming state is acquired, the second gaming medium information stored in the second counting means during the second gaming state is stored in the second gaming state. Prohibit the launch of gaming media based on,
On the day after the second gaming state is acquired, the game medium is prohibited from being launched based on the second gaming medium information stored in the second counting means on the day when the second gaming state is acquired. A gaming machine C11 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C10, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first gaming state changing means changes the first gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the establishment of the first condition, and the second gaming state changing means changes the second game based on the establishment of the second condition. The state is changed to the first gaming state. Further, when the first game medium information is stored in the first counting means in the second game state on the day when the second game state is acquired, or when the first game medium information is stored in the second game state. The game medium supplied from the storing means by the launching means on the basis of the first game medium information or the second game medium information when the game medium provided by is stored as second game medium information in the second counting means Is allowed to fire. In addition, when the first game medium information stored in the first counting means is stored after the next day when the second game state is acquired, it is supplied from the storage means by the launching means based on the first game medium information. Launching of game media is permitted. On the other hand, on the day when the second gaming state is acquired, when the second gaming state ends, in the subsequent game, based on the second gaming medium information stored in the second counting means during the second gaming state. Launching of game media is prohibited, and launching of game media based on the second game media information stored in the second counting means on the day of acquiring the second game status is prohibited after the second day after acquiring the second game status. The Accordingly, whether or not the second game medium information stored in the second counting means can be used is determined based on whether or not the second game state is acquired on the same day, so that the second game state is not acquired. (For example, on the next day), the second game medium information stored in the second counting means is not used, and there is an effect that the game specification can be maintained and the game characteristics only for the day can be maintained.

In any of gaming machines C9 to C11,
In the second gaming state, when the second game medium information is stored in the second counting means, the launching means is based on the first game medium information stored in the first counting means. A gaming machine C12, wherein the second game medium information stored in the second counting means is preferentially used to execute a game medium launch.

  According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C9 to C11, the following effects are produced. That is, in the second gaming state, when the second game medium information is stored in the second counting means, the launching means causes the first counting medium information stored in the first counting means to be transferred to the second counting means. The game medium is launched using the stored second game medium information preferentially. Thereby, the first game medium information stored in the first counting means has a game value for the player from the second game medium information stored in the second counting means, because there is no restriction on the usable game state. In the second gaming state, the second gaming medium information having a gaming value lower than that of the first gaming medium information can be consumed first, so that the gaming value possessed by the player can be protected without being unnecessarily damaged. There is an effect that.

In any of the gaming machines C2 to C12,
The game medium counting means stores the number of pieces of game medium information based on the rental request as the first game medium information in the first counting means when there is a game medium rental request from a player. Characteristic gaming machine C13.

According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C2 to C12, the following effects are produced. That is, when there is a game medium rental request from the player, the game medium counting means stores the number of game medium information based on the rental request as first game medium information in the first counting means. Thereby, since the first game medium information is not restricted in use depending on the game state, there is an effect that the rented game medium can be used in any game state without being restricted in use.

  In addition, the gaming characteristics of the above game specifications are likely to produce a more remarkable effect because the rental rate of the game media is different from the prize conversion rate at the game hall window. Specifically, for example, when there is a prize conversion gap such as “lending rate> prize conversion rate”, a prize is exchanged for one game medium in a game with a rented game medium and a game with a given game medium. There will be a difference in game value equivalent to the gap. In such a situation, the player is given a way to play a game using the rented game medium, and continuously playing the game medium using the game medium provided for the game leads to his own benefit. Whether or not the game based on the game medium is continuously performed is a factor that divides the game. In a game hall with such a prize conversion gap, it is possible to acquire the second game state by adopting the above-mentioned game specifications, and whether or not the game can be continuously played with the game medium provided during that time. There is an effect that the effect of the specification can be made remarkable and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines C2 to C13,
Medium information notifying means (for example, status display) capable of notifying the contents of the first game medium information stored in the first counting means and the contents of the second game medium information stored in the second counting means. A gaming machine C14 comprising a device 85).

  According to the gaming machine C14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C2 to C13, the following effects are produced. That is, the contents of the first game medium information stored in the first counting means and the contents of the second game medium information stored in the second counting means can be notified by the medium information notifying means. Accordingly, the first game medium information stored in the first counting means usable in the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and the second gaming means stored in the second counting means usable only in the second gaming state. 2 game media information can be recognized by the player, for example, how much game media is given during the second game state, or when the game state is changed from the second game state to the first game state In addition, there is an effect that it is possible to clearly recognize how long the game can be continued based on the game medium information stored in the first counting means in the first game state.

In any of the gaming machines C11 to C14,
The first condition is:
A predetermined first condition established by the predetermined condition (for example, a big hit with an even number of “first time”), and
A special first condition that is difficult to be established from the predetermined first condition (e.g., a big hit with "3 symbols (turtle)" of "first time"),
The second gaming state includes a special second gaming state (for example, a “lucky” state) and a disadvantageous second gaming state (for example, a “start” state) that is more disadvantageous for the player than the special second gaming state. Prepared,
The first gaming state changing means includes
First disadvantage changing means for changing to the disadvantage second gaming state based on establishment of the predetermined first condition;
First special changing means for changing to the special second gaming state based on establishment of the special first condition;
A gaming machine C15, comprising:

  According to the gaming machine C15, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C11 to C14, the following effects are produced. That is, the first disadvantageous change means provided in the first gaming state change means changes to the disadvantageous second gaming state based on the establishment of the predetermined first condition. Further, the first special change means provided in the first game state change means is changed to the special second game state based on the establishment of the special first condition. Thereby, regarding the second gaming state, it is possible to provide a special second state that is difficult to start and an unfavorable second gaming state that is likely to be started. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be enhanced by the nature.

  The gaming machine C15 includes second gaming state type notifying means (for example, a lucky movable accessory 96 and a start movable accessory 97) for notifying the special second gaming state and the disadvantageous second gaming state in an identifiable manner. A gaming machine C16 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine C16, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C15, the following effects are produced. That is, the second gaming state type notifying means notifies the special second gaming state and the disadvantageous second gaming state in an identifiable manner. As a result, it is possible to clearly recognize whether the game is in the special second gaming state or the disadvantaged second gaming state, and performing the game while being aware of the change condition to the first gaming state that is different for each second gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the entertainment in each second gaming state can be fully enjoyed. In addition, “notifying in an identifiable manner” means, for example, arranging a plurality of indication objects (for example, movable accessories) provided for each second gaming state so that the player can visually recognize them, When the second gaming state is started, informing the player by making the player visible in accordance with the type of the second gaming state, or for each second gaming state in one display means The case where the displayed display mode is displayed and notified is included.

In the gaming machine C15 or C16,
The second condition is:
A prescribed second condition established by the prescribed condition (end of "time reduction state");
A special second condition (for example, a big hit with “4 symbols (shark)” of “first time”) that is difficult to be established from the prescribed second condition,
The second gaming state changing means is
Second disadvantageous change means for ending the disadvantageous second gaming state based on establishment of the prescribed second condition;
Second special changing means for ending the special second gaming state based on establishment of the special second condition;
A gaming machine C17, comprising:

  According to the gaming machine C17, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C15 or C16, the following effects are produced. That is, the disadvantageous second gaming state is terminated by the second gaming state changing means based on the establishment of the prescribed second condition. Further, the second game state changing means ends the special second game state based on the establishment of the special second condition. Thereby, regarding the second gaming state, it is possible to provide a special second state that is difficult to start and difficult to finish, and a disadvantageous second gaming state that is easy to start and difficult to finish, and each start condition and end By creating a gaming state with different conditions, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be enhanced by various gaming characteristics. In addition, by providing a plurality of types of second gaming state, the period in which the second gaming medium information counted separately from the first gaming medium information acquired in the first gaming state can be varied, There is an effect that the fun of the game can be enhanced by various game characteristics.

In gaming machine C17,
The second disadvantage changing means changes the disadvantage second gaming state to the first gaming state based on the establishment of the prescribed second condition,
The gaming machine C18, wherein the second special changing means changes the special second gaming state to the disadvantageous second gaming state based on the establishment of the special second condition.

  According to the gaming machine C18, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C17, the following effects are produced. That is, the second disadvantageous changing means changes the disadvantageous second gaming state to the first gaming state based on the establishment of the prescribed second condition, and the second special changing means changes the special second condition based on the establishment of the special second condition. The two gaming state is changed to the disadvantageous second gaming state. As a result, regarding the second gaming state, even if it is difficult to start and finishes, it is disadvantageous that the special second state ends via the second gaming state, and the disadvantage is that the first gaming state is immediately changed when it is easily started. Such as a disadvantageous second gaming state can be provided, and by creating a gaming state having different start conditions and ending conditions, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be enhanced by various game characteristics. In addition, by providing a plurality of types of second gaming state, the period in which the second gaming medium information counted separately from the first gaming medium information acquired in the first gaming state can be varied, There is an effect that the fun of the game can be enhanced by various game characteristics.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C18,
A gaming machine C19, comprising: condition notifying means (situation display device 85) for notifying the game state changing condition by the gaming state changing means.

  According to the gaming machine C19, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C1 to C18, the following effects are produced. That is, the condition notification means notifies the game state change condition by the game state change means. This allows the player to recognize the condition for changing the game state. For example, when the game by the second counting means is prohibited when the game state is changed from the second game state to the first game state. However, by recognizing the conditions in advance, there is an effect that it is possible to construct a comfortable gaming environment without giving the player unnecessary confusion regarding the game specifications.

In gaming machine C19,
The gaming machine C20 is characterized in that the condition notifying means is constituted by an electric display means capable of electrically changing display contents.

  According to the gaming machine C20, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C19, the following effects are produced. That is, the condition notifying means is constituted by an electric display means capable of electrically changing display contents. As a result, the contents can be changed and displayed in accordance with the condition for changing the game state, so that the player can appropriately recognize the condition for changing the game state with a simple configuration. is there.

In any of the gaming machines C14 to C20,
The notification by the medium information notification means and the notification by the condition notification means are displayed on one status display means (the lucky number display area 85b and the value information display area 85c of the status display device 85). C21.

  According to the gaming machine C21, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C14 to C20, the following effects are produced. That is, the notification by the medium information notification unit and the notification by the condition notification unit are displayed by one status display unit. That is, the first game medium information and the second game medium information and the game state change condition by the game state change means are displayed on one status display means. Thus, the player can recognize the number of game media owned by the player and the conditions for changing to the second game state by the status display means, so that the extra cost is eliminated without using other devices. There is an effect that the player can recognize the gameability and the game situation of the lucky number system without spending.

In gaming machine C21,
The gaming machine C22, wherein the status display means simultaneously performs notification by the medium information notification means and notification by the condition notification means.

  According to the gaming machine C22, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C21, the following effects are produced. That is, the notification by the medium information notification unit and the notification by the condition notification unit are simultaneously executed by one status display unit. That is, the first game medium information and the second game medium information and the game state change condition by the game state change means are simultaneously displayed on one status display means. Thus, the player can recognize the number of game media owned by the player and the conditions for changing to the second game state by looking at the notification content of the status display means. There is an effect that the player can uniquely recognize the sex.

In the gaming machine C21 or C22,
The gaming machine is composed of a gaming board (for example, gaming board 13) and a frame member (for example, an overhanging portion 16) to which the gaming board is replaceably attached.
The gaming machine C23, wherein the status display means is provided on the frame member.

  According to the gaming machine C23, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C21 or C22, the following effects are produced. In other words, the status display means is provided on a frame member to which the game board is replaceably attached. Accordingly, even when the game board is replaced, the status display means can be used continuously with the frame member being provided, and it is not necessary to provide the status display means on the game board to be replaced. There is an effect that the cost of the entire game board can be reduced as compared with the case where is installed.

In any of gaming machines C2 to C23,
The game medium giving means is
A first entry means (for example, a start winning opening 4) and a second entry means (for example, a specific winning opening 5a) capable of entering a game medium used in the game,
The first entry means is configured to allow entry of game media in the first game state and the second game state,
The second entry means is configured to allow entry of a game medium only in a predetermined game state (for example, a big hit state),
In the second gaming state, the second counting means updates the second game medium information based on the game medium entering the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means. A gaming machine C24 comprising an updating means.

  According to the gaming machine C24, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C2 to C23, the following effects are produced. In other words, the first medium entry means and the second ball entry means provided in the game medium provision means are configured such that the game medium used for the game can enter, and the first game state and the second game state are the first in the first game state and the second game state. The game medium is configured to be able to enter the ball entry means, and the game medium is configured to be able to enter the second entry means only in a predetermined gaming state, and the second overlapping update means provided in the second counting means, In the second game state, the second game medium information is updated based on the game medium entering the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means. Thereby, in the second gaming state, the game medium is given based on the game medium entering the first ball entry means, and the game medium is given based on the game medium having entered the second ball entry means. Since it is not necessary to distinguish and count the game media to be played, it is not necessary to complicate the control related to the update processing of the game media information given during the second game state, and the control load can be reduced. There is.

In any of gaming machines C2 to C23,
The game medium giving means is
A first entry means (for example, a start winning opening 4) and a second entry means (for example, a specific winning opening 5a) capable of entering a game medium used in the game,
The first entry means is configured to allow entry of game media in the first game state and the second game state,
The second entry means is configured to allow entry of a game medium only in a predetermined game state (for example, a big hit state),
The second counting means includes a second single update means for updating the second game medium information based on a game medium entering the second ball entry means in the second game state,
The first counting means includes a first single update means for updating the first game medium information based on a game medium entering the first ball entry means in the second game state. A gaming machine C25 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine C25, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C2 to C23, the following effects are produced. In other words, the first medium entry means and the second ball entry means provided in the game medium provision means are configured such that the game medium used for the game can enter, and the first game state and the second game state are the first in the first game state and the second game state. The game medium is configured to be able to enter the entrance means, and the game medium is configured to be able to enter the second entrance means only in a predetermined gaming state, and the second single update means provided in the second counting means In the second game state, the second game medium information is updated based on the game medium entering the second ball entry means, and the second game state is updated by the first single update means provided in the first count means. The first game medium information is updated based on the game medium entering the first ball entry means.

  Since the second game medium information stored in the second counting means cannot be used for the game after the end of the second gaming state, the game value for the player compared to the first game medium information stored in the first counting means. Is low. Further, since the second entry means is configured so that the game medium can enter only in the predetermined game state of the second game state, the second entry means is directly related to the second game state. The ball means is configured to allow the game medium to enter even in the first game state other than the second game state, and is not directly related to the second game state. Therefore, when a game medium enters the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means during the second game state, all the game medium information based on the ball entry is stored in the second counting means. At this time, if the second counting means stores a game medium entry into the first entering means that can occur independently of the second gaming state and should be stored in the first counting means, the player's game It will damage value. Accordingly, the second game medium information is updated based on the game medium that has entered the second entry means by the second single update means provided in the second count means, and the first count means provided in the first count means. The single update means is configured to update the first game medium information based on the game medium that has entered the first entry means. Thereby, even if it is a 2nd game state, when a game medium enters by the 1st entrance means, it can memorize | store as 1st game medium information with a high game value, Therefore A player's game value is obtained. There is an effect that a suitable gaming environment can be constructed without any damage.

In any of gaming machines C2 to C25,
The gaming state changing means is a fixed amount for changing from the second gaming state to the first gaming state when the second gaming medium information stored in the second counting means reaches a predetermined number. A gaming machine C26 characterized by comprising an end means.

  According to the gaming machine C26, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C2 to C25, the following effects are produced. That is, when the second game medium information stored in the second counting unit reaches a predetermined number by the fixed amount ending unit provided in the gaming state changing unit, the first gaming state is changed from the second gaming state. Changed to Accordingly, it is possible to realize a gameability (so-called quantitative system) for ending the second game state when the number of game media provided during the second game state reaches a certain number. In the conventional quantitative system, the game media staff decides the stop by judging the game media possessed by the player based on the estimated amount, but the given game media is managed numerically and managed with accurate numeric judgment By deciding on the stop, the grounds for the stop will be clarified, so the work of the game hall staff will be reduced, and a gaming environment according to the specifications of the game will be provided without causing any doubt to the player There is an effect that can be.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C25,
The gaming machine C27, wherein the gaming state changing means changes the gaming state based on a game result by the game executing means.

  According to the gaming machine C27, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C0 to C25, the following effects are produced. That is, the game state is changed by the game state changing means based on the game result by the game executing means. Thus, the gaming state is changed based on the gaming result, and a new gaming property in which there is a gaming medium whose use is restricted based on the gaming state is created. There is an effect that the playability of the game is born and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

<Group D>
Game medium counting means for counting the number of game media that can be used in the game (for example, a normal time ball counter 213c or a lucky central ball counter 213d)
Game execution means (for example, ball launching unit 66) for playing a game based on the game media counted by the game media counting means;
A game machine provided with a game medium giving means (for example, a specific prize opening 5a) for giving a game medium to a player based on a game result by the game execution means,
The game executing means is a restricting means (for example, unusable area 213e) for restricting the use of the game medium provided by the game medium providing means to a game in another gaming machine and the time available for the game. When,
A gaming machine D0 characterized by comprising:

  According to the gaming machine D0, the number of game media that can be used in the game is counted by the game medium counting means, and the game is executed by the game execution means based on the game media counted by the game medium counting means. Based on the game result by the executing means, the game medium is given to the player by the game medium giving means. Further, the restriction means provided in the game execution means restricts the use of the game medium provided by the game medium providing means to the game in other game machines and the time that can be used for the game. Accordingly, it is possible to create a gaming medium that cannot be used depending on the gaming machine that performs the game and the time that the game is performed. Therefore, by creating a new game where there is a game machine and a game medium whose use is restricted by time, how long the game continues in a game machine that is not restricted and how long it is during a time when use is not restricted There is an effect that the playability of whether to continue the game is born and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Note that “restricting the use of other game machines” means, for example, that the number of game media that can be used is limited when the use of game media is prohibited or the situation where game media can be used is limited. Or a case where the use of a game medium is temporarily reserved. In addition, “restrict the time that can be used” means, for example, when the use of a game medium is prohibited at that time, or when the situation where a game medium can be used at that time is limited, This includes a case where a limit is imposed on the number that can be used, or a case where the use of a game medium is temporarily reserved at that time.

In gaming machine D0,
Gaming state changing means (for example, unlimited flag 213h) for changing the gaming state based on a predetermined opportunity;
The game medium counting means includes individual counting means (for example, a lucky central ball counter 213d) that counts game media given to a player in a specific gaming state,
The gaming machine D0 is characterized in that the limiting means is configured to limit the use of the game medium counted by the individual counting means to the game.

  According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D0, the following effects are achieved. That is, the gaming state is changed by the gaming state changing unit based on a predetermined opportunity, and the gaming media provided to the player in the specific gaming state is counted by the individual counting unit provided in the gaming medium counting unit. Then, the use of the game medium counted by the individual counting means for the game is restricted by the restricting means. Thereby, it is possible to create a gaming machine that cannot be used with respect to the gaming media counted in a specific gaming state, and a time that cannot be used. Therefore, by creating a new game where there is a gaming machine that performs a game and a game medium that cannot be used depending on the time that the game is performed, the gaming machine that is not restricted for use can continue to be used for a long time, and the usage is not restricted. There is an effect that a game characteristic of how long the game is continued in time is born and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine D0 or D1,
The gaming state changing means is
First gaming state changing means for changing from a first gaming state (for example, “normal gaming state”) to a second gaming state (for example, lucky period) based on a first predetermined opportunity;
A second gaming state changing means for changing from the second gaming state to the first gaming state based on a second predetermined opportunity,
The individual counting means includes
First counting means (for example, a normal time ball counter 213c) for storing first game medium information (for example, sharable balls) related to the game medium given to the player by the game medium giving means in the first gaming state; ,
Second counting means (for example, a lucky central ball counter 213d) for storing second game medium information (for example, lucky balls) related to the gaming medium given to the player by the gaming medium giving means in the second gaming state; With
The limiting means is
A gaming machine that has acquired the second gaming state, and stores in the second counting means during the second gaming state when the second gaming state ends on the day of acquiring the second gaming state. A day prohibition means for prohibiting a game based on the second game medium information
In a gaming machine other than the gaming machine that has acquired the second gaming state, another table prohibiting unit that prohibits a game based on the second gaming medium information stored in the second counting unit;
The next day prohibiting means for prohibiting a game based on the second game medium information stored in the second counting means on the day after acquiring the second gaming state after the day after acquiring the second gaming state;
A gaming machine D2 characterized by comprising:

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D0 or D1, the following effects are produced. In other words, the first gaming state changing means provided in the gaming state changing means changes the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the first predetermined trigger, and is provided in the gaming state changing means. The gaming state is changed from the second gaming state to the first gaming state based on the second predetermined opportunity by the second gaming state changing means. In addition, the first counting means provided in the individual counting means counts the first game medium information related to the game medium provided by the game medium providing means in the first gaming state. Further, the second game medium information relating to the game medium given by the game medium giving means in the second gaming state is counted by the second counting means provided in the individual counting means. When the gaming machine has acquired the second gaming state by the prohibition means provided on the day, and the second gaming state is ended on the day of acquiring the second gaming state, A game based on the second game medium information stored in the second counting means during the second game state is prohibited. In addition, the game based on the second game medium information stored in the second counting means is prohibited in a gaming machine other than the gaming machine that has acquired the second gaming state by the other-player prohibiting means provided in the limiting means. The Furthermore, the game based on the second game medium information stored in the second counting means on the day of acquiring the second gaming state after the next day of acquiring the second gaming state by the other next day prohibiting means provided in the limiting means. Is prohibited. As a result, regarding the gaming media individually counted in the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the gaming machine that has acquired the second gaming state, and on the day of acquiring the second gaming state, the second A situation in which the second gaming medium information stored in the second counting means cannot be used during the second gaming state when the gaming state has ended, and other gaming machines other than the gaming machine that has acquired the second gaming state, Alternatively, it is possible to create a situation in which the second game medium information stored in the second counting means cannot be used after the next day after acquiring the second game state. Therefore, a difference can be provided in the game media counted for each gaming state. And since the game can be changed based on this difference, the game machine that has acquired the second game medium information and how to continue the game on the day are created, and the game There is an effect that the interest can be enhanced. The first predetermined opportunity and the second predetermined opportunity may be different from each other, or may be the same opportunity.

In the gaming machine D2,
The game execution means relates to the first game medium information stored in the first counting means, and the first count is also applied to a gaming machine other than the gaming machine to which a gaming medium is given by the gaming medium giving means. A gaming machine D3 configured to be able to execute a game based on the first game medium information stored by the means.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D2, the following effects are produced. In other words, the first game medium information stored in the first counting means by the game executing means is stored by the first counting means in other game machines other than the gaming machine to which the game medium is given by the game medium giving means. A game based on the played first game medium information is configured to be executable. Thereby, with respect to the game media individually counted in the first game state and the second game state, the game media stored in the first counting means can be used in all the gaming machines. Accordingly, the first game medium information stored in the first counting means has a higher game value for the player than the second game medium information stored in the second counting means because there is no restriction on the gaming machines that can be used. Therefore, a difference can be provided in the game media counted for each gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect played by the gaming machine D2 can be made more remarkable.

In the gaming machine D2 or D3,
The game execution means relates to the first game medium information stored in the first counting means, and the game information stored by the first counting means is also stored on and after the next day after the game medium is given by the game medium giving means. A gaming machine D4 configured to be able to execute a game based on the first game medium information.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D2 or D3, the following effects are produced. That is, with respect to the first game medium information stored in the first counting means by the game executing means, the first game medium stored by the first counting means even after the next day when the game medium is given by the game medium giving means. A game based on information is configured to be executable. Thereby, the game medium memorize | stored in a 1st count means can be used at any time regarding the game medium separately counted by the 1st game state and the 2nd game state, respectively. Accordingly, the first game medium information stored in the first counting means has a higher game value for the player than the second game medium information stored in the second counting means, because there is no restriction on the usable time. Therefore, a difference can be provided in the game media counted for each gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect played by the gaming machine D2 can be made more remarkable.

In any of the gaming machines D2 to D4,
A game permission means (for example, a table and a player) that allows the player to execute a game based on a storage medium (for example, a membership card 300) owned by the player being inserted into an external device (for example, the card sand device 70) outside the gaming machine. Date information confirmation processing (S2881)),
Unique information storage means for storing identification information unique to the gaming machine (for example, gaming machine information 212b);
Time information storage means (for example, timer counter 213o) for storing information about time;
When there is a game interruption instruction, the interruption information storage means for storing the identification information stored in the unique information storage means and the time information stored in the time information storage means in the storage medium (For example, clearing process (S2105)),
When there is an instruction to resume the game, it is determined whether or not the identification information stored in the storage medium matches the identification information stored in the unique information storage means, and stored in the storage medium A table and time information determination means (for example, the table and date information confirmation process (S2881)) for determining whether or not the information about time and the information about time stored in the time information storage means have a predetermined relationship. S2872), and
The limiting means determines that the identification information stored in the storage medium and the identification information stored in the unique information storage means do not match, or information relating to time stored in the storage medium and the information A game based on the second game medium information stored in the second counting means is prohibited when it is determined that the information related to the time stored in the time information storage means is not the predetermined relationship. A gaming machine D5.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D2 to D4, the following effects are produced. That is, the game permission means permits the execution of the game based on the fact that the player-owned storage medium is inserted into an external device outside the game machine. The unique information storage means stores identification information unique to the gaming machine, the time information storage means stores information related to time, and the interruption information storage means stores a game interruption instruction in the unique information storage means. The stored identification information and the information regarding the time stored in the time information storage means are stored in the storage medium. In addition, when there is an instruction to restart the game, it is determined whether or not the identification information stored in the storage medium and the identification information stored in the unique information storage means match by the stand and time information determination means, It is determined whether or not the information relating to the time stored in the storage medium and the information relating to the time stored in the time information storage means have a predetermined relationship. Then, when the identification information stored in the storage medium does not match the identification information stored in the unique information storage means by the table and time information determination means, or information relating to the time stored in the storage medium and the information storage means When the information related to the time stored in is not in a predetermined relationship, the limiting means prohibits the game based on the second game medium information stored in the second counting means.

  When the player wishes to interrupt the game during the second gaming state, for example, if the game is interrupted, for example, if the game is interrupted, the second gaming state being executed is terminated, A specification that prohibits the use of the second game medium information stored in the second counting means assigned during the second game state in any gaming machine is conceivable. In the case of this specification, if the player interrupts the game, there is a fear that the second gaming state obtained at the corner may end, and even if he wants to take a rest or a meal break during the second gaming state, There is a possibility that he / she can hesitate to interrupt the game and cannot maintain a comfortable gaming environment. Further, if the user leaves the gaming machine with a toilet break or the like while the storage medium is inserted into the external device, the storage medium may be stolen by another person while the user is away.

  Further, when the player wishes to suspend the game during the second gaming state, the identification information unique to the gaming machine is stored in the storage medium, and the identification information stored in the storage medium and the gaming machine are resumed when the game is resumed. When the identification information matches, the second gaming state is resumed and the game based on the second gaming medium information stored in the second counting means is made possible, thereby creating a comfortable gaming environment for the player. There are game machines that can be used. In such a gaming machine, for example, when a game is played with the same gaming machine across dates, if the gaming machine performing the game is the same, the game is resumed from the gaming situation at the previous game interruption. Thus, for example, if the player is in the second gaming state, as long as a game is played with the same gaming machine, the second gaming state can be continued without ending, and the game field is created by unintentionally giving the second gaming state. There is a risk of suffering a great disadvantage.

  Therefore, when there is a game interruption instruction, identification information unique to the gaming machine is stored in the storage medium, information regarding time is stored, and when a game restart instruction is issued, it is stored in the storage medium. Stored in the second counting means when the identification information matches the identification information of the gaming machine and the information related to the time stored in the storage medium and the information related to the time in the time information storage means have a predetermined relationship. By configuring so that a game based on the second game medium information can be executed, even if the player wishes to take a toilet break or a meal break even in the second game state, even if the game is interrupted, When the game is resumed, a game based on the second game medium information stored in the second counting means can be executed, so that a comfortable game environment can be constructed while preventing the storage medium from being stolen. Furthermore, for example, since it is possible to prevent the second gaming state from being given across dates as a gaming hall, it is possible to prevent the gaming hall from suffering disadvantages while maintaining the gameability of the lucky number system. There is an effect that can be. Note that “when there is an instruction to suspend a game” means, for example, when the player performs a return operation of the storage medium and ejects the storage medium to the outside of the external device, or is provided in the gaming machine or the external device. A case where the progress of the game is stopped by a game stop means (for example, a game stop button with an authentication function) or a case where the operation of the gaming machine is stopped due to a power failure or the like is included. Also, “when there is an instruction to restart the game” means, for example, a case where a storage medium is inserted into the external device so that the game can be executed, or a game restart means provided in the gaming machine or the external device This includes a case where the progress of the game is permitted (for example, a game restart button with an authentication function) or a case where the operation of the gaming machine is resumed due to a power recovery from a power failure. Further, “determining whether or not the information related to the time stored in the storage medium and the information related to the time stored in the time information storage means have a predetermined relationship” means, for example, the date stored in the storage medium The time information stored in the storage medium and the hour / minute information stored in the time information storage means when determining whether or not the information matches the date information stored in the time information storage means The case where it is determined whether or not it is less than a predetermined interval (for example, 2 hours) is exemplified.

In gaming machine D5,
A state storage unit (for example, a clearing process (S2105)) that stores state information related to the second game state in the storage medium when a game interruption instruction is given;
The restricting means matches the identification information stored in the storage medium and the identification information stored in the unique information storage means by the stand and time information determination means when a game restart instruction is given. And the state information stored in the state storage means when the information related to the time stored in the storage medium and the information related to the time stored in the time information storage means are in the predetermined relationship. A gaming machine D6, wherein the second gaming state is resumed based on the above.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D5, the following effects are produced. That is, when there is a game interruption instruction by the state storage means, the state information related to the second game state is stored in the storage medium, and when there is a game restart instruction, it is stored by the table and time information determination means. The identification information stored in the medium matches the identification information stored in the unique information storage means, and information related to the time stored in the storage medium and information related to the time stored in the time information storage means are predetermined. When the relationship is established, the second gaming state is resumed by the limiting unit based on the state information stored in the state storage unit. As a result, the second gaming state can be resumed when the gaming machine is the same when the game is interrupted and when the game is resumed and when the date when the second gaming state is acquired also matches. Even if the player wishes to take a rest or a meal break even in the second gaming state, even if the game is interrupted, the second gaming state can be resumed when the game resumes, thus preventing storage media theft However, a comfortable gaming environment can be constructed. Also, for example, when the state information related to the second gaming state is stored in the game place management means (for example, the hall computer 263), an abnormality occurs in the state information stored in the management means due to the influence of a power failure or the like. There is a risk that the gaming value that should be originally obtained may disappear. Therefore, by storing the state information related to the second gaming state in the storage medium possessed by the player, it is possible to manage the gaming value obtained at the player's own responsibility, so even if a power outage or the like occurs There is an effect that it is possible to construct a suitable gaming environment without detracting from the gaming value of the player.

In gaming machine D6,
The restriction means determines that the identification information stored in the storage medium does not match the identification information stored in the unique information storage means by the platform and time information determination means, or the storage medium A state limiting means for preventing the second gaming state from being resumed when it is determined that the information relating to the time stored in the time and the information relating to the time stored in the time information storage means are not in the predetermined relationship. A gaming machine D7 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D6, the following effects are produced. That is, when the game is resumed, the information related to the time stored in the storage medium or the identification information stored in the storage medium does not match the identification information stored in the storage medium and the identification information stored in the specific information storage means. When the time information stored in the time information storage means is not in a predetermined relationship, the state restriction means provided in the restriction means is configured not to resume the second gaming state. Thereby, when the gaming machine which acquired the second gaming state is different from the gaming machine which is going to play the current game, or when the date which acquired the second gaming state is different from the date which is going to play the current gaming Thus, the second gaming state can be prevented from being resumed in the gaming machine that is about to play a new game. Therefore, the gaming situation of the gaming machine that was playing last time is not reflected in other different gaming machines, and a new game can be played. There is an effect that as long as the playability can be maintained.

In gaming machine D7,
The state limiting means determines that the identification information stored in the storage medium does not match the identification information stored in the unique information storage means by the stand and time information determination means, or the storage Deleting the state information stored in the state storage means when it is determined that the information related to the time stored in the medium and the information related to the time stored in the time information storage means are not in the predetermined relationship; A gaming machine D8 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D7, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the game is resumed, the information related to the time stored in the storage medium or the identification information stored in the storage medium does not match the identification information stored in the storage medium and the identification information stored in the specific information storage means. State information stored in the state storage means is deleted by the state restriction means when the time information stored in the time information storage means is not in a predetermined relationship. Thereby, when the gaming machine which acquired the second gaming state is different from the gaming machine which is going to play the current game, or when the date which acquired the second gaming state is different from the date which is going to play the current gaming The gaming machine that is about to play a new game can be configured not to resume the second gaming state. Therefore, since the data related to the gaming status of the gaming machine that was playing the previous game is deleted, the grounds for reflecting the status of the gaming machine that was playing the previous game to other different gaming machines and games of the next day, etc. shall be extinguished. Thus, since a new game can be performed without restarting the game, the effect of the gaming machine D6 can be made more remarkable.

In any of the gaming machines D5 to D8,
A power interruption holding means (for example, main processing (FIG. 23)) capable of storing and holding the game state at the time of power interruption
Recovery means (for example, start-up processing (FIG. 22)) for recovering the gaming state stored and held by the power interruption holding means by satisfying a recovery condition at power-on;
A time counter (RTC 220) for measuring the current time;
Time holding means (for example, S2053 of start-up processing (see FIG. 46)) for storing information related to the time before the power-off in the time information storage means;
A time comparison unit that compares the information related to the time stored in the time information storage unit by the time holding unit and the current time measured by the time counting unit at the time of recovery by the recovery unit;
The gaming state changing means, when the comparison result between the information relating to the time stored in the time information storage means and the current time measured by the time counting means becomes a predetermined result by the time comparison means, A gaming machine D9 configured to change from the second gaming state to the first gaming state after restoring the gaming state by a recovery means.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines D5 to D8, the following effects are achieved. That is, the game state at the time of power-off is stored and held by the power-off holding means, and the game state stored and held in the power-time holding means is restored by satisfying the restoration condition when the power is turned on by the restoration means. In addition, the current time is measured by the time measuring means, and the information related to the time before the power-off is stored in the time information storing means by the time holding means. Further, the time comparison means compares the time information stored in the time information storage means by the time holding means with the current time measured by the time counting means at the time of recovery by the recovery means. Then, when the comparison result between the time information stored in the time information storage unit by the time comparison unit and the current time measured by the time counting unit is a predetermined result, the game state is restored by the restoration unit. The game state changing means changes the game state from the second game state to the first game state.

  In a gaming machine having a so-called backup function, if the game state is in the second gaming state when the power is turned off, there is a possibility that the second gaming state is restarted without omission by satisfying the recovery condition when the power is turned on. In such a case, the game hall stores the game machine that was in the second gaming state when the current day's business was terminated in order to prevent the second gaming state from being resumed at the start of the next day's business. The means for initializing the means had to be performed, and the work burden on the staff at the game hall was increasing.

  Therefore, when the power supply is restored, the time comparison unit compares the information related to the time stored in the time information storage unit before the power interruption and the current time measured by the time counting unit into a predetermined result. Since the game state changing means is configured to change the game state from the second game state to the first game state, the second game state can be automatically terminated, thereby reducing the work load of the game hall staff. can do. Note that “before power-off” may be any time from when the gaming machine is turned on until the gaming machine is turned off. It may be a timer interruption process during a normal game or a power interruption process when the power is turned off. Further, “the result of comparison between the time information stored in the time information storage unit by the time comparison unit and the current time measured by the time counting unit is a predetermined result” is stored in the time information storage unit, for example. The time information and the current time measured by the time measuring means are determined to be different from each other, the time information stored in the time information storage means, and the current time measured by the time measuring means. The result of determining that the time difference is different by 5 hours or more is exemplified.

In any of the gaming machines D2 to D9,
The game execution means includes
Storage means for storing game media (for example, supply passage 65);
Launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 66) for launching the game medium supplied from the storage means;
A collecting means (for example, a collecting passage 41a) for collecting the game medium launched by the emitting means;
A sending means (for example, a discharge passage 42a) for sending the game medium collected by the collecting means to the storing means;
A gaming machine D10 which plays a game while circulating a predetermined game medium in the machine.

  According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D2 to D9, the following effects are produced. That is, the game medium is stored by the storage means provided in the game execution means, the game medium supplied from the storage means is launched by the launch means, the game medium launched by the launch means is collected by the collection means, The game medium collected by the collecting means is sent to the storing means by the sending means, so that a game is played while circulating a predetermined game medium in the machine. As a result, a system that digitizes and manages game media, which is a characteristic function of an in-flight circulation game machine (so-called enclosed game machine), is effectively used to determine whether or not the game media can be used based on the game state. There is an effect that a game specification (so-called lucky number system) can be added.

  In more detail, conventionally, in a game hall that employs a lucky number game specification, the staff of the game hall sequentially confirms the start condition of the second game state, and based on the establishment of the start condition, the upper part of the gaming machine In the second gaming state, whether or not the condition for changing from the second gaming state to the first gaming state has been achieved is monitored. It is necessary to perform an operation to end the second gaming state, or to prompt the player to exchange the assigned game medium when the second gaming state ends.

  When the above-mentioned work is performed by a staff at a game hall, work related to the above game specifications is added in addition to normal work such as abnormality check and cleaning of the gaming machine, so there is a risk that the staff will be burdened with a large work load. is there. On the other hand, even if the number of staff is increased to cope with the above-mentioned game specifications, personnel costs for the increased staff increase, and there is a risk that the management of the amusement hall may be tightened. Therefore, even in an environment where the game specifications that can improve the gameability of the lucky number system can be realized, the game hall does not adopt the lucky number system in consideration of the above-mentioned fears, and is in a normal business form. As a result, the gameability was not improved.

  Therefore, by utilizing the functions of the in-flight circulation type gaming machine, the given game media are digitized and managed, and the game media given based on the game status are individually managed and can be used based on the game status By determining the medium, even if the above game specifications are adopted, the management of the amusement hall is sound without reducing the labor costs without placing a heavy work burden on the amusement hall staff and increasing the number of staff. This is advantageous in that various games can be realized while maintaining the conventional environment.

In the gaming machine D10,
The firing means includes
The gaming machine that has acquired the second gaming state and the date on which the second gaming state has been acquired, and in the second gaming state, the first game medium information is stored in the first counting means. Or when the game medium provided by the game medium providing means during the second gaming state is stored as the second game medium information in the second counting means. Permission to launch the game medium supplied from the storage means based on the information or the second game medium information,
When the first game medium information is stored in the first counting means after the gaming machine other than the gaming machine that has acquired the second gaming state, or the day after the second gaming state is acquired, While permitting the launch of game media supplied from the storage means based on 1 game media information,
In the gaming machine that has acquired the second gaming state, when the second gaming state ends, a game medium based on the second gaming medium information stored in the second counting means during the second gaming state Banning fire,
In a gaming machine other than the gaming machine that has acquired the second gaming state, the gaming medium is released based on the second gaming medium information stored in the second counting means in the gaming machine that has acquired the second gaming state. Ban
Further, when the second gaming state is completed on the day when the second gaming state is acquired, the gaming medium based on the second gaming medium information stored in the second counting means during the second gaming state Is prohibited from firing,
On the day after the second gaming state is acquired, the game medium is prohibited from being launched based on the second gaming medium information stored in the second counting means on the day when the second gaming state is acquired. A gaming machine D11 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D10, the following effects are achieved. That is, when it is the second gaming state and the acquired gaming machine, and the second gaming state is acquired, and the first gaming medium information is stored in the first counting means in the second gaming state. Or the game medium supplied from the storage means by the launching means when the game medium given by the game medium giving means during the second gaming state is stored as the second game medium information in the second counting means Is allowed to fire. In addition, when the first gaming medium information stored in the first counting means is stored in another gaming machine other than the gaming machine that has acquired the second gaming state, or the day after the second gaming state is acquired. In addition, the launch of the game medium supplied from the storage means by the launching means is permitted based on the first game medium information. In addition, in the gaming machine that has acquired the second gaming state, when the second gaming state ends, the game medium is released based on the second gaming medium information stored in the second counting means during the second gaming state. Is prohibited. Furthermore, in other gaming machines other than the gaming machine that has acquired the second gaming state, the gaming machine is released based on the second gaming medium information stored in the second counting means in the gaming machine that has acquired the second gaming state. It is forbidden. In addition, when the second gaming state ends on the day when the second gaming state is acquired, the game medium is released based on the second gaming medium information stored in the second counting means during the second gaming state. It is forbidden. Further, on the day after the second gaming state is acquired, the release of gaming media based on the second gaming medium information stored in the second counting means is prohibited on the day when the second gaming state is acquired. Accordingly, whether or not the second gaming medium information stored in the second counting means can be used is determined based on whether the gaming machine has acquired the second gaming state and whether or not the second gaming state has been acquired on the same day. Therefore, the second gaming medium information stored in the second counting means is not used on the gaming machine that has not acquired the second gaming state or the day that the second gaming state has not been acquired (for example, the next day). There is an effect that it is possible to maintain the gaming characteristics of the gaming specifications for one person, one machine, and the day. Note that, for example, after the gaming state is changed from the previous second gaming state to the first gaming state based on the establishment of the second condition, the first condition is established and the next second gaming is performed from the first gaming state. When the state is changed to the state, the launching unit permits the launch of the game medium based on the first game medium information stored in the first counting unit in the next second gaming state, You may comprise so that discharge | release of a game medium may be permitted based on the 2nd game medium information memorize | stored in a 2nd count means in a 2nd game state.

In the gaming machine D11,
The first gaming state changing means changes from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on establishment of a first condition (for example, start of jackpot),
The second gaming state changing means changes from the second gaming state to the first gaming state based on establishment of a second condition (for example, completion of the “time reduction state”),
The firing means includes
The gaming machine that has acquired the second gaming state and the date on which the second gaming state has been acquired, and in the second gaming state, the first game medium information is stored in the first counting means. Or when the game medium provided by the game medium providing means during the second gaming state is stored as the second game medium information in the second counting means. Permission to launch the game medium supplied from the storage means based on the information or the second game medium information,
When the first game medium information is stored in the first counting means after the gaming machine other than the gaming machine that has acquired the second gaming state, or the day after the second gaming state is acquired, While permitting the launch of game media supplied from the storage means based on 1 game media information,
In the gaming machine that has acquired the second gaming state, when the second gaming state ends, the second gaming medium information stored in the second counting means during the second gaming state in the subsequent game Prohibit the launch of game media based on
In a gaming machine other than the gaming machine that has acquired the second gaming state, the gaming medium is released based on the second gaming medium information stored in the second counting means in the gaming machine that has acquired the second gaming state. Ban
Further, when the second gaming state is completed on the day when the second gaming state is acquired, the gaming medium based on the second gaming medium information stored in the second counting means during the second gaming state Is prohibited from firing,
On the day after the second gaming state is acquired, the game medium is prohibited from being launched based on the second gaming medium information stored in the second counting means on the day when the second gaming state is acquired. A gaming machine D12 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D11, the following effects are produced. That is, the first gaming state changing means changes the first gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the establishment of the first condition, and the second gaming state changing means changes the second game based on the establishment of the second condition. The state is changed to the first gaming state. Further, when the second gaming state is the acquired gaming machine and the second gaming state is acquired, and the first gaming medium information is stored in the first counting means in the second gaming state. Or the game medium supplied from the storage means by the launching means when the game medium given by the game medium giving means during the second gaming state is stored as the second game medium information in the second counting means Is allowed to fire. In addition, when the first gaming medium information stored in the first counting means is stored in another gaming machine other than the gaming machine that has acquired the second gaming state, or the day after the second gaming state is acquired. In addition, the launch of the game medium supplied from the storage means by the launching means is permitted based on the first game medium information. In addition, in the gaming machine that has acquired the second gaming state, when the second gaming state ends, the game medium is released based on the second gaming medium information stored in the second counting means during the second gaming state. Is prohibited. Furthermore, in other gaming machines other than the gaming machine that has acquired the second gaming state, the gaming machine is released based on the second gaming medium information stored in the second counting means in the gaming machine that has acquired the second gaming state. It is forbidden. In addition, when the second gaming state ends on the day when the second gaming state is acquired, the game medium is released based on the second gaming medium information stored in the second counting means during the second gaming state. It is forbidden. Further, on the day after the second gaming state is acquired, the release of gaming media based on the second gaming medium information stored in the second counting means is prohibited on the day when the second gaming state is acquired. Accordingly, whether or not the second gaming medium information stored in the second counting means can be used is determined based on whether the gaming machine has acquired the second gaming state and whether or not the second gaming state has been acquired on the same day. Therefore, the second gaming medium information stored in the second counting means is not used on the gaming machine that has not acquired the second gaming state or the day that the second gaming state has not been acquired (for example, the next day). There is an effect that it is possible to maintain the gaming characteristics of the gaming specifications for one person, one machine, and the day.

In any of the gaming machines D10 to D12,
In the second gaming state, when the second game medium information is stored in the second counting unit, the launching unit is configured to determine the first game medium information stored in the first counting unit based on the first game medium information. A gaming machine D13, wherein the second gaming medium information stored in the second counting means is preferentially used to execute the launching of the gaming medium.

  According to the gaming machine D13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D10 to D12, the following effects are produced. That is, in the second gaming state, when the second game medium information is stored in the second counting means, the launching means causes the first counting medium information stored in the first counting means to be transferred to the second counting means. The game medium is launched using the stored second game medium information preferentially. Thereby, the first game medium information stored in the first counting means has a game value for the player from the second game medium information stored in the second counting means, because there is no restriction on the usable game state. In the second gaming state, the second gaming medium information having a gaming value lower than that of the first gaming medium information can be consumed first, so that the gaming value possessed by the player can be protected without being unnecessarily damaged. There is an effect that.

In any of the gaming machines D2 to D13,
The game medium counting means stores the number of pieces of game medium information based on the rental request as the first game medium information in the first counting means when there is a game medium rental request from a player. Characteristic gaming machine D14.

  According to the gaming machine D14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D2 to D13, the following effects are produced. That is, when there is a game medium rental request from the player, the game medium counting means stores the number of game medium information based on the rental request as first game medium information in the first counting means. Thereby, since the first game medium information is not limited by the game state, there is an effect that the rented game medium can be used in any game state without being restricted in use.

  In addition, the gaming characteristics of the above game specifications are likely to produce a more remarkable effect because the rental rate of the game media is different from the prize conversion rate at the game hall window. Specifically, for example, when there is a prize conversion gap such as “lending rate> prize conversion rate”, a prize is exchanged for one game medium in a game with a rented game medium and a game with a given game medium. There will be a difference in game value equivalent to the gap. In such a situation, the player is given a way to play a game using the rented game medium, and continuously playing the game medium using the game medium provided for the game leads to his own benefit. Whether or not the game based on the game medium is continuously performed is a factor that divides the game. In a game hall with such a prize conversion gap, it is possible to acquire the second game state by adopting the above-mentioned game specifications, and whether or not the game can be continuously played with the game medium provided during that time. There is an effect that the effect of the specification can be made remarkable and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines D2 to D14,
Medium information notifying means (for example, status display) capable of notifying the contents of the first game medium information stored in the first counting means and the contents of the second game medium information stored in the second counting means. A gaming machine D15 comprising a device 85).

  According to the gaming machine D15, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D2 to D14, the following effects are produced. That is, the contents of the first game medium information stored in the first counting means and the contents of the second game medium information stored in the second counting means can be notified by the medium information notifying means. Accordingly, the first game medium information stored in the first counting means usable in the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and the second gaming means stored in the second counting means usable only in the second gaming state. 2 game media information can be recognized by the player, for example, how much game media is given during the second game state, or when the game state is changed from the second game state to the first game state In addition, there is an effect that it is possible to clearly recognize how long the game can be continued based on the game medium information stored in the first counting means in the first game state.

In any of the gaming machines D12 to D15,
The first condition is:
A predetermined first condition established by the predetermined condition (for example, a big hit with an even number of “first time”), and
A special first condition that is difficult to be established from the predetermined first condition (e.g., a big hit with "3 symbols (turtle)" of "first time"),
The second gaming state includes a special second gaming state (for example, a “lucky” state) and a disadvantageous second gaming state (for example, a “start” state) that is more disadvantageous for the player than the special second gaming state. Prepared,
The first gaming state changing means includes
First disadvantage changing means for changing to the disadvantage second gaming state based on establishment of the predetermined first condition;
First special changing means for changing to the special second gaming state based on establishment of the special first condition;
A gaming machine D16 characterized by comprising:

  According to the gaming machine D16, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D12 to D15, the following effects are produced. That is, the first disadvantageous change means provided in the first gaming state change means changes to the disadvantageous second gaming state based on the establishment of the predetermined first condition. Further, the first special change means provided in the first game state change means is changed to the special second game state based on the establishment of the special first condition. Thereby, regarding the second gaming state, it is possible to provide a special second gaming state that is difficult to start and a disadvantageous second gaming state that is likely to be started. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be enhanced by the game nature.

  The gaming machine D16 includes second gaming state type notifying means (for example, a lucky movable accessory 96 and a start movable accessory 97) for notifying the special second gaming state and the disadvantageous second gaming state in an identifiable manner. A gaming machine D17 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine D17, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D16, the following effects are produced. That is, the second gaming state type notifying means notifies the special second gaming state and the disadvantageous second gaming state in an identifiable manner. As a result, it is possible to clearly recognize whether the game is in the special second gaming state or the disadvantaged second gaming state, and performing the game while being aware of the change condition to the first gaming state that is different for each second gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the entertainment in each second gaming state can be fully enjoyed. In addition, “notifying in an identifiable manner” means, for example, arranging a plurality of indication objects (for example, movable accessories) provided for each second gaming state so that the player can visually recognize them, When the second gaming state is started, informing the player by making the player visible in accordance with the type of the second gaming state, or for each second gaming state in one display means The case where the displayed display mode is displayed and notified is included.

In the gaming machine D16 or D17,
The second condition is:
A prescribed second condition established by the prescribed condition (end of "time reduction state");
A special second condition (for example, a big hit with “4 symbols (shark)” of “first time”) that is difficult to be established from the prescribed second condition,
The second gaming state changing means is
Second disadvantageous change means for ending the disadvantageous second gaming state based on establishment of the prescribed second condition;
Second special changing means for ending the special second gaming state based on establishment of the special second condition;
A gaming machine D18, comprising:

  According to the gaming machine D18, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D16 or D17, the following effects are produced. That is, the disadvantageous second gaming state is terminated based on the establishment of the prescribed second condition by the second disadvantageous change means provided in the second gaming state changing means. Further, the second special change means provided in the second game state change means ends the special second game state based on the establishment of the special second condition. Thereby, regarding the second gaming state, it is possible to provide a special second state that is difficult to start and difficult to finish, and a disadvantageous second gaming state that is easy to start and difficult to finish, and each start condition and end By creating a gaming state with different conditions, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be enhanced by various gaming characteristics. In addition, by providing a plurality of types of second gaming state, the period in which the second gaming medium information counted separately from the first gaming medium information acquired in the first gaming state can be varied, There is an effect that the fun of the game can be enhanced by various game characteristics.

In the gaming machine D18,
The second disadvantage changing means changes the disadvantage second gaming state to the first gaming state based on the establishment of the prescribed second condition,
The gaming machine D19, wherein the second special changing means changes the special second gaming state to the disadvantageous second gaming state based on the establishment of the special second condition.

  According to the gaming machine D19, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D18, the following effects are produced. That is, the second disadvantageous changing means changes the disadvantageous second gaming state to the first gaming state based on the establishment of the prescribed second condition, and the second special changing means changes the special second condition based on the establishment of the special second condition. The two gaming state is changed to the disadvantageous second gaming state. As a result, regarding the second gaming state, even if it is difficult to start and finishes, it is disadvantageous that the special second state ends via the second gaming state, and the disadvantage is that the first gaming state is immediately changed when it is easily started. Such as a disadvantageous second gaming state can be provided, and by creating a gaming state having different start conditions and ending conditions, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be enhanced by various game characteristics. In addition, by providing a plurality of types of second gaming state, the period in which the second gaming medium information counted separately from the first gaming medium information acquired in the first gaming state can be varied, There is an effect that the fun of the game can be enhanced by various game characteristics.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D19,
A gaming machine D20, comprising: condition notifying means (situation display device 85) for notifying the game state changing condition by the gaming state changing means.

  According to the gaming machine D20, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D1 to D19, the following effects are produced. That is, the condition notification means notifies the game state change condition by the game state change means. This allows the player to recognize the condition for changing the game state. For example, when the game by the second counting means is prohibited when the game state is changed from the second game state to the first game state. However, by recognizing the conditions in advance, there is an effect that it is possible to construct a comfortable gaming environment without giving the player unnecessary confusion regarding the game specifications.

In gaming machine D20,
The gaming machine D21 is characterized in that the condition notifying means is constituted by an electric display means capable of electrically changing display contents.

  According to the gaming machine D21, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D20, the following effects are achieved. That is, the condition notifying means is constituted by an electric display means capable of electrically changing display contents. As a result, the contents can be changed and displayed in accordance with the condition for changing the game state, so that the player can appropriately recognize the condition for changing the game state with a simple configuration. is there.

In any of the gaming machines D15 to D21,
The notification by the medium information notification means and the notification by the condition notification means are displayed on one status display means (the lucky number display area 85b and the value information display area 85c of the status display device 85). D22.

  According to the gaming machine D22, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D15 to D21, the following effects are produced. That is, the notification by the medium information notification unit and the notification by the condition notification unit are displayed by one status display unit. That is, the first game medium information and the second game medium information and the game state change condition by the game state change means are displayed on one status display means. Thus, the player can recognize the number of game media owned by the player and the conditions for changing to the second game state by the status display means, so that the extra cost is eliminated without using other devices. There is an effect that the player can recognize the gameability and the game situation of the lucky number system without spending.

In gaming machine D22,
The gaming machine D23, wherein the status display means simultaneously performs notification by the medium information notification means and notification by the condition notification means.

  According to the gaming machine D23, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D22, the following effects are produced. That is, the notification by the medium information notification unit and the notification by the condition notification unit are simultaneously executed by one status display unit. That is, the first game medium information and the second game medium information and the game state change condition by the game state change means are simultaneously displayed on one status display means. Thus, the player can recognize the number of game media owned by the player and the conditions for changing to the second game state by looking at the notification content of the status display means. There is an effect that the player can uniquely recognize the sex.

In the gaming machine D22 or D23,
The gaming machine is composed of a gaming board (for example, gaming board 13) and a frame member (for example, an overhanging portion 16) to which the gaming board is replaceably attached.
The gaming machine D24, wherein the status display means is provided on the frame member.

  According to the gaming machine D24, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D22 or D23, the following effects are produced. In other words, the status display means is provided on a frame member to which the game board is replaceably attached. Accordingly, even when the game board is replaced, the status display means can be used continuously with the frame member being provided, and it is not necessary to provide the status display means on the game board to be replaced. There is an effect that the cost of the entire game board can be reduced as compared with the case where is installed.

In any of the gaming machines D2 to D24,
The game medium giving means is
A first entry means (for example, a start winning opening 4) and a second entry means (for example, a specific winning opening 5a) capable of entering a game medium used in the game,
The first entry means is configured to allow entry of game media in the first game state and the second game state,
The second entry means is configured to allow entry of a game medium only in a predetermined game state (for example, a big hit state),
In the second gaming state, the second counting means updates the second game medium information based on the game medium entering the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means. A gaming machine D25 comprising an updating means.

  According to the gaming machine D25, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D2 to D24, the following effects are produced. In other words, the first medium entry means and the second ball entry means provided in the game medium provision means are configured such that the game medium used for the game can enter, and the first game state and the second game state are the first in the first game state and the second game state. The game medium can be entered into the ball entry means, and the game medium can be entered into the second ball entry means only in a predetermined game state. In the second game state, the second game medium information is updated based on the game medium entering the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means. Thereby, in the second gaming state, the game medium is given based on the game medium entering the first ball entry means, and the game medium is given based on the game medium having entered the second ball entry means. Since it is not necessary to distinguish and count the game media to be played, it is not necessary to complicate the control related to the update processing of the game media information given during the second game state, and the control load can be reduced. There is.

In any of the gaming machines D2 to D24,
The game medium giving means is
A first entry means (for example, a start winning opening 4) and a second entry means (for example, a specific winning opening 5a) capable of entering a game medium used in the game,
The first entry means is configured to allow entry of game media in the first game state and the second game state,
The second entry means is configured to allow entry of a game medium only in a predetermined game state (for example, a big hit state),
The second counting means includes a second single update means for updating the second game medium information based on a game medium entering the second ball entry means in the second game state,
The first counting means includes a first single update means for updating the first game medium information based on a game medium entering the first ball entry means in the second game state. A gaming machine D26 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine D26, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D2 to D24, the following effects are produced. In other words, the first medium entry means and the second ball entry means provided in the game medium provision means are configured such that the game medium used for the game can enter, and the first game state and the second game state are the first in the first game state and the second game state. The game medium is configured to be able to enter the entrance means, and the game medium is configured to be able to enter the second entrance means only in a predetermined gaming state, and the second single update means provided in the second counting means In the second game state, the second game medium information is updated based on the game medium entering the second ball entry means, and the second game state is updated by the first single update means provided in the first count means. The first game medium information is updated based on the game medium entering the first ball entry means.

  Since the second game medium information stored in the second counting means cannot be used for the game after the end of the second gaming state, the game value for the player compared to the first game medium information stored in the first counting means. Is low. Further, since the second entry means is configured so that the game medium can enter only in the predetermined game state of the second game state, the second entry means is directly related to the second game state. The ball means is configured to allow the game medium to enter even in the first game state other than the second game state, and is not directly related to the second game state. Therefore, when a game medium enters the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means during the second game state, all the game medium information based on the ball entry is stored in the second counting means. At this time, if the second counting means stores a game medium entry into the first entering means that can occur independently of the second gaming state and should be stored in the first counting means, the player's game It will damage value. Accordingly, the second game medium information is updated based on the game medium that has entered the second entry means by the second single update means provided in the second count means, and the first count means provided in the first count means. The single update means is configured to update the first game medium information based on the game medium that has entered the first entry means. Thereby, even if it is a 2nd game state, when a game medium enters by the 1st entrance means, it can memorize | store as 1st game medium information with a high game value, Therefore A player's game value is obtained. There is an effect that a suitable gaming environment can be constructed without any damage.

In any of the gaming machines D2 to D26,
The gaming state changing means is a fixed amount for changing from the second gaming state to the first gaming state when the second gaming medium information stored in the second counting means reaches a predetermined number. A gaming machine D27 comprising an end means.

  According to the gaming machine D27, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D2 to D26, the following effects are produced. That is, when the second game medium information stored in the second counting unit reaches a predetermined number by the fixed amount ending unit provided in the gaming state changing unit, the first gaming state is changed from the second gaming state. Changed to Accordingly, it is possible to realize a gameability (so-called quantitative system) for ending the second game state when the number of game media provided during the second game state reaches a certain number. In the conventional quantitative system, the game media staff decides the stop by judging the game media possessed by the player based on the estimated amount, but the given game media is managed numerically and managed with accurate numeric judgment By deciding on the stop, the grounds for the stop will be clarified, so the work of the game hall staff will be reduced, and a gaming environment according to the specifications of the game will be provided without causing any doubt to the player There is an effect that can be.

In any of the gaming machines D0 to D26,
The gaming machine D28, wherein the gaming state changing means changes the gaming state based on a game result by the game executing means.

  According to the gaming machine D28, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D0 to D26, the following effects are produced. That is, the game state is changed by the game state changing means based on the game result by the game executing means. Thus, the gaming state is changed based on the gaming result, and a new gaming property in which there is a gaming medium whose use is restricted based on the gaming state is created. There is an effect that the playability of the game is born and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

<Group E>
A game medium counting means (for example, a normal time ball counter 213c or a lucky central ball counter 213d) for counting the number of game media usable in the game;
Game execution means (for example, ball launching unit 66) for playing a game based on the game media counted by the game media counting means;
A game medium giving means (for example, a specific prize opening 5a) for giving a game medium to a player based on a game result by the game execution means;
A gaming machine comprising gaming state changing means (for example, unlimited flag 213h) for changing the gaming state based on a predetermined opportunity,
The game execution means includes
Based on the change of the game state by the game state change means, the use restriction means (for example, unusable area 213e) for restricting the use of the game medium granted to the player by the game medium grant means to the game,
The gaming state changing means is
A gaming machine E0 comprising condition setting means (for example, a condition setting switch 280) capable of setting a game state changing condition by the gaming state changing means.

  According to the gaming machine E0, the number of game media that can be used for the game is counted by the game medium counting means, and the game is executed by the game execution means based on the game media counted by the game medium counting means. A game medium is given to the player by the game medium giving means based on the game result by the executing means, and the game state is changed by the game state changing means based on a predetermined opportunity. Then, the use restriction means provided in the game execution means restricts the use of the game medium given to the player by the game medium giving means to the game based on the change of the game state by the game state change means. In addition, the condition setting means provided in the gaming state changing means is configured to be able to set the game state changing condition by the gaming state changing means. As a result, by creating a new gameability in which there is a game medium whose use is restricted based on the game state, it is possible to create a game that determines how long a game state that is not restricted to be used will continue, and the use of the game medium. Since it is possible to set a change condition to the gaming state where the restriction occurs, for example, by setting the change condition to the gaming state where the use restriction of the game medium is generated based on the intention of the gaming place, There is an effect that a certain playability can be realized. “Restricting the use of game media” means, for example, limiting the number of game media that can be used when prohibiting the use of game media or restricting the conditions in which game media can be used. Or a case where the use of the game medium is temporarily reserved.

In the gaming machine E0,
The gaming state changing means is
First gaming state changing means for changing from a first gaming state (for example, “normal gaming state”) to a second gaming state (for example, lucky period) based on a first predetermined opportunity;
A second gaming state changing means for changing from the second gaming state to the first gaming state based on a second predetermined opportunity,
The game medium counting means includes
First counting means (for example, a normal time ball counter 213c) for storing first game medium information (for example, sharable balls) related to the game medium given to the player by the game medium giving means in the first gaming state; ,
Second counting means (for example, a lucky central ball counter 213d) for storing second game medium information (for example, lucky balls) related to the gaming medium given to the player by the gaming medium giving means in the second gaming state; With
The use restriction means is configured to prohibit a game based on the second game medium information stored in the second counting means in the first gaming state,
The condition setting means sets a changing condition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state or a changing condition from the second gaming state to the first gaming state by the gaming state changing means. A featured gaming machine E1.

  According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E0, the following effects are produced. That is, the first gaming state changing means provided in the gaming state changing means changes the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the first predetermined opportunity, and the gaming state changing means is provided. The gaming state is changed from the second gaming state to the first gaming state based on the second predetermined opportunity by the second gaming state changing means. Further, the first counting means provided in the gaming medium counting means counts the first game medium information related to the granted game medium to the player by the game medium giving means in the first gaming state. Further, the second counting means provided in the gaming medium counting means counts the second gaming medium information related to the gaming medium given to the player by the gaming medium giving means in the second gaming state. Furthermore, the game based on the second game medium information stored in the second counting means in the first gaming state is prohibited by the use restricting means. Further, the condition setting means sets a change condition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state or a changing condition from the second gaming state to the first gaming state by the gaming state changing means. Thereby, regarding the game media individually counted in the first game state and the second game state, it is possible to create a situation that cannot be used in the second game medium information stored in the second counting means in the first game state. In addition, it is possible to set a condition for changing to the second gaming state in which the second game medium information can be acquired, and a condition for changing to the first gaming state in which the second game medium information cannot be used. Therefore, by configuring the situation in which the use of the game media counted for each gaming state is restricted, it becomes possible to create a variety of gaming characteristics according to the setting contents, and based on the intention of the game hall Thus, there is an effect that a characteristic game characteristic can be adopted for each game hall. The first predetermined opportunity and the second predetermined opportunity may be different from each other, or may be the same opportunity.

In the gaming machine E0 or E1,
The gaming machine is
A main body frame (for example, inner frame 12) on which game parts are mounted;
A front frame (for example, door frame 14) covering the front side of the main body frame;
A collar (for example, locking device 20) that locks the front frame and the main body frame,
The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the condition setting means is disposed at a position where the condition setting means can be operated when the heel portion is unlocked.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E0 or E1, the following effects are produced. That is, the gaming machine is provided with a main body frame on which gaming parts are mounted, a front frame that covers the front side of the main body frame, and a hook part that locks the front frame and the main body frame, and the hook part is unlocked The condition setting means is arranged at a position where it can be operated. This prevents the player from making any changes to the gaming state by configuring the condition setting means so that only the staff of the game hall who owns the key to unlock the buttocks can operate the condition setting means. Can be. Therefore, by preventing the player from changing the game state, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a disadvantage associated with a change in the game state that is not intended by the game hall.

In gaming machine E2,
The main body frame includes control means (for example, the frame overall control device 111) for performing main control of the game,
The game machine E3, wherein the condition setting means is mounted on the control means.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2, the following effects are produced. That is, the main body frame is provided with control means for controlling the game, and the condition setting means is mounted on the control means. Thereby, there is an effect that it is easy to reflect the setting contents in the control by determining the setting contents of the condition setting means by the control means for controlling the game. In addition, the control means for performing the main control is usually provided with fraud countermeasures that cannot be operated by anyone other than those related to the game hall. By installing the condition setting means in the control means, it is illegally set by the player. There is an effect that the contents can be prevented from being changed.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3,
The game execution means includes
Storage means for storing game media (for example, supply passage 65);
Launching means for launching the game medium supplied from the storage means (for example, the ball launching unit 66);
A collecting means (for example, a collecting passage 41a) for collecting the game medium launched by the emitting means;
A sending means (for example, a discharge passage 42a) for sending the game medium collected by the collecting means to the storing means,
A gaming machine E4, which plays a game while circulating a predetermined game medium in the machine.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E0 to E3, the following effects are produced. That is, the game medium is stored by the storage means provided in the game execution means, the game medium supplied from the storage means is launched by the launch means, the game medium launched by the launch means is collected by the collection means, The game medium collected by the collecting means is sent to the storing means by the sending means, so that a game is played while circulating a predetermined game medium in the machine. As a result, a system that digitizes and manages game media, which is a characteristic function of an in-flight circulation game machine (so-called enclosed game machine), is effectively used to determine whether or not the game media can be used based on the game state. There is an effect that a game specification (so-called lucky number system) can be added.

  In more detail, conventionally, in a game hall that employs a lucky number game specification, the staff of the game hall sequentially confirms the start condition of the second game state, and based on the establishment of the start condition, the upper part of the gaming machine In the second gaming state, whether or not the condition for changing from the second gaming state to the first gaming state has been achieved is monitored. It is necessary to perform an operation to end the second gaming state, or to prompt the player to exchange the assigned game medium when the second gaming state ends.

  When the above-mentioned work is performed by a staff at a game hall, work related to the above game specifications is added in addition to normal work such as abnormality check and cleaning of the gaming machine, so there is a risk that the staff will be burdened with a large work load. is there. On the other hand, even if the number of staff is increased to cope with the above-mentioned game specifications, personnel costs for the increased staff increase, and there is a risk that the management of the amusement hall may be tightened. Therefore, even in an environment where the game specifications that can improve the gameability of the lucky number system can be realized, the game hall does not adopt the lucky number system in consideration of the above-mentioned fears, and is in a normal business form. As a result, the gameability was not improved.

  Therefore, by utilizing the functions of the in-flight circulation type gaming machine, the given game media are digitized and managed, and the game media given based on the game status are individually managed and can be used based on the game status By determining the medium, even if the above game specifications are adopted, the management of the amusement hall is sound without reducing the labor costs without placing a heavy work burden on the amusement hall staff and increasing the number of staff. This is advantageous in that various games can be realized while maintaining the conventional environment.

In the gaming machine E4, the launching means is
In the second game state, when the first game medium information or the second game medium information is stored in either the first counting means or the second counting means, the game supplied from the storage means Allow the launch of the medium,
In the first gaming state, based on the first game medium information stored in the first counting means, the game medium supplied from the storage means is permitted to be launched, while stored in the second counting means. The gaming machine E5 is configured to prohibit launching of game media based on the second game media information.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E4, the following effects are produced. That is, in the second gaming state, when the first game medium information or the second game medium information is stored in either the first counting means or the second counting means, the gaming medium supplied from the storing means by the launching means Is allowed to fire. On the other hand, when the first game medium information is stored in the first counting means in the first gaming state, the game medium supplied to the storage means by the launching means is permitted to be launched, while stored in the second counting means. Launching of game media based on the second game media information is prohibited. Thereby, the game media provided for each game state is counted individually, and in the first game state, the launch of the game media based on only the first game media information stored in the first counting means is permitted. In the two gaming state, it is possible to create a situation in which the launch of the game medium based on the first game medium information or the second game medium information stored in the first counting means or the second counting means is permitted. There is an effect that can be realized. Furthermore, it is possible to create a variety of game characteristics according to the setting contents by configuring the situation in which the use of the given game medium is restricted to the game, and based on the intention of the game hall There is an effect that a characteristic game characteristic can be adopted for each game hall. Note that, for example, after the gaming state is changed from the previous second gaming state to the first gaming state based on the establishment of the second condition, the first condition is established and the next second gaming is performed from the first gaming state. When the state is changed to the state, the launching unit permits the launch of the game medium based on the first game medium information stored in the first counting unit in the next second gaming state, You may comprise so that discharge | release of a game medium may be permitted based on the 2nd game medium information memorize | stored in a 2nd count means in a 2nd game state.

In the gaming machine E5, the first gaming state changing means changes from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the establishment of the first condition set by the condition setting means (for example, start of jackpot). ,
The second gaming state changing means changes from the second gaming state to the first gaming state based on the establishment of the second condition set by the condition setting means (for example, the end of the “time reduction state”). ,
The firing means includes
When the first gaming state is changed from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the establishment of the first condition, either the first counting means or the second counting means When the first game medium information or the second game medium information is stored in the memory, the game medium supplied from the storage unit is permitted to be launched,
When the second gaming state changing means changes from the second gaming state to the first gaming state based on the establishment of the second condition, it is stored in the first counting means in the subsequent game. Based on the first game medium information, the game medium supplied from the storage unit is allowed to be released, while the game medium based on the second game medium information stored in the second counting unit is prohibited from being released. A gaming machine E6 configured as described above.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E4, the following effects are produced. That is, the first gaming state changing means changes from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the establishment of the first condition set by the condition setting means, and the second gaming state changing means by the condition setting means. The game state is changed from the second gaming state to the first gaming state based on the established second condition. Further, when the first gaming state changing means changes the first gaming state to the second gaming state, the first gaming medium information or the second gaming medium information is stored in either the first counting means or the second counting means. When stored, the launching means permits the launch of the game medium supplied from the storage means. On the other hand, when the second gaming state is changed from the second gaming state to the first gaming state by the second gaming state changing means, in the subsequent game, when the first game medium information is stored in the first counting means, the emitting means While allowing the game medium supplied to the storage means to be launched, launching of the game medium based on the second game medium information stored in the second counting means is prohibited. Thereby, the game media provided for each game state is counted individually, and in the first game state, the launch of the game media based on only the first game media information stored in the first counting means is permitted. In the two gaming state, it is possible to create a situation in which the launch of the game medium based on the first game medium information or the second game medium information stored in the first counting means or the second counting means is permitted. There is an effect that can be realized. Furthermore, it is possible to create a variety of game characteristics according to the setting contents by configuring the situation in which the use of the given game medium is restricted to the game, and based on the intention of the game hall There is an effect that a characteristic game characteristic can be adopted for each game hall.

In any of the gaming machines E4 to E6,
In the second gaming state, when the second game medium information is stored in the second counting unit, the launching unit is configured to determine the first game medium information stored in the first counting unit based on the first game medium information. A gaming machine E7, wherein the second game medium information stored in the second counting means is preferentially used to execute a game medium launch.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E4 to E6, the following effects are produced. That is, in the second gaming state, when the second game medium information is stored in the second counting means, the launching means causes the first counting medium information stored in the first counting means to be transferred to the second counting means. The game medium is launched using the stored second game medium information preferentially. Thereby, the first game medium information stored in the first counting means has a game value for the player from the second game medium information stored in the second counting means, because there is no restriction on the usable game state. In the second gaming state, the second gaming medium information having a gaming value lower than that of the first gaming medium information can be consumed first, so that the gaming value possessed by the player can be protected without being unnecessarily damaged. There is an effect that.

In the gaming machine E6 or E7,
Display means for variably displaying the identification information (for example, the third symbol display device 81);
Lottery means (for example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110) for lottery for determining whether or not to give a predetermined profit to a player based on establishment of a predetermined game condition;
A game value giving means (for example, a specific prize opening 5a) for giving a predetermined profit to the player based on the lottery result of the lottery means;
When the predetermined value is given to the player by the game value giving means, display selection means for selecting a combination of the identification information to be displayed on the display means from a plurality of types of display modes (for example, the sound lamp control device 113). MPU221)
The condition setting unit is a display mode setting unit (“1” switch 281, “2” switch 282, “3” switch 283) capable of setting the first condition or the second condition from the plurality of types of display modes. , “4” switch 284, “5” switch 285, “6” switch 286, “7” switch 287, “8” switch 288, and “9” switch 289).

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E6 or E7, the following effects are produced. That is, a variable display of the identification display is performed by the display means, and the lottery means determines whether to give a predetermined profit to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined game condition, and the game value grant means When a predetermined profit is given to the player based on the lottery result of the lottery means and a predetermined game value is given by the display selection means, the combination of identification displays displayed on the display means is a plurality of display modes. Selected from. And it is comprised by the display mode setting means with which the condition setting means was equipped so that a 1st condition or a 2nd condition can be set from a plurality of types of display modes. Thereby, when giving a predetermined profit, based on the displayed display mode, it is possible to additionally give an advantageous gaming state having a different gaming value, or to extinguish the advantageous gaming state, The display mode that is the change condition can be configured to be changeable in the game hall. Therefore, it is possible to create various game properties according to the set contents, and there is an effect that a characteristic game property can be adopted for each game hall based on the intention of the game hall.

In the gaming machine E8,
The gaming machine E9, wherein the display mode setting means can set the first condition or the second condition for each of the plurality of types of display modes.

  According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E8, the following effects are produced. That is, the display condition setting means is configured to be able to set the first condition or the second condition for each of a plurality of types of display aspects. Thereby, for each display mode that appears when a predetermined profit is given to the player, it can be configured that whether or not the second game state is given can be changed in the game hall. Therefore, it is possible to create various game properties according to the set contents, and there is an effect that a characteristic game property can be adopted for each game hall based on the intention of the game hall.

In the gaming machine E8 or E9,
In the case where the display means gives a predetermined profit to the player based on the lottery result of the lottery means, the combination of the identification information is changed to one effective line (for example, left line L1, middle line L2, right line L3 , The right falling line L4 and the left falling line L5), and a plurality of the effective lines can be displayed.
The condition setting means is effective line setting means capable of setting the first condition or the second condition from the effective lines in which the combination of the identification information appears (for example, “10” switch 290, “11” A gaming machine E10 comprising a switch 291, a “12” switch 292, a “13” switch 293, and a “14” switch 294).

  According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E8 or E9, the following effects are produced. That is, when a predetermined profit is given to the player based on the lottery result of the lottery means, the display means is configured to cause the combination of identification information to appear on one active line, and the active line is displayed on the display means. A plurality of displays can be displayed. In addition, the first condition or the second condition can be set from the effective lines where the combination of identification information appears by the effective line setting means provided in the condition setting means. As a result, when a predetermined profit is granted, an advantageous gaming state with a different gaming value is additionally given depending on which of the plurality of active lines the combination of identification information is displayed. Or the advantageous gaming state can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to create various game properties according to the set contents, and there is an effect that it is possible to adopt a game property that is characteristic for each game hall based on the intention of the game hall.

In the gaming machine E10,
The gaming machine E11, wherein the valid line setting means can set the first condition or the second condition for each valid line in which the combination of identification information appears.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine E6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first condition or the second condition can be set for each effective line in which the combination of identification information appears by the effective line setting means. Thereby, it can be configured to be able to change the setting for each gaming place whether or not to give the second gaming state for each active line that appears when a predetermined profit is given to the player. Therefore, it is possible to create various game properties according to the set contents, and there is an effect that it is possible to adopt a game property that is characteristic for each game hall based on the intention of the game hall.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E11,
The gaming machine is configured to execute a game based on the first game medium information stored in the first counting unit in the first gaming state and the second gaming state. E12.

  According to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E1 to E11, the following effects are produced. That is, the game execution means is configured to be able to execute a game based on the first game medium information stored in the first counting means in the first game state and the second game state. Thereby, with respect to the game media individually counted in the first game state and the second game state, the game media stored in the first counting means in both the first game state and the second game state are stored. Can be used. Accordingly, the first game medium information stored in the first counting means has a higher game value for the player than the second game medium information stored in the second counting means because there is no restriction on the gaming state that can be used. Therefore, a difference can be provided in the game media counted for each gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of the gaming machine E1 can be made more remarkable.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E12,
The game medium counting means stores the number of pieces of game medium information based on the rental request as the first game medium information in the first counting means when there is a game medium rental request from a player. Characteristic gaming machine E13.

  According to the gaming machine E13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E1 to E12, the following effects are produced. That is, when there is a game medium rental request from the player, the game medium counting means stores the number of game medium information based on the rental request as first game medium information in the first counting means. Thereby, since the first game medium information is not restricted in use depending on the game state, there is an effect that the rented game medium can be used in any game state without being restricted in use.

  In addition, the gaming characteristics of the above game specifications are likely to produce a more remarkable effect because the rental rate of the game media is different from the prize conversion rate at the game hall window. Specifically, for example, when there is a prize conversion gap such as “lending rate> prize conversion rate”, a prize is exchanged for one game medium in a game with a rented game medium and a game with a given game medium. There will be a difference in game value equivalent to the gap. In such a situation, the player is given a way to play a game using the rented game medium, and continuously playing the game medium using the game medium provided for the game leads to his own benefit. Whether or not the game based on the game medium is continuously performed is a factor that divides the game. In a game hall with such a prize conversion gap, it is possible to acquire the second game state by adopting the above-mentioned game specifications, and whether or not the game can be continuously played with the game medium provided during that time. There is an effect that the effect of the specification can be made remarkable and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E13,
Medium information notifying means (for example, status display) capable of notifying the contents of the first game medium information stored in the first counting means and the contents of the second game medium information stored in the second counting means. A gaming machine E14 comprising a device 85).

  According to the gaming machine E14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E1 to E13, the following effects are produced. That is, the contents of the first game medium information stored in the first counting means and the contents of the second game medium information stored in the second counting means can be notified by the medium information notifying means. Accordingly, the first game medium information stored in the first counting means usable in the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and the second gaming means stored in the second counting means usable only in the second gaming state. 2 game media information can be recognized by each player, for example, how much game media was granted during the second game state, or changed from the second game state to the first game state In this case, there is an effect that it is possible to clearly recognize how much the game can be continued based on the game medium information stored in the first counting means in the first game state.

In any of the gaming machines E5 to E14,
The first condition is:
A predetermined first condition established by the predetermined condition (for example, a big hit with an even number of “first time”), and
A special first condition that is difficult to be established from the predetermined first condition (e.g., a big hit with "3 symbols (turtle)" of "first time"),
The second gaming state includes a special second gaming state (for example, a “lucky” state) and a disadvantageous second gaming state (for example, a “start” state) that is more disadvantageous for the player than the special second gaming state. Prepared,
The first gaming state changing means includes
First disadvantage changing means for changing to the disadvantage second gaming state based on establishment of the predetermined first condition;
First special changing means for changing to the special second gaming state based on establishment of the special first condition;
A gaming machine E15 characterized by comprising:

  According to the gaming machine E15, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E5 to E14, the following effects are produced. That is, the first disadvantageous change means provided in the first gaming state change means changes to the disadvantageous second gaming state based on the establishment of the predetermined first condition. Further, the first special change means provided in the first game state change means is changed to the special second game state based on the establishment of the special first condition. Thereby, regarding the second gaming state, it is possible to provide a special second gaming state that is difficult to start and a disadvantageous second gaming state that is likely to be started. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be enhanced by the game nature.

In gaming machine E15,
The second condition is:
A prescribed second condition established by the prescribed condition (end of "time reduction state");
A special second condition (for example, a big hit with “4 symbols (shark)” of “first time”) that is difficult to be established from the prescribed second condition,
The second gaming state changing means is
Second disadvantageous change means for ending the disadvantageous second gaming state based on establishment of the prescribed second condition;
Second special changing means for ending the special second gaming state based on establishment of the special second condition;
A gaming machine E16 characterized by comprising:

  According to the gaming machine E16, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E15, the following effects are produced. That is, the disadvantageous second gaming state is terminated based on the establishment of the prescribed second condition by the second disadvantageous change means provided in the second gaming state changing means. Further, the second special change means provided in the second game state change means ends the special second game state based on the establishment of the special second condition. Thereby, regarding the second gaming state, it is possible to provide a special second state that is difficult to start and difficult to finish, and a disadvantageous second gaming state that is easy to start and difficult to finish, and each start condition and end By creating a gaming state with different conditions, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be enhanced by various gaming characteristics. In addition, by providing a plurality of types of second gaming state, the period in which the second gaming medium information counted separately from the first gaming medium information acquired in the first gaming state can be varied, There is an effect that the fun of the game can be enhanced by various game characteristics.

In gaming machine E16,
The second disadvantage changing means changes the disadvantage second gaming state to the first gaming state based on the establishment of the prescribed second condition,
The gaming machine E17, wherein the second special changing means changes the special second gaming state to the disadvantageous second gaming state based on the establishment of the special second condition.

  According to the gaming machine E17, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine E16, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second disadvantageous changing means changes the disadvantageous second gaming state to the first gaming state based on the establishment of the prescribed second condition, and the second special changing means changes the special second condition based on the establishment of the special second condition. The two gaming state is changed to the disadvantageous second gaming state. As a result, regarding the second gaming state, even if it is difficult to start and finishes, it is disadvantageous that the special second state ends via the second gaming state, and the disadvantage is that the first gaming state is immediately changed when it is easily started. Such as a disadvantageous second gaming state can be provided, and by creating a gaming state having different start conditions and ending conditions, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be enhanced by various game characteristics. In addition, by providing a plurality of types of second gaming state, the period in which the second gaming medium information counted separately from the first gaming medium information acquired in the first gaming state can be varied, There is an effect that the fun of the game can be enhanced by various game characteristics.

In the gaming machine E16 or E17,
The display mode setting means or the effective line setting means may select the special first condition or the predetermined first condition, or the special second condition or the specified second condition from the display mode or the effective line. A gaming machine E18 characterized by setting.

  According to the gaming machine E18, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E16 or E17, the following effects are produced. That is, the display mode setting means or the effective line setting means sets the special first condition or the predetermined first condition, or the special second condition or the specified second condition from the display mode or the effective line. Thereby, based on the intention of the game hall, it is possible to provide a disadvantageous second gaming state that is disadvantageous for a player that is easy to start and finishes and an advantageous second state that is advantageous for a player that is difficult to start and difficult to finish. By creating a game state in which each start condition and end condition are different, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be enhanced by various game characteristics.

In any of the gaming machines E15 to E18,
Characterized in that it comprises second gaming state type notifying means (for example, a lucky movable combination 96 and a start movable combination 97) for notifying the special second gaming state and the disadvantageous second gaming state in an identifiable manner. A gaming machine E19.

  According to the gaming machine E19, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E15 to E18, the following effects are produced. That is, the second gaming state type notifying means notifies the special second gaming state and the disadvantageous second gaming state in an identifiable manner. Thereby, it is possible to clearly recognize whether it is in the advantageous second gaming state or the disadvantaged second gaming state, and performing the game while being aware of the change condition to the first gaming state that is different for each second gaming state Therefore, there is an effect that the entertainment in each second gaming state can be fully enjoyed. Note that “notifying in an identifiable manner” means, for example, a plurality of indication objects (for example, movable accessories) that are provided for each second gaming state and are normally invisible to the player. There are cases where the player is informed by making the player visible in accordance with the type of the two gaming states, or the display mode corresponding to each second gaming state is revealed in one display means. included.

In any of the gaming machines E0 to E19,
A gaming machine E20 comprising condition notifying means (situation display device 85) for notifying the game state changing condition by the gaming state changing means.

  According to the gaming machine E20, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E0 to E19, the following effects are produced. That is, the condition notification means notifies the game state change condition by the game state change means. This allows the player to recognize the condition for changing the game state. For example, when the game by the second counting means is prohibited when the game state is changed from the second game state to the first game state. However, by recognizing the conditions in advance, it is possible to construct a comfortable gaming environment without giving the player unnecessary confusion regarding the game specifications.

In gaming machine E20,
The gaming machine E21 is characterized in that the condition notifying means is constituted by an electric display means capable of electrically changing display contents.

  According to the gaming machine E21, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E20, the following effects are produced. That is, the condition notifying means is constituted by an electric display means capable of electrically changing display contents. As a result, the contents can be changed and displayed in accordance with the condition for changing the game state, so that the player can appropriately recognize the condition for changing the game state with a simple configuration. is there.

In the gaming machine E20 or E21,
The notification by the medium information notification means and the notification by the condition notification means are displayed on one status display means (the lucky number display area 85b and the value information display area 85c of the status display device 85). E22.

  According to the gaming machine E22, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E21 or E22, the following effects are produced. That is, the notification by the medium information notification unit and the notification by the condition notification unit are displayed by one status display unit. That is, the first game medium information and the second game medium information and the game state change condition by the game state change means are displayed on one status display means. Thus, the player can recognize the number of game media owned by the player and the conditions for changing to the second game state by the status display means, so that the extra cost is eliminated without using other devices. There is an effect that the player can recognize the gameability and the game situation of the lucky number system without spending.

In gaming machine E22,
The gaming machine E23, wherein the status display unit simultaneously performs notification by the medium information notification unit and notification by the condition notification unit.

  According to the gaming machine E23, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E22, the following effects are produced. That is, the notification by the medium information notification unit and the notification by the condition notification unit are simultaneously executed by one status display unit. That is, the first game medium information and the second game medium information and the game state change condition by the game state change means are simultaneously displayed on one status display means. Thus, the player can recognize the number of game media owned by the player and the conditions for changing to the second game state by looking at the notification content of the status display means. There is an effect that the player can uniquely recognize the sex.

In the gaming machine E22 or E23,
The gaming machine is composed of a gaming board (for example, gaming board 13) and a frame member (for example, an overhanging portion 16) to which the gaming board is replaceably attached.
The gaming machine E24, wherein the status display means is provided on the frame member.

  According to the gaming machine E24, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E22 or E23, the following effects are produced. In other words, the status display means is provided on a frame member to which the game board is replaceably attached. Accordingly, even when the game board is replaced, the status display means can be used continuously with the frame member being provided, and it is not necessary to provide the status display means on the game board to be replaced. There is an effect that the cost of the entire game board can be reduced as compared with the case where is installed.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E24,
A first entry means (for example, a start winning opening 4) and a second entry means (for example, a specific winning opening 5a) capable of entering a game medium used in the game,
The first entry means is configured to allow entry of game media in the first game state and the second game state,
The second entry means is configured to allow entry of a game medium only in a predetermined game state (for example, a big hit state),
In the second gaming state, the second counting means updates the second game medium information based on the game medium entering the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means. A gaming machine E25 comprising an updating means.

  According to the gaming machine E25, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E1 to E24, the following effects are produced. In other words, the first medium entry means and the second ball entry means provided in the game medium provision means are configured such that the game medium used for the game can enter, and the first game state and the second game state are the first in the first game state and the second game state. The game medium can be entered into the ball entry means, and the game medium can be entered into the second ball entry means only in a predetermined game state. In the second game state, the second game medium information is updated based on the game medium entering the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means. Thereby, in the second gaming state, the game medium is given based on the game medium entering the first ball entry means, and the game medium is given based on the game medium having entered the second ball entry means. Since it is not necessary to distinguish and count the game media to be played, it is not necessary to complicate the control related to the update processing of the game media information given during the second game state, and the control load can be reduced. There is.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E24,
The game medium giving means is
A first entry means (for example, a start winning opening 4) and a second entry means (for example, a specific winning opening 5a) capable of entering a game medium used in the game,
The first entry means is configured to allow entry of game media in the first game state and the second game state,
The second entry means is configured to allow entry of a game medium only in a predetermined game state (for example, a big hit state),
The second counting means includes a second single update means for updating the second game medium information based on a game medium entering the second ball entry means in the second game state,
The first counting means includes a first single update means for updating the first game medium information based on a game medium entering the first ball entry means in the second game state. A gaming machine E26 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine E26, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E1 to E24, the following effects are produced. In other words, the first medium entry means and the second ball entry means provided in the game medium provision means are configured such that the game medium used for the game can enter, and the first game state and the second game state are the first in the first game state and the second game state. The game medium is configured to be able to enter the entrance means, and the game medium is configured to be able to enter the second entrance means only in a predetermined gaming state, and the second single update means provided in the second counting means In the second game state, the second game medium information is updated based on the game medium entering the second ball entry means, and the second game state is updated by the first single update means provided in the first count means. The first game medium information is updated based on the game medium entering the first ball entry means.

  Since the second game medium information stored in the second counting means cannot be used for the game after the end of the second gaming state, the game value for the player compared to the first game medium information stored in the first counting means. Is low. Further, since the second entry means is configured so that the game medium can enter only in the predetermined game state of the second game state, the second entry means is directly related to the second game state. The ball means is configured to allow the game medium to enter even in the first game state other than the second game state, and is not directly related to the second game state. Therefore, when a game medium enters the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means during the second game state, all the game medium information based on the ball entry is stored in the second counting means. At this time, if the second counting means stores a game medium entry into the first entering means that can occur independently of the second gaming state and should be stored in the first counting means, the player's game It will damage value. Accordingly, the second game medium information is updated based on the game medium that has entered the second entry means by the second single update means provided in the second count means, and the first count means provided in the first count means. The single update means is configured to update the first game medium information based on the game medium that has entered the first entry means. Thereby, even if it is a 2nd game state, when a game medium enters by the 1st entrance means, it can memorize | store as 1st game medium information with a high game value, Therefore A player's game value is obtained. There is an effect that a suitable gaming environment can be constructed without any damage.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E26,
The gaming state changing means is a fixed amount for changing from the second gaming state to the first gaming state when the second gaming medium information stored in the second counting means reaches a predetermined number. A gaming machine E27 comprising an ending means.

  According to the gaming machine E27, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E1 to E26, the following effects are produced. That is, when the second game medium information stored in the second counting unit reaches a predetermined number by the fixed amount ending unit provided in the gaming state changing unit, the first gaming state is changed from the second gaming state. Changed to Accordingly, it is possible to realize a gameability (so-called quantitative system) for ending the second game state when the number of game media provided during the second game state reaches a certain number. In the conventional quantitative system, the game media staff decides the stop by judging the game media possessed by the player based on the estimated amount, but the given game media is managed numerically and managed with accurate numeric judgment By deciding on the stop, the grounds for the stop will be clarified, so the work of the game hall staff will be reduced, and a gaming environment according to the specifications of the game will be provided without causing any doubt to the player There is an effect that can be.

In any of the gaming machines E0 to E26,
The gaming machine E28, wherein the gaming state changing means changes the gaming state based on a game result by the game executing means.

  According to the gaming machine E28, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E0 to E26, the following effects are produced. That is, the game state is changed by the game state changing means based on the game result by the game executing means. Thus, the gaming state is changed based on the gaming result, and a new gaming property in which there is a gaming medium whose use is restricted based on the gaming state is created. There is an effect that the playability of the game is born and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

<F group>
A game medium counting means (for example, a normal time ball counter 213c or a lucky central ball counter 213d) for counting the number of game media usable in the game;
Game execution means (for example, ball launching unit 66) for playing a game based on the game media counted by the game media counting means;
A game medium giving means (for example, a specific prize opening 5a) for giving a game medium to a player based on a game result by the game execution means;
Game state changing means (for example, unlimited flag 213h) for changing the gaming state based on a predetermined opportunity,
The game medium counting means includes
First counting means (for example, sharable balls) related to the gaming medium granted to the player by the gaming medium giving means in the first gaming state (for example, “normal gaming state”) Normal time counter 213c),
When the gaming state changing means changes from the first gaming state to a second gaming state different from the first gaming state (for example, a lucky period), the gaming medium giving means in the second gaming state Second counting means (for example, a lucky central ball counter 213d) for storing second game medium information (for example, lucky balls) related to the gaming medium given to the player,
The game execution means includes
In the first gaming state, use restriction means for restricting a game based on the second game medium information stored in the second counting means (for example, the unusable area 213e),
When the game is performed in a state in which the game based on the second game medium stored in the second counting means is restricted by the use limiting means in the first gaming state, the first counting means. First update means for updating the first game medium information stored in (for example, S2705 in the shot ball counting process (S2104));
When a game is played in the second gaming state, either the first game medium information stored in the first counting means or the second game medium information stored in the second counting means And a second updating means (for example, S2704 and S2705 in the fired ball counting process (S2104)).

  According to the gaming machine F0, the number of game media that can be used for the game is counted by the game medium counting means, and the game is executed by the game execution means based on the game media counted by the game medium counting means. A game medium is given to the player by the game medium giving means based on the game result by the executing means, and the game state is changed by the game state changing means based on a predetermined opportunity. Further, the first counting means provided in the gaming medium counting means stores the first game medium information related to the gaming media given to the player by the gaming medium giving means in the first gaming state. Furthermore, the second counting means provided in the gaming medium counting means stores the second game medium information related to the gaming medium given to the player by the gaming medium giving means in the second gaming state different from the first gaming state. The Then, the game based on the second game medium information stored in the second counting means is restricted in the first gaming state by the use restriction means provided in the game execution means. Also, provided in the game execution means when a state game in which the game based on the second game medium information stored in the second counting means is restricted in the first gaming state by the use restriction means. The first game medium information stored in the first counting means is updated by the first updating means. Further, when a game is played in the second gaming state by the second updating means provided in the game executing means, the first game medium information stored in the first counting means or the second counting means is stored. Any of the second game medium information is updated. As a result, the game medium information given to the player is counted for each game state, and when a game is performed, any game medium information can be updated in a game state where use is not restricted. In the game state that is restricted, the game medium information that is not restricted in use is configured to be updatable, so that the game medium information that is updated for each game state is made different, and a game medium that cannot be used depending on the game state is created. Can do. Therefore, by creating a new gameability in which there is a game medium whose use is restricted based on the game state, a game property of how long a game state that is not restricted to use will be created, and the interest of the game will be enhanced. There is an effect that can be. “Restricting the use of game media” means, for example, limiting the number of game media that can be used when prohibiting the use of game media or restricting the conditions in which game media can be used. Or a case where the use of the game medium is temporarily reserved.

In gaming machine F0,
The second updating means has the second count when the first game medium information is stored in the first count means and the second game medium information is stored in the second count means. A gaming machine F1, wherein the second gaming medium information stored in the means is preferentially updated.

  According to the gaming machine F1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F0, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first game medium information is stored in the first counting means by the second updating means and the second game medium information is stored in the second counting means, it is stored in the second counting means. The second game medium information is updated with priority. Thereby, in the execution of the game in the second gaming state, the second gaming medium information that can be updated only in the second gaming state is updated in preference to the first gaming medium information that can be updated in any gaming state. Can do. The first game medium information stored in the first counting means has a higher game value for the player than the second game medium information stored in the second counting means, because there is no restriction on the gaming state that can be used. Since the second game medium information having a game value lower than that of the one game medium information can be consumed first, there is an effect that the game value possessed by the player can be protected without being unnecessarily damaged.

In the gaming machine F0 or F1,
The gaming machine is configured to execute a game based on the first game medium information stored in the first counting unit in the first gaming state and the second gaming state. F2.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F0 or F1, the following effects are produced. That is, the game execution means is configured to be able to execute a game based on the first game medium information stored in the first counting means in the first game state and the second game state. Thereby, with respect to the game media individually counted in the first game state and the second game state, the game media stored in the first counting means in both the first game state and the second game state are stored. Can be used. Accordingly, the first game medium information stored in the first counting means has a higher game value for the player than the second game medium information stored in the second counting means because there is no restriction on the gaming state that can be used. Therefore, a difference can be provided in the game media counted for each gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect played by the gaming machine F0 can be made more remarkable.

In any of the gaming machines F0 to F2,
The game execution means includes
Storage means for storing the game medium;
Launching means for launching the game medium supplied from the storage means toward the game area (for example, a ball launching unit 66);
A collection means (for example, a collection passage 41a) for collecting the game medium that has been launched by the launching means and has flowed down the game area;
A sending means (for example, a discharge passage 42a) for sending the game medium collected by the collecting means to the storing means;
A gaming machine F3 that plays a game while circulating a predetermined number of gaming media in the machine.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F0 to F2, the following effects are produced. That is, the game medium is stored by the storage means provided in the game execution means, the game medium supplied from the storage means is launched by the launch means, the game medium launched by the launch means is collected by the collection means, The game medium collected by the collecting means is sent to the storing means by the sending means, so that a game is played while circulating a predetermined game medium in the machine. As a result, a system that digitizes and manages game media, which is a characteristic function of an in-flight circulation game machine (so-called enclosed game machine), is effectively used to determine whether or not the game media can be used based on the game state. There is an effect that a game specification (so-called lucky number system) can be added.

In gaming machine F3,
A foul collection means (foul ball passage 64) for collecting game media that have been launched by the launch means and have not reached the game area;
Launch detection means (for example, a launch ball detection switch 94) for detecting a game medium launched by the launch means;
A foul detection means (for example, a foul ball detection switch 93) for detecting the game medium collected by the foul collection means,
The sending means is configured to be able to send the game medium collected by the foul collecting means to the storing means,
The first updating means decreases the first game medium information when the game medium is detected by the launch detection means in the first gaming state, and the first update means when the game medium is detected by the foul detection means. 1 is configured to increase game media information,
The second update means reduces the first game medium information or the second game medium information when the game medium is detected by the launch detection means in the second gaming state, and the foul detection means The game machine F4 is configured to increase the second game medium information when a game medium is detected by the above.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3, the following effects are produced. That is, the game medium that has been launched by the launching means and has not reached the game area is collected by the foul collecting means, the game medium that has been launched by the launching means is detected by the firing detecting means, and is collected by the foul collecting means by the foul detecting means The played game medium is detected. Further, the game medium collected by the foul collecting means is sent to the storing means by the sending means. Further, in the first gaming state, the first update means reduces the first game medium information when the game medium is detected by the firing detection means, and the first game medium when the foul detection means detects the game medium. Information is increased. Also, when the game medium is detected by the launch detection means in the second game state, the first update medium information or the second game medium information is decreased by the second update means, and the game medium is detected by the foul detection means. Is detected, the second game medium information is increased.

  As described above, the first game medium information stored in the first counting means has a higher game value by the player than the second game medium information stored in the second counting means. In the gaming state, when the game medium launched based on the second game medium information of the second counting means is collected by the foul collecting means without reaching the game area, the first counting medium information is stored in the first counting means. The first game medium stored in the first counting means is stored in the first counting means by causing the foul collecting means to collect the game medium intentionally launched by the player. Even if a new game is provided that can be converted into information, and the game media that can be used for each corner and game state are different, the game may be disrupted. Therefore, when the game medium is collected by the foul collecting means in the second gaming state, it is possible to prevent the above problem from occurring by configuring the second counting means to store it as the second game medium information. It is possible to maintain a new gameability.

In gaming machine F4,
In the second gaming state, the launching means is firing based on the first game medium information stored in the first counting means or based on the second game medium information stored in the second counting means. Equipped with a fire discrimination means for discriminating whether it is a fire,
The second update means is a game medium launch based on the first game medium information stored in the first counting means by the launch discriminating means when the game medium is collected by the foul collecting means. The game machine F5 is characterized by comprising update correction means for increasing the first game medium information stored in the first counting means.

  In the second gaming state, whether the gaming medium collected by the foul collecting means is a gaming medium based on the first gaming medium information stored in the first counting means or the second gaming medium information stored in the second counting means. If the game medium is not identified based on the first game medium information stored in the first counting means because the second game medium information is not stored in the second counting means in the second gaming state. When the launched game medium is collected by the foul collecting means, the second counting means stores the second game medium information as a second medium even though the game medium is based on the first game medium information stored in the first counting means. There is a risk of being memorized.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F4, the following effects are produced. That is, when the game medium is collected by the foul collecting means during the second gaming state, the game medium collected by the foul collecting means is launched based on the second game medium information stored in the second counting means. Is determined based on the first game medium information stored in the first counting means, and is determined to be fired based on the first game medium information stored in the first counting means. If the game medium has been played, the first game medium information stored in the first counting means is increased by the update correcting means provided in the second updating means. As a result, when the game medium launched based on the first game medium information stored in the first counting means is recovered by the foul collecting means even though the second gaming state is in progress, the first counting means receives the first Since it can be stored (returned) as game medium information, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an appropriate game environment without damaging the game value possessed by the player more than necessary.

In the gaming machine F4 or F5,
The game execution means includes a regular interval launch control means for firing the game medium by the launch means at regular intervals,
The launch detection means detects a game medium launched from the launching means in a time less than the predetermined interval in the fixed interval launch control means when a game medium is launched from the launch means. Game machine F6.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F4 or F5, the following effects are produced. That is, when the game medium is fired by the launching means at regular intervals by the regular interval launch control means provided in the game execution means, and the game media is fired from the launching means, the regular interval launch control means has a regular interval. The game medium launched from the launching means in less than the time is detected by the launch detection means. As a result, the game medium launched from the launching means can be detected in a shorter time than the fixed interval at which the game medium is launched, so that the first update means or the second update means performs the first update based on the detection result. The value of the game medium information or the second game medium information can be updated. Therefore, the game medium information possessed by the player can be updated after one game medium is launched and before the next game medium is launched. For example, the remaining game medium information is one. When the game medium is fired based on the above, the game medium information can be updated to zero before the next game medium can be launched, so that the player possesses 0. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game media from being launched in the absence of the game media possessed by the player.

In any of the gaming machines F0 to F6,
The game medium counting means stores the number of pieces of game medium information based on the rental request as the first game medium information in the first counting means when there is a game medium rental request from a player. A featured gaming machine F7.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F0 to F6, the following effects are produced. That is, when there is a game medium rental request from the player, the game medium counting means stores the number of game medium information based on the rental request as first game medium information in the first counting means. Thereby, since the first game medium information is not restricted in use depending on the game state, there is an effect that the rented game medium can be used in any game state without being restricted in use.

  In addition, the gaming characteristics of the above game specifications are likely to produce a more remarkable effect because the rental rate of the game media is different from the prize conversion rate at the game hall window. Specifically, for example, when there is a prize conversion gap such as “lending rate> prize conversion rate”, a prize is exchanged for one game medium in a game with a rented game medium and a game with a given game medium. There will be a difference in game value equivalent to the gap. In such a situation, the player is given a way to play a game using the rented game medium, and continuously playing the game medium using the game medium provided for the game leads to his own benefit. Whether or not the game based on the game medium is continuously performed is a factor that divides the game. In a game hall with such a prize conversion gap, it is possible to acquire the second game state by adopting the above-mentioned game specifications, and whether or not the game can be continuously played with the game medium provided during that time. There is an effect that the effect of the specification can be made remarkable and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines F0 to F7,
Medium information notifying means (for example, status display) capable of notifying the contents of the first game medium information stored in the first counting means and the contents of the second game medium information stored in the second counting means. A gaming machine F8, comprising a device 85).

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F0 to F7, the following effects are produced. That is, the contents of the first game medium information stored in the first counting means and the contents of the second game medium information stored in the second counting means can be notified by the medium information notifying means. Accordingly, the first game medium information stored in the first counting means usable in the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and the second gaming means stored in the second counting means usable only in the second gaming state. 2 game media information can be recognized by each player, for example, how much game media is given during the second game state, or when the game state is changed from the second game state to the first game state In addition, there is an effect that it is possible to clearly recognize how long the game can be continued based on the game medium information stored in the first counting means in the first game state.

In any of the gaming machines F0 to F8,
The gaming state changing means is
First gaming state changing means for changing from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on establishment of a first condition (for example, start of jackpot);
Second game state changing means for changing from the second game state to the first game state based on the establishment of the second condition (for example, completion of the “time reduction state”),
The first condition is:
A predetermined first condition established by the predetermined condition (for example, a big hit with an even number of “first time”), and
A special first condition that is difficult to be established from the predetermined first condition (e.g., a big hit with "3 symbols (turtle)" of "first time"),
The second gaming state includes a special second gaming state (for example, a “lucky” state) and a disadvantageous second gaming state (for example, a “start” state) that is more disadvantageous for the player than the special second gaming state. Prepared,
The first gaming state changing means includes
First disadvantage changing means for changing to the disadvantage second gaming state based on establishment of the predetermined first condition;
First special changing means for changing to the special second gaming state based on establishment of the special first condition;
A gaming machine F9 characterized by comprising:

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines F0 to F8, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first disadvantageous change means provided in the first gaming state change means changes to the disadvantageous second gaming state based on the establishment of the predetermined first condition. Further, the first special change means provided in the first game state change means is changed to the special second game state based on the establishment of the special first condition. Thereby, regarding the second gaming state, it is possible to provide a special second gaming state that is difficult to start and a disadvantageous second gaming state that is likely to be started. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be enhanced by the game nature.

  The gaming machine F9 includes second gaming state type notifying means (for example, a lucky movable accessory 96 and a start movable accessory 97) for informing the special second gaming state and the disadvantageous second gaming state in an identifiable manner. A gaming machine F10 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine F9, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second gaming state type notifying means notifies the special second gaming state and the disadvantageous second gaming state in an identifiable manner. As a result, it is possible to clearly recognize whether the game is in the special second gaming state or the disadvantaged second gaming state, and performing the game while being aware of the change condition to the first gaming state that is different for each second gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the entertainment in each second gaming state can be fully enjoyed. Note that “notifying in an identifiable manner” means, for example, a plurality of indication objects (for example, movable accessories) that are provided for each second gaming state and are normally invisible to the player. There are cases where the player is informed by making the player visible in accordance with the type of the two gaming states, or the display mode corresponding to each second gaming state is revealed in one display means. included.

In the gaming machine F9 or F10,
The second condition is:
A prescribed second condition established by the prescribed condition (end of "time reduction state");
A special second condition (for example, a big hit with “4 symbols (shark)” of “first time”) that is difficult to be established from the prescribed second condition,
The second gaming state changing means is
Second disadvantageous change means for ending the disadvantageous second gaming state based on establishment of the prescribed second condition;
Second special changing means for ending the special second gaming state based on establishment of the special second condition;
A gaming machine F11, comprising:

  According to the gaming machine F11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F9 or F10, the following effects are produced. That is, the disadvantageous second gaming state is terminated based on the establishment of the prescribed second condition by the second disadvantageous change means provided in the second gaming state changing means. Further, the second special change means provided in the second game state change means ends the special second game state based on the establishment of the special second condition. Thereby, regarding the second gaming state, it is possible to provide a special second state that is difficult to start and difficult to finish, and a disadvantageous second gaming state that is easy to start and difficult to finish, and each start condition and end By creating a gaming state with different conditions, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be enhanced by various gaming characteristics. In addition, by providing a plurality of types of second gaming state, the period in which the second gaming medium information counted separately from the first gaming medium information acquired in the first gaming state can be varied, There is an effect that the fun of the game can be enhanced by various game characteristics.

In gaming machine F11,
The second disadvantage changing means changes the disadvantage second gaming state to the first gaming state based on the establishment of the prescribed second condition,
The gaming machine F12, wherein the second special changing means changes the special second gaming state to the disadvantageous second gaming state based on the establishment of the special second condition.

  According to the gaming machine F12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F11, the following effects are produced. That is, the second disadvantageous changing means changes the disadvantageous second gaming state to the first gaming state based on the establishment of the prescribed second condition, and the second special changing means changes the special second condition based on the establishment of the special second condition. The two gaming state is changed to the disadvantageous second gaming state. As a result, regarding the second gaming state, even if it is difficult to start and finishes, it is disadvantageous that the special second state ends via the second gaming state, and the disadvantage is that the first gaming state is immediately changed when it is easily started. Such as a disadvantageous second gaming state can be provided, and by creating a gaming state having different start conditions and ending conditions, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be enhanced by various game characteristics. In addition, by providing a plurality of types of second gaming state, the period in which the second gaming medium information counted separately from the first gaming medium information acquired in the first gaming state can be varied, There is an effect that the fun of the game can be enhanced by various game characteristics.

In any of the gaming machines F0 to F12,
A gaming machine F13 comprising condition notifying means (situation display device 85) for notifying the game state changing condition by the gaming state changing means.

  According to the gaming machine F13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F0 to F12, the following effects are produced. That is, the condition notification means notifies the game state change condition by the game state change means. This allows the player to recognize the condition for changing the game state. For example, when the game by the second counting means is prohibited when the game state is changed from the second game state to the first game state. However, by recognizing the conditions in advance, it is possible to construct a comfortable gaming environment without giving the player unnecessary confusion regarding the game specifications.

In gaming machine F13,
The gaming machine F14 is characterized in that the condition notifying means is constituted by an electric display means capable of electrically changing display contents.

  According to the gaming machine F14, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine F13, the following effects are achieved. That is, the condition notifying means is constituted by an electric display means capable of electrically changing display contents. As a result, the contents can be changed and displayed in accordance with the condition for changing the game state, so that the player can appropriately recognize the condition for changing the game state with a simple configuration. is there.

In any of the gaming machines F8 to F14,
The notification by the medium information notification means and the notification by the condition notification means are displayed on one status display means (the lucky number display area 85b and the value information display area 85c of the status display device 85). F15.

  According to the gaming machine F15, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F8 to F14, the following effects are produced. That is, the notification by the medium information notification unit and the notification by the condition notification unit are displayed by one status display unit. That is, the first game medium information and the second game medium information and the game state change condition by the game state change means are displayed on one status display means. Thus, the player can recognize the number of game media owned by the player and the conditions for changing to the second game state by the status display means, so that the extra cost is eliminated without using other devices. There is an effect that the player can recognize the gameability and the game situation of the lucky number system without spending.

In gaming machine F15,
The gaming machine F16, wherein in the status display means, the notification by the medium information notification means and the notification by the condition notification means are simultaneously executed.

  According to the gaming machine F16, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F15, the following effects are produced. That is, the notification by the medium information notification unit and the notification by the condition notification unit are simultaneously executed by one status display unit. That is, the first game medium information and the second game medium information and the game state change condition by the game state change means are simultaneously displayed on one status display means. Thus, the player can recognize the number of game media owned by the player and the conditions for changing to the second game state by looking at the notification content of the status display means. There is an effect that the player can uniquely recognize the sex.

In the gaming machine F15 or F16,
The gaming machine is composed of a gaming board (for example, gaming board 13) and a frame member (for example, an overhanging portion 16) to which the gaming board can be exchanged.
The gaming machine F17, wherein the status display means is provided on the frame member.

  According to the gaming machine F17, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F15 or F16, the following effects are produced. In other words, the status display means is provided on a frame member to which the game board is replaceably attached. Accordingly, even when the game board is replaced, the status display means can be used continuously with the frame member being provided, and it is not necessary to provide the status display means on the game board to be replaced. There is an effect that the cost of the entire game board can be reduced as compared with the case where is installed.

In any of the gaming machines F0 to F17,
The game medium giving means is
A first entry means (for example, a start winning opening 4) and a second entry means (for example, a specific winning opening 5a) capable of entering a game medium used in the game,
The first entry means is configured to allow entry of game media in the first game state and the second game state,
The second entry means is configured to allow entry of a game medium only in a predetermined game state (for example, a big hit state),
In the second gaming state, the second counting means updates the second game medium information based on the game medium entering the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means. A gaming machine F18 comprising an updating means.

  According to the gaming machine F18, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F0 to F17, the following effects are produced. In other words, the first medium entry means and the second ball entry means provided in the game medium provision means are configured such that the game medium used for the game can enter, and the first game state and the second game state are the first in the first game state and the second game state. The game medium can be entered into the ball entry means, and the game medium can be entered into the second ball entry means only in a predetermined game state. In the second game state, the second game medium information is updated based on the game medium entering the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means. Thereby, in the second gaming state, the game medium is given based on the game medium entering the first ball entry means, and the game medium is given based on the game medium having entered the second ball entry means. Since it is not necessary to distinguish and count the game media to be played, it is not necessary to complicate the control related to the update processing of the game media information given during the second game state, and the control load can be reduced. There is.

In any of the gaming machines F0 to F17,
The game medium giving means is
A first entry means (for example, a start winning opening 4) and a second entry means (for example, a specific winning opening 5a) capable of entering a game medium used in the game,
The first entry means is configured to allow entry of game media in the first game state and the second game state,
The second entry means is configured to allow entry of a game medium only in a predetermined game state (for example, a big hit state),
The second counting means includes a second single update means for updating the second game medium information based on a game medium entering the second ball entry means in the second game state,
The first counting means includes a first single update means for updating the first game medium information based on a game medium entering the first ball entry means in the second game state. A gaming machine F19 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine F19, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F0 to F17, the following effects are produced. In other words, the first medium entry means and the second ball entry means provided in the game medium provision means are configured such that the game medium used for the game can enter, and the first game state and the second game state are the first in the first game state and the second game state. The game medium is configured to be able to enter the entrance means, and the game medium is configured to be able to enter the second entrance means only in a predetermined gaming state, and the second single update means provided in the second counting means In the second game state, the second game medium information is updated based on the game medium entering the second ball entry means, and the second game state is updated by the first single update means provided in the first count means. The first game medium information is updated based on the game medium entering the first ball entry means.

  Since the second game medium information stored in the second counting means cannot be used for the game after the end of the second gaming state, it is less versatile than the first game medium information stored in the first counting means. The game value is low for the player. Further, since the second entry means is configured so that the game medium can enter only in the predetermined game state of the second game state, the second entry means is directly related to the second game state. The ball means is configured to allow the game medium to enter even in the first game state other than the second game state, and is not directly related to the second game state. Therefore, when a game medium enters the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means during the second game state, all the game medium information based on the ball entry is stored in the second counting means. At this time, if the second counting means stores a game medium entry into the first entering means that can occur independently of the second gaming state and should be stored in the first counting means, the player's game It will damage value. Accordingly, the second game medium information is updated based on the game medium that has entered the second entry means by the second single update means provided in the second count means, and the first count means provided in the first count means. The single update means is configured to update the first game medium information based on the game medium that has entered the first entry means. Thereby, even if it is a 2nd game state, when a game medium enters by the 1st entrance means, it can memorize | store as 1st game medium information with a high game value, Therefore A player's game value is obtained. There is an effect that a suitable gaming environment can be constructed without any damage.

In any of the gaming machines F0 to F19,
The gaming state changing means is a fixed amount for changing from the second gaming state to the first gaming state when the second gaming medium information stored in the second counting means reaches a predetermined number. A gaming machine F20 including an ending means.

  According to the gaming machine F20, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F0 to F19, the following effects are produced. That is, when the second game medium information stored in the second counting unit reaches a predetermined number by the fixed amount ending unit provided in the gaming state changing unit, the first gaming state is changed from the second gaming state. Changed to Accordingly, it is possible to realize a gameability (so-called quantitative system) for ending the second game state when the number of game media provided during the second game state reaches a certain number. In the conventional quantitative system, the game media staff decides the stop by judging the game media possessed by the player based on the estimated amount, but the given game media is managed numerically and managed with accurate numeric judgment By deciding on the stop, the grounds for the stop will be clarified, so the work of the game hall staff will be reduced, and a gaming environment according to the specifications of the game will be provided without causing any doubt to the player There is an effect that can be.

In any of the gaming machines F0 to F19,
The gaming machine F21, wherein the gaming state changing means changes the gaming state based on a game result by the game executing means.

  According to the gaming machine F21, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F0 to F19, the following effects are produced. That is, the game state is changed by the game state changing means based on the game result by the game executing means. Thus, the gaming state is changed based on the gaming result, and a new gaming property in which there is a gaming medium whose use is restricted based on the gaming state is created. There is an effect that the playability of the game is born and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

<G group>
A game medium counting means (for example, a normal time ball counter 213c or a lucky central ball counter 213d) for counting the number of game media usable in the game;
Game execution means (for example, ball launching unit 66) for playing a game based on the game media counted by the game media counting means;
Lottery information acquisition means (for example, a start winning opening 4) for acquiring lottery information based on establishment of a start condition based on a game by the game execution means;
Determination means for determining the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means (for example, change start processing (S1307));
Display means (for example, the third symbol display device 81) for dynamically displaying the identification information based on the determination result of the determination means;
In the dynamic display, when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode, a game medium giving means for giving a game medium to the player (for example, the specific winning opening 5a),
Game state changing means (for example, unlimited flag 213h) for changing the gaming state based on a predetermined opportunity,
The game medium counting means includes
First counting means (for example, sharable balls) related to the gaming medium granted to the player by the gaming medium giving means in the first gaming state (for example, “normal gaming state”) Normal time counter 213c),
Second memory for storing second game medium information (for example, lucky balls) related to the game medium provided to the player by the game medium providing means in a second game state (for example, lucky period) different from the first game state. Counting means (for example, a lucky central ball counter 213d),
The gaming state changing means is configured to change from the second gaming state to the first gaming state when a predetermined regulation condition is established in the second gaming state,
The game execution means includes restriction means for restricting a game based on the second game medium information stored in the second counting means in the first gaming state (for example, the unusable area 213e),
In the second gaming state, the gaming machine G0 is provided with situation notifying means (for example, a shutter accessory 228) for notifying the player of the relationship between the current gaming situation and the prescribed condition.

  According to the gaming machine G0, the number of game media that can be used for the game is counted by the game medium counting means, and the game is executed by the game execution means based on the game media counted by the game medium counting means, and the game execution is performed. The lottery information is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means based on the establishment of the start condition based on the game by the means, the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means is determined by the determination means, and based on the determination result of the determination means When the identification information is dynamically displayed by the display means, and the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode in the dynamic display, the game medium is acquired by the game medium provision means, and a predetermined opportunity is obtained. Based on the game state change means, the game state is changed. Further, the first counting means provided in the gaming medium counting means stores the first game medium information relating to the game medium acquired by the game medium giving means in the first gaming state. Further, the second counting means provided in the gaming medium counting means stores the second game medium information related to the gaming media acquired by the gaming medium giving means in the second gaming state different from the first gaming state. Further, in the second gaming state, when a predetermined prescribed condition is satisfied, the gaming state changing unit changes the second gaming state to the first gaming state. In addition, the limiting means provided in the game execution means limits the game based on the second game medium information stored in the second counting means in the first gaming state, and the situation notification means provided in the game execution means. Thus, in the second gaming state, the player is notified of the relationship between the current gaming situation and the prescribed conditions. As a result, regarding the game media individually counted in the first game state and the second game state, the game related to the second game medium information is limited in the first game state, so the game is counted for each game state. Differences can be made in the media. Since the game can be changed based on this difference, the second game state is continued in the second game state, and the game medium counted by the second counting means is continuously played. It is possible to increase the interest of the game by creating a new playability of whether or not to use it. Further, the situation notifying means notifies the player of the relationship between the specified condition that is a condition for changing the second gaming state to the first gaming state and the current gaming situation. Therefore, the content of the notification regarding the relationship between the current game situation and the prescribed condition regarding whether or not the player can continuously play a game based on the second game medium information given in the second game state. By confirming, for example, a game can be performed while estimating the possibility that the second game state being executed will be changed to the first game state. There is an effect that it can produce a special effect. In addition, “notify the relationship between the current gaming situation and the prescribed condition” means that when extracting the difference between the prescribed condition and the current gaming situation and notifying the difference, This includes a case where notification is given by causing a movable accessory or the like to notify that a predetermined gaming situation has been achieved.

In gaming machine G1,
The situation notifying means notifies the relationship between the current gaming situation and the specified condition in an effect mode associated with the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the display means. .

  According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G0, the following effects are produced. That is, the situation notification means notifies the relationship between the current game situation and the specified condition in an effect manner associated with the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the display means. In this way, the notification contents of the status notification means for performing the dynamic display of the display means for performing notification as to whether or not the game value is given and the notification as to whether or not the given game value can be continuously used. By producing the above in association with each other, there is an effect that it is possible to create a new interest that links the two game characteristics.

In the gaming machine G0 or G1,
The situation notification means includes a first relationship notification mode (for example, see FIG. 34 (b)) indicating that the relationship between the current gaming situation and the prescribed condition is a first relationship, and the first relationship based on the first relationship. A second relationship notification mode (for example, see FIG. 34 (c)) indicating that the second condition is easy to be established, and can be executed.
The display unit performs the dynamic display in a first dynamic mode (for example, see FIG. 34 (b)) when the status notification unit is in the first relationship notification mode, and the status notification. When the means is the second relation notification mode, the dynamic display is executed in a second dynamic mode (for example, see FIG. 34 (d)) having a display ratio smaller than that of the first dynamic mode. Characteristic gaming machine G2.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the following effects are produced. That is, the first relation notification mode indicating that the relationship between the current gaming situation and the prescribed condition is the first relation by the situation notifying means, and the second relation in which the prescribed condition is more easily established than the first relation. And a second relation notification mode indicating that it is executable. Further, the display means executes the dynamic display in the first dynamic mode when the change suggesting unit is in the first mode, and the dynamic display is performed in the first mode when the change suggesting unit is in the second suggestion mode. It is executed in the second dynamic mode having a display ratio smaller than that of the one dynamic mode. Thereby, the higher the possibility of changing from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, the smaller the display ratio of the dynamic display, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize the content of the notification by the status notification means. There is an effect that can be.

In any of the gaming machines G0 to G2,
The dynamic display is composed of a result suggesting mode (for example, reach display) that suggests a determination result of the determining unit and a previous stage suggesting mode (for example, high-speed fluctuation) that is executed before the result suggesting mode. Has been
The status notification means can execute a condition establishment notification mode (for example, see FIG. 34 (d)) that notifies that the prescribed condition is satisfied,
The gaming machine G3, wherein the condition establishment notification mode is executed in the previous stage suggestion mode of the dynamic display executed after the change from the second gaming state to the first gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G0 to G2, the following effects are produced. That is, the dynamic display is composed of a result suggesting mode that suggests the determination result of the determining means and a previous stage suggesting mode that is executed before the result suggesting mode. In addition, a condition establishment notification mode for notifying that the prescribed condition is established is executed by the situation notification means, and further, a preliminary stage suggestion of dynamic display executed after the change from the second gaming state to the first gaming state is performed. In the aspect, the condition establishment notification mode is executed by the situation notification unit. Thus, the condition notification means is configured to execute the condition establishment notification mode in the previous stage suggestion mode of the first dynamic display after the second gaming state is ended. When the second gaming state ends, for example, if there is a dynamic display standby count, the next dynamic display is immediately executed, so the situation notification means indicating the end of the second gaming state If the condition establishment notification mode is canceled immediately after the start of the next dynamic display and the condition satisfaction notification mode is canceled, the notification is made despite the fact that the end of the second gaming state has been notified by the turning point and the situation notification means. Since the state is instantaneous, there is a possibility that the player cannot recognize the end of the second gaming state. Therefore, when the condition notification means is executed by the situation notification means, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize the end of the second gaming state by maintaining the state for a predetermined period. There is. In addition, the period during which the condition establishment notification mode is executed by the status notification unit is performed in the previous stage suggestion mode that is executed before the result suggestion mode that suggests the determination result of the determination unit, so that the determination result of the dynamic display There is an effect that it is possible to accurately notify the end of the second gaming state without excessively interfering with the effect.

In any of the gaming machines G0 to G3,
The game execution means includes
Storage means for storing game media (for example, supply passage 65);
Launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 66) for launching the game medium supplied from the storage means;
A collecting means (for example, a collecting passage 41a) for collecting the game medium launched by the emitting means;
A sending means (for example, a discharge passage 42a) for sending the game medium collected by the collecting means to the storing means;
A gaming machine G4 which plays a game while circulating a predetermined game medium in the machine.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G0 to G3, the following effects are produced. That is, the game medium is stored by the storage means provided in the game execution means, the game medium supplied from the storage means is launched by the launch means, the game medium launched by the launch means is collected by the collection means, The game medium collected by the collecting means is sent to the storing means by the sending means, so that a game is played while circulating a predetermined game medium in the machine. As a result, a system that digitizes and manages game media, which is a characteristic function of an in-flight circulation game machine (so-called enclosed game machine), is effectively used to determine whether or not the game media can be used based on the game state. There is an effect that a game specification (so-called lucky number system) can be added.

  In more detail, conventionally, in a game hall that employs a lucky number game specification, the staff of the game hall sequentially confirms the start condition of the second game state, and based on the establishment of the start condition, the upper part of the gaming machine In the second gaming state, whether or not the condition for changing from the second gaming state to the first gaming state has been achieved is monitored. It is necessary to perform an operation to end the second gaming state, or to prompt the player to exchange the assigned game medium when the second gaming state ends.

  When the above-mentioned work is performed by a staff at a game hall, work related to the above game specifications is added in addition to normal work such as abnormality check and cleaning of the gaming machine, so there is a risk that the staff will be burdened with a large work load. is there. On the other hand, even if the number of staff is increased to cope with the above-mentioned game specifications, personnel costs for the increased staff increase, and there is a risk that the management of the amusement hall may be tightened. Therefore, even in an environment where the game specifications that can improve the gameability of the lucky number system can be realized, the game hall does not adopt the lucky number system in consideration of the above-mentioned fears, and is in a normal business form. As a result, the gameability was not improved.

  Therefore, by utilizing the functions of the in-flight circulation type gaming machine, the given game media are digitized and managed, and the game media given based on the game status are individually managed and can be used based on the game status By determining the medium, even if the above game specifications are adopted, the management of the amusement hall is sound without reducing the labor costs without placing a heavy work burden on the amusement hall staff and increasing the number of staff. This is advantageous in that various games can be realized while maintaining the conventional environment.

In gaming machine G4,
The firing means includes
In the second game state, when the first game medium information or the second game medium information is stored in either the first counting means or the second counting means, the game supplied from the storage means Allow the launch of the medium,
In the first gaming state, based on the first game medium information stored in the first counting means, the game medium supplied from the storage means is permitted to be launched, while stored in the second counting means. The gaming machine G5 is configured to prohibit the launching of game media based on the second game media information.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G4, the following effects are produced. That is, in the second gaming state, when the first game medium information or the second game medium information is stored in either the first counting means or the second counting means, the gaming medium supplied from the storing means by the launching means Is allowed to fire. On the other hand, when the first game medium information is stored in the first counting means in the first gaming state, the game medium supplied to the storage means by the launching means is permitted to be launched, while stored in the second counting means. Launching of game media based on the second game media information is prohibited. Thereby, the game media acquired for each game state is counted individually, and in the first game state, the launch of the game media based only on the first game media information stored in the first counting means is permitted, and the second In the gaming state, it is possible to create a situation where launching of game media based on the first game medium information or the second game medium information stored in the first counting means or the second counting means is permitted, and various gaming properties Is effective. Note that, for example, after the gaming state is changed from the previous second gaming state to the first gaming state based on the establishment of the second condition, the first condition is established and the next second gaming is performed from the first gaming state. When the state is changed to the state, the launching unit permits the launch of the game medium based on the first game medium information stored in the first counting unit in the next second gaming state, You may comprise so that discharge | release of a game medium may be permitted based on the 2nd game medium information memorize | stored in a 2nd count means in a 2nd game state.

In gaming machine G5,
The gaming state changing means changes from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on establishment of a first condition (for example, start of jackpot), and the second gaming state based on establishment of the prescribed condition. To the first gaming state from
The firing means includes
When the gaming state changing means changes from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the establishment of the first condition, either the first counting means or the second counting means When the first game medium information or the second game medium information is stored, the game medium supplied from the storage means is permitted to be launched,
When the gaming state changing means changes from the second gaming state to the first gaming state based on the establishment of the prescribed condition, the first counting means stores the first counting means in subsequent games. Based on the game medium information, the launch of the game medium supplied from the storage means is permitted, while the launch of the game medium based on the second game medium information stored in the second counting means is prohibited. A gaming machine G6 characterized by being made.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G5, the following effects are produced. That is, the gaming state changing means changes from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the establishment of the first condition, and changes from the second gaming state to the first gaming state based on the establishment of the prescribed condition. The Further, when the gaming state changing means is changed from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, the first gaming medium information or the second gaming medium information is stored in either the first counting means or the second counting means. The launching means permits the launch of the game medium supplied from the storage means. On the other hand, when the second game state is changed from the second game state to the first game state by the game state changing means, when the first game medium information is stored in the first counting means in the subsequent game, the launch means stores the storage means. While allowing the game medium supplied to the player to be released, the release of the game medium based on the second game medium information stored in the second counting means is prohibited. Thereby, the game media acquired for each game state is counted individually, and in the first game state, the launch of the game media based only on the first game media information stored in the first counting means is permitted, and the second In the gaming state, it is possible to create a situation where launching of game media based on the first game medium information or the second game medium information stored in the first counting means or the second counting means is permitted, and various gaming properties Is effective.

In any of gaming machines G4 to G6,
In the second gaming state, when the second game medium information is stored in the second counting unit, the launching unit is configured to determine the first game medium information stored in the first counting unit based on the first game medium information. A gaming machine G7, wherein the second game medium information stored in the second counting means is preferentially used to execute a game medium launch.

  According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G4 to G6, the following effects are produced. That is, in the second gaming state, when the second game medium information is stored in the second counting means, the launching means causes the first counting medium information stored in the first counting means to be transferred to the second counting means. The game medium is launched using the stored second game medium information preferentially. Thereby, the first game medium information stored in the first counting means has a game value for the player from the second game medium information stored in the second counting means, because there is no restriction on the usable game state. In the second gaming state, the second gaming medium information having a gaming value lower than that of the first gaming medium information can be consumed first, so that the gaming value possessed by the player can be protected without being unnecessarily damaged. There is an effect that.

In any of the gaming machines G0 to G7,
The game medium counting means stores the number of pieces of game medium information based on the rental request as the first game medium information in the first counting means when there is a game medium rental request from a player. Characteristic gaming machine G8.

  According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G0 to G7, the following effects are produced. That is, when there is a game medium rental request from the player, the game medium counting means stores the number of game medium information based on the rental request as first game medium information in the first counting means. Thereby, since the first game medium information is not restricted in use depending on the game state, there is an effect that the rented game medium can be used in any game state without being restricted in use.

  In addition, the gaming characteristics of the above game specifications are likely to produce a more remarkable effect because the rental rate of the game media is different from the prize conversion rate at the game hall window. Specifically, for example, when there is a prize conversion gap such as “lending rate> prize conversion rate”, a prize is exchanged for one game medium in a game with a rented game medium and a game with a given game medium. There will be a difference in game value equivalent to the gap. In such a situation, the player is given a way to play a game using the rented game medium, and continuously playing the game medium using the game medium provided for the game leads to his own benefit. Whether or not the game based on the game medium is continuously performed is a factor that divides the game. In a game hall with such a prize conversion gap, it is possible to acquire the second game state by adopting the above-mentioned game specifications, and whether or not the game can be continuously played with the game medium provided during that time. There is an effect that the effect of the specification can be made remarkable and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In any of gaming machines G0 to G8,
Medium information notifying means (for example, status display) capable of notifying the contents of the first game medium information stored in the first counting means and the contents of the second game medium information stored in the second counting means. A gaming machine G9 comprising a device 85).

  According to the gaming machine G9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G0 to G8, the following effects are produced. That is, the contents of the first game medium information stored in the first counting means and the contents of the second game medium information stored in the second counting means can be notified by the medium information notifying means. Accordingly, the first game medium information stored in the first counting means usable in the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and the second gaming means stored in the second counting means usable only in the second gaming state. 2 game media information can be recognized by each player, for example, how much game media is given during the second game state, or when the game state is changed from the second game state to the first game state In addition, there is an effect that it is possible to clearly recognize how long the game can be continued based on the game medium information stored in the first counting means in the first game state.

In any of gaming machines G6 to G9,
The first condition is:
A predetermined first condition established by the predetermined condition (for example, a big hit with an even number of “first time”), and
A special first condition that is difficult to be established from the predetermined first condition (e.g., a big hit with "3 symbols (turtle)" of "first time"),
The second gaming state includes a special second gaming state (for example, a “lucky” state) and a disadvantageous second gaming state (for example, a “start” state) that is more disadvantageous for the player than the special second gaming state. Prepared,
The gaming state changing means is
First disadvantage changing means for changing to the disadvantage second gaming state based on establishment of the predetermined first condition;
First special changing means for changing to the special second gaming state based on establishment of the special first condition;
A gaming machine G10, comprising:

  According to the gaming machine G10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G6 to G9, the following effects are produced. That is, the first disadvantage changing means provided in the gaming state changing means changes to the disadvantage second gaming state based on the establishment of the predetermined first condition. Further, the first special changing means provided in the gaming state changing means is changed to the special second gaming state based on the establishment of the special first condition. Thereby, regarding the second gaming state, it is possible to provide a special second gaming state that is difficult to start and a disadvantageous second gaming state that is likely to be started. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be enhanced by the game nature.

  The gaming machine G10 includes second gaming state type notifying means (for example, a lucky movable accessory 96 and a start movable accessory 97) for notifying the special second gaming state and the disadvantageous second gaming state in an identifiable manner. A gaming machine G11 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine G11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G10, the following effects are produced. That is, the second gaming state type notifying means notifies the special second gaming state and the disadvantageous second gaming state in an identifiable manner. As a result, it is possible to clearly recognize whether the game is in the special second gaming state or the disadvantaged second gaming state, and performing the game while being aware of the change condition to the first gaming state that is different for each second gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the entertainment in each second gaming state can be fully enjoyed. Note that “notifying in an identifiable manner” means, for example, a plurality of indication objects (for example, movable accessories) that are provided for each second gaming state and are normally invisible to the player. There are cases where the player is informed by making the player visible in accordance with the type of the two gaming states, or the display mode corresponding to each second gaming state is revealed in one display means. included.

In gaming machine G10 or G11,
The prescribed conditions are:
Specific provisional conditions established by specific conditions (end of "time reduction state"),
Special provision conditions that are difficult to establish from the specific provision conditions (for example, “end of“ time reduction state ”after jackpot in“ 4 symbols (shark) ”of“ first time ”),
The gaming state changing means is
Second disadvantage changing means for ending the disadvantage second gaming state based on establishment of the specific prescribed condition;
A second special changing means for ending the special second gaming state based on establishment of the special prescribed condition;
A gaming machine G12 characterized by comprising:

  According to the gaming machine G12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G10 or G11, the following effects are produced. In other words, the second disadvantageous gaming state provided in the gaming state changing means terminates the disadvantageous second gaming state based on the establishment of the specific prescribed condition. Also, the second special change means provided in the game state change means ends the special second game state based on the establishment of the special prescribed condition. Thereby, regarding the second gaming state, it is possible to provide a special second gaming state that is difficult to start and difficult to finish, and an unfavorable second gaming state that is easy to start and finish, each game having different start conditions and end conditions. By creating a state, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be enhanced by various game characteristics.

In gaming machine G12,
The second disadvantage changing means changes the disadvantage second gaming state to the first gaming state based on establishment of the specific prescribed condition,
The gaming machine G13, wherein the second special changing means changes the special second gaming state to the disadvantageous second gaming state based on the establishment of the special prescribed condition.

  According to the gaming machine G13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G12, the following effects are produced. That is, the second disadvantageous change means changes the disadvantageous second game state to the first game state based on the establishment of the specific prescribed condition, and the second special change means changes the special second game based on the establishment of the special prescribed condition. The state is changed to the disadvantaged second gaming state. As a result, regarding the second gaming state, even if it is difficult to start and finishes, it is disadvantageous that the special second state ends via the second gaming state, and the disadvantage is that the first gaming state is immediately changed when it is easily started. Such as a disadvantageous second gaming state can be provided, and by creating a gaming state having different start conditions and ending conditions, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be enhanced by various game characteristics. In addition, by providing a plurality of types of second gaming state, the period in which the second gaming medium information counted separately from the first gaming medium information acquired in the first gaming state can be varied, There is an effect that the fun of the game can be enhanced by various game characteristics.

In any of the gaming machines G0 to G13,
A gaming machine G14 comprising condition notifying means (situation display device 85) for notifying the game state changing condition by the gaming state changing means.

  According to the gaming machine G14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G0 to G13, the following effects are produced. That is, the condition notification means notifies the game state change condition by the game state change means. This allows the player to recognize the condition for changing the game state. For example, when the game by the second counting means is prohibited when the game state is changed from the second game state to the first game state. However, by recognizing the conditions in advance, it is possible to construct a comfortable gaming environment without giving the player unnecessary confusion regarding the game specifications.

In gaming machine G14,
The gaming machine G15, wherein the condition notifying means is constituted by an electric display means capable of electrically changing display contents.

  According to the gaming machine G15, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G14, the following effects are produced. That is, the condition notifying means is constituted by an electric display means capable of electrically changing display contents. As a result, the contents can be changed and displayed in accordance with the condition for changing the game state, so that the player can appropriately recognize the condition for changing the game state with a simple configuration. is there.

In any of gaming machines G9 to G15,
The notification by the medium information notification means and the notification by the condition notification means are displayed on one status display means (the lucky number display area 85b and the value information display area 85c of the status display device 85). G16.

  According to the gaming machine G16, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G9 to G15, the following effects are produced. That is, the notification by the medium information notification unit and the notification by the condition notification unit are displayed by one status display unit. That is, the first game medium information and the second game medium information and the game state change condition by the game state change means are displayed on one status display means. Thus, the player can recognize the number of game media owned by the player and the conditions for changing to the second game state by the status display means, so that the extra cost is eliminated without using other devices. There is an effect that the player can recognize the gameability and the game situation of the lucky number system without spending.

In gaming machine G16,
The gaming machine G17, wherein in the status display means, notification by the medium information notification means and notification by the condition notification means are executed simultaneously.

  According to the gaming machine G17, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G16, the following effects are produced. That is, the notification by the medium information notification unit and the notification by the condition notification unit are simultaneously executed by one status display unit. That is, the first game medium information and the second game medium information and the game state change condition by the game state change means are simultaneously displayed on one status display means. Thus, the player can recognize the number of game media owned by the player and the conditions for changing to the second game state by looking at the notification content of the status display means. There is an effect that the player can uniquely recognize the sex.

In gaming machine G16 or G17,
The gaming machine is composed of a gaming board (for example, gaming board 13) and a frame member (for example, an overhanging portion 16) to which the gaming board is replaceably attached.
The gaming machine G18, wherein the status display means is provided on the frame member.

  According to the gaming machine G18, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G16 or G17, the following effects are produced. In other words, the status display means is provided on a frame member to which the game board is replaceably attached. Accordingly, even when the game board is replaced, the status display means can be used continuously with the frame member being provided, and it is not necessary to provide the status display means on the game board to be replaced. There is an effect that the cost of the entire game board can be reduced as compared with the case where is installed.

In any of the gaming machines G0 to G18,
The game medium giving means is
A first entry means (for example, a start winning opening 4) and a second entry means (for example, a specific winning opening 5a) capable of entering a game medium used in the game,
The first entry means is configured to allow entry of game media in the first game state and the second game state,
The second entry means is configured to allow entry of a game medium only in a predetermined game state (for example, a big hit state),
In the second gaming state, the second counting means updates the second game medium information based on the game medium entering the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means. A gaming machine G19 comprising an updating means.

  According to the gaming machine G19, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G0 to G18, the following effects are produced. In other words, the first medium entry means and the second ball entry means provided in the game medium provision means are configured such that the game medium used for the game can enter, and the first game state and the second game state are the first in the first game state and the second game state. The game medium can be entered into the ball entry means, and the game medium can be entered into the second ball entry means only in a predetermined game state. In the second game state, the second game medium information is updated based on the game medium entering the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means. Thereby, in the second gaming state, the game medium is given based on the game medium entering the first ball entry means, and the game medium is given based on the game medium having entered the second ball entry means. Since it is not necessary to distinguish and count the game media to be played, it is not necessary to complicate the control related to the update processing of the game media information given during the second game state, and the control load can be reduced. There is.

In any of the gaming machines G0 to G18,
The game medium giving means is
A first entry means (for example, a start winning opening 4) and a second entry means (for example, a specific winning opening 5a) capable of entering a game medium used in the game,
The first entry means is configured to allow entry of game media in the first game state and the second game state,
The second entry means is configured to allow entry of a game medium only in a predetermined game state (for example, a big hit state),
The second counting means includes a second single update means for updating the second game medium information based on a game medium entering the second ball entry means in the second game state,
The first counting means includes a first single update means for updating the first game medium information based on a game medium entering the first ball entry means in the second game state. A gaming machine G20 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine G20, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G0 to G18, the following effects are produced. In other words, the first medium entry means and the second ball entry means provided in the game medium provision means are configured such that the game medium used for the game can enter, and the first game state and the second game state are the first in the first game state and the second game state. The game medium is configured to be able to enter the entrance means, and the game medium is configured to be able to enter the second entrance means only in a predetermined gaming state, and the second single update means provided in the second counting means In the second game state, the second game medium information is updated based on the game medium entering the second ball entry means, and the second game state is updated by the first single update means provided in the first count means. The first game medium information is updated based on the game medium entering the first ball entry means.

  The second game medium information stored in the second counting means cannot be used for the game after the end of the second gaming state, and is therefore more versatile than the first game medium information stored in the first counting means. The game value is low for the player. Further, since the second entry means is configured so that the game medium can enter only in the predetermined game state of the second game state, the second entry means is directly related to the second game state. The ball means is configured to allow the game medium to enter even in the first game state other than the second game state, and is not directly related to the second game state. Therefore, when a game medium enters the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means during the second game state, all the game medium information based on the ball entry is stored in the second counting means. At this time, if the second counting means stores a game medium entry into the first entering means that can occur independently of the second gaming state and should be stored in the first counting means, the player's game It will damage value. Accordingly, the second game medium information is updated based on the game medium that has entered the second entry means by the second single update means provided in the second count means, and the first count means provided in the first count means. The single update means is configured to update the first game medium information based on the game medium that has entered the first entry means. Thereby, even if it is a 2nd game state, when a game medium enters by the 1st entrance means, it can memorize | store as 1st game medium information with a high game value, Therefore A player's game value is obtained. There is an effect that a suitable gaming environment can be constructed without any damage.

In any of the gaming machines G0 to G20,
The gaming state changing means is a fixed amount for changing from the second gaming state to the first gaming state when the second gaming medium information stored in the second counting means reaches a predetermined number. A gaming machine G21, comprising a termination means.

  According to the gaming machine G21, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G0 to G20, the following effects are produced. That is, when the second game medium information stored in the second counting unit reaches a predetermined number by the fixed amount ending unit provided in the gaming state changing unit, the first gaming state is changed from the second gaming state. Changed to Accordingly, it is possible to realize a gameability (so-called quantitative system) for ending the second game state when the number of game media provided during the second game state reaches a certain number. In the conventional quantitative system, the game media staff decides the stop by judging the game media possessed by the player based on the estimated amount, but the given game media is managed numerically and managed with accurate numeric judgment By deciding on the stop, the grounds for the stop will be clarified, so the work of the game hall staff will be reduced, and a gaming environment according to the specifications of the game will be provided without causing any doubt to the player There is an effect that can be.

In any of the gaming machines G0 to G20,
The gaming machine G22, wherein the gaming state changing means changes the gaming state based on a gaming result by the gaming execution means.

  According to the gaming machine G22, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G0 to G20, the following effects are produced. That is, the game state is changed by the game state changing means based on the game result by the game executing means. Thus, the gaming state is changed based on the gaming result, and a new gaming property in which there is a gaming medium whose use is restricted based on the gaming state is created. There is an effect that the playability of the game is born and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

<Group H>
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 10) that performs a game, and a game recording medium (for example, a membership card 300) that is arranged corresponding to the gaming machine and records various information that is used for games in the gaming machine. A game assisting means (card sand device 70) that can be thrown in, a management means (for example, a hall) configured to be able to communicate with the game assisting means and the gaming machine, and for managing the usage status of the gaming assisting means and the gaming machine. A gaming system comprising a computer 263),
The game assisting means includes:
Auxiliary side reading means (for example, a card reader / writer 274) for reading the various information recorded on the game recording medium;
Auxiliary transmission means (for example, main processing (see FIG. 35)) for transmitting the various information read by the auxiliary reading means to the gaming machine;
Auxiliary side receiving means (for example, main processing (see FIG. 35)) for receiving the various information based on the gaming result of the gaming machine when a predetermined condition (for example, operation of the return button 75) is established;
Auxiliary side writing means (for example, card reader / writer 274) for writing the various information received by the auxiliary side receiving means to the game recording medium,
The gaming machine is
A model-side game medium counting means (for example, a normal time ball counter 213c or a lucky central ball counter 213d) for counting the number of game media usable in the game;
Model-side game execution means (for example, ball launch unit 66) for playing a game based on the game media counted by the model-side game medium counting means;
A model-side game medium providing means (for example, a specific prize opening 5a) for giving a game medium to a player based on a game result by the model-side game execution means;
A model-side game state changing means (for example, an unrestricted flag 213h) for changing the game state based on a game result by the model-side game executing means;
A model side receiving means (for example, a clearing process (S2105)) for receiving the various information transmitted by the auxiliary side transmitting means;
A model-side transmission unit (for example, a settlement process (S2105)) that transmits the various types of information to the game assisting unit when the predetermined condition is satisfied,
The model-side game medium counting means is
In the first game state (for example, “normal game state”), the model-side memory that stores first game medium information (for example, sharable balls) related to the game medium given to the player by the model-side game medium giving means. 1 counting means (for example, a normal time ball counter 213c),
Stores second game medium information (for example, lucky balls) relating to the game medium provided to the player by the model-side game medium providing means in a second game state (for example, lucky period) different from the first game state. A model side second counting means (for example, a lucky central ball counter 213d),
The model-side game execution means is
A model-side restriction unit (for example, an unusable area 213e) that restricts a game based on the second game medium information stored in the model-side second counting unit in the first game state;
The game recording medium is:
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, medium-side first counting means (for example, a normal time memory) that records the first game medium information stored in the model-side first counting means transmitted by the model-side transmitting means. 300c)
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, medium-side second counting means for recording the second game medium information stored in the model-side second counting means transmitted by the model-side transmitting means (for example, game unusable) A memory 300d),
The game assisting means includes:
When the auxiliary transmission means transmits various information of the game recording medium to the gaming machine, the first game medium information recorded in the medium-side first counting means is transmitted to the gaming machine, The gaming system H1 is configured not to transmit the second game medium information recorded in the medium-side second counting means.

  According to the gaming system H1, a game is played in the gaming machine, and a game recording medium in which various information used for gaming in the gaming machine can be input by the gaming auxiliary means arranged corresponding to the gaming machine. The specification status of the game auxiliary means and the gaming machine is managed by the management means configured to be communicable with the game auxiliary means and the gaming machine. In the game assisting means, various information recorded on the game recording medium is read by the auxiliary reading means, and the various information read by the auxiliary reading means is transmitted to the gaming machine by the auxiliary transmitting means. Furthermore, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the auxiliary side receiving means receives various information based on the game result of the gaming machine. Further, various information received by the auxiliary side receiving means is written to the game recording medium by the auxiliary side writing means. In the gaming machine, the number of game media that can be used for the game is counted by the model-side game medium counting means, and the game is performed by the model-side game execution means based on the game media counted by the model-side game medium counting means. Based on the game result by the model-side game execution means, the game medium is given to the player by the model-side game medium giving means, and the model-side game state changing means based on the game result by the model-side game execution means As a result, the gaming state is changed. Further, various types of information transmitted by the auxiliary transmission unit are received by the model side reception unit. In addition, when the predetermined condition is satisfied by the model side transmission unit, various information is transmitted to the game assisting unit. Furthermore, the first game medium information relating to the game medium given to the player by the model side game medium giving means in the first game state is stored by the model side first counting means provided in the model side game medium counting means, The second game medium related to the game medium given to the player by the model side game medium giving means in the second game state different from the first game state by the model side second counting means provided in the model side game medium counting means. Information is stored. Further, the game based on the second game medium information stored in the model side second counting unit in the first game state is limited by the model side limiting unit provided in the model side game executing unit. In the game recording medium, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first game medium information stored in the model-side first counting means transmitted by the model-side transmitting means is recorded by the medium-side first counting means. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the second game medium information stored in the model-side second counting means transmitted by the model-side transmitting means is recorded by the medium-side second counting means. The game assisting means transmits the first game medium information recorded in the medium-side first counting means to the gaming machine when the auxiliary-side transmitting means transmits various information of the game recording medium to the gaming machine. The second game medium information recorded in the medium side second counting means is not transmitted. Thereby, in the gaming machine, it is possible to create a gaming medium whose use is restricted based on the gaming state, and after the predetermined condition is established, the second gaming medium information recorded in the gaming recording medium is transmitted to the gaming machine. By not doing, the game based on the second game medium information can be restricted. Therefore, there is a game medium that is restricted in use based on the gaming state, and even if a predetermined condition is satisfied once, it creates a new gameability that there is a game medium that is restricted in use. There is an effect that it can be increased.

A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 10) that performs a game, and a game recording medium (for example, a membership card 300) that is arranged corresponding to the gaming machine and records various information that is used for games in the gaming machine. A game assisting means (card sand device 70) that can be thrown in, a management means (for example, a hall) configured to be able to communicate with the game assisting means and the gaming machine, and for managing the usage status of the gaming assisting means and the gaming machine. A gaming system comprising a computer 263),
The game assisting means includes:
Auxiliary side reading means (for example, a card reader / writer 274) for reading the various information recorded on the game recording medium;
Auxiliary transmission means (for example, main processing (see FIG. 35)) for transmitting the various information read by the auxiliary reading means to the gaming machine;
Auxiliary side receiving means (for example, main processing (see FIG. 35)) for receiving the various information based on the gaming result of the gaming machine when a predetermined condition (for example, operation of the return button 75) is established;
Auxiliary side writing means (for example, card reader / writer 274) for writing the various information received by the auxiliary side receiving means to the game recording medium,
The gaming machine is
A model-side game medium counting means (for example, a normal time ball counter 213c or a lucky central ball counter 213d) for counting the number of game media usable in the game;
Model-side game execution means (for example, ball launch unit 66) for playing a game based on the game media counted by the model-side game medium counting means;
A model-side game medium providing means (for example, a specific prize opening 5a) for giving a game medium to a player based on a game result by the model-side game execution means;
A model-side game state changing means (for example, an unrestricted flag 213h) for changing the game state based on a game result by the model-side game executing means;
A model side receiving means (for example, a clearing process (S2105)) for receiving the various information transmitted by the auxiliary side transmitting means;
Model-side unique information storage means (for example, gaming machine information 212b) for storing unique information unique to the gaming machine;
A model-side transmission unit (for example, a settlement process (S2105)) that transmits the unique information and the various types of information to the game assisting unit when the predetermined condition is satisfied,
The model-side game medium counting means is
The model-side first that stores first game medium information (for example, sharable balls) related to the game medium given to the player by the model-side game medium giving means in the first game state (eg, “normal game state”) Counting means (for example, a normal time ball counter 213c);
Second game medium information (for example, lucky balls) relating to the game medium provided to the player by the model-side game medium providing means in a second game state (for example, lucky period) different from the first game state is stored. A model-side second counting means (for example, a lucky central ball counter 213d),
The model-side game execution means is
A model-side restriction unit (for example, an unusable area 213e) that restricts a game based on the second game medium information stored in the model-side second counting unit in the first game state;
The game recording medium is:
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, medium-side first counting means (for example, a normal time memory) that records the first game medium information stored in the model-side first counting means transmitted by the model-side transmitting means. 300c)
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, medium side second counting means (for example, lucky medium memory) for recording the second game medium information stored in the model side second counting means transmitted by the model side transmitting means. 300e)
Medium side unique information storage means (for example, game machine information memory 300f) that stores the unique information stored in the model side unique information storage means transmitted by the model side transmission means when the predetermined condition is satisfied. And comprising
The gaming machine is
Model side base determination means (for example, base information confirmation processing) for determining the unique information stored in the medium side unique information storage means by the auxiliary side transmission means and the unique information stored in the model side unique information storage means (S2851))
In the model-side platform determination unit, the determination result between the unique information stored in the medium-side unique information storage unit and the unique information stored in the model-side unique information storage unit is determined to be the first result. A model-side first information transmitting means (for example, coincidence information) for transmitting the first information to the game assisting means,
In the model side stand determination means, the determination result of the unique information stored in the medium side unique information storage means and the unique information stored in the model side unique information storage means is determined to be the second result. A model-side second information transmitting means (for example, mismatch information) for transmitting second information to the game assisting means,
The game assisting means includes:
When transmitting various information of the game recording medium to the gaming machine by the auxiliary side transmission means, the first game medium information recorded in the medium side first counting means is transmitted to the gaming machine,
When the first information is transmitted by the model-side first information transmitting means, the second game medium information stored in the medium-side second counting means is transmitted to the gaming machine,
When the second information is transmitted by the model-side second information transmitting means, the second game medium information recorded in the medium-side second counting means is not transmitted. H2.

  According to the gaming system H2, a game is performed in the gaming machine, and a game recording medium in which various information used for gaming in the gaming machine can be input by the gaming auxiliary means arranged corresponding to the gaming machine. The specification status of the game auxiliary means and the gaming machine is managed by the management means configured to be communicable with the game auxiliary means and the gaming machine. In the game assisting means, various information recorded on the game recording medium is read by the auxiliary reading means, and the various information read by the auxiliary reading means is transmitted to the gaming machine by the auxiliary transmitting means. Furthermore, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the auxiliary side receiving means receives various information based on the game result of the gaming machine. Further, various information received by the auxiliary side receiving means is written to the game recording medium by the auxiliary side writing means. In the gaming machine, the number of game media that can be used for the game is counted by the model-side game medium counting means, and the game is performed by the model-side game execution means based on the game media counted by the model-side game medium counting means. Based on the game result by the model-side game execution means, the game medium is given to the player by the model-side game medium giving means, and the model-side game state changing means based on the game result by the model-side game execution means As a result, the gaming state is changed. Further, various types of information transmitted by the auxiliary transmission unit are received by the model side reception unit. Further, unique information unique to the gaming machine is stored by the model-side unique information storage means. In addition, when the predetermined condition is satisfied by the model side transmission unit, the unique information and various types of information are transmitted to the game assisting unit. Furthermore, the first game medium information relating to the game medium given to the player by the model side game medium giving means in the first game state is stored by the model side first counting means provided in the model side game medium counting means, The second game medium related to the game medium given to the player by the model side game medium giving means in the second game state different from the first game state by the model side second counting means provided in the model side game medium counting means. Information is stored. Further, the game based on the second game medium information stored in the model side second counting unit in the first game state is limited by the model side limiting unit provided in the model side game executing unit. In the game recording medium, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first game medium information stored in the model-side first counting means transmitted by the model-side transmitting means is recorded by the medium-side first counting means. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the second game medium information stored in the model-side second counting means transmitted by the model-side transmitting means is recorded by the medium-side second counting means. Further, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the medium side unique information storage means stores the unique information stored in the model side unique information storage means transmitted by the model side transmission means. In the gaming machine, the model-side platform determination unit determines the unique information stored in the medium-side unique information storage unit by the auxiliary-side transmission unit and the unique information stored in the model-side unique information storage unit. Furthermore, the determination result between the unique information stored in the medium-side unique information storage means and the unique information stored in the model-side unique information storage means is a first result (for example, a positive determination) by the model-side platform determination means. When it is determined that there is, the first information is transmitted to the auxiliary game means by the model-side first information transmission means. On the other hand, the determination result between the unique information stored in the medium-side unique information storage means and the unique information stored in the model-side unique information storage means is the second result (for example, no-determination) by the model-side platform determination means. Is determined, the second information is transmitted to the auxiliary game means by the model-side second information transmission means. The game assisting means transmits the first game medium information recorded in the medium-side first counting means to the gaming machine when the auxiliary-side transmitting means transmits various information of the game recording medium to the gaming machine. . Further, when the first information is transmitted by the model side first information transmitting unit, the second game medium information stored in the medium side second counting unit is transmitted to the gaming machine, while the model side second information transmission is performed. When the second information is transmitted by the means, the second game medium information recorded in the medium-side second counting means is not transmitted. Thereby, in the gaming machine, it is possible to create a gaming medium whose use is restricted based on the gaming state, and for the gaming machine after the predetermined condition is satisfied, if the determination of the gaming machine is not the predetermined determination result (correct determination). By not transmitting the second game medium information recorded on the recording medium to the gaming machine, it is possible to limit the game based on the second game medium information. Therefore, there is a game medium whose use is restricted based on the game state and there is a game medium whose use is restricted unless the base information is determined once the predetermined condition is satisfied. By creating, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 10) that performs a game, and a game recording medium (for example, a membership card 300) that is arranged corresponding to the gaming machine and records various information that is used for games in the gaming machine. A game assisting means (card sand device 70) that can be thrown in, a management means (for example, hall A gaming system comprising a computer 263),
The game assisting means includes:
Auxiliary side reading means (for example, a card reader / writer 274) for reading the various information recorded on the game recording medium;
Auxiliary transmission means (for example, main processing (see FIG. 35)) for transmitting the various information read by the auxiliary reading means to the gaming machine;
Auxiliary side receiving means (for example, main processing (see FIG. 35)) for receiving the various information based on the gaming result of the gaming machine when a predetermined condition (for example, operation of the return button 75) is established;
Auxiliary side writing means (for example, card reader / writer 274) for writing the various information received by the auxiliary side receiving means to the game recording medium,
The gaming machine is
A model-side game medium counting means (for example, a normal time ball counter 213c or a lucky central ball counter 213d) for counting the number of game media usable in the game;
Model-side game execution means (for example, ball launch unit 66) for playing a game based on the game media counted by the model-side game medium counting means;
A model-side game medium providing means (for example, a specific prize opening 5a) for giving a game medium to a player based on a game result by the model-side game execution means;
A model-side game state changing means (for example, an unrestricted flag 213h) for changing the game state based on a game result by the model-side game executing means;
A model side receiving means (for example, a clearing process (S2105)) for receiving the various information transmitted by the auxiliary side transmitting means;
A model-side time information storage means (for example, timer counter 213o) for storing information relating to time;
A model-side transmission unit (for example, a settlement process (S2105)) that transmits the information about the time and the various types of information to the game assisting unit when the predetermined condition is satisfied,
The model-side game medium counting means is
In the first gaming state (for example, “normal gaming state”), the model side storing first game medium information (for example, sharable balls) related to the game medium given to the player by the model side game medium giving means. 1 counting means (for example, a normal time ball counter 213c),
Second game medium information (for example, lucky balls) relating to the game medium provided to the player by the model-side game medium providing means in a second game state (for example, lucky period) different from the first game state is stored. A model-side second counting means (for example, a lucky central ball counter 213d),
The model-side game execution means includes model-side restriction means (for example, an unusable area 213e) for restricting a game based on the second game medium information stored in the model-side second counting means in the first gaming state. Prepared,
The game recording medium is:
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, medium-side first counting means (for example, a normal time memory) that records the first game medium information stored in the model-side first counting means transmitted by the model-side transmitting means. 300c)
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, medium side second counting means (for example, lucky medium memory) for recording the second game medium information stored in the model side second counting means transmitted by the model side transmitting means. 300e)
Medium-side time information storage means (for example, a date memory 300h) for storing information on the time stored in the model-side time information storage means transmitted by the model-side transmission means when the predetermined condition is satisfied; With
The gaming machine is
Model side time determination means (for example, a stand and a table) that determines information related to time stored in the medium side time information storage means by the auxiliary side transmission means and information related to time stored in the model side time information storage means. Date information confirmation processing (S2881)),
In the model-side time determination unit, it is determined that the determination result between the information related to the time stored in the medium-side time information storage unit and the information related to the time stored in the model-side time information storage unit is the first result. A model-side first information transmitting means (for example, coincidence information) for transmitting the first information to the game assisting means,
In the model-side time determination unit, it is determined that the determination result between the information related to the time stored in the medium-side time information storage unit and the information related to the time stored in the model-side time information storage unit is a second result. A model-side second information transmitting means (for example, mismatch information) for transmitting the second information to the game assisting means,
The game assisting means includes:
When transmitting various information of the game recording medium to the gaming machine by the auxiliary side transmission means, the first game medium information recorded in the medium side first counting means is transmitted to the gaming machine,
When the second information is transmitted by the model-side first information transmitting means, the second game medium information stored in the medium-side second counting means is transmitted to the gaming machine,
When the second information is transmitted by the model-side second information transmitting means, the second game medium information recorded in the medium-side second counting means is not transmitted. H3.

  According to the gaming system H3, a game is played in the gaming machine, and a game recording medium on which various information used for gaming in the gaming machine can be input by a gaming auxiliary means arranged corresponding to the gaming machine. The specification status of the game auxiliary means and the gaming machine is managed by the management means configured to be communicable with the game auxiliary means and the gaming machine. In the game assisting means, various information recorded on the game recording medium is read by the auxiliary reading means, and the various information read by the auxiliary reading means is transmitted to the gaming machine by the auxiliary transmitting means. Furthermore, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the auxiliary side receiving means receives various information based on the game result of the gaming machine. Further, various information received by the auxiliary side receiving means is written to the game recording medium by the auxiliary side writing means. In the gaming machine, the number of game media that can be used for the game is counted by the model-side game medium counting means, and the game is performed by the model-side game execution means based on the game media counted by the model-side game medium counting means. Based on the game result by the model-side game execution means, the game medium is given to the player by the model-side game medium giving means, and the model-side game state changing means based on the game result by the model-side game execution means As a result, the gaming state is changed. Further, various types of information transmitted by the auxiliary transmission unit are received by the model side reception unit. Information related to time is stored by the model-side time information storage means. In addition, when the predetermined condition is satisfied by the model-side transmission unit, the time-related information and various types of information are transmitted to the game assisting unit. Furthermore, the first game medium information relating to the game medium given to the player by the model side game medium giving means in the first game state is stored by the model side first counting means provided in the model side game medium counting means, The second game medium related to the game medium given to the player by the model side game medium giving means in the second game state different from the first game state by the model side second counting means provided in the model side game medium counting means. Information is stored. Further, the game based on the second game medium information stored in the model side second counting unit in the first game state is limited by the model side limiting unit provided in the model side game executing unit. In the game recording medium, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first game medium information stored in the model-side first counting means transmitted by the model-side transmitting means is recorded by the medium-side first counting means. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the second game medium information stored in the model-side second counting means transmitted by the model-side transmitting means is recorded by the medium-side second counting means. Further, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the medium-side time information storage unit stores information related to the time stored in the model-side time information storage unit transmitted by the model-side transmission unit. In the gaming machine, the model-side time determination unit determines the information related to the time stored in the medium-side time information storage unit by the auxiliary-side transmission unit and the information related to the time stored in the model-side time information storage unit. The Further, the model-side time determination unit uses the first result (for example, positive determination) as the determination result between the information related to the time stored in the medium-side time information storage unit and the information related to the time stored in the model-side time information storage unit. ), The first information is transmitted to the auxiliary game means by the model-side first information transmission means. On the other hand, the determination result between the information on the time stored in the medium-side time information storage unit and the information on the time stored in the model-side time information storage unit by the model-side time determination unit is a second result (for example, no determination). Is determined, the second information is transmitted to the auxiliary game means by the model-side second information transmission means. The game assisting means transmits the first game medium information recorded in the medium-side first counting means to the gaming machine when the auxiliary-side transmitting means transmits various information of the game recording medium to the gaming machine. . Further, when the first information is transmitted by the model side first information transmitting unit, the second game medium information stored in the medium side second counting unit is transmitted to the gaming machine, while the model side second information transmission is performed. When the second information is transmitted by the means, the second game medium information recorded in the medium-side second counting means is not transmitted. As a result, in the gaming machine, it is possible to create a game medium whose use is restricted based on the gaming state, and the determination of the information regarding the time recorded after the predetermined condition is satisfied is not a predetermined determination result (correct determination). The game based on the second game medium information can be limited by not transmitting the second game medium information recorded on the game recording medium to the gaming machine. Therefore, there is a game medium whose use is restricted based on the game state, and there is a game medium whose use is restricted unless the determination of time information is performed once a predetermined condition is established. By creating a game, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  One of the gaming machines A0 to A22, B0 to B26, C0 to C27, D0 to D27, E0 to E28, F0 to F21, G0 to G22, and H1 to H3, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine A gaming machine I1. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area based on the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  One of the gaming machines A0 to A22, B0 to B26, C0 to C27, D0 to D27, E0 to E28, F0 to F21, G0 to G22, and H1 to H3, the gaming machine is a slot machine, A gaming machine I2. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  In any of the gaming machines A0 to A22, B0 to B26, C0 to C27, D0 to D27, E0 to E28, F0 to F21, G0 to G22, and H1 to H3, the gaming machine includes a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine I3 characterized by being fused. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

3 general prize opening (a part of game media grant means)
4 start prize opening (a part of game media grant means)
5a Special prize opening (part of game media grant means)
10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
66 ball launch unit (part of game execution means)
213c Normal time ball counter (part of game medium counting means)
213d Lucky central ball counter (part of game media counting means)
213e Unusable area (part of usage restriction means)
213h Unlimited flag (part of the game state changing means)
213i Lucky flag (part of gaming state changing means)
213j Start flag (part of the game state changing means)

Claims (2)

Game medium counting means for counting the number of game media usable in the game;
Game execution means for playing a game based on the game media counted by the game media counting means;
Game medium giving means for giving a game medium to a player based on a game result by the game execution means;
A gaming state change means for changing a gaming state based on a predetermined opportunity,
The game execution means includes
Based on the change of the gaming state by the gaming state changing means, comprising use restriction means for restricting the use of the game medium given to the player by the game medium giving means to the game,
The gaming state changing means is
A gaming machine comprising: condition setting means capable of setting a game state changing condition by the gaming state changing means. The gaming state changing means is
First gaming state changing means for changing from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on a first predetermined opportunity;
A second gaming state changing means for changing from the second gaming state to the first gaming state based on a second predetermined opportunity,
The game medium counting means includes
First counting means for storing first game medium information relating to the game medium given to the player by the game medium giving means in the first gaming state;
Second counting means for storing second game medium information related to the game medium given to the player by the game medium giving means in the second gaming state,
The use restriction means is configured to prohibit a game based on the second game medium information stored in the second counting means in the first gaming state,
The condition setting means sets a changing condition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state or a changing condition from the second gaming state to the first gaming state by the gaming state changing means. The gaming machine according to claim 1, characterized in that:

Images